Home

Yamaha V4.0 Owner's Manual

1. Double click a component to display the component editor for it The number of channels varies depending on the component but all share a common configuration in the component editor Meter component editor Displays signal levels for each channel DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Miscellaneous In the Miscellaneous group there are the Oscillator subgroup and the Wav File Player Oscillator The Oscillator subgroup contains a monochannel oscillator component The oscillator generates sine waves at fixed frequencies of 100 Hz 1 kHz and 10 kHz a variable frequency sine wave pink noise and burst noise Double click a component to display the component editor for it Oscillator component editor EEx Snap Library METT Store Recall Output 166H2 16kHz2 Vari Frequency aa I co to 6 dB Displays the signal level On ON OFF Turns ON the oscillator Wave Form sine selects the frequency and waveform that will be generated Only one of the six Sine and Noise buttons can be selected Noise Pink Burst Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz When Vari is selected for Sine this sets the frequency of the generated sine wave Pink Noise A standard signal used for sound measurement This sound covers a frequency range of 20 Hz to 20 kHz As the frequency doubles the energy of the sound is cut in half The sound level is equal at all frequencies Burst Outputs p
2. Control Change Tab Assigns components to control change for each DME You can change DME parameters by sending control change messages from external equipment You can assign to control change numbers 1 31 33 95 and 102 119 NOTE Because control change numbers 0 and 32 are used for bank select MSB numbers 96 101 are RPN NRPN related and 120 127 are used for mode messages they cannot be used for component assignment DME Group DMEG4AN Control Ghange Program Change Parameter Change Clear Clear 4ll E Control Change List The control change numbers and current settings are displayed in the list in the center No Displays the control change numbers Component Displays the assigned components Control changes that have no component assigned to them are blank If you click here a list will be displayed Usable components are on the list Click the component name to select it NOTE If user module security is enabled the components are not displayed However parameters displayed in the user module editor are displayed here DME Group DMEG4N Control Ghange Program Change Parameter Change Clear Clear All Re Jeram snot Nn HOS ComponentCompanderH S Ean OFF 002 DO3 Aea E a on O05 O06 oo O08 agg O10 O11 126 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Parameter set the assigned component link parameter When you click here
3. 42 DME Data Import This imports DME data file settings into a DME or SP2060 included in the current configuration 1 Activates the DME or SP2060 configuration layout to be imported If multiple configurations are available the DME or SP2060 configuration layout to be imported can be selected via the Navigator window 2 Click the File menu in the Main Panel window and move the mouse cursor over Import Device Configuration A submenu will be displayed The DME groups and SP groups included in the current configuration will be displayed on a submenu a DME Designer Ctrl M A aT oo Va fl Le Port Chrl o User Ctrl 5 Save Os Import DME Designer All File Export DME Designer All File DME File Storage Import Device Configuration DME Groupi Export Device Configuration SP Group b 1 c Setup0 daf Create New Group 20 Setup06 daf Preferences Log OFF Exit 3 Select the device group to which the DME or SP2060 is to be imported from the submenu DME and SP2060 units cannot be used assigned to the same device group NOT C DME and SP2060 units cannot be combined in the same Device Group 4 On the submenu click on the DME or SP2060 into which you will import settings The Open dialog box will be displayed i O YAMAHA bldg v F data01 dd My Recent Documents File name X Files of type DME File ddf Cancel 5 Select t
4. sown oma zoma wow id Pann faoa osma foun i own i 2 Channel v v v 4 Channel 8 Channel 12 Channel 16 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 4 Channel 8 Channel 12 Channel 16 Channel f OJ O1 DME Designer Owner s Manual 3 pe D O O fe 3 O gt D mp Q Q D T IT l Room Combiner Mono 4 Room 8 Room 12 Room 16 Room Stereo 4 Room 8 Room 12 Room 16 Room 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 32 Output Router 1 Input 2 Input Router 2 Input 4 Input 8 Input 12 Input 16 Input 32 Input DME Designer Owner s Manual 377 378 Chapter 6 Component Guide T T Source Selector 4 Position 1 Channel 2 Channel 6 Channel 8 Position 1 Channel 2 Channel 6 Channel 16 Position 1 Channel 1 Way lt Speaker Processor lt lt _ xw xe lt lt lt lt lt lt NR w Pp ao ao lt lt lt c ew e oe ay AEC AEC Component Editor Slot Slot In Component Ed
5. 8 68 You can change the parameter by dragging the slider You can set the action that results from using the mouse on the scale area with Component Editor tab gt Slider Mode in the Preferences dialog box Preferences dialog box gt Component Editor tab page 73 To make a finer setting press the lt Shift gt key while dragging the slider If you click a slider while pressing the lt Ctrl gt key the setting will return to its default value E Buttons There are several types of buttons e Switches between ON OFF When turned on the button lights up The color depends on the button s function When turned ON When turned OFF e In button sets of this type you can select one of several buttons When you do all other buttons in the set turn off Samir le Meter Feet Frame Beat DME Designer Owner s Manual 321 322 Chapter 5 Components e Click here to execute a command e Displays a menu e Displays another window Crossover Processor Snap WETT Delay Matrix 6 CrossPoint Outrut Channel 1 Delay Input Channel l g Delay Matrix 2 Input 2 Output Programmable BPF Snap we Tc Input Tyre Frequency SdB Oct Frequency Thru 6dB Oct 12dB Oct AdjustGc 12dB Oct Butrwrth 12dB Oct Bessel 12dB Oct Linkwitz 18dB Oct AdjustGc 18dB Oct Butrwrth 18dB Oct Bessel 24dB Oct AdjustGc 24dB Oct Butrwrth 24dB Oct Bessel Prosra
6. Samelina Rate Converter In Out On On On ary We zy Fs Tyre 4 ik HA ik When Word Clock ack is set to kHz oFeration i limited to inF utfoutrut d ic 1 an Sampling ON OFF Turns the sample rate converter for input Rate channels 1 2 or 3 4 ON or OFF Converter On Out ON OFF Turns the sample rate converter for output ONO Sanne INGE O Sets the sampling rate for output channels 1 2 or 3 4 This parameter is only available when On Out is ON When set to AES EBU_IN_CH1 2 or AES AES EBU_IN_CH1 2 EBU_IN_CH8 4 the output audio signal is AES EBU_IN_CH3 4 synchronized to the clock of the signal received at the MY4 AEC card s AES EBU IN 1 2 or IN 3 4 inout connector respectively 502 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Remote Controlled Head Amp There are AD824 and AD8HR components arranged in the zone window E AD824 Controls the Yamaha A D converter AD824 The AD824 is an eight channel analog to digital converter AD824 ae i AD824 Double click the component to display the component editor for it NO If a DME is not selected in the properties dialog box the component editor will not be displayed even if you double click page 230 AD824 component editor Remote Controlled Head Ame ADS24 Parameter Setting Range Function lev ON OFF Turns ON phantom power 48V Gin 10 to 62 dBu sets the head amp gain Word Clock sets the operating frequenc
7. Delay values for wires are displayed beside the input port of the connected object NOT C Delay values for SPX components vary depending on the Bypass ON OFF status because SPX components add the effect signal to the original signal When Show Signal Delay is turned ON the delay value for the Bypass ON status will be displayed Delay values for Wav File Player components are displayed for external inputs Delay values for local Wave files cannot be displayed If there is an obvious problems with the connections the Some errors occurred while compiling Please try Analyze and the error of the reason is displayed error message will appear Use the Analyze dialog box to determine the reason for the error A progress bar will appear during compilation but in some cases it may not exactly match the progress of the compilation process Also the appearance of the progress bar is no guarantee that compilation will be completed successfully If compilation continues for an inordinately long period of time click the Abort button to stop processing Try eliminating unnecessary Components and connections and replacing components that place a heavy load on resources with more efficient ones then compile again DME Designer Owner s Manual 305 306 Chapter 4 Designer Monitoring Point List When you click Monitoring Point List in the Tools menu the Monitoring Point List dialog box is displayed This allows reg
8. Duplicate erate Display Order gt p wa o Properties E Text Object Context Menu Cut Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard Copy Copies the selected object to the clipboard Paste Pastes the object that is on the clipboard Delete Deletes the object you clicked on Duplicate Duplicates the object you clicked on Display Order Changes the display order of the objects according to a command in the submenu Properties Displays the Text Properties dialog box DME Designer Owner s Manual 251 252 Chapter 4 Designer E Text Object Properties To display the Text Properties dialog box double click on a text object or select a text object then click the Properties command on the Edit menu W Text Properties Text bext Text Font Cancel Text Color Background Effect Draw Test Border Text Border Style Plain Background Color Color Link Component Editor Hame Select Component Text Box You can enter up to 10 000 English characters to display in the text object box Text Font Button sets the font Clicking here displays the Select Font dialog box For information about the Select Font dialog box see page 264 Text Color Button sets the color of the text Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box Draw Text Border Displays a frame around the text object If this is
9. Recall ithe athe ow Mid Hish j Hish Mid 40 40 20 100 200 00 ik 2k Sk 10k 20k Grarh Visible Q Navisator Hish Output Level ge Delay s TT ute Limiter 09 10 Hish Mid Qutrut Level ge yere Delay 3 IY te Limiter Input Level g 09 10 i 9 ow Mid Qutrut Leve Delay ED p ae te Limiter Output Lewe Delay ED ute Limiter Speaker Processor 18668 lt 2718H Name Function Crossover response phase Crossover phase response color coded for output channel Crossover response level Crossover level response color coded for each output channel ome meter Displays Displays the input signallevel input Displays the input signallevel level Outputmeter meter Displays the output level foreach band _ the output level Displays the output level foreach band _ each band Crossover Curve Display Button Turns crossover curve display for each output channel on or off DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide s pense crossover edior wou oy opens dl eter window PEQ Opens the parametric equalizer editor window Output Level to 10 dB sets the output level from each output channel ON OFF Mutes the output of each output channel imiter Opens the limiter editor window Different numbers of channels are provided by each component variation Low Low Mid High Mid High Sub Low Low Low Mid High Mid High Sub Low Low Low Mid Mid High
10. DME Designer Owner s Manual 915 Appendix Utility Displays Most basic ICP1 functions can be accessed via the Utility Display Items accessible via the Utility display Name display Version The device s current version number Current status and settings for the Ethernet network page 517 Master Slave Displays current status whether the device is device group master or not Description Vianual Page Current status and settings for the devices basic parameters page 517 Link Mode Current status and setup for the NETWORK connector Panel Lock Target Current status and setup for the panel lock target User Defined Lock Panel lock and setup for each page of user defined parameters Current status and setup for settings not included in other pages page 519 scene Store Current status and setup for scene store accessibility Last Mem Resume Indicates whether the previous memory contents will be retained when the unit is restarted Event Scheduler Current status whether an event schedule setup in the DME Designer will be executed or not 516 DME Designer Owner s Manual Utility Display Operation The general procedure for operating the Utility displays is outlined below 1 Press the F4 UTILITY Key for longer than 2 seconds from the Main display to go to the Utility display 2 Press the F4 UTILITY Key as many times as necessary until the desired parameter page appears 3 Use the F1 F2 F3 F
11. Display Order Changes the display order in front or behind of the selected objects gt Changing the Order in Design Window Shared Settings and Operations page 278 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer E Edit Legend This command can be selected when an Area window Zone window or Configuration window is active It lets you edit the descriptive text legend displayed on the sheet in the Area window Zone window or Configuration window When this command is selected the Edit Legend dialog box will be displayed gt Legend Descriptive Fields in Objects page 260 E Properties Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected objects gt See Object Types on page 210 View Menu Displays or hides the windows T Designer Resource Meter Navigator Port Long Name Zoom In Ctrl ae Zoom Out Ctrl Zoom To OF Actual Size Fit in Window E Toolbar Displays or hides the toolbar A checkmark appears beside this menu item when the toolbar is displayed E Status Bar Displays or hides the status bar A checkmark appears beside this menu item when the status bar is displayed E Area Toolkit Resource Meter Navigator Displays or hides the Area window Toolkit Resource Meter or Navigator window A checkmark appears to the left of the command name when a window Is displayed The Resource Meter window is displayed only when the Co
12. Eue a Compressor 3 MDe Esser B Ducking M Expander MM Gate T H Limiter Compressor 4 BEQ eae ree See See Sen User Module Manager When you click User Module Manager on the Tools menu the User Module Manager dialog box is displayed Edits renames and deletes user module templates T User Module Manager User Modules User Module Settings Double Click Action Open User Module Design Window Ey User Module Group2 i User Module Security Settines Security On Default Library None Change settings Import Library Export Library Rename User Module Group Delete User Module Import Export oo morte e EXP Close E User Modules User modes saved as templates are displayed in the list Select the target user module by clicking on it ESE Only user modules saved can be displayed User modules placed in the component editor are saved in project files and can be used without being saved as files However they will not be displayed in the User Module Manager dialog box list When a user module to which security has been applied is selected a password will be required for all operations other than Delete and Import 314 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer E User Module Settings Displays the settings for the user module selected on the list To change the settings click the Change settings button to open the Us
13. Library Store Recall DER Library Store Recall Output U A E I EA E 7 EB 3 18 11 12 See tha athe 1 Router 12 Input 12 Output Router 12 Input 12 Not Cleared Cleared E Clearing Routing Settings If you click the dot that indicates routing the routing indicated by that dot will be cleared and the dot will be erased DER DER Library Sna Library Store Recall G P Store Recall Output Output Ag BE BS IIIS f 38 9110411112 ej 3 546471 S9 9 16 iy te DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Source Selector This component selects a single input source from multiple input sources Position is the number of input sources and Channel is the number of channels included in the source For example a 4 Position 2 Channel component allows you to select a single 2 channel source from four 2 channel inout sources 3 Position and 16 Position components are all 1 Channel types while 1 2 and 6 Channel versions of 4 Position and 8 Position components are provided Source Setector 2 Source Selector 3 4 Position 1 Channel 4 Position 2 Channel JIN4 4 OUT 10 LINI INZ OUT 20 Source Selector 7 8 Position 6 Channel T TR CIN4 IN CJIN4 4 OUT 1 A outl Pe gran CANE EEE S IN2 4 DE eh SE Oe BT ed oe AN aS ag ir a a aa se ti ee ate ai a GHSSOSHHHHHSSS55 Oe Rr Tia RCS Re ABUN
14. OK Button Applies any setting changes and closes the window Cancel Button Closes the window without changing any settings DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Remote Control Setup List When you click the Remote Control Setup List command on the Tools menu the Remote Control setup List dialog box is displayed Registers the parameters to be controlled from an external controller NOT DME V3 8 or later DME Satellite units allow remote control via the NETWORK connector as well as via the REMOTE connector The port to be used is specified via the Remote tab of the Utility dialog box page 172 For details about the communication protocol refer to the DME Remote Control Protocol Specifications on the Yamaha Pro Audio website URL below htto www yamahaproaudio com ESE Does not apply to SP2060 units Names and Functions Remote Control Setup List Parameter Value Edi Component Delay Le Parameter Value Edi Component Slot OL Level Meter Component SP Component Cascade String Display Humeric Cancel DME From the list select the DME where you will be making settings Function select No Assign Parameter Value Edit or Level Meter Parameter specifies the parameter to be controlled A list of parameters will be displayed according to the selection of Function NOn Components for user modules are also listed in a
15. e Play Wav File Allows initiation of Wave file playback Operation Setting The content changes according to the event selected for Operation e When Scene Change is selected Event Operation Operation Scene Change v Operation Setting Scene 001 Scene 001 X 001 Scene 001 002 Scene 002 select the scene to be recalled from the Scene list Stored scenes are displayed in the list e When Parameter Value Edit is selected Event Operation Operation PAAA ERATA E v Operation Setting Scene 001 Scene 001 v DME DME24N x Component Component Unit Output v Parameter Out1 1 Level v Value oo gt y n a Scene select a scene from the list If the DME unit s current scene differs from the scene specified in event scheduling the scheduled scene will be recalled If the DME unit s current scene is the same as the scene specified in event scheduling the scheduled scene will not be recalled DME Unit From the list select the DME unit to which this scheduled event will apply The DMEs included in the zone are displayed in the list DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Component select the component that has the parameter to be changed The list displays the components arranged for the DME that is selected in the DME Unit box Parameter select the parameter that will change Parameters for the component that is selected in the Component box are displayed in a
16. gt Edit checkbox in the Security dialog box has been checked can turn the Edit Mode ON Designer Window You can display or hide the Designer window using the Designer command on the View menu in the Main Panel window Title Bar Toolkit Window Navigator Window IT TEE LEE By E Pire i J a i F i bi HUHUT PHBE HG 5 L i Design Window Resource Meter Window Title Bar Designer is displayed on the title bar You can move the window by dragging the title bar There are Minimize Maximize Restore and Close buttons at the right edge of the title bar Menu Bar Commands that can be executed in the application are collected into categories on the menu bar When you click one of the categories a list of commands is displayed DME Designer Owner s Manual 193 Chapter 4 Designer 194 Toolbar Frequently used commands are arranged here as buttons Redo Button Navigator Button Probe Monitor Button Arrow Button Show Unconnected Node Button Print Button Copy Button Analyze Button Zoom In Button Zoom To Button Undo Button Paste Button Show Signal Delay Button Actual Size Button Cut Button Resource Meter Button Zoom Out Button Hand Button Edit Mode Button Print Button page 203 Prints the active design window Undo Button page 204 Undoes the most recent edit operation Redo Butt
17. gt User Control submenu in the Main Panel window If you click the control it will be displayed in a user control editor window Snap and Library appear appears in a new user control HiehGut Snap wert D CE fe i 4 m cid E User Control Security security can be set independently for each User Control User Control levels higher than the user security level will not be displayed in the menu or the User Control Manager dialog box The security level settings for both the user control and the user affect editing and display of user controls E User Control Security Level security 1 10 can be set for each level or user Level 1 is the highest level and 10 is the lowest If the security level for a user control is set to 2 only users at level 1 or level 2 can display or edit it security levels for user controls can be changed in the User Control Manager dialog box by a user who has logged on at a security level equal to or higher than the user control 1 Click User Control Manager on the Main Panel window Tools menu The User Control Manager dialog box will be displayed 2 Changing User Control Security DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Components e To Change the Security level Click the Security Level box of the User Control to be changed The security level list will appear User Control Manager Open User Control at startup New Delete Cancel The l
18. lt Slot hy 6 AE AES EBU 1 3 MESHE AES EBU 9 16 MERRE DME24N with no I O card installed DME24N with an I O card installed in its expansion slot DME Designer Owner s Manual 213 Chapter 4 Designer DME64N CAS OUT ae are CAS Ih CAS OUT ETHERNET o WC Ih ETHERNET H USE PO Ou USB REMOTE aoe gies Al Ih REMOTE Cie ADAT OUT mi AES EBL Bi DME6A4N with no I O cards connected in slots DME6GA4N with I O cards installed in expansion slots 1 and 4 DME8i C DME80 C DME4io C ETHERNET amp USB MEJE GP OUT REMOTE BE CobraNet PRIMARY E CobraNet PRIMARY E CobraNet PRIMARY CobraNet SECONDARY E CobraNet SECONDARY E CobraNet SECONDARY UL GING s UUI AING JUDI AING ETHERNET amp USB MEJE SPI OUT REMOTE EE EtherSound IN e EtherSound IN a EtherSound IN EtherSound OUT E EtherSound OUT EtherSound OUT 214 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer When I O Cards Are Installed in DME Expansion Slots When an I O card is selected for an expansion slot in the DME properties an I O port is added for the DME arranged in the Zone window An I O component block will be added to the configuration window If None is selected for I O cards in the DME properties any I O component blocks will also be deleted automatically from the Configuration window Even if the I O components are deleted the wiring will remain i Designer H BAmbient Noise Compensator H BAudio Dete
19. Box Properties dialog box by double clicking the box If you right click on the object a context menu will be displayed Cut z Eg Copy ae Ed Paste Delete a eee Duplicate T TT Display Order gt E Box Object Context Menu Cut Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard Copy Copies the selected object to the clipboard Paste Pastes the object that is on the clipboard Delete Deletes the object you clicked on Duplicate Duplicates the object you clicked on Display Order Properties Changes the display order of the objects according to a command in the submenu Properties Displays the Box Properties dialog box DME Designer Owner s Manual 253 Chapter 4 Designer E Box Object Properties To display the Box Properties dialog box double click on a box object or select a box object then click the Properties command on the Edit menu T Box Properties Box Size width T Cancel Height K0 Box Style Style Plain r Round Comer Curve Medium Line Type Solid Size 1 Select Color J Fill Color Select Color Width Box Specifies the width of the object in pixels The default is 50 pixels Height Box specifies the height of the object in pixels The default is 50 pixels Style sets the style of the object From the list select Plain Raised or Sunken Round
20. Connect the digital mixer to the REMOTE connector of one of the DME units and set the port to be used for head amp control to Remote via the Internal HA Control parameter in the Remote tab in the Utility dialog box page 172 Use an Ethernet cable connected to the NETWORK connectors to make connections between DME series units D SUB 9 pin Cable REMOTE REMOTE Ethernet PD MH Network Switch Digital Mixer DME4io ES e Only control signals are transmitted and received via the REMOTE connection Audio connections must be made separately e Connection can also be made to the REMOTE connector of a DME unit with built in head amplifiers 142 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window CobraNet Connection Use a CobraNet interface card such as the MY16 Cll to make CobraNet connections between the digital mixer and DME units Use an Ethernet cable connected to the NETWORK connectors to make connections between DME series units The port to be used for head amp control is specified via the Internal HA Control parameter in the Remote tab in the Utility dialog box page 172 Select Slot 1
21. GPI IN reception PortNo AD 0 1023 A control signal Level has been received at the GPI IN terminal Port number 3 GPI OUT transmission PortNo gt HIGH A high or low level control signal has been sent via the GPI OUT GPI OUT transmission PortNo gt LOW terminal Port number Panel Unlocked Panel lock has been disengaged Panel Locked Panel lock is engaged so panel operations cannot be performed Panel operation may have been locked by the administrator to prevent unwanted data changes due to improper operation To unlock the panel press and hold the CANCEL button for longer than 2 seconds The power was turned on DME power has been turned on Communication between external AD unit and Communication between the external head amp unit and DME DME ended device has stopped Check cable connections External device control buffer full The receive buffer for control commands from external devices has become full Too much control may have been received Invalid password An incorrect password has been entered via the panel If you have forgotten the correct password contact your Yamaha dealer Current Settings lost The memory has been erased and current settings have been lost Try a scene recall If that doesn t rectify the problem contact your Yamaha dealer Network hardware error A network device error has occurred Contact your Yamaha dealer Duplicate IP address Duplicate IP address
22. K Select Color Line Settings Number of Lines jo Line Color Select Color Cap Settings Cap Size Middle v Cap Color white v Scale Settings MV Show Scale Number Color Select Color Size Width and Height set the width and height of the slider in pixel increments NOTE The size of sliders can also be changed by dragging any of the slider s corners in the user control editor Direction set the slider s orientation to Vertical or Horizontal as required Background Color Uncheck this item to make the background transparent When this item is checked the Color button to its right opens the Select color dialog box that can be used to select a background color Number of Lines sets the number of scale markings lines between the minimum and maximum values Line Color Click the Select Color button and select the desired scale line color in the Select Color dialog box Cap Size select a knob cap size from the list Very Large Large Middle Small Very Small Cap Color select a knob cap color from the list Black Gray White Red Yellow Green Blue Violet Show Scale Check this item to show the numeric scale values Number Color Click the Select Color button and select the desired scale number color in the Select Color dialog box DME Designer Owner s Manual 9345 Chapter 5 Components
23. Minimum 438 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Output Channel Switching The Delay Matrix All Inputs to One Output editor window displays the output channel clicked on in the delay matrix component editor The Channel buttons in the Output section of the Delay Matrix All Inputs to One Output editor window switch the channel group that is displayed in the window Delay Matrix All Inputs to One Output FE o J on ae wo n Be If you make the delay matrix component editor active while the Delay Matrix All Inputs to One Output editor window is displayed and then click another output channel that channel group will be displayed in the Delay Matrix All Inputs to One Output editor window One Delay Matrix All Inputs to One Output editor window is displayed for each delay matrix component editor One Input to All Outputs When you click the input channel number on the left side of matrix the Delay Matrix One Input to All Outputs editor window opens One input channel and the send levels from the input channel to all outout buses are displayed The input channel is the one you have clicked on in the delay mixer component editor Delay Matrix One Input to All Outputs Input Channel 6 Phase Delay Level On Off Nomina Minimurs Delay Matrix 8 Ineut 8 Output 18666 C2716H gt Channel Displays the selected input channel Select another channel from a menu
24. when the DME unit to be used for serial communication is a DME24N Slot 1 through Slot 4 if it is a DMEGAN or CobraNet if it is a DME Satellite unit The settings for all other DME units should be OEE lt is also necessary to match the CobraNet serial communication channels of the interface card installed in the serially connected DME unit with that of the interface card in the digital mixer Refer to page 495 for DMEB8i C 80 C 4io C information Refer to the CobraNet Manager Lite for Yamaha Owner s Manual for more information on setting the MY16 CIl Set the serial channel for all other devices to OFF CobraNet Network Switch Serial Channel Serial Channel a Network pp Hiig F eg Ethernet Switch EE piii CD os 00000 DME24N Serial Channel OFF Tx LS9 ix 0 Tx When two MY16 CIll or similar CobraNet interface cards are installed in an LS9 32 in order to control multiple DME units use the COMM PORT parameter in the LS9 EXTERNAL HA display to select the slot to be used DME Designer Owner s Manual 143 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window EtherSound Connection m Digital Mixers Without a REMOTE Connector Use an EtherSound interface card such as the MY16 ES64 to make EtherSound connecti
25. 246 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Picture An image can be arranged as an object on a sheet This specifies a file for this purpose You can use image files in the following formats BMP omp PNG png XBM xbm XPM xpm and JPEG jpg Before placing a picture object prepare an image file Copy the image file to the folder specified in the Preferences dialog box gt Application tab ContentsFolder in the Main Panel window In the project file the location and name of the image file are registered in an relative path below the ContentsFolder and the linked image file is read and displayed If the image file is moved renamed or the ContentsFolder is changed the image cannot be displayed NOT C Background images for sheets are specified in the Sheet dialog box Pictures are arranged as objects on the sheets E Placing Pictures There are three picture placement methods e You can drop the Picture item from the Toolkit window into each design window e You can double click Picture on the Toolkit window e You can click Picture in the Area Parts Device List Component List on the Tools menu then click each design window When you place a picture object the Open dialog box is displayed Select the image file and click the Open button The picture will be placed in the design window Look in e Picture e ea b 01x jpa CAS OUT
26. 310 Chapter 4 Designer 4 Here you can set object properties Inouts Outputs Sets is set to 1 Set the required number of ports 5 Click the OK button A user module will be created and placed in the Configuration Design window BBLR fl Surround Router G1 Input G2 Input H 4 Input G8 Input i K 12 Input i B16 Input pw 2 Output of Output oe is Output oo 2 Output 16 Output User Module Blank User Module Picture The user module properties can also be changed later For information about the User Module Properties dialog box see User Module on page 243 Saving User Modules When user modules are saved using the Save User Module command they are displayed below User Module in the Toolkit window and can be used as templates e User modules placed in the configuration window can be saved with project files but user module templates are saved as files in a specific folder on the computer e User module templates can be exported and imported as user module template files The export file includes the component wiring connection library and user module editor data e f a user module template is placed in the configuration window and then edited and saved with a project file the template will not be changed Using the Save User Module command you can either overwrite the original template or save the template with a new name e User modules created fro
27. DME Designer Owners Manual 89 90 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Preset parameters List Displays the preset parameters for each DME unit in the scene selected in the list When another scene is selected on the list the contents of the preset parameters list will be changed You can change the preset parameters used in the scene by clicking the radio buttons to the left of the preset parameters names You can also create delete and store preset parameters or change their names DME Displays the DME Below the DME there are Slot Component and AD If there are preset parameters below them a button will be displayed When you click the it becomes a and the presets are displayed Preset parameters Displays DME preset parameters If you click the preset parameters name selecting the text that is there you can change the preset parameters name When preset parameters are automatically created when a scene is stored they are named Preset001 Preset002 and so on preset parameters created with the New button are named New Preset You can select the preset parameters used in a scene by clicking the radio buttons to the left of the preset parameters names Del Button Deletes the preset parameters selected on the preset parameters list NOTE Presets used In a scene cannot be deleted Store Button stores the current parameter status in the preset parameters selected in the preset
28. E Objects Objects such components user modules and shapes are arranged in the Configuration window When you double click a component placed in the window the editor set in Double Click Action in User Module Properties will open E I O Component Depending on the settings for the DME placed in the Zone window I O components will be automatically placed or added e O components can be arranged in the DME24N DME Satellite and SP2060 configuration window e When Show Cascade Port is ON in the DME64N DME Device Properties dialog Cascade I O is added automatically e When you set a slot in the properties for a DME placed in the Zone window Slot I O will be automatically added You cannot apply edit operations like cut copy paste duplicate to I O components Slot I O and Cascade O DME Designer Owner s Manual 301 302 Chapter 4 Designer Placing Components You can place objects by dragging them from the Toolkit window You can also place objects by double clicking them in the Toolkit window The same objects are displayed in the Component List submenu on the Tools menu or on the context menu that appears when you right click on the sheet For information about the Component List in the Configuration window see page 201 i DME64N zone2 DME64N Zone1 M2 Crossover M2 Crossover Processor H D Delay B Dynamics H B Compander Gl MDeEsser 2 hu Mdann i 6
29. Enter new name for the current zone name dialog box Enter a zone name then click the OK button NOTE C The current name of the zone you will be renaming is displayed in the Current Zone Name box of the Enter new name for current zone name message T Enter new name for zone coros Close Button Closes the Zone Manager dialog box 292 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Changing Device Groups A zone can include up to 32 device groups and all devices will belong to one of those groups Click Device Group Manager in the Tools menu to open the Device Group Manager window via which device groups can be changed as required Device Group Manager Window i Device Group Manager Device Group Default Col DME Group DME Group a DME Groupe DME Group m7 SP Groupl Seis l melee _ Dete Rename Soler olor Apply Default Color to All Existing Devices Device Group All device groups in the zone being edited appear in the list Click the Slick a device group to select it for editing e Name The name of the device group e Attribute The type of device group e Default Color The default color for devices that are added to the group Delete Button Deletes the device group currently selected in the list An Are you sure confirmation box will appear when this button is clicked The selected device group will be deleted when the OK
30. ON OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal to 10 dB sets the input signal level Solo ON OFF Turns solo ON If Solo is engaged for even one channel all non Solo channels will be muted On ON OFF ON OFF Turns Turns input ON Turns input ON Bus Send Level Delay O to 500 ms Sets the delay time from the input channel to each output bus Level to 10 dB Sets the send levels from the input channel to each output bus ON OFF Turns ON the send from the input channel to each output bus DME Designer Owner s Manual 439 Chapter 6 Component Guide Parameter Setting Range Function EJ Block can aan Turns ON send to all channel buses When turned ON the On button lights up for Tums OFF sendin all channel buses Nominal Resets al send levels making emod Minimum Resets al send levels making them dB Input Channel Switching The Delay Matrix One Input to All Outputs editor window displays the input channel for the channel number clicked on in the delay matrix component editor The Channel buttons in the Input section of the Delay Matrix All Inputs to One Output editor window switch the channel group that is displayed in the window Delay Matrix One Input to All Outputs If you make the delay matrix component editor active while the Delay Matrix One Input to All Outputs editor window is displayed and then click another inout channel that channel will be displayed in the
31. Set IP addresses so that no two devices with the same address are connected to the network DSP power shortage Audio input output has been muted due to insufficient DSP resources This can occur if a configuration created for 48kHz word clock is run at 96kKHz To ensure full word clock operation create configurations with word clock set to 96kHz DME Designer Owner s Manual 81 82 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Scene Manager Scenes Configuration contents can be given a name and saved as Scenes Saving scenes is called Scene Store Parameter settings in the configuration for each site used can be stored multiple times and recalled and used when needed There are 999 scene memories available When a scene is stored DME and SP2060 parameters are saved as preset parameters Presets are automatically created when a scene is stored Bringing back a scene making a scene the current scene is called scene recall Scenes are recalled using the V button next to the current scene on the Main Panel window or by using the Scene Manager dialog box E Scene Manager Dialog Box Click either the Tools menu Scene Manager item or the Scene Link Manager window Scene Manager button to open the Scene Manager window that allows editing of scene data Scene names security levels and presets can be changed and copy pasted as required The DME scene memory is comprised of 999 user memories w
32. When the mouse pointer is placed over an edit box a spin box appears Clicking the up arrow button A increases the value while clicking the down arrow W decreases it Double click Selects a number You can change the selected number using the keyboard There is no need to enter units When you press the lt Enter gt key the numbers you entered will be set and the units displayed Set the value with the lt Enter gt key Enter a number from the keyboard Moving with the lt Tab gt Key If you press lt Tab gt key while an edit box is selected the selection will move to the next edit box If you press lt Shift gt lt Tab gt the selection moves to the previous edit box DME Designer Owner s Manual 323 324 Chapter 5 Components Changing Selections with the Key Mouse Wheel You can modify values in selected edit boxes using the direction keys or the mouse wheel e Up and Down Arrow Keys Increases or decreases number settings e lt PageUp gt Key lt PageDown gt Key Increases or decreases number settings in large increments The lt PageUp gt key increases and the lt PageDown gt key decreases the setting e lt Enter gt Key When you press the lt Enter gt key the numbers you entered will be confirmed e lt Ctrl gt Key lt Enter gt Key When you press the lt Ctrl gt lt Enter gt key the setting will return to its default value e Mouse Wheel Rolling the mouse wheel upward away f
33. You can group parameters of the same type and link them These groups are called Parameter Links When one parameter in a parameter link group is changed all parameters in the parameter link group will change in the same way There are three parameter link types global links local links and component links Global links link parameters for DMEs within a device group Local links and component links link parameters that are included for a single DME NOT C Parameters can not apply to multiple groups When a library is recalled the linked parameters in other components will not change even if parameter linking is enabled Groups can be created and parameters added to groups in the user control user module control editor and component editor For information about creating parameter links see Creating Parameter Links on page 368 You can check the status of parameter links and edit them in the Parameter Link window Parameter Link Window When you click Parameter Link in the Tools menu the Parameter Link window is displayed You can also display the window by selecting Open Parameter Link from the context menu displayed in the user control user module editor and component editor Names and Functions Global Link button Local Link Component Link buttons E Global Link button Local Link button Component Link button switches the window display e Global Link Links to the paramete
34. amp Matrix Mixer All Inputs to One Output On Off Nominal Minimum 10007 lt 2717H If you make the matrix mixer component editor active while the Matrix Mixer All Inputs to One Output editor window is displayed and then click another output channel that channel group will be displayed in the Matrix Mixer All Inputs to One Output editor window One Matrix Mixer All Inputs to One Output editor window is displayed for each matrix mixer component editor E One Input to All Outputs When you click the inout channel number on the left side of the matrix the Matrix Mixer One Input to All Outputs editor window opens One input channel and the send levels from the input channel to all output buses are displayed The input channel is the one you have clicked on in the delay mixer component editor amp Matrix Mixer One Input to All Outputs Input Channel Phase On Off Nominal Minimum Matrix Mixer 8 Input Outrut kema DERK the selected input channel Select another channel from a menu ON OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal to 10 dB Sets the input signal level Solo ON OFF Turns solo ON If Solo is engaged for even one channel all non Solo channels will be muted On ON OFF Turns input ON ot send Level Level co to 10 dB Sets the send level from the input channel to each output bus ON OFF Turns ON the send from the input channel to each output bus je Turns ON send to all channel b
35. button is clicked Click the Cancel button to abort the delete operation F DME Designer Eg Ore vou sure Lf Cancel Device groups cannot be deleted when they include assigned devices DME Designer Owner s Manual 293 294 Chapter 4 Designer Rename Button Renames the device group currently selected in the list The Enter new name for current device group window will appear when this button is clicked Enter anew name for the device group and click the OK button NOTE The current name of the selected device group will appear in the name entry window in place of current device group in the window name Enter new name for current device group ff Enter new name for DME Group F fx Color Button Species the default color for new devices added to the currently selected device group The Select Color window will appear when this button is clicked Refer to The Select Color Window on page 265 for information on the Select Color window Apply Default Color to All Existing Devices When checked the color of all existing devices will change accordingly when the initial default device color is edited OK Button Closes the Device Group Manager window DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Adding Deleting and Renaming a Configuration A device group will include at least one configuration and others can be added as required
36. dialog box page 182 If the file name is to include non English Latin characters Latin 1 select English German French Spanish Inappropriate combinations of file names and Language settings can make files unreadable in some cases Names and Functions Zone D DOMEdio O0192 168 000 003 Receive Delete Remaining Memory 0 0 KB Close E Zone List select the desired zone and device group and DME from the list E File List A list of the files stored on the selected DME E Send Button Transfers selected files from the computer to the DME m Receive Button Transfers selected files from the DME to the computer E Delete Button Deletes selected files from the DME E Close Button Closes the dialog box NOTE Synchronization may become impossible if the Remaining Memory value the amount of remaining DME memory becomes too small If this occurs delete unwanted scenes or files to increase the amount of available memory DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Replacing the DMEG4N 24N startup screen The screen image appearing when the DMEG64N 24N starts up can be replaced with a graphic file of your choice in the following way This function allows you to display a desired startup screen for example one that includes your facility s name and logo E Preparing the graphic data Create the desired graphic data at a size of 160 x 48 dots in black and white bitmap form
37. e DME Speaker Processor When ON numbered suffixes will automatically be appended to added DME SP2060 and ICP objects e Component When ON numbered suffixes will automatically be appended to added SPX and user module objects e Other Objects When ON numbered suffixes will automatically be appended to added objects not covered by the above two categories OK Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings DME Designer Owner s Manual 269 270 Chapter 4 Designer Grid Displays a grid on the sheet in each design window to guide the placement of objects You can also have the objects snap to automatically align with the grid when dragging them When you click the Grid command on the Tools menu the Grid dialog box is displayed Here you can enable or disable display of the grid and set the grid interval and form Spacing x ho 2 99 i ho 4 2 99 Cancel V Show Grid C Line Dot Save As Default Setting Snap to Grid Makes objects align the grid when dragging them Spacing This sets the spacing of the grid This setting can range from 2 to 99 pixels e X Box This sets the spacing of the grid in the horizontal direction e Y Box This sets the spacing of the grid in the vertical direction Show Grid Displays the grid Place a checkmark here to enable display and select the type of grid e Line Dis
38. f UserLevel Levelli C User Name User Name Administrator Designer Operator Open User Control at startup cod 3 Enter the name for the new user control into the Name box DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Components 4 Sets security for User Control Different settings are provided for individual security levels and users security cannot be set higher than the user security level NOTE If the Open User Control at startup checkbox is checked the user control will open automatically when the project file iS opened Click the User Level V button to select a security level New User Control Name High Cut Security UserLevel Levelli C User Name V Open User Control at startup Use User Name to select a user New User Control Name High Cut Security C User Level User Name User Name Administrator V Open User Control at startup cool 5 Click the OK button The user control will be created and displayed on the list in the User Control Manager dialog box User Control Manager Master Volume Level 3 Mixing Setup Administrator Designer Open User Control at startup New Delete Cancel DME Designer Owner s Manual 327 328 Chapter 5 Components 6 Click the OK button in the User Control Manager dialog box When a new user control is created it will be displayed in the View menu
39. ty ce 510r Tree EE Paste ee en a Duplicate Display Order gt f Barty te Properties E Ellipse Object Context Menu Cut Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard Copy Copies the selected object to the clipboard Paste Pastes the object that is on the clipboard Delete Deletes the object you clicked on Duplicate Duplicates the object you clicked on Display Order Changes the display order of the objects according to a command in the submenu Properties Displays the Elliose Properties dialog box DME Designer Owner s Manual 290 256 Chapter 4 Designer E Ellipse Object Properties To display the Ellipse Properties dialog box double click on an ellipse object or select an ellipse object then click the Properties command on the Edit menu i Ellipse Properties Ellipse Size Width 50 Cancel Height 50 Line Type Solid Y Size 1 Select Color Fill Color Select Color Width Box Specifies the width of the object in pixels The default is 50 pixels Height Box specifies the height of the object in pixels The default is 50 pixels Line sets the line that frames the ellipse e Type Displays a list where you can select the type of line to frame the ellipse The following types are available Solid Dash Dot DashDot and DashDotDot e Size Box sets the width of the line t
40. 16615 lt 271fH Surround 10015 27IfH gt 456 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide E Surround 3 1 Surround 3 1 has four channel surround pan with three channels in front and one in the rear There is one input and four outputs Double click a component to display the component editor for it Surround 3 1 component editor Surround Snap METI Sets the sound image orientation You can move the sound image by clicking and dragging 2D Surround 2D Surround Pan Graph Pan Graph Left Right Position L63 C R63 Displays and edits the LR surround location Front Back Position F63 C R63 Displays and edits the front back surround location Divergence Front O to 100 Sets the ratio for sending the front center signal to front L and front R Pan Nominal Position Center Selects the nominal position from a menu LR Speaker Button Clicking here moves the sound image to the button location DME Designer Owner s Manual 457 Chapter 6 Component Guide E Surround 5 1 surround 5 1 has surround pan with three channels in front two in the rear and one sub woofer channel There is one input and six outputs Surround lt Double click a component to display the component editor for it Surround 5 1 component editor Surround ER Snap Library we tT Store Recall Surround 5 2D Surround 2D Surround Sets the sound image orienta
41. Add button Delete Deletes the currently selected set Same function as the Delete button Cleanup Deletes sets that are not being used in the current scene Rename Allows a new name to be entered for the selected set Copy Copies the contents component selections of the currently selected set Paste Pastes copied contents to the currently selected set Duplicate Creates a duplicate copy of the currently selected set NOTE Appropriate icons appear to the left of Partial Recall set names when the set is being used by a scene and when the scene the set is being used by is protected Partial Recall sets that are being used in a scene cannot be deleted Recall Settings i e Recall Settings Partial Recall ne Protect GFF Fartiall E ON Partial Recall Safe Partial Recall a Add Delete B Partiall fe Partial The set is being used by a protected scene The set is being used by a scene NOTE gt Partial Recall sets cannot be created or edited while online Common Tab Functions e Select All Button Checks all components e Clear All Button Unchecks all components e OK Button Applies any settings that have been made and closes the dialog box e Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without applying or saving any settings NOTE If the same component is checked in both the Recall Safe and Partial Recall tabs the Recall Safe function takes priority and that compo
42. Aico Com Sheet MEET T 1 foe eiea i i PEPER cu Probie Diagonal Connecbence Hh j F ESP v bn FEU Midua TMAA GD Pabe XAT Uber Modu Fem MT hd Be he E A ee Sa ee Pithi Hare ie j Tet Export fF fg i 5 f T a T CE i Phew Eia E DWT to antere LE EnA Tainena Toolkit window Tools menu Component List submenu on the Tools menu or on the context menu Four Design Windows The following design windows are available the Area window Zone window Configuration window and User Module window In each window there is a single sheet on which objects can be arranged Within the Designer window you can simultaneously open and edit in the Area window Zone Window Configuration window and User Module window Configuration Structure and Four Design Windows Area Window GS Noviestor EEJ New Area EEE Zonet ety OME Group Bete Contie Zone Window i Matrix Mixer Configuration Window Component Editor User Module Window E Area Window Used to design areas gt See Area Window on page 297 E Zone Window Used to design zone configurations gt See Zone Window on page 298 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer E Configuration Window Used to design configurations for DME units arranged in a zone gt See Configuration Window on page 301 E User Module Window Used to design user modules configurations A m
43. B Device Group Manager Configuration Manager Synchronization Cut Copy Delete Duplicate Display Order Recall Scene Flash Unit LEDs Output Level Properties E Scene Info and On line Button SP2060 objects include an object that provides scene info and an On line button O01 Scene 001 On line Scene Info On line Button The scene info area displays the current scene number and name Click the scene info area to open the Scene Manager window The On line button has the same function as the On line button in the main panel window gt On line Button page 59 m The SP2060 Object Context Menu Open Configuration Window Opens the Configuration window gt Configuration Window page 301 Device Group Manager Opens the Device Group Manager window gt See Device Group Manager on page 293 Configuration Manager Not available for SP2060 objects Synchronization Opens the Synchronization dialog box gt See Synchronization DME Designer and Unit Synchronization on page 97 Cut Cuts the selected object and places it on the clipboard DME Designer Owner s Manual Copy Copies the selected object to the clipboard Paste Pastes the SP2060 object currently on the clipboard Delete Deletes an object Duplicate Creates a duplicate of an object Display Order Chapter 4 Designer Ch
44. Clear All Button Clears assignments for all control change numbers DME Designer Owner s Manual 127 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Program Change Tab Assigns scenes to program control change numbers 1 through 128 Switches scenes when program changes are received These settings are shared by all DMEs in the device group Up to 999 assignments can be made Scenes above number 128 are assigned by changing banks DME Group DME64N Control Change Program Change Parameter Change Program Change Event Clear All 00 Scene001 Scene 001 Clear oo 003 Assign All O04 O05 O06 007 Bank Select LSB O08 ang mig O11 on O13 E Program Change Event Program numbers and the scenes assigned to them are displayed in a list No This displays program numbers from 1 to 128 Scene Displays the scene number and name of the assigned scene Program changes that have no scene assigned to them are blank When you click here a list of scenes Is displayed Select the scene you want to assign DME Group DME AN ae Control Change Program Change Parameter Change Frogram Change Event Clear gull Clear Assign All Scene003 Scene 003 Scenell4 Light_On Scene005 DoorOpen Bank Select LoB E Clear All Button Clears all scene assignments E Clear Button Clears the scene assignment for the program number selected in the list so that no scene is assigned to that number
45. DI GC Ses ch etter cto asec aac bteetetnt daea iak iii 505 ONIE ce eee eho ace acerca aerials neat nce peas tect ate a vette ana EEA 213 DME Data File TN Borate eran arpsitrcac E E ion an E E ENEE EN 44 Taaie a AE EE EE E E E E E E E E E 42 Drawing Setting ccccccccccsseeeeeecceesseeeeeeceesseeeeeeeeeeesseaseseseessanseeeess 282 CE O ae E E T A E EAE AS 407 DYNAMO ae eee E R T ER 401 E Edit Event dialog BOX ac dacasadccasaseiadinnsianiagasceseendelevntnestenanndanenbdedan 103 E T e E EEA A 63 204 od o el EE O E E E E O A ceceeasanaeeei 192 E E E E E 332 een ence cept te ener erent Cate rere er ter tee Pee eere ce en ree err erent 250 Eee AUC LoT ON sererai ari ciesandeeiatien 159 ENTER Buton ICP bessser areeni e ARNE 510 Equalizer Graphic Egualizer QEU srrssirigoesassisi snit ont ere enee rear 414 Parametric Equalizer PEQ eessiicessssiiirerssiirererrrrrrrerrnnn 416 ES ez ac ae E ee ea A A AE TE E O E T 414 M TESS E a E R 511 Event Log GIST susirasveitsisnsnunnari riain ria atinae ariii a 80 Evon Log LIST OIAIOG DOK scires E E 79 Eveni LOOO soea EE R E A E sou tohenwetaaient 177 Event Scheduler dialog DOX ccccccccceeseeeceeesseeeeesseesseeeseeeeneas 101 a 71g ene ene ree ene een Ret er renee E 408 Export Design WINQOW 4 ccccoreranctosdenc nesessernestuedadgeacsborgosmebaadeheaueaaters 271 E eer E E E E EE 44 Pe eG VIC Seis aaa nan E EEEE 230 F IFI BUTON CPTI canre Eie 509 F2 Buioni PI
46. DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Cascade DMEG4N only Up to eight DME64N units can be cascade connected to provide bus sharing of up to 32 channels in order to distribute DSP resources and or increase input output capacity If Show Cascade port on Configuration Window in the DME Device Properties dialog box is checked Cascade O components will appear in the Configuration window Refer to When the DME64N Cascade Setting is Turned ON page 215 and to Cascade Setting Dialog Box page 221 for further information NOTE Be careful to avoid loop connections both when connecting via physical cables and in the Designer window m Cascade In signals received from the CASCADE bus are assigned to the Cascade In component Any cascade connected DMEGAN unit is capable of outputting the same signals The meter displays the signal levels received at the rear panel CASCADE IN terminal Right click the component and select Open Component Editor from the contextual menu to open the component editor The component editor is the same for all types Cascade Input mB gt 7 8 9 8 W te 13 W 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Meter Shows the signal level for each channel DME Designer Owner s Manual 489 Chapter 6 Component Guide m Cascade Out Ports output to the CASCADE bus are assigned to the Cascade Out component Make connections for signal
47. Mute Input Select Analos IN AXA Disital IN L R Disital L a a gt InFut Mute Mute 16664 C27i4H gt Input Select Analog IN A B Selects the input signal s Selects analog input channels A and B as the input signal sources Analog IN A A Selects analog input channel A as the source for both input signals Digital IN L R Selects digital inout channels L and Ras the input signal Sources Digital IN L L selects the digital L inout channel as the source for both signals Input Level 10 dB Set the input signal level for the corresponding input channel Meter Display the input signal level for the corresponding input channel Mute ON OFF Mute the input of the corresponding input channel 494 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide CobraNet Input and Output The DME8i C DME8o0 C DME4Iio C configuration window includes CobraNet Input and CobraNet Output blocks E CobraNet Either double click the block or select Open Input Component Editor or Open Output Component Editor from the context menu that appears when the block is right clicked to open the component editor The displayed parameters are the same as for Slot In and Slot Out component editors Right click the block and select Open CobraNet Editor from the contextual menu to open the editor CobraNet Input Output Component Editor Gobranet E B Ed Setting from this Editor Disable Hiah Samrlina Mode InFut
48. Object Types The devices shapes and wires that can be arranged in each design window are called Objects The following objects are available aides SSS OME o os DME and any cards inserted ino issos eooo oes User ened parameter contol Component Configuration User Module Audio processor Control parts User Module SPX Component Configuration SPX components User Module Area An area displayed on the sheet where descriptive Zones information is presented Configuration Various design elements such as name color and size can be set in the Properties dialog box for each object Size is set using the Width and Height boxes in the Properties dialog box The maximum size values that can be set may vary according to the sheet size and object position You can set a size that allows the object to fit in the sheet 210 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Zone There must be at least one zone in the Area window Zones are added and deleted using the Zone dialog box Zones are not displayed in the Toolkit window or in the Area Parts List submenu in the Tools Menu If you right click on the name of a zone object located in the Area window a context menu will be displayed ja New frea E Zone Context Menu l l at ut o h Copy BB reste Delete Duplicate Display Order gt Properties Cut Copy Paste and Delete are grayed out and cannot
49. Parameter sets can be copied between snap buttons A D e Select from the contextual menu e Drag and drop Drag and drop copy will also work between components of the same type DME Designer Owner s Manual 363 Chapter 5 Components Library Component editor user control editor and user module editor parameters can be saved as library files By reading back a saved library file you can reset all the editor parameters to the status they had when the file was saved Saving in a library file is called storing while bringing back the settings is called recalling them Library files have the following file name extensions cel for component editors ucl for user control editors and uml for user module editors Store Library Button Recall Library Button compressor CE III Sra Libr ars wr fT Oo Store Fae ts m ras cel Tee iresholi atin Over Nala ld ae k tha cel 4 A 40 r 5 i s 5 44 54 O q1 1 HARD 5 12 Attack Release Gain 720 La 229m Te Recall Library Menu Open File Dialog a a wy F 60 E0 4 250 m 13 G F i lII T E 120 Crm Us Oo 1 LALA kesln L n Compressor Steren JHBRe CerlzHo If you store library files in the Library component group names component names folders in the ContentsFolder specified in the Main Panel window Preferences dialog box they will be automatically d
50. Restart the firmware 2 Launch DME Designer and make the necessary communication port settings Page 155 3 Select Firmware Update gt Recovery Update from the Hardware menu The folder select dialog box will be displayed 4 Select the folder that contains the update file then click the OK button The Firmware Update window will open NOTE All connected DME units are displayed in the Device field A Firmware Update Selected Folder Firmware Please do not disconnect cable or turn off any device while updatine IP Address i V DME24N Select All Clear All Update 5 Check the DME SP2060 or ICP1 unit to be restored Clicking the checkboxes alternately turns the check mark on and off The Select All button can be used to check all DME SP2060 and ICP1 units The Clear All button removes the check marks from all DME SP2060 and ICP1 units 6 When the DME SP2060 and ICP1 units to be restored have been checked click the Update button The firmware restore process will begin NOTE During the restore process do not disconnect any USB or Ethernet cables or turn the DME SP2060 or ICP 1 power off Doing so can result is loss of the DME Designer communication port settings When the restore update is complete the DME SP2060 and ICP1 units will restart automatically It is also necessary to restart the DME designer F Update the firmware in the normal way Select Firmware Upda
51. There are three possible ways to connect a DME unit to a digital mixer for serial communication 1 via the REMOTE connector 2 via CobraNet and 3 via EtherSound In all cases it is necessary to set the communication port that the DME unit will use and if CobraNet or EtherSound are to be used it is necessary to make the appropriate settings for those protocols as well lt is also necessary to assign an ID to the internal head amp of the DME that is to be controlled oage 146 Since AD8HR protocol is used for communication between the DME units and digital mixer the head amp IDs allow multiple DME units to be viewed and controlled as AD8HR head amps from the mixer Details on making the appropriate settings are provided on the following pages NOTE O e Only one mixer can be communicated serially within each device group e f the connection between DME series units is interrupted communication with DME units with ID numbers higher than that of the unit at which the interruption occurred will not be possible e The variable range of GAIN differs between the AD8HR and the DME series You cannot use the mixer to specify a value that exceeds the variable range of the DME series e f the DME unit that is communicating serially with the digital mixer is changed or it s internal head amp ID assignment is changed it will be necessary to restart the DME unit DME Designer Owner s Manual 141 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Remote Connection
52. Wav File Manager dialog box gt See Wav File Manager on page 108 E GPI Opens the GPI dialog box gt See GPI on page 112 DME Designer Owners Manual 65 66 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window m MIDI Opens the MIDI dialog box gt See MIDI on page 125 User Defined Button Opens the User Defined Button dialog box gt See User Defined Button User Defined Parameters on page 132 DAW Control Opens the DAW Control dialog box gt See DAW Control on page 136 Remote Control Setup List Opens the Remote Control Setup List Dialog box gt See Remote Control Setup List on page 139 Internal HA Control Opens the Internal HA Control dialog box gt See Internal HA Control on page 141 Parameter List Opens the Parameter List dialog box gt See Parameter List on page 144 Component Lock Opens the Component Lock dialog box gt See Component Lock on page 150 Scene Link Manager Allows scene link setup gt See Scene Link Manager on page 151 SP2060 Library Manager Allows setup of SP2060 libraries gt See SP2060 Library Manager on page 153 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Setup Menu DME Designer Shortcut keys E Security E r m E Communication Port EF Ey fi fF Fort
53. a A E ee ee oe ee 54 TOODA Gaeenennen center re tere ener Meter ent EER a emer tate 194 RY aetna epee ete ee ee eee aten ent Erara 29 198 A T E R e a 199 anea E E E E E EE T E E 199 E a a ETS E OE EE T E S E T 200 Tools MEU srarenornn iea e a E centri eran tire riven mers 65 207 U User aeiee OWS E A E 58 Ee E E E E EA E EEE 31 rodun NEN sedsrsrra nnan E RE A 163 a E A 160 Jeer C OnT aa E R 91 creating NEW ssu sessissssriressrrrrsrrrresrrrrsrrrtrsrrrresrreresrrrrsrrererne 326 E U e E E en doe seeeeeees 328 User Control Manager dialog DOX sssssiiissssssiirirerrrrrrrerrrrrrrreen 91 User Control MENU m assrisicsirirriinneskinei s ininda rakean ieie Kia T naa N 326 User Defined Button User Defined Parameters essieesiiieesrrrerrrrrerrrrrerrrrerrrrre 132 User Defined Button dialog DOX ssesssrrneeessrrrnrersrrrreesrrrrrren 132 User Defined LOCK ssssiusssinnssrrrrerrrrrerrirerrrrerrrrerrrrrrrrrrerrrrrerrn 519 User Defined Parameters cccccccccccccccs ee cecceeeeeeeeeeneeceeenaeseeeaas 132 SIMD ra E E E S a EES 135 User Module exsczcca ce cccree seca acaud toicatee acne aaccedatetnateestcuaaeteea setae 243 309 C a Rta ey ere me Ro Rete re ene noe oreo NE 309 Sf 0 anne ne nen ee eee Pe Cerne ene ete ee nee aera eee err een ener re 310 User Module Editor 20 0 ccccccceccceseeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeseeseeneeeeenaees 330 User Module Manager scsicccicnnusssadeascyscstiecsieeactnnsgicddna
54. a list of parameters included in the component is displayed Select the parameter you want to assign DME Group DME64N Control Ghange Program Change Farameter Change Clear Clear All Kkeyh 1 1 Kexh Dyn 1 1 Threshold Dyn 1 1 Ratio Dyn 1 1 Knee Dyn 1 Attack Dyed Release Dyn 1 Gain Min Max Sets the range of operation for the parameter The current values for the Min lower limit and Max upper limit are displayed If you click here a slider will be displayed The range and parameter units that can be set will vary depending on the parameter selected in the Parameter box You can change the parameter by dragging the slider To make a finer setting press the lt Shitt gt key while dragging the slider The value for the parameter will be shown while you are dragging the slider When you finish dragging and release the mouse button the slider will disappear The same slider is displayed whether you click the Min box or the Max box The black part is the parameter range If you drag the left edge of the black part the Min value will change If you drag the right edge the Max will change MIDI DME Group DMESiC Control Change Program Change Parameter Change Clear Clear All No Function Parameter Min Mas 001 Component CobraNet Output Out 1 1 Level x 002 INFINITY dB 0 00dB E Clear Button Clears assignments for the selected control change numbers E
55. and Frame have been added to the tool palette of the user module editor and user control editor design mode page 325 Controller properties can be accessed by double clicking controllers in the user module editor or user control editor design mode page 344 Picture and Text objects can be clicked to open a specified editor in the user module editor or user control editor The User Module Editor and User Control Editor offer a greater range of customization options for color size etc of the placed controls MIDI Setup e A MIDI Setup minimize function has been added E V1 2 Precautions e When using project files daf created by version 1 1 5 or earlier synchronize from the DME Designer to the DME unit for the first synchronization e Project files daf created using version 1 2 will not open properly on version 1 1 DME Designer Owner s Manual 13 14 Changes from V1 2 to V2 0 E General e Support added tor DME8i C DME8o0 C DME4io C SP2060 units and MY16 CIl e Device Groups or groups of the same type of device have been added at the lowest Zone level e t is now possible to have one master device per device group rather than one master device per zone This means that it is possible to have multiple master devices in a single zone e Group masters can now be assigned regardless of the IP address This makes it possible to have multiple device groups at a single network address e Configura
56. editor window displays four channels each for Inout and Output lt displays the channel group you click on in the delay matrix component editor The Channel buttons in the Input and Output sections of the Delay Matrix Crosspoint editor window switch the channel group that is displayed in the window Input section Output section Channel menu Channel menu If you click another channel group when the delay matrix component editor is active and an Delay Matrix Crosspoint editor window is displayed that channel group will be displayed in the open Delay Matrix Crosspoint editor window Only one Delay Matrix Crosspoint matrix window is displayed for each delay matrix component editor Matrix Mixer In the matrix mixer the input channels and output buses are arranged in a checkerboard configuration You can adjust the group balance for each output bus There are 32 components in the in the Matrix Mixer group each with different numbers of input and output channels There are eight groups based on the number of inputs as follows 2 Input 4 Input 8 Input 12 Input 16 Input 24 Input 32 Input and 64 Input 5 Matrix Mixer lt Matrix Mixer gt Matrix Mixer gt Matrix Mixer gt gt Matrix Mixer ut ut ut 442 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide If a 64 input 64 output Matrix Mixer component or a 64 input 32 output Matrix Mixer component i
57. fT and specify continuous control of continuously variable parameters from an external fader knob or similar device T and 4 specify on off control of 2 state parameters via an external switching device T The specified Wave file will be played each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to above the median voltage Max voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min voltage applied to GPI IN The specified Wave file will be played each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to below the median voltage Max voltage applied to GPI IN Min voltage applied to GPI IN P Same as P 1 Same as db Median voltage refers to the voltage halfway between the maximum and minimum voltages detectable by the GPI input terminals Refer to the DME owner s manual for details on GPI voltages DME Designer Owner s Manual 121 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window mE GPI OUT The DMEGAN has sixteen GPI OUT ports the DME24N has eight and the DME Satellite has four These settings determine which DME parameter values will be output via each individual GPI IN ports The ports numbers are shown in the leftmost column Function specifies the function to be transmitted via a GPI output The six available functions are No Assign Parameter Value Edit Scene Change GPI Lock Direct Parameter Value and Audio Detector The Parameter Threshold Terminal and P
58. key to select the highlighted item and close the window DME Designer Owner s Manual 913 Appendix ON OFF Parameters Parameters that are either ON or OFF are edited via this type of display e g Mute Parameter Edit display in Mute Switching 1 Rotate the dial clockwise to select ON or counterclockwise to select OFF 2 Press enter to confirm the selection and close the window Parameter Edit displays will also appear when the SCENE F6 MUTE or other key is pressed These allow scene changes and other settings to be edited as required Editing User Defined Button 1 If the Main display is not showing press the HOME key to recall it 2 Press the HOME key until the page containing the parameter to be edited appears 3 Use the F1 F2 F3 F5 keys select the parameter to be edited The Parameter Edit display for the selected User Defined Button will appear NOTE User Defined Button can be of all three types numeric list and ON OFF 4 User Defined Button as required Refer to Parameter Edit Displays on page 512 for editing procedures NOTE Any changed User Defined Button values will be lost if the power is turned off or if scenes are changed To preserve the changed values store the scene data DME Designer Owner s Manual Mute Switching Turns the DME series output mute function ON or OFF 1 Press the F6 MUTE key for longer than 2 seconds The Mute Parameter
59. 0ms to 46 0s Compressor release time A8kHz 5 0ms to 42 3s 88 2kHz 3ms to 23 0s 96kHz 3ms to 21 1s Exp Rel 44 1kHz 6 0ms to 46 0s Expander release time 48kHz 5 0ms to 42 3s 88 2kHz 3ms to 23 0s 96kHz 3ms to 21 1s Exp Byp ON OFF Expander bypass 12 0 dB to 0 0 dB Limiter threshold O10 T20 ms Lim Rel 44 1kHz 6 0ms to 46 0s Limiter release time A8kHz 5 0ms to 42 3s 88 2kHz 3ms to 23 0s 96kHz 3ms to 21 1s DME Designer Owner s Manual 481 Chapter 6 Component Guide AEC Acoustic Echo Canceller MY4 AEC card required This component is only available when an MY4 AEC Acoustic Echo Canceller is installed in a rear panel I O slot of the DME64N 24N To place the AEC component in a layout select a DME64N or DME24N device then select the MY4 AEC card via Select I O Card in the DME Device Properties dialog box Page 218 How Acoustic Echo and Noise are Reduced Acoustic echo occurs in a teleconferencing system when the sound from a speaker or reflections from surfaces of the room are picked up by a microphone and transmitted to the other party resulting in a loss of intelligibility Projectors and air conditioning systems also produce noise that can interfere with clear teleconferencing The echo canceling noise reduction and feedback suppressor capabilities of the MY4 AEC help to achieve maximum clarity and intelligibility for smooth effective communication Remote Local gt g mmo
60. 18 dB Oct Butrwrth 18 dB Oct Bessel 24 dB Oct AdjustGc 24 dB Oct Butrwrth 24 dB Oct Bessel 24 dB Oct Linkwitz 36 dB Oct AdjustGc 36 dB Oct Butrwrth 36 dB Oct Bessel 48 dB Oct AdjustGc 48 dB Oct Butrwrth 48 dB Oct Bessel 48 dB Oct Linkwitz 6 dB to 6 dB ation one tae T LPF 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency Gc Chapter 6 Component Guide Sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type THRU turns off the filter When AdjustGc Adjustable Gc is selected for Type this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency ON OFF Turns bypass ON Output 20 fo 0 dB Sets the output signal level DME Designer Owner s Manual 425 Chapter 6 Component Guide Programmable HPF The high pass filter passes frequencies in the signal that are higher the specified frequency while attenuating lower frequencies in the signal With the programmable high pass filter you can set the filter type and the slope between the frequency band that is passed and the band that is cutoff There are two types of programmable HPF components mono channel and stereo channel Mono channel programmable HPFs have one input and one output Stereo channel programmable HPFs have two of each Double click a component to display the component editor for it The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components Programmable HPF component editors EEk Snare Library METT Store Recall Input HPF Oute
61. 346 E Toggle Button Properties Dialog Box The Toggle Button Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click the ON OFF button or right click it and select Properties from the contextual menu This sets the text displayed by the button along with the color of the button g Togele Button Properties Cancel Text Font Color Displays a list where you can select the color of the button If you click the W a list of button colors will be displayed gae Togele Button Properties Text Font Size Select a button size from the list Small 87x11 Small 51x11 Medium 74x11 Medium 74x22 or Large 111x33 Text box Enter the text to be displayed by the button You can set different text for when the button is ON and for when it is OFF Text Font Button sets the font size and style Clicking here displays the Select Font dialog box For information about the Select Font dialog box see page 264 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Components m Radio Button Properties Dialog Box The Radio Button Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click a radio button or right click it and select Properties from the contextual menu You can set the button s color size and font Small 37x11 Cancel Sa mp le Text Font Color select a color from the list White Red Yellow Green Blue or
62. 368 Chapter 5 Components Creating Parameter Links You can group controls parameters and link their parameters You can create parameter link groups and add controls to them in the component editor Parameter link settings are made in the Parameter Link window For information about parameter links and the Parameter Link window see Parameter Link page 94 NOTE A parameter can belong to one group only Furthermore only parameters of the same type can be grouped E Creating Parameter Links If you right click on a control a context menu will be displayed The Add Parameter to Parameter Link gt Global Link Local Link gt Add Group commands create new groups Controls can be added by right clicking m Adding Controls to a Group If you right click a control in the component editor a context menu will be displayed You can create groups or add controls using commands in the Add Parameter to Parameter Link submenu Groups that do not have the same type of parameters will be grayed out and cannot be selected Global Link The group names for global link groups are displayed in the Global Link submenu When you click a group name a control is added to the group DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Components Local Link The group names for local like groups are displayed in the Local Link submenu When you click a group name a control is added to the group mE Adding Mu
63. 5 YAMAHA 2 Getting Started with DME Designer In this manual the abbreviation DME refers to the DME64N DME24N DME8i C DME8o0 C DME4io0 C DME8i ES DME80 ES DME4Iio ES The abbreviation DME Satellite refers to the DME8i C DME8o0 C DME4io C DME8i ES DME8o0 ES DME4io ES Your DME SP2060 ICP1 and the DME Designer software let you build a custom audio system installation that can support an incredible variety of conditions You can build an entire system from input to output with the DME Designer software then send the system data to the DME and SP2060 which become independent processors An amazing variety of applications are possible including audio installations sub mixing speaker system control matrix routing and multi effect processing Nor p Here the abbreviation DME does not include the DME32 Ea This manual is based on the English version of operating system Illustrations command names window names and similar information are from that version Some items may differ from what you see on the computer screen depending on which operating system you are using SPECIAL NOTICES e The software and this Owner s Manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation e Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden without the written consent of the manufacturer e Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard
64. Aligns the positions of multiple controls Picture Button Align Left Button TEXT Button Align Right Button Box Button Align To Top Button Ellipse Button Align To Bottom Button Frame Button Tool Palette H os i d TEET 2 met Fi CA al me Grid Vertical Center Align Button Scene Recall Button Horizontal Center Align Button Button Align Vertically Button Align Horizontally Button Line Button Align Left Button Aligns all selected controls with the left edge of the leftmost selected control Align Right Button Aligns all selected controls with the right edge of the rightmost selected control 332 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Components Align To Top Button Aligns all selected controls with the top edge of the uppermost selected control Align To Bottom Button Aligns all selected controls with the bottom edge of the lowermost selected control Align Horizontally Button This button can be used only when three or more controls are selected lt arranges the controls in a uniform horizontal line Without changing the position of the leftmost and rightmost control this button arranges the controls between them at uniform intervals It puts the same amount of space between each control and its neighbor Align Vertically Button This button can be used only when three or more controls are selected It arranges the controls in a uniform vertical line Without changing
65. Attn ERE 1 Acoustic Echo Canceller AER Hi AEC On E Hard 4 Hard 4 Hard 4 Hard Effect Effect Effect Effect n Sort EE Sort E Srt i 2 Distance Meter Distance Meter Distance Meter 3 4 Feedback Surrressor FES tin __PRSSS eal FESS Cie 5 Width oct Wa Width oct Wa Width oct Wea Width oct Derth dE R Derth dE a Derth dE E Kerth d3 Acoustic Echo Canceller Channel 164 c63HI DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Mic In meters These meters display the signal levels from the corresponding near end microphones Ref In meters Display the level of the far end input signals that are used for AEC reference individually for each channel Maintaining the reference signals at optimum levels leads to maximum echo cancellation efficacy Echo Attn meters Display the echo cancellation strength for each channel The higher the level the stronger the echo cancellation effect ERL meters Display the ERL Echo Return Loss the amount of speaker output that is picked up by the microphone for each channel Echo cancellation will be most effective if the microphone and speaker positions orientations are adjusted so that this level is minimal Sectio Parameter Range Function AEC AEC On ON OFF Turns the echo canceller function ON or OFF When OFF AEC learning will also stop Effect 1 2 3 4 Sets the strength of echo cancellation Higher values correspond to higher echo can
66. Band The components that can be placed in the configuration window vary according to the device type For details see Component List on page 372 If the Matrix Mixer 64 input 64 output or the Matrix Mixer 64 input 32 output components are placed in the DME64N configuration window you will not be able to use other components even though the window does not reach 100 percent The Matrix Mixer 64 input 64 output or Matrix Mixer 64 input 32 output components cannot be used in the DME24N and DME Satellite E Arranging a Number of Components of the Same Type You can arrange a number of components of the same type If there are two or more of the same component numbers will be attached to their names as follows Compressor 2 Compressor 3 and so on Multiple components placed in the configuration are independent and you can set different parameters for each of them iDME64N Zone1 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer m SP2060 Configuration Window SP2060 Zone1 SP Group 3x2way NA NB Input A B Link Button Although SP2060 configurations cannot be edited the Input A B Link status can be changed Clicking this button alternately turns INPUT A B linking ON and OFF When switched ON the input level EQ and Delay component parameters are copied from Input A to Input B and are thereafter linked Probe Monitor Probe monitor is a function that lets you monitor output
67. Bottom Circle Size Width and Height set the width and height of the line in pixel increments NOTE The size of lines can also be changed by dragging any of the line s corners in the user control editor Direction set the line s orientation to Vertical or Horizontal as required Type select a line type from the list Solid Dash Dash Dot Dash Dot Dot Size Sets the line width Color Click the Select Color button and select the desired line color in the Select Color dialog box Top Left select a line termination for the top or left end of the line from the list None Arrow Circle Bottom Right select a line termination for the bottom or right end of the line from the list None Arrow Circle DME Designer Owner s Manual 355 356 Chapter 5 Components m Scene Recall Button Properties Dialog Box Double click a Scene Recall button or right click it and select Properties from the contextual menu to display the Scene Recall Properties dialog box This lets you specify the scene to be recalled by the button and other characteristics Scene Recall Button Properties N Red bd Large 111433 Lenea Test Scene ogil fw Edit Mark Text Test Font Alignment Center T O07 Scene O01 Cap Color select a button color from the list White Red Yellow Green Blue Violet Size select a button si
68. Box Communication Port LL o a DMEdio ES H DME4ioES 1 DME Group SP2060 1 sP2060 SP Group NoAssign DMEJioES H No ssign SP2060 H DME 4io ES 2 Mo Assign Tx Selects the driver communication port to be used for transmission Rx Selects the driver communication port to be used for reception Group Select the device group to be set up from the list DME Designer Owner s Manual 155 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Shortcut Keys Click Shortcut Keys in the Setup menu to display the Shortcut Keys dialog Names and Functions Shortcut Keys Open om Save Ctrl 5 Save as j DME File Storage Preferences Enter new key i Log Off Epit CtrlN Import OME Designer All File e PG Export OME Designer Al File El Edit o Undo Ctr Redo Ctrl o i Undo History o Ee Miew z Designer io User Control i Mew User Control z Event Logger Ctrl L i Navigator Cr Click to select the desired shortcut item E Enter New Key If assigned the current shortcut will be displayed A shortcut entered via the computer keyboard will be displayed E OK Button Enters the settings and closes the dialog box E Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without entering the settings 156 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Security Creating Users and Making User Settings When you click the Security command on the Setup me
69. Chapter 5 Components User Control Editor User Module Editor User Control Editor The user control function lets you lay out a set of component controls in the Configuration window or User Module window and create a control window with them The controls in the user control editor are linked to the controls for the original component If the parameters are changed in the user control editor the parameters will change in the same way in the component editor If parameters are changed in the component editor the controls in the user control window will also change in the same way You can create a compact control window by only including controls for parameters that are used frequently You can also lay out controls for multiple components so that you can adjust parameters for them from a single window User Control Editor Component Editor CS Master Volume Laid Out Controls A SHAT ISS Se NERS Controls Laid Out in the User Control Edit Palette There is also a Library button in the user control editor which you can use to save parameters to the library User controls are created by selecting View menu User Control gt New User Control in the Main Panel window Created user controls are displayed in the View menu gt User Control submenu If you select one a window will open for it The controls which can be opened by the user control editor are automatically set according to the user security settings
70. Consult with the network administrator if it is necessary to use a global address Master ID If the DME or SP2060 unit connected to the port specified by the Communication Port dialog box is a Slave device the fourth octet of the of the device group master IP address is displayed and can be edited here This parameter is display only if the device is the device group master NOTE Be sure to set the DME and SP2060 to a different device group Link Mode Displays and sets the link mode of the DME or SP2060 unit connected to the port specified by the Communication Port dialog box MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the DME or SP2060 unit connected to the port specified by the Communication Port dialog box DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Utility Click the Utility item of the Hardware menu to open the Utility window Utility Window This window provides a variety of utility settings for DME and SP2060 units These settings can be made when the target unit is not only online but also offline A password will be required to open this window if the DME64N 24N Utility screen is locked NOTE Only users with security status in which Edit is checked can edit Utility parameters Names and Functions ie ee ee Type i Into Network Display Lock Misc Remote MIDI GPI Yamaha OME24H 1 ama i DMEZ4N 092 168 000 002 DMEZ4N Version 400 Batter
71. Delay Matrix One Input to All Outputs editor window One Delay Matrix One Input to All Outputs editor window is displayed for each delay matrix component editor 440 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide E Crosspoint Delay Matrix Crosspoint editor window If you click a level meter in the delay Delay Matrix CrossRoint4x4 matrix component editor that group s Delay Matrix Crosspoint editor channel 1 4 window will be displayed Adjusts the send levels from each input channel to output buses and turns them ON and OFF Just like the delay matrix component editor the input channels ZE SE CSE A are arranged vertically while the output oie 4 io 6 in io Poe channels are arranged horizontally Sr ee eet ag a 9 Delay Matrix Input 8 Outrut 16618 271aH gt Fe frst cums aaa Co ouma erame Swiches we aneterchannel group On ON OFF ON OFF Turns ON send for each crosspoint dice Turns ON all sends in the Crosspoint window The On button lights up Turns Turns OFF all sends in the Crosspoint window all sends in the Turns OFF all sends in the Crosspoint window window a pm all send levels in the Crosspoint window making them O dB Minimum Resets all send levels in the Crosspoint window making them dB DME Designer Owner s Manual 441 Chapter 6 Component Guide Channel Group Switching The Delay Matrix Crosspoint
72. Design Mode Soak Hold v Level Meter Enable Close All Editor Windows Open Parameter Link R Peak Hold gt Level Meter Enable Close All Editor Windows Open Parameter Link Design Mode switches between design mode and operation mode When you are in design mode a checkmark will appear to the left of the command name Peak Hold Turns the peak hold meter ON or OFF and performs a reset The ON or OFF setting for peak hold applies to the whole zone Master Volume Snap wee vo Design Mode Close All Editor Windows Open Parameter Link e On When you select this peak hold is turned ON and a checkmark appears next to it If you select this item while it is checked peak hold is turned OFF e Reset Resets peak hold NOTE gt Peak hold is a function that makes it easy to see the maximum signal value by lighting up at the level of the maximum value as the signal peak comes in DME Designer Owner s Manual 359 360 Chapter 5 Components Level Meter Enable Specifies whether the level meters will be enabled or disabled Close All Editor Windows Closes all component editor windows Open Parameter Link Opens the Parameter Link window For information about the Parameter Link window see Parameter Link page 94 Add Parameter to Parameter Link Creates a parameter link See Creating Parameter Links page 368 Add Component to Component Link Component editor
73. Displays and sets the Utility screen lock status The settings are Unlock and Lock Unlock The Utility screen can be opened without a password Lock An 8 character password is required to open the Utility screen NOT C The password is also required to switch from Unlock to Lock status Panel Lock Boot Displays and determines whether the panel lock will be automatically engaged when the unit is turned on The settings are Unlock and Lock Unlock The panel will not be locked when power to the unit is turned on Lock The panel will be locked when power to the unit is turned on Panel Lock Target Displays and sets the panel lock target The settings are Key Only and Key GPI Key Only Only input via the panel controls will be locked Key GPI Input via the panel controls and GPI inputs will be locked User Defined Page Lock Displays and sets the User Defined Button lock status for each page The settings are Unlock and Lock Unlock The corresponding User Defined Button page will be displayed Lock The corresponding User Defined Button page will not be displayed User Lock Displays and sets the panel lock status The settings are Unlock and Lock Unlock Panel not locked Lock Panel locked The following operations cannot be performed when the panel is locked e Parameter changes e Scene recall store e Scene title editing e Scene protect cha
74. E Minateariae eset 428 WW TKXer f lal 1 6 0 gt er 429 I EOE A EEA E A E E T 431 a E AEE AE EE E EE vee EE E E 453 Room COMbiner nsusxscisssutcrtudxneinseanndenxnesersnaphatnoumtenensrdGronnteweste 460 a DE O A EA P EEA E N 461 POUNCE GPEC eresie ie Re R iS 463 Speaker Processor ccccceccccsesseceeceeaeeeeeceeegesecseeeeeseesesaeeees 464 E a E E TAE E ners EE E E A E P A E E 471 AEC Acoustic Echo Canceller MY4 AEC card required 482 O a E E E A E 487 Cascade DMEGAN OI sisviesicuiiesuinnmnraectiuetvetaiasoedietentemanoneiels 489 Analog Input and OUT OUT sescdectss cineceedeate areteecdorin davieers cease 492 SP2060 Input and OULD Ul ierisinde 494 CobraNet Input and OUTDUTiriciiccercscceuteicenicoedaoanccterseseleesacies 495 DME Designer Owner s Manual 21 22 EtherSound Input and Output sede ecteactemmertersasteasereeiactvatent 497 DV A era A EE a 498 Remote Controlled Head AM cccccccceccccseeeceeeeeeeeeneeeees 503 Component Glossary essiri a aa Ea 505 Appendix 509 DETE EE A EAA E EATE E A 509 MAIO ae E EN 511 Parameter Edit Displays ssn ssnessnssrnsinesrrrrrrerrrerrrerrrrrren 512 DAE E 9 E E eee E A T eee 516 Troubleshooting 521 Index 522 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 1 Before Using Installing DME Designer To use DME Designer you must first install the software on the computer Before you can connect the DME Designer software to the DME or SP2060 unit you must f
75. EH Edit Mode sheet Prohibit Diagonal Connections Grid m Arrow Hand Preferences e Symbols are substituted for external devices in the following three types of folders Microphone gt mike symbol Power Amp gt amp symbol speaker gt speaker symbol e Text decoration except for size will be eliminated e Picture objects and background images for the sheet or objects will all be eliminated Style attributes for boxes will be eliminated When you select this command the Export DXF dialog box will be displayed DME Designer Owner s Manual 271 Chapter 4 Designer Export DXF dialog box T Export DXF DXF File Name MEA A Scale 1 1 v Cancel Test Style TXT Block Block Paper Size Preset Size A3 4208297 16 54411 69 in Landscape v C Custom Sizes Unit Horizontal 1100 mm C inch Vertical i 00 E DXF File Name Enter a filename for the DXF file The default file name entered here will vary according to the currently active window If you click the button at the right of the box the DXF File Name dialog box is displayed Specify the DXF file filename and the folder where the file will be saved DXF File Name Save in O YAMAHA bldg x e B Picture My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents M ut etwork File name DSPO1 dsf aces Save as type DXF File dxf v Cancel
76. Firmware Update on page 186 Device Information Opens the Device Information dialog box gt See Device Information on page 190 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Window Menu DME Desiener indon Close All Editor Windows Ctrl E Scene Humi 1 Designer 2 Compressor raria T m8 SA g Displays the open windows Click a window name to bring that window to the front E Close All Editor Windows Closes all editor windows Each design windows within the Designer window can be switched using the Window menu in the Designer window About Menu CH DME Designer About DME Designer ed fet mo Y LA i FEE E i E About DME Designer Displays information about this application Mute DME Designer Owner s Manual 69 70 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window DME File Storage Allows management of DME files Project files can be managed on the DME eliminating the need to manage them on the computer Project files can be managed on a DME unit without the need for a computer Since project files are necessary to allow synchronization of DME and SP2060 units we recommend that you save your project files to the DME unit for enhanced reliability Click DME File Storage in the File menu to display the DME File Storage dialog Does not apply to SP2060 units If the file name is to include Japanese characters select Japanese via the Language
77. First Monday in January each year e Day 1 every month First day of each month e Second Monday of every month The second Monday of each month e Monday every week Each week on Monday e Every day Every day Time Displays the time for starting the event Group List selects the device group for which events are to be specified displayed Only events for the selected device group will appear in the window Enable Event Scheduler Enables the scheduled events Add Button Adds an event Clicking here displays the Add Event dialog box If the maximum of 50 events has already been registered this button is grayed out Remove Button Deletes the event selected on the list This button is grayed out when no event is selected Edit Button Lets you edit the selected event Displays the Edit Event dialog box This button is grayed out when no event is selected Copy Button Copies the selected event This button is grayed out when no event is selected Paste Button Pastes the copied event The event is added This button is grayed out when no event has been copied DME Designer Owner s Manual E Clock setup Button Opens the Clock dialog box to set the DME internal clock gt See Clock on page 180 E Apply Button Applies any current setting changes E OK Button Applies any setting changes and closes the window E Cancel Button Closes the window
78. H SHELF High Shelving There is no sound attenuation at high frequencies The sound is attenuated at a constant rate from the cutoff frequency towards the lower frequencies The attenuation rate per octave can be set to 6 dB Oct or 12 dB Oct e HPF This is a high pass filter Q 0 7 Attenuates the low frequencies with a gentle curve 12 dB Oct e LPF This is a low pass filter Q 0 7 Attenuates the high frequencies with a gentle curve 12 dB Oct DME Designer Owner s Manual 417 Chapter 6 Component Guide Fader Controls the output level for each channel Fader components are available for 1 2 4 8 12 and 16 channels Double click a component to display the component editor for it The number of channels varies but all components share a common configuration in the component editor Fader component editor Fader 16 Channel ki E io J ro y a B a E S r oetting Range FUNCTIC Phase ON OFF Reverses the phase of the output signal for each channel oa ON OFF Turns ON each channel s output Fadar to 10 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel O Fae oo ON OFF Sets fade during scene recall ON or OFF E Fade Sets the action of the fader when there is a large change in its position during scene recall When you turn this ON the fader moves gradually to the position after the jump If you turn this OFF it immediately jumps to the parameters saved in the recalled scene See The
79. Hardware menu the Work Clock dialog box is displayed Names and Functions CA Word Glock Device i ery ea v Clock Information SLOT 1 No Gard SLOT 2 Slot Information No Gard SLOT 3 No Gard SLOT 4 No Gard Clock Status Unlock Lock Lock But Not Sync ed Q Unknown CH9 10 IM CHI1 12 IO CHI3 1 GH3 4 CH9 10 IQ GHI1 12 Internal O 44 1k O 48k O 88 2k O 96k Word Clock O WO IN Cascade Digital O IN O oT O IN e The number of channels varies according to the card inserted into the slot E DME From the list select the DME or SP2060 where you will be making settings E Clock Information Displays the word clock frequency for the DME or SP2060 selected in DME The frequency of the operational word clock is displayed when the device Is online When offline the frequency information used at the time of compilation is displayed regardless of the frequency of the device s word clock Click the V button to the right of the frequency display to select the frequency of the operational word clock DME Designer Owner s Manual 177 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Card Slot Information Displays the name of the card inserted into the slot Card Slot Number SLOT 1 MT 6G AE SLOT 2 MY Te C SLOT 3 M4 AD SLOT 4 Card Name E Clock Status The clock status is displayed using a color code a Unlock Indicates that there is no input si
80. Here you can set the delay for each frequency band Crossover Process E ossover Processor Il 4 Way 16663 2718H gt ms O to 500 sets the delay time sample the range depends on the Fs value Meter O to 171 8 Feet 0 to 563 6 Frame the range depends on the Frame value Beat the range depends on the Beat value evel co to 0 dB sets the output signal level for each channel ON OFF Turns delay ON Delay Scale ms selects the units for setting the delay Sample time The selected button will light up Meter and the units in the Delay edit box Feet will change Frame If Beat is selected use the Knob to Beat set the BPM beats minute Delay Scale does not support the parameter link feature Refer to Parameter Link on page 94 for information on parameter linking 396 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide E Parametric Equalizer When you click the PEQ button for the crossover processor it opens the parametric equalizer editor window Here you can make parametric equalizer settings for each frequency band Crossover Processor I PEQ High PEQ Curve Displays the PEQ curve Type PEQ Select the filter type from the menu L SHELF 6 dB Oct L SHELF 12 dB Oct H SHELF 6 dB Oct H SHELF 12 dB Oct oa iomo Sasthe vend wath ofeach bend Fe Fieqensy _ 20Het0 20K Sers he fequency ofeach bench Fe can s ra Seo he reuency gain foreach band Lo Bypass onor Tuns ON bypass to
81. Indicator Shows the current mute ON OFF status bal Mute ON F Mute OFF Output Level Indicator Displays the current output level in 10 increments The longer the bar the higher the output level Panel Lock Icon This icon appears when the panel lock function is turned ON al Panel Lock ON Panel controls locked Panel Lock The panel controls can be locked to prevent accidental mis operation To activate the panel lock function simultaneously press and hold the HOME and ENTER keys for longer than 2 seconds The panel lock icon will appear on the Main display when the panel is locked Level1 Level HI fiteiscene 00 Ke Panel lock icon Panel Lock can be disengaged by pressing the CANCEL key for longer than 2 seconds NOTE You can select whether or not the panel lock function is automatically engaged when the unit is initially turned on This selection can be made via the Utility display Lock page refer to the page 518 DME Designer Owner s Manual 511 912 Appendix Parameter Edit Displays Parameter Edit displays will appear when the SCENE F6 MUTE or other key is pressed to allow scene changes level adjustment and other settings to be edited as required Parameter Edit displays are also used to edit utility parameters In most cases the desired parameter edit page can be accessed by selecting the item you want to edit in the appropriate display by u
82. Inout Meter Displays the input signal level Mix Balance Control Adjusts the balance between the fundamental tone and the effect tone Bypass button When turned ON the input signal is output without change o0 Output Meter Displays the output signal level Other Parameters Other parameters vary according to the effect type DME Designer Owner s Manual 471 472 Chapter 6 Component Guide Other effect parameters vary according to the selected effect type as shown below Effect Type Reverb Hall Reverb Room Reverb Stage Reverb Plate One input two output hall room stage and plate reverb simulations all with gates Early Ref One input two output early reflections Gate Reverb Reverse Gate One input two output early reflections with gate and early reflections with reverse gate Mono Delay One Input one output basic repeat delay DME Designer Owner s Manual Function Balance of early reflections and reverb 0 all reverb 100 all early reflections A eo Gate Lvi Attack Hold 44 1kHz 0 02ms to 2 13s Gate open time A8kHz 0 02 ms to 1 96s 88 2kHz 0 01ms to 1 06s Gate closing speed 96kHz 0 01ms to 981ms 44 1kKHz 6 0ms to 46 0s A8kHz 5 0ms to 42 3s Decay 88 2kKHz 3ms to 23 0s 96kHz 3ms to 21 1s Type S Hall L Hall Random Revers Type of early reflection simulation Plate Spring Roomsize 0 1 to 20 0 Reflection spacing Liveness
83. Lo ee Ha012345 Sete way compression sappie Release 44 1 kHz 6 ms to 46 s Sets the release time 48 kHz 5 ms to 42 3 s The setting range may very depending on the 88 2 KHz 3 ms to 23 s operating frequency 96 kHz 3 ms to 21 1 s Gan oo 0 dB to 18 dB Sets the output gain On ON OFF Turns the compressor ON When you turn this button OFF the compressor is bypassed 392 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Crossover Processor Il The following five types of components are available in the Crossover Processor Il group 2 Way 3 Way 4 Way 5 Way and 6 Way Crossover processor II components have a single input and 2 to 6 outputs Double click a component to display the component editor for it The number of bands may vary depending on the component but they share a common configuration in the component editor There are inout and output level meters in the upper part of the window If you click the Crossover Delay PEQ or Compressor button in the Navigator section an editor for the crossover delay parametric equalizer or compressor will be displayed in a separate window A separate component editor will open for each output channel Such as Low or Mid when you click on the delay parametric equalizer or compressor Crossover Processor Il Crossover Processor II DER Snap Library we tT Store Recan Input Outeut Over Over Compressor Hish Mid Compresso
84. MINI FLAT DST Type DST1 DST2 OVD1 OVD2 Distortion type DST distortion OVD overdrive CRUNCH Dive Master Bass Viadie Treble Gab Dep EQF EQ peaking type frequency EQ peaking type gain EQ peaking type bandwidth N Gate 010 20 Dyna Fite Pe aig controlled filter Decay 44 1kHz 6 0ms to 46 0s Filter frequency change decay speed A8kHz 5 0ms to 42 3s 88 2kHz 3ms to 23 0s 96kHz 3ms to 21 1s Type Offs Ot 100 Sense controlled flanger Decay 44 1kHz 6 0ms to 46 0s Decay speed 48kHz 5 0ms to 42 3s Dyna Flange Two input two output dynamically 88 2kHz 3ms to 23 0s 96kHz 3ms to 21 1s Offset O to 100 Delay time offset FB Gain 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback SHF EQ peaking iype frequency EQ peaking ype gan EQ peaking type bandwidth Dyna Phaser n controlled phaser Decay 44 1kHz 6 0ms to 46 0s Decay speed 48kHz 5 0ms to 42 3s 88 2kHz 3ms to 23 0s 96kHz 3ms to 21 1s O to 100 Lowest phase shifted frequency offset FB Gain 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Number of phase shift stages LSH F 21 2 Hz to 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 to 12 dB Low shelving filter gain HSH F 50 0 Hz to 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12to 12 dB High shelving filter gain DME
85. Main Panel Window gt Current Scene page 57 see Scene Manager on page 82 F Display the Synchronization dialog box Click Synchronization in the Tools menu or the large Synchronization button on the toolbar When the dialog box opens a list of connected DME and SP2060 units will be obtained DMEs and SP2060s connected to the computer are displayed in the Network list Group DME Group M DME Designer Network IP Address 192 168 000 004 m 92 168 000 004 DME4io C 192 168 000 007 mza 192 168 000 007 DME24N Message V Close this window after synchronization Wv Store Project File into DME after synchronization ESE When requesting the Synchronization dialog box a one time alert will be displayed if the Communication Port settings have not been made After clicking the OK button on the alert a dialog will open At this time you can make the needed settings in the displayed dialog box and then again display the Synchronization dialog box 8 Device Group Selection Select the device group to be synchronized from the Group list in the Synchronization window NOT C Only one device group can be online in one operation DME Designer Owner s Manual 51 92 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview 9 IP Address Selection The DMEs and SP2060s included in the current device group are displayed in the Designer list in the Synchronization dialog box Click the IP Address b
86. Net Dise Lock E itil kE Unlock Q Pane ILock Boot UM book nd ieee Tars et ker Dnis Fade 2 4 4 O userDefined Lock FR OFFOFFOFe Utility The lock status for the Utility display settings This parameter can be set to Unlock or Lock Unlock The Utility display can be accessed without a password Lock A password must be entered to access the Utility display When Lock is selected a password entry window will appear when the F4 UTILITY key is pressed to access the utility pages Ul Password OHOUOOUUOU r H UserDefined Lock OFF OFFIOFFIOFF Use the F1 and F3 buttons to position the cursor and the dial to enter the desired character at the cursor location When all of the password s characters have been entered as required press the ENTER key The password will also be required when switching from the Unlock mode to the Lock mode NOTE Password security and management is very important If you forget your password the unit cannot be operated If you forget your password contact the system administrator If the password become unrecoverable for some reason and you need to unlock the system please contact your Yamaha representative Panel Lock Boot Determines whether or not panel lock will be on when power to the device is turned on This parameter can be set to Unlock or Lock Unlock Panel lock is OFF when power to the device is turned
87. OMEG4N User Module GEQ Mona Crossover Processor Delay Lone Components included in the User Module i OMPFessor Components Fader i Auto Mixer CGompanderH Lo mpander Hi i Go mpander H 3 Ducking PEGI Mono PEG Monat oe PEG Mona 3 m The subordinate items are displayed or hidden using the buttons to the left of the area zones configurations user modules or DME devices When the subordinate items are displayed the button changes to If you click this button the subordinate items will be hidden When the subordinate items are hidden the button changes to If you click this button the subordinate items will be displayed subordinate items are also displayed and the button changes to when you click on an area zone configuration user module or DME device E Area If you click the area the Area window becomes active E Zone If you click a zone the Zone window becomes active If another Zone window Is open zone will be switched NOT A When there are multiple configurations in a zone click a configuration to switch configurations not the zone DME Designer Owner s Manual 197 Chapter 4 Designer E Device Group If a group is clicked the zone window of the clicked group will become active If a window for another zone is open at the time zone will be switched E Configuration lf a configuration is clicked the clicked configuration will be select
88. ON The command is grayed out for users for whom Control Component Editor is turned OFF Compressor 4 a PE Stereo 4 F Add Component t Gommorent Link itt 00006060000 EIN eecer ost eae cman th32 cel a SLs re en Paige amp ee Open File Dialog e Open File Dialog Displays the file select dialog box You can recall libraries saved in folders other than the user module Library folder Store Component Library saves the component parameters Click to display the Store dialog box If you then save without changing the folder the parameters will be added to the library Refer to Library on page 364 for more information Add Component to Component Link Creates component link Refer to Creating Component Links on page 370 for more information Properties Displays the Component Properties dialog box Component Properties Here you can set properties for each component If multiple examples of the same component type are arranged on a single sheet changing the properties of a single component does not change the others To display the Component Properties dialog box select a component object then click the Properties command on the Edit menu i Component Properties Label Compressor Label Font Label Color Width fo Inputs Outputs Labels Color Height 60 2 Color Style Plain v DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Design
89. Open User Module Design Window Open User Module Editor Security Settings j Enable Security __ Set Password Default Library None v User Modules Name 4 Double click a user module in the Configuration window The user module editor will be displayed 5 Right click in the component editor or user module editor then click the Design Mode command in the context menu Design mode will be turned ON 6 Drag the controls from the component editor to the user module editor Arrange the controls in the user control editor DME Designer Owner s Manual 9339 Chapter 5 Components m Placing Controls Using Copy and Paste Copy the controls in the component editor and paste in the user control editor or user module editor To copy controls in the component editor press the Copy command shortcut keys lt Ctrl gt lt C gt To paste in the user control editor or user module editor press the Paste command shortcut key lt Ctrl gt lt V gt or the Paste button on the edit palette 1 Click on the source component editor window to make it active then select the control or controls you want to copy 2 Press the lt C gt key while holding down the lt Ctrl gt key The selected controls will be copied to the clipboard 3 With the target user control editor or user module editor active press the lt V gt key while holding down the lt Ctrl gt key You can also paste by clicking the Paste button on the
90. Output Low Level Hall Mid 2 Crossover Output Mid Level Hall Hi 2 Crossover Output High Level Selects the parameter to be edited from two DME units Specifies the configuration and preset data combination in each DME DME 2 Configuration DME 1 Configuration Preset parameters Preset parameters Specifies the parameter to be linked between DME units 8 DME Designer Owner s Manual NOTE Separate SP2060 units normally handle scenes independently but the Scene Link function can be set from the DME Designer to allow linked scene operation See Scene Link Manager on page 151 DME Designer Owner s Manual 9 10 Main Changes from V1 0 to V1 1 E Main Panel Window e Instead of the former Parameter Link function there are now two functions a Global Link function that links parameters within all DMEs in a zone and a Local Link function that links parameters within a single DME unit page 94 e The Synchronization function can now not only send data from DME Designer to the DME unit but can also synchronize by reading data from the DME unit page 97 e Scene Increment Decrement and Time Adjustment can now be assigned in the GPI input function page 114 e DME unit events can now be recorded by the Event Logger function and displayed in the Event Logger window page 177 e The time for executing an event can now be set by us
91. Panel Window E DME List e Date Displays the date the event occurred Example Display 2004 08 24 e Time Displays the time the event occurred Type Displays the event type and Icon There are three event types A Warning Warning event x Error Error event i Information Other events e Zone Displays the name of the zone in which the event occurred e Group Displays the name of the device group in which an event has occurred e DME Displays the name of the DME in which the event occurred e Event Displays the content of the event Log Setup Button Displays the Log Setup dialog box page 77 Here you can make Event Log settings Get Log Button When offline this opens the Get Log dialog box page 78 The event log data can be taken from the DME units and written to a file on the computer Zone Selects the zone device group and device for which events will be displayed Only events from the selected device will be displayed in the window If All is selected events will be displayed for all Display button Information Warning Error e i Display Information Button Switches between displaying and hiding Information events When turned ON Information events are displayed in the Event Logger window e A Display Warning Button switches between displaying and hiding Warning events When turned ON Warning events are displayed in the Event Logger win
92. Panel Window Me Nnu ccccccececseeeeeeeeeeneeeeneseeaeeeeaaes 60 DME File Sh ON ACS coos stersiadiunicradnnencdeonadtanvacstnanabtunwsaebaceebeaescsdeas 70 PS SNCS osha renccaereatetrenteaennstwtcrncuneauttexwoteanaabtoraciedueabindanieee 72 EVENT LOO CCl wanene aia e aE 75 Scene Manager a acteticacbuthertecnad ess etenteccadens hehydanndoceleaueanaseaaueanacc dace 82 User COMOL aesir niei i aaa REEN EAE 91 Parameter EINK coment ee e EAEE E ENE 94 Synchronization DME Designer and Unit Synchronization 97 Event Scheduler ccccatecs sinececaterhapittasaate siupinatiaamesieastictaamestaatiss 101 Wav File MAN AO Clic ssctccseanevecsaiecseasacostaiecseanacnsiaierssanesoeiadezsaes 108 CO EPET E EEE EEEE A E EEEE AEETI 112 MID eeen A E S 125 User Defined Button User Defined Parameters 132 DAW CONWOL srcsisasccicnascenensasescpessctncsncsnicmescnune tis koimcwacienaliaud nemancawsdionss 136 Remote Control Setup LISt ec ceeccceeceeeseeeeeeneeeeens 139 Internal HA Control ccc ccccccccccceccceeeeeeeeneceeeaeeeceeuaeeeeenaeees 141 Parameter List ccccccccsecccesceeceeeeseeceeeeeeseeeeeneeesseeeeaneeeeaeess 147 Component LOCK cece ccc ccc ccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeenaeeeesenes 150 Scene LINK Manager eee ccce cesses eeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeee es 151 DP 2000 Library Manage ciate stosoncracirnmntiansedswouseebsenoimentinteadectees 153 Commu nication Port SSIUO 2c ssssacsn
93. Sampling Input Format DOUBLE CHANNEL Selects the format for 88 2 96 kHz Mode SINGLE sampling rates Linked to Output Format Double FS ON OFF When turned ON the speed of the MY card word clock output is doubled Only available when the card is set as the word clock master Output Format DOUBLE CHANNEL Selects the format for 88 2 96 kHz SINGLE sampling rates Linked to Input Format Bundle Input 0 65279 Specifies the input bundle number Number Output 0 65279 Specifies the output bundle number Serial Rx OFF 1 15 Specifies the serial receive channel Channel OFF 1 5 specifies the serial transmit channel Properties Bit Length Bit Off specifies the output bit rate 16bit Output is muted when Bit Off is 20bit selected 24bit Specifies the latency Advanced Opens the Advanced Settings Window Refer to Advanced Settings Window on page 496 for details Select Disable if you intend to make settings via the CobraNet network using the CobraNet Manager for example In such cases selecting Enable may result in incorrect settings Refer to the MY16 CII Owner s Manual or CobraNet Manager Lite for YAMAHA Owner s Manual for mote information on CobraNet DME Designer Owner s Manual 501 Chapter 6 Component Guide E MY4 AEC This editor will appear when you click Open MY Card Editor in the contextual menu that appears when you right click the block MY 4 AEC Ejek
94. T EE 39 opening a project file from the Recently Used Files list 40 opening a project file that has security set eee 40 CSF SO NOS ararsan in erei E EA EREE 358 CSCW OW septa ae chataui inant need erena eitinterinacnod OSASI canes 429 Output Level Indicator lt a cacrconscananecnwemduapcceinniadannnrednadacaqmetedoanesnnds 511 P Page oo Da siase a AR A Oai i 511 Pane aerate ast aoe tose bad ctneaasesacnooseneaceaadesanaciaseerantiosenoinacies 453 507 E E FA cca AA NE EA ENET E T A nines 453 LP e A E A 454 LE TA E E E E E AA E T ET 455 Pan Nominal Position casiasasseterecctuctouiassateecnctusscsenemeemsdne 453 507 n Ee e E E E E E E 511 DME Designer Owner s Manual 923 924 Index Panel Lock BOOU asciietescassienigeaatonantecneancauenddenmnchanscanedneeblamnietabncdsnads 519 Fanell LOCK ICON oscars E S ERE 511 Panel Lock Targat peccccucsacesasnccenecaaacwenaconencetesieuienconeaadenueduceeaeseeuens 519 Parameter Change tab esn usssiinesrinnesrrnnesrrrresrrrerrrrrerrrrerrrrn 129 Parameter LINK acacsacnicecctcanencd ges nenbecadtoamencdaessenrecedtoadamaaaesnianiace 94 368 aee PEM MIST E E EAE E E 144 Parametric Equalizer PEQ sesssisissssssiiiirersrrirrrrerrrrrrersrrrrrrreen 416 PFarial Recall 5 cctwanecsceaantaneeacevamosdencqaannansieinnentonsaaceceunasinnmmecdiecadenace 85 Peels E E success ces ges oe de E E E ocean eee O eg eres 507 FIGUE lt 5icacdasdansccataaid de onicndaaicaonsendtaesa
95. User Module window You can also place objects by double clicking them in the Toolkit window The same objects are displayed in the Component List submenu on the Tools menu or on the context menu that appears when you right click on the sheet For information about the User Module window Component List see page 202 i i Unsaved User Module 3 Zone1 i i Unsaved User Module 3 Zone1 H D Dynamics Dynamics MEQ Baas 42 ceee cade H BEQ Fader Da p e BFader M Filter EE EA J Filter EABPF tees E 1 BAaOLtcrtier E BPF oneness aN BHPF Bas FAA ATE Thani mean Mono i f Steeo j IMIR E VVI MF peCciOCOtTtier i io h Stereo amp eee any Ss GA EBLPF flMBNotch JB ow ww eww i ABNah o o COME OU UC es DME Designer Owner s Manual 313 Chapter 4 Designer mE Placing a Number of Components of the Same Type You can arrange a number of components of the same type If there are two or more of the same component numbers will be attached to their names as follows Compressor 2 Compressor 3 and so on Multiple components placed in the configuration are independent and you can set different parameters for each of them H B Ambient Noise Compensator MAudio Detector B Auto Gain Control B Crossover H Crossover Processor H Crossover Processorll H D Delay Dynamics B Compander Compressor je Mono
96. View Displays the scene link name DME group and or SP2060 scene number and scene name for each scene Link setup Clicking on scene number or scene name opens a list from which a new selection can be made Click on the scene link name to edit it E New Button Creates a new scene link setup Enter a name and click the OK button to add a new scene link setup DME Designer Owner s Manual 151 152 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Delete Button Deletes the scene link setup currently selected in the scene link tree view When clicked an Are you sure dialog will appear Click the Yes button to delete the selected scene link setup Click the No button to abort the scene link delete operation The No button will be grayed out and inoperable if a scene link setup is not selected Copy Button Copies the selected scene link setup The Copy button will be grayed out and inoperable if a scene link setup is not selected Paste Button Pastes a cut or copied scene link setup to the currently selected scene link setup in the scene link tree view The selected scene link setup will be overwritten The Paste button will be grayed out and inoperable if no scene link setup has been cut or copied Cut Button Cuts the selected scene link setup The Cut button will be grayed out and inoperable if a scene link setup is not selected Insert Button Inserts a cut or copied scene link at the currently selected scene l
97. Violet Size select a button size from the list Small 87x11 Small 44x11 Medium 75x11 Medium 74x22 or Large 111x33 Text Box Enter the text to be displayed by the button Text Font Button sets the font size and style Clicking here displays the Select Font dialog box For information about the Select Font dialog box see page 264 mE Edit Box Properties Dialog Box The Edit Box Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click an edit box or right click it and select Properties from the contextual menu Here you can set the edit box size Size select an edit box size from the list Large Medium or Small E Level Meter Properties Dialog Box The Level Meter Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click a level meter or right click it and select Properties from the contextual menu Here you can specify the number of meter segments and scale Size The width is set using the Width and the height is set using Height The units are pixels Segment select a number of meter segments from the list 2 6 or 60 Scale select the type of scale to be displayed beside the meter from the list This option is only available when Segment is set to 60 DME Designer Owner s Manual 347 348 Chapter 5 Components E Slider Level Meter Properties Dialog Box The Level Meter Properties dialog box will appear when you ei
98. a dotted line when muted 394 DME Designer Owner s Manual Thru 6 dB Oct 12 dB Oct AdjustGc 12 dB Oct Butrwrth 12 dB Oct Bessel 12 dB Oct Linkwitz 18 dB Oct AdjustGc 18 dB Oct Butrwrth 18 dB Oct Bessel 24 dB Oct AdjustGc 24 dB Oct Butrwrth 24 dB Oct Bessel 24 dB Oct Linkwitz 36 dB Oct AdjustGc 36 dB Oct Butrwrth 36 dB Oct Bessel 48 dB Oct AdjustGc 48 dB Oct Butrwrth 48 dB Oct Bessel 48 dB Oct Linkwitz 20 Hz to 20 kHz Thru 6 dB Oct 12 dB Oct AdjustGc 12 dB Oct Butrwrth 12 dB Oct Bessel 12 dB Oct Linkwitz 18 dB Oct AdjustGc 18 dB Oct Butrwrth 18 dB Oct Bessel 24 dB Oct AdjustGc 24 dB Oct Butrwrth 24 dB Oct Bessel 24 dB Oct Linkwitz 36 dB Oct AdjustGc 36 dB Oct Butrwrth 36 dB Oct Bessel 48 dB Oct AdjustGc 48 dB Oct Butrwrth 48 dB Oct Bessel 48 dB Oct Linkwitz 20 Hz to 20 kHz Chapter 6 Component Guide sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type THRU turns off the filter Sets the LPF cutoff frequency When Adjustable Gc is selected for Type this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency Sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type THRU turns off the filter sets the HPF cutoff frequency When Adjustable Gc is selected for Type this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency DME Designer Owner s Manual 395 Chapter 6 Component Guide E Delay When you click the Delay button for the crossover processor it opens the delay editor window
99. all be scheduled NOTE Does not apply to SP2060 units Only users for whom the Edit checkbox in the Security dialog box has been turned ON can edit scheduling settings Names and Functions Event Scheduler DME Group iW Enable Event Scheduler Add Edit Remove Copy Paste 0i Opening Scene Change 001 Scene 001 Sunday every week 08 00 00 Oo Ending Scene Change O02 Scene O02 Sunday ever week 20 59 00 0a Maintenance Scene Change 003 Scene O03 4232007 05 00 00 Clock setup E Event View Displays registered scheduling events When periodic events cyclical events are first displayed together they are displayed in order of date The order of same time events can be changed by dragging and dropping Click to select an event mE No Displays the event number Numbers are added from the top in order This function will not be executed if the checkbox is not checked E Name Displays the event names Clicking an event will select it allowing you to change its name There is no limit to the number of characters DME Designer Owners Manual 101 102 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Operation Displays the function that will be executed when the event starts E Date Displays the event start date Periodic events are displayed as shown below with an icon and text that indicate a periodic event e January 1 every year Each New Year s Day e First Monday of January every year
100. apply to SP2060 units Names and Functions DME OME Group DMEt CobraNet Output 10001 F Crossover Processor 10004 In 1 1 Level 0 0 0 0 0 0 00dE INFINIT dB Delay 1 1 Level 1 0 0 0 0 0 0006 ANFIMIT dB Delay 1 1 Mute 1 0 0 1 0 OFF OFF Delay 1 7 0n 1 0 0 2 0 ON OFF 2 Delay 1 1 Delay 1 0 0 30 0 0 ms 0 0 ms 2 Delay 2 1 Level 1 1 0 0 0 0 0006 INFINIT JB Delay 2 1 Mute 1 7 0 1 0 OFF OFF Delay 2 71 01 1 7 0 2 0 ON OFF Delay 2 1 Delay 1 1 0 30 0 00m 0 0 ms Band 1 1 HPF Frequency 2 0 0 3 0 800Hz 20 0Hz H Band 1 1 HPFT ype 20 0 5 0 48d6 Oct Linkwitz Thru 1 0 C C 0 C C 2 T F R Save String Display Numeric Close E DME From the list select the DME where you will be making settings Components in the selected DME are displayed in the component list Component List The components and user modules included in the DME their IDs and the component parameters are displayed in hierarchal list The AD and slot are also displayed NOT C Components for user modules are also listed in a hierarchal display but if user module security is enabled the components are not displayed However parameters displayed in the user module editor are displayed here ID Displays the component or parameter ID The following is displayed for the parameter ID Element No X Y Parameter No Index No Value Displays the value for the parameter Min Max Displays
101. arranged here as buttons When a command cannot be used its button will be grayed out Open File Button Save File Button Undo Button Undo History Button Redo Button ca of m S oe Sl te a Port Port Button User Control Manager Button Clock Button Parameter Link Button MIDI Button GPI Button Word Clock Button User Defined Button E Open File Button Opens project files gt Open on the File menu page 61 54 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Save File Button saves the project file currently being edited gt Save on the File menu page 61 Undo Button Undoes the most recent edit operation gt Undo on the Edit menu page 63 Undo History Button Opens the Undo History dialog box Undoes multiple operations gt Undo History on the Edit menu page 63 Redo Button Restores operations undone with the Undo button back to their original condition gt Redo on the Edit menu page 63 User Defined Button Opens the User Defined Button dialog box gt See User Defined Button on page 132 Word Clock Button Opens the Word Clock dialog box gt See Word Clock on page 177 GPI Button Opens the GPI dialog box gt See GPI on page 112 MIDI Button Opens the MIDI dialog box gt See MIDI on page 125 Parameter Link Button Opens t
102. but if user module security is enabled the components are not displayed However parameters displayed in the user module editor are displayed here e Scene Change Allows scene recall The scene to be recalled is specified in the Parameter field e GPI OUT Allows GPI output The GPI setting is made in the Parameter field e Play Wav File Allows initiation of Wave file playback The Wave file setting is made in the Parameter field Wave files set by the Wav File manager can be specified Files can not be selected unless a Wav File Player is included in the DME configuration DME Designer Owners Manual 133 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Parameter sets the parameter assigned to each function key If you click here a list will be displayed This list displays the parameters that are included in the current configuration Select the parameter you want called by the function key User Defined Button DME Group v 1 2S S oe Clear OD Display Ructon Parameter SSS d F1 Compande CompanderOn Parameter Value Edit DME64N Component CompanderHiIracos Occ at F2 Scene01 Scenell Scene Change 001 BGM_Control OMESI C 42 i H Component Ss fi Internal Analog f Internal CobraNet J ap DME64N Component amp CompanderH 2 Keyln1 1 Keyln a Dyn 1 1 Threshold z Dyn 1 1 Ratio PE be DyndAWidth Le Dyn 1 1 Attack is Dyn 1 1 Release i
103. by the DAW controller When a selection has been made LOCK is displayed in the Label field e Play Wav File Allows initiation of Wave file playback The Wave file setting is made in the Parameter field Wave files set by the Wav File manager can be specified Files can not be selected unless a Wav File Player is included in the DME configuration DME Designer Owner s Manual 137 138 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Controller selects a controller from the list wnen Parameter Value Edit is set in Function Switch Fader or Knob can be selected Label Enter a label Double click to enter the text You can enter up to 16 characters of text Set the value with the lt Enter gt key or cancel it with the lt ESC gt key NOTE C If Scene Change Scene Increment Scene Decrement Mute or GPI Lock is selected for Function the label name is fixed Parameter If Scene Change Parameter Value Edit or Play Wav File is set in Function set the parameters If you click here a list will be displayed e When Scene Change is set in Function Displays scenes that can be selected e When Parameter Value Edit is set in Function Selectable parameters are displayed e When Play Wav File is set in Function selectable Wave files are displayed To select a Wave file the file must first be specified in the Wav File Manager and then the Wav File Player must be placed in the DME configuration
104. can be remotely controlled from custom made controllers or external equipment The number of GPI ports depends on the type of device Sets GPI input output for each DME Using GPI input data you can switch DME scenes and change component change component parameters Refer to the DME owner s manual for information on making GPI connections and other hardware related issues NOTE gt Only users for whom the Operation Security Edit checkbox has been checked can make GPI settings This cannot be set when online Does not apply to SP2060 units GPI Input Output Setup Example Control Faders Levels and On via a CP4SF A CPASF control panel connected to the GPI terminal can be used to control the faders Level and On parameters of Fader and Mixer components By assigning the component s Level and On parameters via the Parameter Value Edit function in the GPI IN field it becomes possible to use the CP4SF faders and switches to control the assigned Level and On parameters If the port assigned to the Level parameter is set to Min INFINITYdB Max 10 00dB Terminal fF the parameter will be controlled in proportion to the input voltage fader position The minimum input voltage will produce a level setting of dqB and the maximum input voltage will produce a level setting of 10 00dB If the port assigned to the On parameter is set to Min OFF Max ON Terminal 4 the parameter will toggle between ON and OFF each ti
105. command you cannot password protect an already saved project file that was not already password protected To set a password for a file that is not already password protected save it as a separate file using the Save As command DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Opening Project Files Project files are opened using the File menu gt Open command in the Main Panel window Since the currently opened project file must be closed before another one can be opened a Project file has been modified Save dialog box may be displayed E Open Command Project files are opened using the File menu gt Open command in the Main Panel window 1 Click File menu gt Open in the Main Panel window A Project file has been modified Save dialog box may be displayed DME Designer i Project file has been modified D Saver 2 Click the Yes or No button The Open dialog box will be displayed Look in O YAMAHA bldg v FR 123 daf Fig asd dar My Recent Se projectO1 daf Documents AR project02 daf Oe project03 daf My Network File name PO aces Files of type Project File daf v Cancel 3 Selects the file to be opened 4 Click the Open button DME Designer Owner s Manual 39 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview E Opening a Project File That Has Security Set If security is set for a pro
106. connection Is via 10Base T or 100Base TX MAC Address Displays the MAC address E Display Tab hto Network Display Lock Misc Remote MIDI GPI LOD Contrast 55 4 4 LOD Back Light fe ON i OFF Meter Fall Time fe Slow C Fast Displays and allows editing of the DME64N 24N panel display LCD Contrast Displays and sets the display contrast The parameter range is O 100 LCD Backlight Displays and sets the display backlight status The settings are ON or OFF ON The display backlight is continuously on OFF The display will light when a panel control is operated but will go out 10 seconds after panel operation stops Meter Fall Time Displays and sets the meter fall time The settings are Slow and Fast Slow Slow meter fall time Fast Fast meter fall time DME Designer Owner s Manual 169 170 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Lock Tab Info Network Display Lock Misc Remote MIDI GPI Utility User Lock f Unlock f Unlock f Lock f Lock Panel Lock Boot Panel Lock Target f Unlock f Key Only f Lock f Key GFI User Defined Lock Fage Page 2 Page 3 Page 4 f Unlock f Unlock f Unlock f Unlock f Lock f Lock f Lock f Lock Displays and allows editing of the DME64N 24N and SP2060 panel lock parameters Only the User Lock parameter is displayed and can be edited for SP2060 units All other parameters are displayed and can be edited for DME64N 24N units Utility
107. deletion cut or copy You can change the position and design of zone objects in the Area window Double click to open a Zone window E Objects Various types of objects can be placed cut copied pasted deleted moved and manipulated in other ways E Legend Double click Legend to show the Edit Legend dialog box where the title fields can be edited DME Designer Owner s Manual 297 Chapter 4 Designer Arranging Objects Various types of objects can be placed in the window by dragging them from the Toolkit window You can also place objects by double clicking them in the Toolkit window You can also display the Area Parts List from the Tools menu or from the context menu that appears when you right click on the sheet BRE xbemal Miroi Ey External Dewi Petes lent Picture E atte ieee oe Dae eee es ee Be Oe cee oe wo ae l aor T iii al Ee Pk ied ot Ob ie A i s idla M al idh Taer ha m kai BB Wt Tei Ellippe Zone Window In the Zone window the zone configuration is designed by arranging zone devices on a design sheet A zone configuration can be created that is the same as the actual hardware arrangement To display the Zone window double click in the Area window When you click a configuration in the Navigator window it becomes active The following objects can be arranged in the Zone window e DME e CP e SP2060 e External Device e Picture e Text e Box e Ell
108. eaey a CTET to 6 dB Sets the cutoff frequency gain when the Type setting is AdjustGc Adjustable Gc Frequency 20Hzto20kHz Hz to 20 kHz 467 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Thru sets the roll off slope and filter tyoe for each 6dB Oct octave 12dB Oct AdjustGc The filter is bypassed when Thru is 12dB Oct Butrwrth selected 12dB Oct Bessel 12dB Oct Linkwitz 18dB Oct AdjustGc 18dB Oct Butrwrth 18dB Oct Bessel 24dB Oct AdjustGc 24dB Oct Butrwrth 24dB Oct Bessel 24dB Oct Linkwitz 36dB Oct AdjustGc 36dB Oct Butrwrth 36dB Oct Bessel 48dB Oct AdjustGc 48dB Oct Butrwrth 48dB Oct Bessel 48dB Oct Linkwitz 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency 6 dB to 6 dB sets the cutoff frequency gain when the Type setting is AdjustGc Adjustable Gc E Delay Click the Speaker Processor Delay button to open the window Delay can be set independently for each output channel Speaker Processor Delay editor window Speaker Processor Mie Delay Scale mz 8 88 Sample Focus kHz ms agg Meter 343 Fo Y Feet 127 aire sla E ca S Frame SAND o 500 Beat 128 Sredker Processor RE THAT C2relHs Delay ms O to 500 Sets the delay time sample the range Two edit boxes show milliseconds and the unit depends on the Fs value specified in the Delay Scale section Meter O to 171 8 Sets the output level for each band Feet O to 563 6 Frame the ra
109. edit palette The controls will be copied 340 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Components mE When You Cannot Copy Regardless of whether you drag or use copy and paste you cannot create multiple copies from the same single component If you drag controls that are already copied into the user control editor or user module editor the mouse pointer will change into the unavailable mark a circle with a diagonal slash indicating that you cannot copy You can copy more than one component of the same type into the user control editor as long as they come from different components located in the configuration or user module Controls for components arranged in the configuration can be copied only to the user control editor Controls for components arranged in a user module can be copied to both the user control editor and the user module E Order of Controls Controls newly pasted in the user control editor will be displayed above any previously pasted controls they overlap The tab order for edit boxes will be the order in which they were pasted NOTE In the component editor you can select multiple controls using lt Ctrl gt click or by dragging Once controls are copied they will be pasted in the order in which they were copied DME Designer Owner s Manual 341 342 Chapter 5 Components Moving and Aligning Controls In the user control editor or user module editor you can move or align copied
110. external input cannot be edited is displayed Interval sets the time until the next playback when Repeats is set to a value higher than 1 If you click here a list will be displayed You can set O to 99 since external input cannot be edited is displayed Auto Start Turns automatic playback ON or OFF When ON playback begins automatically when the file is loaded If you click here a list will be displayed Select ON or OFF Next No specifies the number for the Wave Tile to be played next If you click here a list will be displayed Select the number for the Wave file to be played next e Stop This stops playback after this Wave file is finished playing without specifying the next wave file since external input cannot be edited is displayed E Store Button saves the current settings in the Wav File Manager dialog box in a file as a library Clicking here displays the file save dialog box DME Designer Owners Manual 109 110 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Recall Button Reads a saved library Clicking this button displays a menu A menu displays library files saved in the folder that has been set as the Contents Folder Click the library to be read Open File Dialog Displays the file select dialog box You can select a library file that is saved in the folder set as the Contents Folder and read it Add Button When you click here External Inout and th
111. first time the Toolkit window is displayed at the left side of the Designer window DME Designer Owner s Manual 199 Chapter 4 Designer Toolkit Window Types The contents of the Toolkit window will vary depending on which window is active Area Window Area Parts List Configuration Window Component List User Module Window Component List The following objects are displayed in each window DME sa 0 7 SSS Seabee a a component S S s a a xcom SS S a a a Wsw oS S a a Powes YOY a a a a S SS AIA N S s l Area Parts List The Area Parts List displays objects that can be arranged in the Area window The same objects are displayed in the Area Parts List submenu on the Tools menu or on the context menu that appears when you right click on the sheet T Designer I Designer Area Parts List Device List External Device gt Picture Component List gt Text Zone Manager Box Ei Device Group Manager Ellipse m Configuration Manager Save User Module User Module Manager LIJ Show Signal Delay Pee Analyze eee Probe Monitor NOTE gt You can create multiple zones in an area They are added using the menu bar Tool menu gt Zone dialog box 200 DME Designer Owner s Manual Device List The Device list displays objects that can be arranged in a Zone window configuration The sam
112. flow between components IN DMEGAN 1 _ out IN DMEGAN 2 S owm e IN 3 DMEG4AN 3 OUT Be careful to avoid loop connections both when connecting via physical cables and in the Designer window DME Designer Owner s Manual 491 Chapter 6 Component Guide Analog Input and Output In the DME24N DME Satellite configuration window there are Analog Input and Analog Output blocks E Analog Input Right click the component and select Open HA Editor from the contextual menu to open the editor NOTE The DME24N DME8i C DME4io C DME8i ES and DME4io ES have analog inputs The DME24N DME8i C and DME8i ES have eight analog inputs while the DME4io C and DME4io ES have four FP DME24N HA AD SEE Snap Library WETT Store Internal Head Ame OME24N HA AD Either double click the component or select Open Inout Component Editor from the contextual menu that appears when the component is right clicked to open the component editor Analog Input ojs ON OFF Turns ON phantom power 48V Gan o 10 to 60 dBu Sets the rated input level N Caution e If you don t need phantom power be sure to turn this button off e Before you turn phantom power on make sure that no equipment other than phantom powered devices such as condenser microphones are connected to that jack Otherwise you risk damaging your external equipment Balanced dynamic microphones however wi
113. follows F 0 14 seconds Returned to 0 seconds 15 29 seconds Advanced to 30 seconds 30 44 seconds Returned to 30 seconds 45 59 seconds Advanced to 0 seconds Parameter Min and Max are not available Terminal determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter t and specify continuous control of continuously variable parameters from an external fader Knob or similar device P and 4 specify on off control of 2 state parameters via an external switching device T The internal clock time will be adjusted each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to above the median voltage Max voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min voltage applied to GPI IN The internal clock time will be adjusted each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to below the median voltage Max voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min voltage applied to GPI IN P Same as 1 Same as 4 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window e Play Wav File GPI input can be used to initiate playback of the specified Wave file Parameter specifies the Wave file to be played Files specified by the Wav File Manager can be selected Wave files can only be selected if a Wav File Player is included in the DME configuration Min and Max are not available Terminal determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter
114. gt See Event Scheduler Dialog Box on page 101 Current Zone Displays the name of the active zone A list where you can select a zone is displayed when you press the V Mute DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Current Scene Displays information about the current scene You can switch between scenes Change displayed Scene displays DME groups SP2060s Scene Number Scene Name Scene Manager Button E Change Display Scene selects the information to be displayed When All is selected scene link information is displayed in Scene Number and Scene Name When a DME group or SP2060 is selected scene information is displayed in Scene Number and Scene Name Refer to Scene Manager on page 82 for information on scenes and Scene Link Manager on page 151 for information on scene linking E Scene Number Displays the number of the current scene or scene link A list where you can select a scene or scene link is displayed when you press the W The EDIT indicator will light when a parameter has been edited after recalling or storing a scene Device Group Scene 100 199 l scene 200 299 scene 300 399 Scene 400 499 scene 500 599 w 001 Scene 001 O02 Scene OOF O03 Scene OOS scene G00 699 scene 00 799 scene 800 699 Scene 900 999 NOTE Press lt Ctrl gt key and lt gt key simultaneously recall the next scen
115. has the highest level and can use all functions All new users are created at a level lower that the Administrator user and are displayed below the Administrator If a user at level 2 and below has other users subordinate to him or her a or button will be displayed to the left of higher level user s name on the list Clicking the or buttons displays or hides the users subordinate to that higher user The currently logged on user can create multiple users at lower levels Name Displays the user names The currently logged on user is displayed in bold text Add User Button Adds a user subordinate to the user selected on the list Clicking here displays the Add User dialog box Select the user that will be superior to the new user then click this button If a user higher than the currently logged on user is selected the button will be grayed out and no user can be added Remove User Button Deletes the user selected on the list Only users at levels lower than the currently logged on user can be deleted Furthermore the currently logged on user cannot delete himself Change Button Changes settings for the user selected on the list Opens the Change User Information dialog box The contents of the dialog box are the same as the Add User dialog box 160 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Operation Security sets the functions that can be u
116. kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency DME Designer Owner s Manual 473 Chapter 6 Component Guide Effect Type Pe rameter Settin ing Range Ra Function action Chorus ants effect EQ peaking type frequency EQ peaking type gain EQ peaking type bandwidth Flange slo oes oe eis Wee ass Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback EQ peaking type frequency EQ peaking type gain EQ peaking type bandwidth Symphonic eae effect EQ peaking type frequency EQ peaking type gain EQ peaking type bandwidth Phaser ET phaser Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback Auto Par A we L lt gt R L gt R L lt R Turn L Turn Panning direction R EO peaking iype frequency EQ peaking ype gain EQ peaking type bandwidth 474 DME Designer Owners Manual Tremolo Two input two output tremolo effect HQ Pitch One input two output high quality pitch shifter Dual Pitch Two input two output pitch shifter Rotary One input two output rotary speaker simulator Ring Mod Two input two output ring modulator Mod Filter Two input two output modulation filter Distortion One input two output distortion effect Chapter 6 Component Guide SOCLU 1Q nal IJS UNCTION Freq sd 0 05 to 40 00 Hz Modulation speed EQ peak
117. list Value set a value for the parameter Change the parameter using the spin buttons or the slider on the right e When GPI Out is selected Operation Setting DME OME64N ema 4 Fora Por Pons Por Por DME From the list select the DME where you will be making settings Port1 Port2 Port3 set ON OFF or for each port If it is set to OFF the LOW HIGH port outputs HIGH LOW signal the HIGH LOW port outputs LOW HIGH signal e When Play Wav File is selected Event Operation Operation IARE F Operation Setting Scene 001 Scene 001 Wave DME64N 001 Opening Scene Select a scene from the list Wave select a Wave file from the list Wave files set by the Wav File manager can be specified Files can not be selected unless a Wav File Player is included in the DME configuration DME Designer Owner s Manual 105 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Event Schedule set the year month date to start the event Event Schedule Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 1 Za 8S FF A 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 29 30 31 gt Today 10 28 2005 Time 00 00 00 hr min sec Repeating Event Day Calendar sets the date the event will start Change the year and month using the lt and gt buttons Click on a day to set that date February 29 can be set on the calendar where it appears every four years ea
118. logged on user are displayed in the list Scenes are stored with the same security level as the user but their recall security levels can be set lower if required Fade It sets whether fade is applied ON or not OFF when a scene is recalled When ON the faders in fader components will fade to their new settings according to the specified fade mode and fade time when a scene is recalled This only applies to fader components NOTE The fade function cannot be simulated in DME Designer Fade Mode sets the fade mode You can select All or Selected If you select All all channels using Fader components in their configuration will be affected Even when multiple components are used all channels are targeted If you select Selected the only channels affected will be those for which the Fade switch in the component editor has been set to ON NOT The Fade switch for each channel is set to OFF by default The fade effect will not be applied even if Fade ON and Fade Mode Selected is selected To apply the effect you must set the Fade switch to ON for the channels where you need it DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Fade Time sets the fade time i e the time it will take fader parameters to reach their new settings when a scene is recalled The changes are smooth and continuous If only the presets in the recalled scene are set when that scene is recalled the volume
119. module window each component is independent and its parameters are set individually in a separate Component Editor window When you double click on a component located in a Configuration window the Component Editor window will open There is not just one window that is called the component editor The contents of the editor and the name on the title bar will differ according to type of component for which the window was opened Names and Functions The contents of the Component Editor window vary according to the component Library Back Button Title Bar o 500 Meter miter 8807 hase hase hase hase Jelay ms 6 00 6 00 6 00 Ol Button Samples 6 6 8 10 10 10 10 elay 6 Qe 9 O 6240 6240 6 66 6 66 Slider Edit Box DME Designer Owner s Manual 9319 320 Chapter 5 Components E Title Bar Displays the label Label settings are made in the Component Properties dialog box For information about component labels see Component page 235 in Objects Back Button This button appears in the child window of windows that have a parent child relationship and can be clicked to return the parent window Status Bar Component ID Matrix Mixer 76 In ut 16 Quteut 1HAIH cerlaH gt 1 0 0 1 4 Component Name Parameter ID Component Name Displays the component name Component ID Displays the component ID NOTE When controlling the DME64N 24N by connecting an RS
120. not previously been saved or the computer is online e Enable Auto save of project files being worked on will occur when checked The file will be overwritten but the Undo history will not be cleared e Interval in minutes Specifies the auto save interval in minutes Confirm Scene Store Place a checkmark here to have a confirmation message displayed when storing a scene Save after synchronization If a save is performed after the DME Designer is synchronized to the DME or SP2060 unit the next synchronization will be significantly faster because one the difference needs to be synchronized Check this checkbox to specify auto save after the DME Designer is synchronized to the DME or SP2060 unit Component Editor Tab sets up operation of the Component Editor Knobs sliders and edit boxes exe Preferences Application Component Editor Knob Mode slider Mode Ramp Edit Box Zoom On Edit Box Font MS UI Gothic gt Cancel Knob Mode sets how the knobs operate e Circular The knob is dragged following its shape as though you were drawing a circle e Linear As you drag the knob to the upper the value increases Dragging it down decreases the value DME Designer Owners Manual 73 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Slider Mode sets the action that occurs when you click on the scale located under the sliders e Ramp When the fader bar is clicked the knob will move a preset amount in the corre
121. of the DME device is changed after the device has been synchronized with DME Designer it will be necessary to re transfer the configuration data The Full Resync operation forces a re transfer of all configuration data and can be initiated by clicking the Go On line button while holding down the Ctrl key NOT C If LAN cable connections are changed while DME Designer is running the DME units will continue to attempt to connect to the original computer If it is necessary to switch computers either quit DME designer before changing the connections or set the Port parameter to No Assign DME Designer Owner s Manual 53 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Names and Functions of the Windows The Main Panel window is the main window of DME Designer Current Zone Current Device Group Current Configuration Title Bar DME Desiener Menu Bar Tool Buttons Small Tool Buttons Large Log On User Current Scene Mute Button ome tatus Title Bar DME Designer is displayed on the title bar Menu Bar Commands that can be executed in the application are collected into categories on the menu bar When you click one of the categories a list of commands is displayed Also the name of the currently open project file is displayed at the right When a new project file has been opened or has not yet been saved Untitled will be displayed for the file name Tool Buttons Small Frequently used commands are
122. of the currently logged in user DME Designer Owner s Manual 325 Chapter 5 Components 326 E User Control Menu User controls are displayed in the View gt User Control submenu of the Main Panel window If you Click the User Control button in the Main Panel window you will display the same menu as the View menu gt User Control submenu DME Designer case daf View ia Designer 2 oo J ef te Zone Device Group Event Logger Ctri L i Scene Configuration 7 kA User Control gt Master Volume i Mute Rx Tx On line I v Navigator Ctr B New User Control User Control Name Displays a menu of user controls included in the current configuration of the current zone Clicking one of the user controls opens the user control editor A checkmark appears next to already open windows New User Control When you select the New User Control command the New User Control dialog box will be displayed m Creating New User Controls New user controls are added in the User Control Manager dialog box 1 Click User Control Manager on the Main Panel window Tools menu The User Control Manager dialog box will be displayed User Control Manager Master Yolume Level 3 Mixing Setup Administrator Designer Open User Control at startup New Delete Cancel 2 Click the New button The New User Control dialog box will be displayed Name Security
123. of the folder shown in the Save In box Only files belonging to the type selected in the Save As Type box will be displayed QO File Name Box Enter the filename If the currently open file has already been saved its name will be already entered in this box To save using a different filename change the name here DME Designer Owner s Manual 35 36 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Save as type selects the format for the file you are saving When saving project files including Wave files set for Wav File Player select Project File with wave daf Otherwise select Project File daf Security Protects files with a password If you check here you will be able to enter settings in the ID Password and Confirm Password boxes ID Box Enter the ID that has been set for the file The currently logged on user name will be pre entered but you can change it This need not be the same as a user name Password Box Enter the password that has been set for the file You can enter up to 256 alohanumeric characters The characters you enter will be displayed as asterisks in the Password box Confirm Password Box Enter the password once again to confirm it Enter the same password as was entered into the Password box The characters you enter will be displayed as asterisks the same as in the Password box NOTE When someone attempts to open a password protected p
124. on Lock Panel lock is ON when power to the device is turned on Panel Lock Target Displays the controls control functions to be affected by panel lock Panel Lock Target status of ICP1 is fix to Key Only NOTE See page 511 for details on how to use the Panel lock feature User Defined Lock sets the lock status individually for each of the four User Defined Button pages ON The corresponding User Defined Button will not appear on the display OFF The corresponding User Defined Button will appear on the display To change the settings use the F1 and F3 keys to move the cursor to the setting for the desired page the press the ENTER button to alternately turn the setting ON and OFF NOTE The User Defined Button are accessed as described in the Parameter Edit Display section on page 512 Appendix Miscellaneous Setup Misc Page This page includes parameters not available in any other page Misc 1 Scene Store 2 Last Hem Pesume COM 1 3 Event Scheduler COH 7 Scene Store Determines whether or not scene store operations are allowed This parameter can be set to Enable or Disable Enable Scene store operations are allowed Disable Scene store operations are prohibited Edit using the List Parameters editing procedure described on page 513 NOTE see page 515 for scene store procedure This setting applies to individua
125. only Creates a component link See Creating Component Links page 370 The Context Menu Displayed in Design Mode When You Right Click an Empty Location wt Dei Meet Set Uner Hoje Ag Master Layout Close AJ fdir Winclewes een Primair Lonk Tab Order User Control Editor and User Module Editor only When using user control editors or user module editors this function displays the order in which you move through them by pressing the lt Tab gt key When you select this command numbers are displayed next to the edit boxes A checkmark appears next to Tab Order in the context menu To exit tab order settings click Tab Order the context menu or click anywhere besides a tab order number in the user control editor Clicking the displayed numbers changes the order The numbers are changed in the order that they are clicked To exit tab order settings click Tab Order the context menu or click anywhere besides a tab order number in the user control editor See Changing the Tab Order on page 357 User Control Editor Settings User Control Editor and User Module Editor only sets a background image for a window Clicking here displays the User Control Editor Settings dialog box See Window Size and Background Settings on page 335 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Components E The Context Menu Displayed in Design Mode When You Right Click a Control Ly Design Mode Set User M
126. picture object then click the Properties command on the Edit menu T Picture Properties Label icture Label Font Cancel Width Label Color Height Port Label Color Draw Picture Border File Mame C Progra m Files r MAHA OFT Toole DME Designer imager picture jpe Bronse Link Component Editor Hame Select Component Fort Left 0 Max 64 Edit Port Label and Type Right 0 4 Max 64 Label Box You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object If the box is left blank the label will disappear Draw Picture Border Displays a border around picture objects Label Font Button sets the font for the label Clicking here displays the Select Font dialog box For information about the Select Font dialog box see page 264 Label Color Button This sets the color of the label text Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box For information about the Select Color dialog box see page 265 Port Label Color Button sets the color of the I O port label Click to display the Select Color dialog box File Name Box Displays the path to the graphic file Browse Button selects a graphic file Link Component Editor When On a Picture object can be double clicked to open the component editor specified by the Select Component button If an object is placed in the Configuration Window and the Link Component Ed
127. s Manual Chapter 4 Designer E DME Object Context Menu Open Configuration Window Opens the Configuration window gt See Configuration Window on page 301 Device Group Manager Opens the Device Group Manager window gt See Device Group Manager on page 293 Configuration Manger Opens the Configuration Manager window gt See Configuration Manager on page 295 Synchronization Opens the Synchronization window gt See Synchronization DME Designer and Unit Synchronization on page 97 Cut Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard Copy Copies the selected object to the clipboard Paste Pastes the DME object that is on the clipboard Delete Deletes the object you clicked on Duplicate Duplicates the object you clicked on Display Order Changes the display order of the objects according to a command in the submenu Recall Scene Selects and recalls a scene from the submenu Flash Unit LEDs When selected the DME front panel will flash and will continue flashing until selected a second time DME Designer Owner s Manual 217 218 Chapter 4 Designer Output Level When you select this command the Output Level dialog box will be displayed This sets the DME master volume ca Output Level Seles Properties Displays the DME Device Properties dialog box E DME Properties To display the DME Device Propert
128. selected library up one position in the library list The Move UP button will be grayed out and inoperable if a library is not selected Move Down Button Moves the currently selected library down one position in the library list The Move Down button will be grayed out and inoperable if a library is not selected Duplicate Button Copies the library from the SP2060 selected in the SP2060 list to a different SP2060 When the Copy button is clicked the Duplicate window will open Select the destination SP2060 and click the OK button to copy the library Multiple destination SP2060 units can be selected Click the Cancel button to abort the library copy operation The Copy button will be grayed out and inoperable if no SP2060 is selected Import List Button Imports a library file llf extension to the SP2060 selected in the SP2060 list When the Import List button is clicked the Open window will appear Select a library file and click the Open button to import all libraries included in the library file Click the Cancel button to abort the import operation The Import List button will be grayed out and inoperable if no SP2060 is selected Export List Button Exports and saves the library of the SP2060 selected in the SP2060 list as a library file Ilf extension When the Export List button is clicked the Save As window will appear Select a file format and click the Save button to save t
129. sesten e eE NS 509 Po SOO IIPS E E E TEE munca sed 509 F4 UTILITY Button ICP1 acs ctssheuartunitan canaetianeadienden ladeusacieaudcongna tates 509 Uo ESV Oe A E cai sete aaa ten odd E E 510 F6 MUTE Button IGP 1 srs cscsaeiiinnirecceaion hie iarharedetsotabiesbialadetehanone 510 SE e E EAE Geaeteat A EEEE 506 FA I oarre E A E E ER 418 Feedback Suppressor cccccccseeceeeceeeseeeeeeseeeseseeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeseeeaaeas 419 EE AEA E E E AEA 60 Filter Band Fass Filter BPE sorreraren iE e ER 420 High Pass Filter HPF cc ccccccceccccce ee eceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaaees 421 Low Pass Filter LPF sie cdccsierducsiicuameideddserindonecrirandieanardaldase 422 ROON PINSI INOTGUIY essre a E S 423 Programmable BPP ncasancaaideecenennevciocnnecadienceuanncdniggeenatdeesanannset 424 Progammanle HPF ssmiseieser ikera EREE 426 Programmable LPF ssssnnsossnnnssnnnsssrnnsssrerssrrrrssreresrrersssreressne 427 EE E tect EE PE AAA TE T 419 Firmware Update DME unit firmware ssiisssiissssinsssirresrirrrsrirrerrirrrrrrrrrrrrrerrn 186 Pre E a a E EA 506 G E E EE EE IET A EA T AET TE T TATE 506 NON CE rriar r a A E NEAS ANRE EAA 506 C2 EE EE E E EEE A AAEE ATAA OEE 409 General Purpose Interface GPI es sssiceessieerrrrerrrrrrrrrrrerrrreeen 112 Hae OG Ao DOK sessar ar E E EER 78 GPI General Purpose Interface eesiceiieerrrirerrrrrrrrrrerrrrreen 112 GP SCAN DOK seor a E N 113 Graphic Equalizer GEQ scircacca
130. so their checkboxes cannot be removed The DME Designer settings will also always be exported so they are not displayed here 2 Check the file s to be exported and click OK The Save As dialog box will appear This is the same as the Save As dialog box used when saving project files and details can be found in the Saving Project Files section on page 35 Save irr E My Documents e E CME Designer G Mp Music A My Pictures File name SetupOs Save a Ippe fai File dme B Cancel Security ID Password Contirm Password 3 Enter a file name destination folder and if necessary security settings including ID and password then click the Save button DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Configuration Creation Procedure The configuration is a design diagram that determines the DME configuration Transferring this data causes the DME to operate Follow the procedure below to create a DME Designer configuration SP2060 configurations can be selected from scene preset data but cannot be edited NOTE Configurations can be created only when the DME unit is offline To transfer the data you must first go into online status The procedure for going online is given later in this document 1 Creating a New Project When you start DME Designer a new project is created If another project file is already open use the File menu gt New command in
131. stack Back Moves the selected object down one level in the stack rs ee Ye ee oe EEATT CUCU a A ee ee eee PRYS ome T Ok Po maf lee ee Oe Td Cut a Copy Uppermost Object Paste nie r E A T Delete Duplicate ae TrA Ga dh dh ad e e el a F aa le PATNI TL Ue A Properties 278 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Drawing and Editing Wires Wire Objects that are arranged on sheets in the Configuration or User Module windows can be connected to each other by wires Not only does this let you logically connect signal sources output side and destinations input side it also lets you draw connections and independent lines on the display Each wire has at least two wire nodes Between the nodes are line segments d Caecade Input a a en o o a a a o a o Ial G D a e Cascade In BUS BUS BUSS BU Se BUSS BU SE BUS BUSS BUSS BUSA BUS1 BuUS12 BUS13 BUS Wire Node Line Segment Cc E Selecting Wires and Canceling Selection You can select a line segment by clicking on it If you hold down the lt Alt gt key while clicking you will select the entire wire NOTE The color used when a wire object is selected can be set with Selected Color in the Wire Properties dialog box E Line Segment The line width default value is set from one to five pixels in the Designer window Preferences dialog box In the Wire Prop
132. symphonic balance 0 all reverb 100 all symphonic Modulation delay time Rev gt Sympho ooo oa symphonic effects Reverb and symphonic reverb balance 0 all symphonic reverb 100 all reverb Rev gt Pan D ae autopan effects in a Reverb and panned reverb balance 0 all panned reverb 100 all reverb L lt gt R L gt R L lt R Turn L Turn Panning direction R Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform Delay ER Delay L 0 0 to 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time a 0 0 to 1000 0 ms Right channe delay time output delay and Delay R 0 0 to 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time early reflections FB DIy 0 0 to 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time effects in parallel FB Gain 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback 0 1 to 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio THRU 21 2 Hz to 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz to 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency Dly ER O to 100 Delay and early reflections balance 0 all delay 100 all early reflections Type S Hall L Hall Random Revers Type of early reflection simulation Plate Spring 0 1 to 20 0 Reflection spacing O to 10 Early reflections decay characteristics 0 dead 10 live 478 DME Designer Owner s Manual Delay gt ER One input two output delay and early reflections effects in series Delay Reverb One input two output delay and reverb effects i
133. that appears when the group name is right clicked e Parameter Displays the parameters that belong to a parameter link group You can display or hide minimum and maximum values for a parameter by clicking the plus or minus signs You can delete a parameter from a parameter link group by selecting the parameter name and pressing the lt Delete gt key NOTE Components for user modules are also listed in a hierarchal display but if user module security is enabled the components are not displayed However parameters displayed in the user module editor are displayed here 96 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Synchronization DME Designer and Unit Synchronization The DME or SP2060 unit and DME Designer are synchronized by Synchronization The DME or SP2060 operates according to the configuration and scene information transferred during this process This Synchronization is used when transferring the configuration in DME Designer and when controlling the DME or SP2060 unit in real time NOTE gt Because Synchronization presupposes that the DME or SP2060 unit can communicate with the computer where DME Designer is installed the necessary drivers USB MIDI or DME N Network Driver must be installed and appropriate settings must be made for the driver and for DME Designer communication ports page 155 For information about driver installation and settings see DME Setup Manual For DME Designer
134. the Select Color dialog box see page 265 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Launch Application The radio buttons determines whether an application or file will be linked to an external device e Application Box The linked application will be displayed Click the Browse button to locate and select an application Specifies the path to an application to be launched when an External Device object is double clicked e File Box The linked file will be displayed Click the Browse button to locate and select a file Specifies the path to a file to be launched when an External Device object is double clicked Port specifies the number of ports displayed for an External Device object e Left sets the number of ports to be displayed on the left e Right sets the number of ports to be displayed to the right e Edit Port Label and Type Button sets the label and type for each port Click to display the Edit Port Label dialog box OK Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings DME Designer Owner s Manual 233 234 Chapter 4 Designer E External Device Properties AD824 AD8HR Serial Controlled Device Properties Dialog Box To display the Serial Controlled Device Properties dialog box select AD824 or AD8HR then click the Properties command on the Edit menu This dialog box is the sa
135. the Main Panel window to create a new file Main Panel Window Menu gt File menu gt New page 60 2 Zone Settings Zone names are set and zones are added and deleted using the Zone Manager dialog box See Adding Deleting and Renaming a Zone on page 291 3 DME ICP External Device Layout Position the required DME ICP and other external devices in the Designer window set the device groups for the DME and ICP units and set the properties See Device Group Selection on page 276 Designer Window on page 193 Objects on page 210 Design Window Shared Settings and Operations on page 268 4 Configuration Settings Configurations can be named added and deleted via the Configuration dialog box See Adding Deleting and Renaming a Configuration on page 295 5 Placing Components Place components and user modules in the Configuration window See Configuration Window on page 301 User Module on page 309 Types of Components on page 371 6 Component Logical Connections Use wires to connect the components and user modules you placed in the Configuration window See Drawing and Editing Wires on page 279 F Setting Parameters Edit the component parameters in the component editor See Component Editor Window on page 319 8 Setting User Defined Button Parameters can be assigned to function keys F1 through F6 in the DME unit See User Define
136. the Zone window These can be controlled using User Defined Button First click on an ICP object arranged in the Zone window to select it then double click the label This opens a Control Panel Properties window If you right click on the object a context menu will be displayed ICP Copy i E E E E Faste bee LAN Delete te eee Rag Duplicate ee oS Fe Display Order Properties E ICP Object Context Menu Cut Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard Copy Copies the selected object to the clipboard Paste Pastes the control panel object that is on the clipboard If the same control panel object exists on the sheet where you are pasting a new ICP object will be created Delete Deletes the object you clicked on Duplicate Duplicates the object you clicked on Display Order Changes the display order of the objects according to a command in the submenu Properties Displays the properties dialog box DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer E ICP Properties To display the DME Device Properties dialog box select a ICP object then click the Properties command on the Edit menu T DME Device Properties Label ICF Label Font Cancel Width g0 Label Color Height a0 Back Color Style Plain Ethernet Port lw Show Port C Left Side fe Right Side Label Box You can enter up to 100 text characters
137. the average ambient noise level The Threshold program source level is increased when this threshold level is exceeded The program source level is lowered when this threshold level is not reached ease Lights when a gap is detected in the program lee Threshold co to 0 00 dB sets the program source threshold level A gap is assumed if the program source level remains below the threshold for a specified amount of time 0 1 to 5 0 sec sets the time interval for gap detection Program Source Min Gain 18 0 to 0 0 dB sets the minimum level for program source level compensation Max Gain 0 0 to 18 0 dB Sets the maximum level for program source level compensation Gain Ratio 0 5 1 to 2 0 1 Sets the amount of program source level compensation This is specified as a ratio between the amount of program source level compensation and the amount the ambient noise level has exceeded the threshold Response Time 1 to 60 sec sets the response time for level compensation DME Designer Owner s Manual 379 Chapter 6 Component Guide ON OFF Turns compensation on or off Level Meter Displays the program source output level after compensation Program Source Input level Gap Threshold Time Ambient Noise Level Sense Threshold Time Program Source Gain Response Time Response Time Max Gain a Min Gain 380 DME Designer Owner s Manual Audio Detector Chapter 6 Component Guid
138. the display to normal dimensions E Fit in Window Increases or decreases the display magnification so that the sheet exactly fits the current window The entire sheet will be visible 206 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Tools Menu Designer Grea Parts List Device List Component List 1M Speaker Pre Zone Manager MaExternal De Device Group Manager ew Picture Configuration Manager i Text i Ellipse User Module Manager Show Signal Delay H Analyze fle Erobe Monitor Save User Module Monitoring Point List EN Edit Mode Sheet Prohibit Diagonal Connections Grid A Arrovy ath Hand Show Unconnected Node Export DXF Preferences E Area Parts List This command can be used only when the Area window is active A submenu displays the same objects that are in the Toolkit window displayed while the Area window Is active Clicking an object on the submenu then clicking the Area window places that object in the Area window gt Area Parts List in Toolkit Window page 200 E Device List This command can be used only when the Zone window Is active A Submenu here displays the same objects as the Toolkit window Clicking an object on the submenu then clicking the Zone window places that object in the Zone window gt Zone Device List in Toolkit Window page 201 E Component List This command can be use
139. the only difference being the number of channels The Auto Mixer Il component editor is organized into inout channel and master output sections AutoMimxer ll E meg Snr Library aan m E e y Store Recall aster Phase Phase Phase Phase MAET Aut Auto METY Auto Gain Resronse Time 223m Of Ride O Ride Of Ride 0 Ride O Ride Of Ride i in m i M rit iol Itty l i in littl tol itty ot ee Mji i EE 1 23 Master AutoMixer Il amp Channel DME Designer Owner s Manual 433 Chapter 6 Component Guide Se inction ON OFF Inverts the phase of each input channel Auto ON OFF specifies whether each channel is applied to automatic compensation or not Lights when the input level exceeds the Detect Gain setting Detect Gain 54 to 0 dB sets the threshold level above which input signals will be detected The master output level is automatically adjusted reduced to maintain a constant level according to the number of channels for which input is detected 1 Inout Channel Phase Input Detect O Ride ON OFF The corresponding channel is given output priority when this parameter is ON All other channels are muted Last Mix Determines whether only the last channel given priority via the O Ride parameter is turned ON Last or whether multiple channels can be turned ON Mix Q On ON OFF Turns the input to each channel ON Fader to 10 dB sets the input level for each input cha
140. the selected object When multiple objects are selected these operations apply to the first object selected These shortcuts can be changed as required gt See Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Shortcut Keys on page 156 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer E Starting Drawing from the End Point Node Line Segment of an Existing Wire You can draw from the end or midway point of an existing wire If you start from a node or line segment a branch line will be created Method 1 Continue Drawing from a Wire End Point When continuing an existing wire right click on the wire end point then click Continue Wire on the displayed context menu Delete Wire Properties Method 2 Start Drawing from a Node Right click on a wire node then click Start Wire on the displayed menu You can start a branch wire from the node you clicked on Delay Matriz Delete Wire Delete Properties Method 3 Start Drawing from a Line Segment Right click on a wire line segment then click Start Wire on the displayed menu A node will be created at the point you right clicked and you can start a branch wire from that node eS Salb oF wo wOUe toe OMe ONC Delay Matroc2 Delete Wire Delete aces Duplicate haa Et Display Order pf oss Properties M f E E Drawing from Anywhere on the Sheet Right click the start position for drawing the click Start Wire on the context menu that is display
141. the tall thin chart to the right of the palette Click the OK button to set the color you selected E Saving Colors You Have Created In the custom color section you can save up to 16 colors you have created When you save a custom color it can be selected by clicking on its color button in the same way as for the Basic colors Even if you open the Select color dialog box from the Properties of another object any custom color you save will be displayed and you can use that same color for the other object DME Designer Owner s Manual 265 Chapter 4 Designer 1 Click the Custom colors box where you will save the color you create The box you clicked will be selected and a frame will appear around it Select color will Hue 1 Red Sat 10 Green Val 1255 Blue 255 Add to Custom Colors 2 Set the color on the color palette 3 Click the Add to Custom Colors button The selected color will be added to Custom colors Select color Basic colors 4 ieee FF im EE FF FU BEER eT BEE ee BEE eee BE CUD Custom colors a a a ee Hue 247 Red 78 wn Hi W Sat 200 Green 55 Define Custom Colors gt gt Val 255 Blue 255 Cancel Add to Custom Colors I You can save another color in a box that already has an original color saved in it Just click on the box to select it The new color will overwrite the previous color which will be lost 266 DME Designer Owner s Manu
142. the trigger source for stereo channel components e LR BOTH sets both the left and right input signals as the trigger source for stereo channel components The strongest input signal will be the trigger source whether from the left or right channel e KEYIN The Keyln input will be the trigger source 402 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Compander The compander combines the effects of a compressor and an expander A compressor compresses signals that exceed the threshold while the expander reduces signals that fall below the threshold There are two compander groups CompanderH compander hard and CompanderS compander soft Within each group there are mono channel and stereo channel companders Mono channel companders have one input one output and one KeylIn input Stereo channel companders have two inputs two outputs and one Keyln input CompanderH CompanderS CompanderH ay CompanderH 2 CompanderS a CompanderS 2 Stereo channel Stereo channel Mono channel Mono channel Double click a component to display the component editor for it The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components The compander hard and compander soft differ in the compression ratio of their fixed expander The expander compression is expressed by the straight portion of the lower left part of the compander curve The compression ratio of the compander hard is large Th
143. to accommodate third party Mini YGDAI cards E Component Editor Window e Undo and Redo are now shortcut compatible e A scroll bar appears when the size of the component editor window is reduced e The size and position of the component editor window are memorized e An option to allow mouse over zooming of the edit box has been added page 323 e A Back button that allows switching between related parent and child windows has been added page 320 A Close All Editor Windows button has been added to the contextual menu source Selector Soeaker Processor Limiter Slot In Cascade In and Cascade Out components have been added e The Delay algorithm has been revised page 399 LEVEL and MUTE are effective when Delay is Off for each channel The name of the overall Delay On parameter has been changed to All Bypass Input Input Mute Level Input Input Mute Level On Mute Level IN m wo oao A Delay On B On Mute Level e The bus send level range for Delay Matrix and Matrix Mixer components has been changed to co through 0 0 qB Snap copy is possible page 363 snap can be retained until the application is quit or another file is opened security status is displayed in the user module editor status bar Multiple controllers can be selected by clicking while holding the lt Ctrl gt key when the editor is in the design mode page 337 Picture Text Box Ellipse
144. to the use of the software and documentation and cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software e The company names and product names in this Owner s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies e The screen displays as illustrated in this Owner s Manual are for instructional purposes and may appear somewhat different from the screens which appear on your computer e Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and functions will be announced separately e Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation DME Designer Owner s Manual The DME Audio System Network In an audio system including one or more DME units and or SP2060 units the control space is logically organized using the concepts of Area Zone and Device Group The space covered by the entire system is the Area while independent sonic spaces within that Area are called Zone A group of DME or SP2060 units assigned to the same function are considered a Device Group An Area is comprised of one or more Zones and each Zone can include up to 32 Device Groups A single Device Group can include as many as 16 devices Each Device Group has one Group Master NO Meter response may deteriorate as the number of meters displayed in a single device group in DME Designer increases In such cases meter r
145. turned the MUTE function ON MUTE was turned off IP DME IP Address turned the MUTE function OFF Input gain too high AD ChannelNo The input signal slot number channel number will be displayed Input gain too high SlotNo ChannelNo has exceeded the clipping level Input gain too high CobraNet ChannelNo Reduce the input signal level or head amplifier gain Input gain too high EtherSound ChannelNo Output level too high DA ChannelNo The output signal slot number channel number will be Output level too high SlotNo ChannelNo displayed has exceeded the clipping level Output level too high CobraNet ChannelNo Reduce the output signal level Output level too high EtherSound ChannelNo scene store failure The scene data is protected This may have been set by the administrator to prevent unwanted data changes due to improper operation To change this setting turn Protect OFF in the Scene Manager dialog box Word clock unlocked An appropriate word clock is not being received or cannot be detected Re check the word clock connections and the Word Clock dialog box settings Word clock not synchronized Slot Slot The received word clock input connector slot number channel Channel number will be displayed is not synchronized with the DME Word clock not synchronized WC INI word clock Word clock not synchronized Cascade IN Revise the Word Cloc
146. unit is also displayed NOTE Not displayed in the SP2060 configuration window E DSP Memory Usage Percentage When you are designing in the Configuration window it gives you a yardstick for judging the total usage percentage for DSP memory in the DME unit In addition the usage percentage varies depending on the sampling frequency even for the same component When the configuration is synchronized with the DME unit during online status checks of connections and component information begin automatically this is called compiling The actual total usage percentage is calculated after this compiling operation The usage percentage will vary according to the number of connections and components The Resource Meter window gives you a precompile guideline for use while designing your configuration An error may occur even when the meter shows less than 100 percent based on conditions such as the number of connections and type and number of components used We recommend using the Analyze dialog box page 308 to check whether compilation will be successful before actually performing the compilation NOTE If a configuration is compiled at fs 44 1kKHz or 48kHz and the sampling frequency is then changed to 88 2kHz or 96kHZ it is necessary to recompile at 88 2kKHz or 96kKHZz If this is not done some configurations may produce no sound In such cases a DSP Power Shortage message will be displayed on the DME unit E SPX Resource Us
147. will be adjusted while the sound from the previous scene is playing until the new level is reached If the configuration also changes the volume will rise from silence until it reaches the new value This can be set from zero to 60 seconds in 0 1 second increments Protect Turns the Protect function ON or OFF When ON scene data cannot be deleted overwritten edited or renamed NOTE Right click in the list and use the contextual menu that appears to set User Defined Button Program Change GPI In or GPI Out for the scene Partial Recall Partial Recall sets created in the Partial Recall tab page 87 accessed from the Recall Settings dialog box can be selected for each scene Cut Button Cuts the scene selected on the list The button will be grayed out and cannot be used when the unit is online or when an SP2060 preset is being used Copy Button Copies the scene selected on the list The button will be grayed out and cannot be used when the unit is Online Paste Button Pastes the contents of the cut or copied scene into the scene selected on the list Cuts the scene selected on the list The button will be grayed out and cannot be used when the unit is online or when an SP2060 preset is being used The selected scene will be overwritten Insert Button Inserts the contents of the cut or copied scene into the location of the scene selected on the list The selected scene and those below are moved down by
148. will be connected at that position If you drag it to a line segment a node will be created Created Node Logical connection A connection from a source output side signal to a destination input side signal is called a logical connection If a logical connection is present in a configuration the actual hardware signal will be connected A single wire can make a single logical connection Logical connections are possible only in the Configuration window and the User Module window Wires in the Area window or Zone window can be drawn for display only Even in the Configuration window and User Module window you can also draw wires for display only Configuration Window Logical connection and drawing for display only User Module Window Logical connection and drawing for display only E Situations Where No Logical Connection Is Created e Both sides are source output side signals e Both sides are destination input side signals e Two source output side signals are connected to a destination e There are two destination input side signals and the wire is not connected to a source output side signal DME Designer Owner s Manual 289 Chapter 4 Designer Show Unconnected Node Turn Show Unconnected Node in the Tools menu ON to display unconnected nodes as red dots The Show Unconnected Node ON OFF settings are individually saved with each Configuration Window The ON OFF status of this feature in other Con
149. 060 units connected to the specified port E Library List Library titles and library file names are displayed in this list The default titles are the file names minus the file extension Click a title to edit it Titles can be up to 23 characters in length but the SP2060 display will only show 16 characters 2 byte characters can also be used but they will not appear on the SP2060 display E Add File Button Adds a library file saved by the component editor cel extension to the SP2060 selected in the SP2060 list When the Add File button is clicked the Open window will appear Select a library file and click the Open button to add the library The Add File button will be grayed out and inoperable if no SP2060 is selected Refer to the Libraries section on page 364 for information on component editor libraries DME Designer Owner s Manual NOT C Add File Delete File Move LIP Move Down Hi Duplicate i Import List Export List tl Upload List Close d 153 154 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Delete File Button Deletes the selected library from the library list When this button is clicked an Are you sure dialog box will open Click the YES button to delete the selected library Click the NO button to abort the library delete operation The Delete button will be grayed out and inoperable if a library is not selected Move UP Button Moves the currently
150. 128 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Assign All Button Assigns all scenes in order starting from program number 1 E Bank Select LSB The bank is changed when assigning scenes numbered 129 and higher Eight banks can be used numbered from zero to seven Click the Y and select the bank where you will make settings DME Group DMEG4N Control Change Program Change Parameter Change Program Change Event Clear All Assign All Bank Select LSB J oon es oP Parameter Change Tab specifies the parameter to be controlled by parameter change commands for each address Up to 128 can be set OME Group DMEG4N Control Change Program Change Parameter Change Clear Clear All No einctin Panton Wins Pii CN ComponentCompanderH Th 1 1 On OFF DME Designer Owner s Manual 129 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Parameter Change List The current settings are displayed in the list in the center No This displays the parameter change numbers Component Assigns components If you click here a list will be displayed Assignable components are on the list Click the component name to select it DME Group DME64N Control Change Program Change Farameter Change Clear Clear All ComponentompanderH h 1 1 0r CFF ComponentiGo mpa Componenttompandigr H Component Feedback Su Component PEQ Stereo Parameter set the assigned componen
151. 232C compatible controller to the REMOTE terminal a component ID is required for distinguishing the same components in the DME64N 24N The component ID is included in the signal that controls the component parameters For details about control methods contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor at the end of the DME64N 24N Owner s Manual Parameter ID Displays the parameter ID for controls that are being operated Snap Up to four component editor parameter sets can be recorded temporarily You can switch between parameter sets using buttons Parameter sets can be copied by dragging and dropping a button onto any other button Copy can also be carried out from the contextual menu that appears when a button is right clicked gt See Snap on page 362 Library saves and recalls component editor parameter sets as files gt See Library on page 364 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Components E Knob Frequency 1 48k Drag to adjust the parameter You can change the way knobs operate using the Component Editor tab Knob Mode setting in the Preferences dialog box Preferences dialog box gt Component Editor tab page 73 NOT C To make a finer setting press the lt Shift gt key while dragging the knob when Knob Mode is Linear If you click a knob while pressing the lt Ctrl gt key the setting will return to its default value E Slider
152. 2nd will invert the phase at the specified frequency by 180 and for entire frequency bands by 0 360 For APF 2nd you can adjust the Q setting 2 Horn EQ CD Constant Directivity horn speakers exhibit a roll off in high frequency level Horn EQ is provided to compensate for this roll off For this reason the gain can only be set to higher than OdB and the frequency higher than 500HZ DME Designer Owner s Manual 469 Chapter 6 Component Guide E Limiter Click the Speaker Processor Limiter button to open the window Limiter settings are provided for each output channel Speaker Processor Limiter Editor Window Speaker Processor Limiter High Kx a Tareshold Attack Release al a Fast Fast Mid Mid Slow Slow 1BBBE CePIBHS Funct Limiter Curve A graphic representation of limiter response The horizontal axis represents input level and the vertical axis represents output level 0 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the amount of gain reduction Output Meter peep aye the output level oO Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB Sets the threshold level Attack Fast Selects the attack speed of the limiter If the Manual Mid setting is selected specify the attack time in msec Slow units If Fast Mid Slow is selected the attack time is Manual 0 to 120ms specified roughly according to the HPF cutoff frequency of Speaker Processor s Crossover Fast 1 4 wavelength of cutoff frequency Mid 1 2 wavelength of
153. 4N or DME Satellite units running firmware version V3 0 or later and SP2060 units running firmware version V1 2 or later e Use the latest DME Designer to update the DME firmware to the latest version e DME Designer cannot be used to update firmware version 3 5 or earlier to version 3 8 or later or to downgrade from version 3 8 or later to version 3 5 or earlier this does not apply to the SP2060 or ICP1 Contact your Yamaha dealer e Save an up to date DME project file daf Don t update unless an up to date daf file has already been saved on your computer Without the daf file you will not be able to restore DME operation e When DMEG64N 24N units running firmware version 3 5 or earlier and DME64N 24N or DME satellite units running firmware versions 3 8 or later are combined in the same device group DME64N 24N units running firmware version 3 5 or earlier cannot be designated as the group master e f the Program Ducker component is used both DME firmware and DME Designer versions must be V3 5 or later DME Designer Owner s Manual 19 20 Changes from V3 8 to V4 0 E New Features e The MY4 AEC card can now be selected for I O card slots AEC components which are available when the card is installed have been added e The Partial Recall function has been added Scenes can now be recalled on a per component basis By utilizing both Recall Safe and the new Partial Recall functions components to be re
154. 5 keys to select the parameter you want to edit 4 Press the ENTER key This either confirms a selection or edit or calls the appropriate parameter edit page Info Page Infa Het D i F Lock Labe CICF i J Vers pon Cis oe J NOTE The date and time and the internal battery status are not shown on the ICP1 control panel display Label Shows the user ID The user ID can be changed via the DME Designer application running on a computer connected to the unit NOTE The label can not be changed from the ICP1 controls Program Version This is the current firmware version number Appendix Network Settings Net Page Shows the Ethernet network address and other parameters Info Het Di SF Lock F Q Master ss lave O IP Adi 192 165 000 003 NMaster ID 192 168 000 a02 Q Link Mode M GBASE TY HAC Adr C pAGDEZ5S002a Master Slave Indicates whether or not the device is functioning as the device group master Device Group status of ICP1 is fix to Slave IP Adr This is the device s IP address Edit using the Numeric Parameters editing procedure described on page 512 Di F Lock F MAC Ades DeSean a CHBAGDES See J Network Address Host Address NOTE The network addresses of devices in the same device group must be the same Master ID Displays and sets the device group master host address Link Mode sho
155. 6 o Input Meter Displays the input signal level Output Meter Displays the output signal level DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ON OFF Turns ON bypass for each band Set by Range Sets the output gain for its band GEQ ON ON OFF Turns the GEQ ON Selects the gain adjust width EQ Flat e Returns the faders of all bands to OdB to 10 dB Sets the input signal level ON OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal Hm S 0 1 to 63 0 Sets the width of the frequency band that will be changed by the filter ON OFF Turns bypass ON ON OFF Turns output ON E EQ Graph Bypass Button A number for each frequency band is displayed on these buttons When you click the button it lights up and the bypass turns ON When you turn this ON bypassed sound unchanged sound is output When you turn this OFF the sound is output with effects applied L pam 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency Bypass ON Bypass OFF DME Designer Owner s Manual 415 Chapter 6 Component Guide Parametric Equalizer PEQ Boosts or cuts signals within specified frequencies In both the Mono group and Stereo group there are 2 band 3 band 4 band 6 band and 8 band components available Mono channel PEQs have one input and one output each Stereo channel PEQs have two Inputs and two outputs each The number of bands varies depending on the component but all share a common configuration in the component
156. 60 1 92 1768 000 005 Designer lt SP2060 Target Displays the label and IP address of connected SP2060 units that are offline One SP2060 unit can be selected for backup Designer lt SP2060 Button The data is acquired from the specified SP2060 unit and saved as an SP2060 backup file file extension spb 184 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Restore Tab P 2060 Backup Backup Restore Target SP2060 BE Designer SP2060 Target Displays the label and IP address of connected SP2060 units that are offline Check the SP2060 units to which the data is to be restored Multiple SP2060 units can be selected Designer gt SP2060 Button Transmits and restores the SP2060 backup file file extension spb to the specified SP2060 unit Backup files with the dbk file extension stored in the Backup dialog box cannot be selected When the restore operation Is finished the SP2060 unit will automatically restart At this time please also manually restart DME Designer DME Designer Owner s Manual 185 186 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window DME Firmware Update You can update the DME or SP2060 unit ICP1 firmware using the Firmware Update command on the Hardware menu When you move the mouse cursor over the Firmware Update command on the Hardware menu a submenu is displayed MI DME Desiener a r caer dat Network Set etwork Set
157. 8 2 kHz 55 1 ms to 1 06 s on the operating frequency 96 kHz 50 6 ms to 981 m DME Designer Owner s Manual 431 Chapter 6 Component Guide Decay 44 1 kHz 110 ms to 46s Sets the speed for closing the gate 48 kHz 101 ms to 42 3s The setting range may vary depending 88 2 kHz 55 ms to 23 s on the operating frequency 96 kHz 51 ms to 21 1 s Solo ON OFF Turns solo ON If Solo is engaged for even one channel all non Solo channels will be muted On ss ON OFF sd Turns Turns ON each channel s input each channel s Turns ON each channel s input a o to 10 a Sets the input signal level for each channel Master Output Gain Correct ON OFF Automatically adjusts the master output level to maintain a constant level according to the number of input channels with open gates 1 ON OFF Turns ON each channel s output to 10 dB Sets the output signal level 1 The amount of gain compensation varies according to the number of input channels with open gates as follows 432 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Auto Mixer Il This component detects the presence of signals at the input channels and automatically adjusts the master output level to maintain a constant level according to the number of active input channels 8 inout and 16 input types are provided Double click the component to open the component editor The component editor is the same for the 8 inout and 16 input types
158. 9 Chapter 6 Component Guide Gate Curve Displays results graphically The horizontal axis is the input signal level and the vertical axis is the output level 0 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation _ Meter Displays the output a level oO Threshold E7 dB to 0 dB Sets the threshold value Range 70 dB to 0 dB sets the amount by which the level is reduced O Attack O to 120 ms Sets the attack time Hold 44 1 kHz 0 02 ms to 2 13 s Sets the hold time 48 kHz 0 02 ms to 1 96 s 88 2 kHz 0 01 ms to 1 06 s 96 kHz 0 01 ms to 981 ms Decay 44 1 kHz 6 ms to 46 s Sets the decay time 48 kHz 5 ms to 42 3 s The setting range may very depending on the 88 2 KHz 3 ms to 23 s operating frequency 96 kHz 3 ms to 21 1 s Keyln Mono SELF Selects the trigger source from a menu The KEYIN currently selected trigger source is displayed on the button Stereo ON OFF Turns the gate ON Range 25dqB Output Level dB Z 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 Input Level dB Limiter Signals above the threshold are compressed at an 1 ratio preventing output of signals that exceed the threshold level Mono channel and stereo channel components are provided Mono channel components have a single inout and output plus a key input while stereo channel components have two inputs and outputs and a key input 410 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Double click the
159. A T 3 Area Parts List lt sccssascinesiessimnnmcammeadewesnasauanmsetnaemsneuauledaanedanneedouasanewsn 200 Area WINAOW cecesuteoacieccete Hexesraveeesuanaeds EEEE EEEE EE REEERE EPE EKEKA KEKEKE EEEn 27 297 Attack Attack Time cccccccccccccccsecccceeeeeeceeseeeeeesneeseeeeaneseesuanes 505 Pudo IGT SCHON sasarina dines AS A ESET a E 381 Aulo Gan COn ol sesaria ansa erena E LEa AENEA aa 382 AOLO IIN sereen E AE 31 AUO USET sicatvaseactenctinccesactndecdsunsieccnctslecdbalsoactmates Nadas 159 Enaoe AULO ON aerei adie RE SERER 159 AUI e a cise sete ee dca iaetat auate eased ae ner wneeneneeat 431 PAU OT sericea aceseeceacceeseec ken ancora AN EEEN 433 B Background Images EE O IAEE pane ace A ET 399 PWN 2a E T TE E 157 Band Pass Mher BPF P cacas oE asee REE a EEAS 420 BESSE aaier aaie ika aei aE aR Si 505 BOX roc aNd eanan EA E EENEN 253 Butterworth Butrwrth s ssssiissssirsesirissrrrirsrrrrrrrrrrrirrrrrrrrerrrreen 505 PE aaa SE E E A E E oan se es 505 C CANCEL Button OPT ssssisniissasssiiiseii eminii i eiii aE 510 Cascade Setting dialog DOX sss issssssiirisserrrrrrrerrrrrrrrrerrrrrree 221 Change User Information dialog DOX ssssssiisesesiireserrrrirrerrerin 162 Changing Order ssss sseessrrnneeessrrrrrressrrrrerssrrrerrrrssrrrerssrrrerrrrssrere 278 EE E EAE A SE AEE oer On A AAN ATEA ern Tn ere 41 Oe SE DUT seca scscesten te sncsen se cca E a A ASAS 495 CobraNet QU PU s veccnsoesieeacnanncen
160. Also deletes the history of operations Undo History i Move Objects Append Wire Append Wire Append Object Append Wire Append Wire Move Objects Move Objects Append Wire Append Wire Append Object Delete All List Displays all operations performed so far in order starting with the oldest You can select an operation by clicking on it OK Button Undoes all operations below the one selected on the list The operation selected on the list does not get undone Close Button Closes the dialog box Delete All Button Deletes the entire history of operations displayed on the list When an operation is deleted from the list it cannot be undone Operations undone from the Undo History can be re executed one by one using Redo DME Designer Owner s Manual 63 64 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window View Menu 4 DME Designer i r i E Designer Event Logger Otrl L EA User Control I Navigator Ctri B E Designer Displays or hides the Designer window E Event Logger Displays the network event log Not displayed if selected while the network event log is showing See Event Logger on page 75 E User Control This opens User Control The user controls that can be opened by the currently logged on user are displayed on a submenu If you click New User Control on the submenu the New User Control dialog box opens gt See User Control User Module Edito
161. C DME4io C Owner s Manual for mote information on CobraNet Advanced Settings Window MY16 CI Advan 6 Channel rer Bundle InFut 5 Qutrut Conductor Priority Auto Initialization of 41 Parameters Execute VOOR Card MY I6 Cll Cc ic Input 1 2 4 8 Specifies the number of channels per input bundle 1 Output 1 2 4 8 Specifies the number of channels per output bundle 1 Auto Sets the conductor priority 255 is the O 255 highest priority Auto means 32 on DME8i C DME8o0 C DME4io C Initialization of All Execute Resets all settings to their default values Parameters A confirmation dialog box will appear Only available when online 2 1 Fewer channels may be available depending on the settings Refer to the MY16 Cll Owner s Manual or DME8i C DME80 C DME4io C Owner s Manual for details 2 All internal parameters will be set to factory presets as well as parameters that can be set via editor 496 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide EtherSound Input and Output The DME8i ES DME8o0 ES DME4io ES configuration window includes EtherSound Input and EtherSound Output blocks E EtherSound Either double click the block or select Open Input Component Editor or Open Output Component Editor from the context menu that appears when the block is right clicked to open the component editor The displayed parameters are the same as for Slot In and Slot Out compo
162. Clear All Move Down Utility Cancel Device Group Select Field selects the target device group Device Label selects the DME unit to which head amp control is to be applied Insert Button Inserts an unassigned row at the currently selected DME in the list The originally selected DME will be moved to the next row Clear Button Deletes the currently selected DME from the list Clear All Button Clears all settings from the list Move Up Moves the selected DME up one row in the list Move Down Moves the selected DME one row down in the list Utility Button Opens the Remote tab in the Utility dialog box Select the DME unit to be used for serial communication with the digital mixer and specify the port to be used for head amp control via the Internal HA Control parameter OK Button Applies the settings and closes the dialog box Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without applying the setting changes DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Parameter List When you click Parameter List in the Tools menu the Parameter List dialog box is displayed A list of parameters in the current configuration of the current zone are displayed Here you can check things like the parameter IDs You can also print the list of parameters When the dialog box is opened or when a DME is selected from the DME list the parameter values are displayed NOTE Does not
163. Context Menu Start Wire Begins drawing a line segment from the location where you clicked Delete Wire Deletes the entire wire Cut Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard Copy Copies the selected object to the clipboard Paste Pastes the object that is on the clipboard Delete Deletes the line segment where you right clicked Duplicate Duplicates the wire object DME Designer Owner s Manual 257 298 Chapter 4 Designer Wire Color Specifies the wire color Properties Displays the Wire Properties dialog box E Wire Object Context Menu Node a ee eee N Start Wire NE ees the ene Delete Wire f wee See See 2 Delate LESSER AALE E eater tea Properties Node Context Menu Start Wire Begins drawing a wire segment from the location where you right clicked Delete Wire Deletes the entire wire Delete Deletes the node The nodes before and after will become directly connected Properties Displays the Wire Properties dialog box E Wire Object Context Menu Termination we ls Continue Wire mei Start Wire Delete Wire Properties Termination Context Menu Continue Wire Begins drawing wire from a termination node Start Wire Begins drawing a wire from the location where you right clicked Delete Wire Deletes the entire wire Properties Displays the Wire Properties dialog box DME Designer Ow
164. Corner Creates a rectangular box with rounded corners Line Sets the line that frames the box e Type Displays a list where you can select the type of line to frame the box The following types are available Solid Dash Dot DashDot and DashDotDot e Size Box sets the width of the line that frames the box This setting can range from 1 to 100 pixels e Select Color Button sets the color of the line that frames the box Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box For information about the Select Color dialog box see page 265 Fill Color Uncheck this item to make the background of objects transparent When this item is checked the Color button opens the Select color dialog box that can be used to select a background color OK Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings 254 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Ellipse Elliose in the Toolkit window places a elliptical shape on the sheet When you click an Ellipse object that is located in the sheet handles small Squares appear at the corners and sides of the object You can adjust the size by dragging the handles You can open the Ellipse Properties dialog box by double clicking the ellipse If you right click on the object a context menu will be displayed 7 E j TS cut f in hanna 7 EA EEJ copy Vin wesigoner
165. DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Editing User Modules User modules can be edited in the User Module window Components layout and logical connections are set up in the design worksheet The design worksheet can be opened by selecting Open User Module Design Window from the contextual menu of user modules in the configuration window If Open User Module Design Window is selected as the Double Click Action in the User Module Properties window the design worksheet can also be opened by double clicking a user module User Module Properties page 245 i Designer Menu Bar Too Bar O T Woe cco E i i UserModule1 Zone1 DME Group1 Configuration1 DMEBi C Title Bar H Crossover H Crossover Processor HM Crossover Processorll HM Delay Dynamics i G llCompander io B B Compressor oe MDucker i iiMono i eE Stereo i BE xpander e 2 Band E Title Bar The user module name Zone name Device Group name Configuration name Device name is displayed on the title bar User module names are set in the User Module Properties dialog box E Objects You can place cut copy paste delete and move component and shape objects When you double click an object placed in the window the component editor will open mE Placing Components Components are placed the same as in the Configuration window You can place objects by dragging them from the Toolkit window to the
166. DME dio ES ICF eaker Processor E lmSp i LWESP2O060 CAS OUT ETHERNET n US REMOTE GPIIN SPl OUT ETHERNET In the Toolkit window ICP1 icons are located in the ICP1 folder This icons can be dragged to the zone window DME Designer Owner s Manual FMD ME BEDME24N BDMEBAN E DMESC EDME 80 C EDHE dioC E DMHESES EDMHES0 ES EDME dio ES BA ICP HS peaker Processor ie ES P2060 H E sternal Device Picture Chapter 4 Designer Configuration Window The Configuration window is used for arranging components on the sheet and making logical connections It is displayed when you double click on a DME or SP2060 NOTE SP2060 configurations cannot be edited i Designer Tool Bar H BAmbient Noise Compensator Gi B udio Detector H BAuto Gain Control H D Crossover H B Crossover Processor H Crossover Processorll EE Fader Feedback Suppressor I Filter HE Meter Hl Miscellaneous Mixer H DPan H Room Combiner H B Router H B Source Selector a Speaker Processor cy ua a he Sheet Jiao pyi fa as 2 User Module E Title Bar Displays Device name Zone name Device Group name Configuration name The configuration window using Configuration for a DMEGA4N placed in Device Group1 of Zone will be DME64N Zone1 DME Group 1 Configuration1 The device name is set in the properties for the device placed in the Zone window
167. DSHR Remote Option Sens Pot Mode O Mode 1 O Mode 1 Sar Sena Corera Mode HA Remote Serial Port lt gt Int Slot Pot Sena Comerarscason Mode HA Remote Serna Pest lt gt int Shot Peet 5 Muiicast Mode 2 Mulicatt ees i Mode 2 aa Past co Eiai a emal Slot Post lt gt EtherSound Urcan GRE Internal Slot Post EtherSound Unicant MY16ES54 11 a intemal Slot Por herS oun zy oes O Steve O Mode 3 Stave Mode 3 x T emote S i Pot c gt aSo HA Remote Senal Port lt gt EtharSour EtherSound Tuned Unavatsde HA Remote Serial Por EtherSound Turret Unavatadie emote Ser x EtherSound ESS Sena Port Corfigueatixes Serial Port Configuration SoudRote 383400 v Party BadRae wm v Panty Sits per Chee Ponty Bits per Cher Party Stop Bits Hardihake Stop Bits Harstihake EtherSound a a a ie ia ureter a erm en ere gd AARREREEEE O 3 T m E H mi E E MY16 ES64 TE mode 2 n MY16 ES64 lf YAMAHA H mode 2 R Network 7 T i Ethernet Switch ww OOOO mwg 3 DME24N can A a DME4io ES e When installing an MY16 ES64 or similar EtherSound interface card in an LS9 32 be sure to install it in SLOT 1 Also select SLOT 1 using the COMM PORT para
168. Designer Owner s Manual Area Parts List Device List Component List Zone Manager Device Group Manager Configuration Manager Save User Module User Module Manager Show Signal Delay Hell Analyze fies Probe Monitor Monitoring Point List Edit Mode Sheet Prohibit Diagonal Connections Grid lv Arrow Hand Export DXF Preferences Ambient Noise Compensator gt Audio Detector Auto Gain Control Crossover Crossover Processor Crossover ProcessorII Delay Dynamics EQ Fader Feedback Suppressor Filter Meter Miscellaneous Mixer Pan Room Combiner Router Source Selector Speaker Processor SPX reer eS SY FE ee eS EE FS SES ES ES OT User Module Picture Text Box Ellipse 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output Group Component 3 pe D O O fe 3 O gt D mp Q Q D Crossover Processor Il 4 Way 5 Way 6 Way Delay Long 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output short 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output Dynamics Compander CompanderH Mono _ Stereo CompandersS Mono _ _ Stereo Compressor Mono De Esser Mono Ducking Mono Expander Mono Gate Mono _ Limiter Mono Stereo Mono Program Ducker Stereo D
169. Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Check All Button Checks all checkboxes Clear All Button Clears all checkboxes OK Button Updates the settings and closes the dialog box Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings Cascade Setting Dialog Box Setting Chart 18dB 18dB O dB Always Unidirectional Bidirectional Unidirectional Bidirectional Signal Bidirectional PREU 00 o Always Unidirectional Always Unidirectional When a cascade connected PM5D is set up to send the slot output signals via its CASCADE OUT terminal DME64N 2 Mixer DME64N 1 CASCADE OUT CASCADE OUT CASCADE IN CASCADE IN CASCADE OUT DME64N 3 Mixer CASCADE OUT CASCADE IN CASCADE IN E Edit Port Label and Type Dialog Box The Edit Port Label and Type dialog box will appear when the Edit Port Label and Type button is clicked Specifies the port labels and types to be displayed to the left and right of DME and SP2060 objects To set labels enter the Port Name for Left and Right Each name can be up to 100 characters in length To set the port type use Port Type to select the Left and Right types I Edit Port Label and Type Port Name Port Name Q Gancel D a a a E C mmo wor 7 mome p DME Designer Owner s Manual 223 224 Chapter 4 Designer ICP You can arrange DME Device objects in
170. Designer Owner s Manual Rev Chorus One input two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel Rev gt Chorus One input two output reverb and chorus effects in series Rev Flange One input two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel Rev gt Flange One input two output reverb and flanger effects in series Chapter 6 Component Guide Parameter Setting Range Function Low pass filter cutoff frequency Rev Cho O to 100 Reverb and chorus balance 0 all reverb 100 all chorus 0 05 to 40 00 Hz Modulation speed AM Depth O to 100 Amplitude modulation depth High frequency reverb time ratio Reverb and chorused reverb balance 0 all chorused reverb 100 all reverb Rev Flig O to 100 Reverb and flange balance 0 all reverb 100 all flange 0 05 to 40 00 Hz Modulation speed O to 100 Modulation depth Mod Dly 0 0 to 500 0 ms Modulation delay time Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback Reverb and flanged reverb balance 0 all flanged reverb 100 all reverb FB Gain 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback Modulation waveform DME Designer Owner s Manual 411 Chapter 6 Component Guide ttect lype ter oetting Range Function AlAlne Rev Sympho PRLR symphonic effects pera Low pass filter cutoff frequency Rev Sym O to 100 Reverb and
171. E Communication Port Opens the Communication Port dialog box gt See Communication Port Setup on page 155 E Shortcut Keys Opens the Shortcut Keys dialog box gt See Shortcut Keys on page 156 E Security Opens the Security dialog box gt See Security Creating Users and Making User Settings on page 157 Hardware Menu Network Setup Utility Word Clack Ctrl g i Monitor Cut Ctrl 9 Clock Language Backup SP2060 Backup Firmware Update b Device Information E Network Setup Opens the Network Setup dialog box gt See Network Setup on page 165 m Utility Opens the Utility dialog box gt See Utility on page 167 E Word Clock Opens the Word Clock dialog box gt See Word Clock on page 177 DME Designer Owner s Manual 67 68 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Monitor Out Opens the Monitor Out dialog box gt See Monitor Out on page 179 Clock Opens the Clock dialog box gt See Clock on page 180 Language Opens the Language dialog box gt See Language Settings on page 182 Backup Opens the Backup dialog box gt See Backup on page 183 SP2060 Backup Opens the SP2060 Backup dialog box gt See SP2060 Backup on page 184 Firmware Update Updates the DME SP2060 or ICP1 firmware gt See DME
172. EES Eee BREE EEO RRR eee men mo Or RREN o SEE EEE Bee eee mets SERS OSE RREN 3 EERE EEE ORES Eee sna n SSE ORR eee GE BER BE ee eee SERRE EEOS SEES BERR REE Ee eee oT tt Jo el ii Soe See SPS a 7th SEER EESS SE SS Se Oe Sooo cone TE m E BERR REE BEER EE a BREE Bs ee BERR EES E outer 1 Input 12 Output 10050 2742 Router 16 Ineut 16 Output Routers let you route signals from various Input locations by connecting them to various Output locations One output can be connected to one input only A single input can be output to multiple channels but multiple inputs cannot be output over a single channel In other words you can distribute the inputs but you cannot mix them You cannot setup routing for more signals than the number of output channels DME Designer Owner s Manual 461 Chapter 6 Component Guide 462 E Routing Settings To change an assignment click at the position where the desired input and output channels intersect When the mouse pointer is moved over a cell the inout and output channels are highlighted and a red line is displayed connecting them Click to set routing for that position If another output channel has been assigned to the clicked input channel the original assignment will not be cleared If another input channel has been assigned to the clicked output channel the original assignment will be cleared PEX
173. ESSe029 2 Rotate the dial to edit the value as required Lock F Di SF IP Address a 8 a EEE 3 Repeat step 1 to select the next value to be edited use the dial to edit as required and repeat until all values have been edited as required 4 When all values have been edited press the ENTER key A confirmation window will appear press ENTER one more time to confirm the edits and close the window E Are OW Sure 7 Ves ENTER kev Hoe CANCEL Kev You can return to the Parameter Edit display without changing any values by pressing the CANCEL key rather than the ENTER key Appendix List Parameters List parameters allow you to make one selection from a list of possibilities Rotate the dial to scroll up or down the list In some cases the centermost item on the display will be always highlighted as the list is scrolled and in others the same item will remain highlight as the list is scrolled up or down List Parameter with Scrolling Highlight Link Mode 19BASE T 1G GBASE T 1 Use the dial to scroll up or down the list As you scroll the highlighted selection will remain highlighted and will scroll up or down with the list 2 Press the ENTER key to highlight the centermost item on the display NOTE In some cases a confirmation dialog will appear when the ENTER key is pressed If this occurs press the ENTER key a second time to continue 3 Press the ENTER
174. Edit display will appear Mute Ea pui O ON 2 Select Mute ON or OFF The mute function is turned on or off as described in ON OFF Parameters NOT All outputs in the device group including the PHONES jack are muted Scene Recall This procedure recalls a new scene refer to page 512 1 Press the SCENE button The Scene Recall display will appear Scene Recall 001 BEM_Controller 00 Convent ion Center 2 Select a new scene Scenes are selected as described in the List Parameters section on page 513 Scene Aecagi 001 EGM_Controller 00 Convent ion Center E 3 Press the ENTER button A confirmation message will appear gJ Confirm Are OW SUFE 7 Ves ENTER kev CAHCEL Kery 4 Press the ENTER button again The new scene will be selected Router1 Router Router3 ilikaConvent ton_l Router4 Fader1 L Fader L NOTE o If head amplifier parameters are included in the recalled scene data the head amplifier settings will be changed accordingly Appendix Scene Store Stores the current scene data for later recall 1 Press the SCENE button for longer than 2 seconds A confirmation window will appear on the display Are YOU Sure 7 Yes ENTER Kew Moe CANCEL Kew 2 Press the ENTER key This stores the scene data in the current scene memory NOTE Press the CANCEL key if you want to abort the scene store operation
175. Editor from the context menu to display the editor for it Example MY16 AE component editor MY16 AE SE Hish Sampling Mode input Format DOUBLE CHANNEL Double Fs Quteut Format DOUBLE CHANNEL Input Format DOUBLE SPEED Selects the format for 88 2 96 kHz For MY8 AE96 the DOUBLE CHANNEL setting range is Double Speed Double Channel For SINGLE other cards it is Double Channel Single Double Fs ON OFF When ON the speed of the word clock from the MY Card is doubled Only for MY16 AE MY8 AE96 MY 16 TD When On is set for the MY8 AE96 the Inout Format is Double Channel When Off is set the input format is Double Speed Only displayed when this card is functioning as the word clock master Output Format DOUBLE SPEED Selects the format for 88 2 96 kHz For MY8 AE96 the DOUBLE CHANNEL setting range is Double Speed Double Channel For SINGLE other cards it is Double Channel Single DME Designer Owner s Manual 499 Chapter 6 Component Guide mE MY16 C Right click the block and select Open MY Card Editor from the context menu to display the editor for it MY16 C component editor MY16 C Eak Hardware Hish Samelina Mode InFut Format DOUBLE CHANNEL Double Fs Quteut Format DOUBLE CHANNEL Bundle Number Input 1 A Qutrut 1 neut 2 4 Qutrut 2 Serial Channel Foe OFF Tx EOFF Bit Lenath Abit Latency 5 33m Setting Priority Setting Priority Hardware The MY16 C switch settings take priority wh
176. Engages paired operation for odd and even channel pairs excluding Pan PFL and AUX Send operation When turned ON the odd channel parameters are copied to the even channel When ON Pan functions in LR Nominal mode nominal level when pan is full left or right and when OFF Pan functions in Center Nominal mode nominal level when pan is center On ON OFF Turns the input of each channel ON Fader to 10 0 dB sets the input level for each input channel DME Designer Owner s Manual 451 Chapter 6 Component Guide io I F AVE c e r FL 7 otic l PFL ON OFF Engages PFL send The last selected channel is given priority Master Output AUX1 Master co to 10 0 dB Adjusts the AUX1 master level AUX2 Master co to 10 0 dB Adjusts the AUX2 master level m gt I L63 Center R63 Sets the pan position of the stereo output ON OFF Turns master output ON co to 10 0 dB sets the master output level E EQ Editor Window Click the Simple Mixer EQ Details EQ button to open the EQ editor window via which EQ can be adjusted for each channel Simple Mixer PEQ Ch Simple Mixer 16 Channel 10003 carilah Type PEQ L SHELF 6dB oct Selects the filter type for the Low and High bands L SHELF 12dB oct H SHELF 6dB oct H SHELF 12dB oct eR 16 0 to 0 1 Sets the Q for each band Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the center frequency for each band O Gan o 18 0 to 18 0 dB Sets the gain for
177. Enter the filename specify the folder where the file will be saved then click the Save button When you return to the Export DXF dialog box the specified filename will be displayed in the DXF File Name box Me When you click on the Save button in the DXF File Name dialog box the DXF file is not saved Only when you click on the OK button in the Export DXF dialog box does the DXF file become saved E Scale sets the reduction ratio When the size of the sheet is large you can reduce it before exporting it E Text Style Specifies the text font for output in DXF format The default is the TXT drawing font used in CAD 272 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer E Block sets the block form used in the sheet Displays a list where you can select the form Block Makes the blocks rectangular and groups the text in the port icons and port names Explode Makes the blocks into sets of four lines and does not group the text in the port icons and port names E Paper Size sets the size of the paper Preset Size Displays a list where you can select preset paper sizes When you select a paper size numerical values are set for Horizontal and Vertical Custom Sizes set a custom size by specifying the vertical and horizontal sizes of the sheet e Horizontal Box Sets the horizontal width of the sheet e Vertical Box Sets the vertical height of the sheet Unit sele
178. Enter your ID and password and click OK Enter ID amp Password The imported files are stored in the folders listed below Library Files The Library folder in the folder specified by the Contents Folder item in the Main Panel Window Preferences window The Wav folder in the folder specified by Contents Folder Picture Files The image folder in the folder specified by Contents Folder DME Designer Owner s Manual Project File Specified in step 5 47 48 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Exporting DME Designer All Files 1 Click Export DME Designer All File in the Main Panel Window File menu The Select File for Export dialog box will appear Check the checkboxes of the files you want to export To select all the available files click the Select All button or click Clear All to uncheck all the Tiles Select File for Export H M4 CrossoverProcessor H CrossoverProcessore Fader o M Fader 2 Channel i W LibraryFader Fader 2 Channel library12 cel H Ml GEG H W HPF H W Speaker Processor H O SPx Image l Project File L C Project02 daf M TemplateLserModule HM User Module Group H W User Module Group Wav e Only wave and image files used by the currently open project file will be displayed All user module templates will be displayed under TemplateUserModule e The project file and image files will always be exported
179. Event Log List The event logs that can be retrieved from the DME unit as well as their content and countermeasures are listed below Displayed Messages Contents Countermeasures Communication between PC and DME ended Communication between the computer and DME device group master has stopped Check cable connections and router hub operation Communication between PC and DME started Communication between the computer and DME device group master has started Communication between mixer PM5D and DME Communication between the mixing console PM5D and DME ended device group master has stopped Check cable connections Communication between mixer PM5D and DME Communication between the mixing console PM5D and DME started device group master has started Communication between master DME and slave Communication between the device group master DME and IP DME ended slave IP Address has stopped Check cable connections and router hub operation Communication between master DME and slave Communication between the device group master DME and IP DME started slave IP Address has started scene recalled Scene number has been recalled scene stored Scene number has been stored DME Designer to DME unit synchronized A configuration has been transferred from DME Designer to the DME unit and synchronized MUTE was turned on IP DME IP Address
180. External Device Properties dialog box DME Designer Owner s Manual 231 232 Chapter 4 Designer E External Device Properties To display the External Device Properties dialog box select any external device object besides AD824 or AD8HR then click the Properties command on the Edit menu i External Device Properties Label Wireless Receiver Label Font Cancel Width 160 3 Label Color Height 60 2 Port Label Color Style Plain x Back Color Launch Application Application nnn Browse C File menen Port Left 0 4 Max 64 Right 0 Max 64 Edit Port Label and Type Label Box You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object Width Box specifies the object width in pixels Height Box specifies the object height in pixels Style sets the object style Select Plain Raised or Sunken from the list Label Font Button sets the font for the label Clicking here displays the Select Font dialog box For information about the Select Font dialog box see page 264 Label Color Button This sets the color of the label text Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box Port Label Color Button sets the color of the I O port label Click to display the Select Color dialog box Back Color Button sets the object color Click to display the Select Color dialog box NOTE For information about
181. Format DOUBLE CHAKHEL Quteut Format DOUBLE CHANNEL Bundle Murber Input 1 Qutrut 1 In ut 2 Qutrut 2 InFut 3 Qutrut 3 InFut 4 Qutrut 4 InFut 3 InFut 6 InFut 7 InFut 3 Serial Channel Rx OFF Tx Bit Lenath bit Latency 1 33m Advanced setting from this Editor Disable Enable When Disable is selected settings made via the CobraNet network take priority When Enable is selected settings made from the DME Designer take priority High Input Format DOUBLE Selects the format for 88 2 96 kHz sampling rates Sampling CHANNEL Linked to Output Format Mode SINGLE Output Format DOUBLE Selects the format for 88 2 96 kHz sampling rates CHANNEL Linked to Input Format SINGLE Bundle 0 65279 Specifies the input bundle number Number Output 0 65279 Specifies the output bundle number Serial OFF 1 15 specifies the serial receive channel Channel OFF 1 15 Specifies the serial transmit channel Properties Bit Length Bit Off specifies the output bit rate 16bit Output is muted when Bit Off is selected 20bit 24bit Latency Specifies the latency Advanced f Opens the Advanced Settings window Select Disable if you intend to make settings via the CobraNet network using the CobraNet Manager for example In such cases selecting Enable may result in incorrect settings DME Designer Owner s Manual 495 Chapter 6 Component Guide NOTE Refer to DME8i C DME8o0
182. I IN DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window e GPI Lock GPI Lock can be turned on or off via GPI input When GPI Lock is ON all GPI inputs other than the one being used for GPI Lock control are locked and input will be ignored Parameter Min and Max are not available Terminal determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter T GPI lock will be ON when the voltage applied to GPI IN is above the median voltage and OFF when the voltage is below the median Max voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min voltage applied to GPI IN 4 GPI Lock will be OFF when the voltage applied to GPI IN is above the median voltage and ON when the voltage is below the median Max voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min voltage applied to GPI IN P GPI Lock will be alternately turned ON and OFF each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from below to above the median voltage Max voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min voltage applied to GPI IN ON OFF ON Ls GPI Lock will be alternately turned ON and OFF each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from above to below the median voltage ON OFF ON Max voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min voltage applied to GPI IN DME Designer Owner s Manual 119 120 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window e Time Adjustment GPI input can be used to adjust the DME internal clock as
183. LR separates a single input into left and right outputs Components are available with 1 2 4 8 12 and 16 channels Double click a component to display the component editor for it The number of channels varies depending on the component but all share a common configuration in the component editor Pan component editor aae Library Store Recall Nominal Cente Position i Pan LR 4 Channel t ter atting Range Function L63 R63 Sets the LR orientation H Pan Nominal Position Selects the nominal position from a menu LR 454 DME Designer Owners Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Surround There are three types of Surround pan components in the Surround subgroup 3 1 5 1 and 6 1 The surround pan component editor has a two dimensional surround pan graph where you can set the location of the sound image Surround 6 1 component editor Surround Snare we tT i 2D Surround Pan Graph Sets the sound image orientation You can move the sound image by clicking and dragging Speaker Clicking here moves the sound image to the Button button location R am fere Low Frequency Indicates that there is a sub woofer Clicking Effect Sub Woofer makes the LFE level O dB The sound image does not move by clicking Left Right Position L63 C R63 Displays and edits the LR sound image Front Back Position L63 C R63 Displays and edits the front back sound image You can set the sound locatio
184. Log On Administrator od egn User List Operation Security Level 1 User Administrator W Edit H SuehemE ngi rae M View DME Design window Level 2 User j i Control Component Editor Low MainO perator J gt g tord W View Component Editor Level 3 User p pera he Operatard if Change Configuration gt Operator ee Level 4 User i Operators M Synchronization View Log Window Scene StoresHecall Level 2 User Control Level Security Level Settings Add User Remove User Change You can allow or disallow editing and the ability to open windows or set controls Ten levels 1 through 10 are set for scene storage recall and user controls Level 1 is the highest level and 10 is the lowest By default level 1 is set for the Administrator user Level 1 can be set for the Administrator only Users created by the Administrator directly below itself can be set at levels 2 through 10 New users created subordinate to users at level 2 can be set at levels 3 through 10 New users can be created no higher than one level below the user that created them scene sets the level for storing and recalling scenes The logged on user can store or recall scenes at levels equal to or lower than his or her own level For example a user at level 3 can recall scenes set for scene recall at levels 3 through 10 Levels are also set for user control The logged on user can display or edit user controls at levels equal to or lower than his o
185. ME Designer Owner s Manual 373 374 Chapter 6 Component Guide EQ GEQ Mono 7 Band 15 Band 31 Band Stereo 7 Band 15 Band 31 Band PEQ Mono 2 Band 3 Band 4 Band 6 Band 8 Band Stereo 2 Band 3 Band 4 Band 6 Band v T omae e screw scheme perma scheme Feme o o Pw sw seo sw seo sw sw i ee ee a IT _ DME Designer Owner s Manual 3 pe a D O O fe 3 O gt D mp Q Q D N Meter 1 Channel 2 Channel so 4 Channel Py 8 Channel py 12 Channel Py 16 Channel py _ 4 a Oscillator Mono Miscellaneous i5 i i Wav File Player Mixer Auto Mixer 2 Channel fw 4 Channel py 8 Channel m owe l o roma o e kosa J e sown J rou sown kosa sown J owa sown kosa sown J rou sown J owe own koswa Bosa wowa own kosa f o e a sowa J o ow DME Designer Owner s Manual 375 376 Chapter 6 Component Guide arou iy DMEO4N DME24N riations sou Bowe owe Powe sown
186. MIDI User defined Button DAW Control e Parameter values scene recall GPI output Wave file playback and head amp gain can be set via the User Defined Buttons page 132 e The Component Lock function dialog is separate from the Parameter List dialog page 150 e Shortcuts can be freely set as required page 156 e Files can be saved in the DME unit page 70 e A Close All Editor Windows button has been added to the Window menu page 69 e External head amp parameters will be recognized by the DME unit when either the DME or the external head amp AD824 AD8HR are turned on Execute a scene recall to send DME settings an external head amp e This manual is now separate from the DME Designer installer and can not be accessed from the DME Designer menus Designer Window e The following operations can be carried out via the shortcut keys Navigator Activate Navigator Activate Toolkit Activate Design Window Select Left Port and Start Wiring Select Right Port and Start Wiring Wire Auto Single to Right Wire Auto Multi to Right Wire Auto Single to Left Wire Auto Multi to Left Delete Wire e t is now possible to simultaneously edit multiple objects of the same type Example Change the thickness or color of multiple wires at once e Files related to user modules user module files library files user module editor files can be combined and exported imported as a single file e Port colors can be inde
187. Mid High Each frequency band has its own color with Low being red Mid being green and so on DME Designer Owner s Manual 465 Chapter 6 Component Guide E Graph Control Points The crossover level control points indicate Output Level and Frequency The control points will move in response to Output Level changes made via the knobs or edit boxes The Output Level and Frequency parameters can also be changed by directly dragging the control points Changes to the Frequency parameter are shown on the crossover phase response graph Library Library Hame Store Recall InFut pe A Il E a hs Outrut Over O Low Mid Hish TEL Low Hish Mid cu D Visible Havisator Hiah Qutreut Level imi Hish AET 5 B HAA Limiter Ae 10 Hiah id Output Level l Delas a fee ad limiter neut Lewel ge ae I 40 B A am 1 2 adel 410 Low Mid Quteut Level re Delas ALAA Bair Limiter MILF Ut Level Delas 3 EE Limiter HAH T Sredker Processor 4 Way igg c2rieH The control point in the center of the graph can be dragged vertically to change the Output Level parameter Duteut Level ges 6 66 Qutrut Level ge 4 68 Outeut Level g The Output Level parameter changes Control points at the intersections between the frequency bands can be dragged horizontally to change the Frequency The crossover phase response will change 466 DME Designer Owner s Manual E Crossover C
188. N V3 8x or later and the DME Satellite e A new Show Unconnected Node button which displays unconnected nodes has been added into the Designer window toolbar e The window sizes of User Control Editor User Module Editor can now be enlarged more than the display resolution of computers When a size is set that is larger than the display resolution of computers in the User Control Editor Settings dialog box which can be selected in the context menu a scroll bar is displayed e New library data has been added into the Preset Library of the Soeaker Processor e The following devices can now be set for the external devices M7CL 48ES DSR series S5 NS AW series NS IC series KMS 710 CD S3800RK CD C600RK Gooseneck Microphone and Boundary Microphone E Changes e The layout of the Remote functions and MIDI functions have been changed through revisions of the operation of the Utility dialog E Fixed Bugs e Fixed problems in which the Remote Control settings were not applied to the DME Designer appropriately when synchronizing e Fixed a problem in which the meter laid out in User Control might not move e Fixed a problem in which the window might not be displayed when the external display status was changed e Fixed a problem in which the parameters of both Recall Safe and Global Link might not be displayed appropriately when Scene Recall was executed E V3 8 Precautions e Use DME Designer version V3 8 0 with DME64N 2
189. N units only DAW control editing can be performed only by users for whom the Edit security checkbox has been checked Names and Functions 2 DAW Control DME sRicieetivie v DAW Type Off Function Controller Label Parameter Chi NodAssign No Assign No Assign No Assign No Assign No Assign No Assign No Assign No Assign E DME From the list select the DME64N 24N where you will be making settings m DAW Type Select the DAW type The available settings are MIDI DAW Type1 and DAW Type2 The DAW Type parameter has the same function as Protocol in the Utility dialog box MIDI tab MIDI Use this setting when any MIDI device other than a general purpose ProTools controller HUI protocol or general purpose Logic or Cubase controller Mackie control protocol is to be connected DAW Type1 Use this setting when a general purpose ProTools controller HUI protocol is to be connected DAW Type2 Use this setting when a general purpose Logic or Cubase controller Mackie control protocol is to be connected E DAW Control Table The following can be set for each channel from 1 to 64 Function Controller Label Parameter DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Function selects the function that will be changed by the DAW controller If you click here a list will be displayed CA DAW Control DME DME24N DAW Type Off e No Assign Makes no assi
190. Node Selection If you select another object or an empty location on the sheet it will cancel selection of the object you previously clicked You can also cancel node selections by holding the lt Ctrl gt key while clicking With this technique you can cancel only the node you clicked on when multiple nodes are selected lt Cirl gt Click lt Ctrl gt Click 280 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Hotspot The small white rectangles at the edge of objects are called Hotspots Wires usually connect to hotspots Router oc 2 Input2 Outpt TNA OUT AIL EEN ou at e Some hotspots do not have a connection to a logical signal within the hardware e Component and user module hotspots normally include logical connections e External device hotspots do not include logical connections E Selecting Hotspots If you click a hotspot drawing will start To select press lt Shift gt click You can select multiple hotspots as follows Select a hotspot with lt Shift gt click then select additional hotspots using lt Ctrl gt lt Shift gt click Cas ade lripat Cascat 1 Using Shortcuts Press the F2 key to select the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the selected object and begin drawing a wire Press lt Shift gt F2 to select the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the selected object and begin drawing a wire DME Designer Owner s Manual 281 Chapte
191. O to 10 P reflections decay characteristics 0 dead live ni Dly Initial delay before reverb begins Diff Reflection diffusion left right reflection spread Density Reflection density ER Num Number of early reflections FB Gain Feedback gain Hi Ratio High frequency feedback ratio High pass filter cutoff frequency PF Low pass filter cutoff pea O to 10 aie reflections decay characteristics 0 dead live FB Gain 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback 0 1 to 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio THRU 21 2 Hz to 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz to 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency L 0 Chapter 6 Component Guide ATINCA slala a i 1NCTION oetnogo mange unction Mer Parameter Stereo Delay Delay L 0 0 to 1350 0 ms Left channel delay time Two input two i i output basic stereo Delay R 0 0 to 1350 0 ms Right channel delay time ss channel delay time delay FB Gain L 99 to 99 Left channel feedback plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback FB Gain R 99 to 99 Right channel feedback plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback 0 1 to 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio THRU 21 2 Hz to 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz to 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency Mod Delay 0 0 10 2725 0 ms One input two
192. OEO o EO S e A A 431 DAAMA eaaa a E S E AR E 435 Matrix MIXET acc sneehscivsncuitniaced date wadasventebiacoiaad RENEE AASE 442 MOm dialog DOK arene renee tenes te oei aren renee ne tetera nS 179 MONTONG OMNI WIG serrit etsera a E E I 306 Mute DUTTON 2c 2ictrcinddncrissomdiierumechnsssucadioniectdudenserenedacenihiimennsainnebees 58 Mute ICC IG can cpsdcmateecethan th condonnteneemsnedeatanduentensenedsdenseutepeaecsaasen 511 Mute SC TAMING catcnidtar a aerae A aa 514 NGI aka oh consents unis met detained mecca ce blasnld wid nee bohanddesats a acdeeaelcehn 498 N DN atest sees E AE Sd cease dco TE repuee a E E 517 Navigator WINAOW ce 29 197 ISS arinki NEE 917 Network Settings Net Page ccccccccsssseesseeseeesseeseeseeeasaasesees 517 INGOT MIIS PIN ORGE a ahana slabs cecdeaduet teatien Snceinaaneadcansielas cuansncirasaee 423 Numeric Parameter Jo teteicvsicnsannciceddteahatstaiduinseeddndandiauasvaccddadenaibed 512 O IDOC srreeip aen E A ot Moet tanta aebeacadtanneens 29 AERE N E EEIE E SEE AEE 275 298 299 T ae NEE EE E EEE E 277 See ea o E AE EE E ET 277 E a E E S aveceussouearanl 210 OMNE srcacsapche asta dace i a i a 97 switching between online and offline ceeiiieererrreeee 97 ON OFF Parameter ss sssinessiisesrirursrinsrrrresrrrrerrrrerrrreerrrreerrrr 514 ONNE serae ace saeceeatemiecias os eeseceaglseeetbae so eeeee 50 97 switching between online and offline cece eeeeeeee eee e ees 97 DOT oea E E
193. OMAAN Double click a component to open the component editor The component editor is the same for all types the only difference being the number of sources Source Selector Component Source Selector Sel Snap Library WETT Store Recall Source Select DER Snap Library AETI Store Recall Source Select SEE Snap Library WETT Store Recall ource Selector 3 16 11 l2 13 14 15 16 Source Selector 3 Positic 10003 C2713H gt siti 10005 2715H 8 Positic 16664 lt 2714H The Source Selector connects the selected input to the output For example if you select 1 for a 4 Position 2 Channel component IN1 1 will be connected to OUT 1 and IN1 2 will be connected to OUT2 If you select 2 IN2 1 will be connected to OUT 1 and IN2 2 will be connected to OUT2 DME Designer Owner s Manual 463 464 Chapter 6 Component Guide Speaker Processor The Speaker Processor is a crossover processor that includes APF All Pass Filter horn EQ and limiter functions Six component types are available 1 Way 2 Way 3 Way 4 Way 5 Way and 6 Way speaker Processor components have one input and one or multiple outputs speaker Processor speaker Processor 2 Speaker Processor 3 speaker Processor 4 speaker Processors speaker Processorcs Double click a component to open the component editor Speaker processor Component 0 Speaker Processor Sele Snap Library METT Library Name Store
194. ON the On button lights up Turns OFF output for all channels in the Output Master window Nominal Resets all output signal levels in the Output Master window making them O dB Minimum Resets all output signal levels in the Output Master window making them dB E All Inputs to One Output When you click the output channel number on the matrix the Delay Matrix All Inputs to One Output editor window opens One output channel and the send levels from each input channel to the output bus are displayed The output channel is the one you have clicked on in the delay mixer component editor Delay Matrix All Inputs to One Output Outeut Chane Off Nominal Minimum Delay Matrix 8 Input 8 Output Level to 10 dB sets the send level from each input channel to the output bus ON OFF Turns ON the send from each input channel to the output bus Channel Displays the selected output channel Select another channel from a menu ON OFF Turns ON the output for the channel displayed in the window Displays the output signal level of the channel displayed in the window Turns ON send from all input channels When turned ON the On button lights up Parameter Setting Range Function Bus Send Level Delay O to 500ms sets the delay time from each input channel to the output bus Turns OFF send from all input channels Resets all of send levels making them O dB Resets all send levels making them GB Nominal
195. Panel window User modules will be saved there Refer to User Module Editor on page 330 for more information on the dedicated user module control window NOTE The Main Panel Menu Preferences dialog box is displayed using Preference in the File menu Creating User Modules When you place a blank user module in the Configuration window a new user module is created When the project is saved the user modules are also saved in the project file 1 Make the Configuration window active 2 Click the next to User Module in the Toolkit window The items in the level below the User Module folder will be displayed 3 Drag the Blank User Module to the Configuration window Mixer n Bo mE f DPan E 8 o co gt 9 Room Combiner H Router H Source Selector H Speaker Processor H D SPX User Modu J 5s EE Blank User Module ee vomo m w Elipse oat Y ork n TOR POSRDONE When you release the mouse button at the location where you will place the user module the User Module Properties dialog box is displayed Labe Unsaved User Module Label Font width fo Label Color Height m 3 Inputs Outputs Labels Color Style Plain o o Color hputs Outputs Sets Inputs 1 44 Max 64 Outputs f 4 Max 64 Double Click Action Security Settings Open User Module Design Window I Enable Security C Open User Module Editor DME Designer Owner s Manual 309
196. PiN het motif _es_7 jpq WC IN ETHERNET ona CRA ETHERNET Te My Recent s90 jpg Sm WC OUT USB M REMOTE oe Documents oe REMOTE Sh File name s2 Files of type images bmp png xbm xpm ipa bd DME Designer Owner s Manual 247 Chapter 4 Designer 248 E Picture Object When you click a picture object that is located in each design window handles small squares appear at the corners and sides of the object You can expand or reduce the picture s size by dragging a handle AES EBLI 9 1 6 a picture B ig SS pi ji ois z SNN If you double click on the object the Picture Properties dialog box opens If you right click on a picture object a context menu will be displayed Delete ner DUME DESL nwpicae e Dior Order gt Properties E Picture Module Object Context Menu Cut Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard Copy Copies the selected object to the clipboard Paste Pastes the object that is on the clipboard Delete Deletes the object you clicked on Duplicate Duplicates the object you clicked on Display Order Changes the display order of the objects according to a command in the submenu Properties Displays the Picture Properties dialog box DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer E Picture Object Properties To display the Picture Properties dialog box select a
197. Room THAIS c2rTifH Combine ON OFF Specifies whether the rooms are to be combined or not Room No o Specifies the room number to be combined Room No refers to the numbers that are the component s input port names 1 Depends on the number of rooms provided by the placed component 460 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Router The router assigns inputs to outputs Each of the six router groups has a different number of inputs The groups are 1 input 2 input 4 input 8 input 12 input and 16 input Each group has five components with 2 4 8 12 and 16 outputs 32 input group has only 32 outputs component 8 Input 32 Input Router 16 Router 1 lt Router tg Router 20 1 Router 31 Router 17 a aime Bi a este fo gt Bh ay eee ce l 12 Input AYE EIR E CK EVID AIS ED I Wal 16 Input Router 28 Router 29 gt Router 30 l l Router 26 i Router 27 ut Double click a component to display the component editor for it The number of channels varies depending on the component but all share a common configuration in the component editor Eek Library 9 10 11 12913 14 15 1 1j2 3 4Ee 516 718 Seren PRUE DERE RREN RERE eee DORR BREE Bee eee setae HE BEEER Bee Bee 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 wi ni REO SEE Be RREN DEER EEE BEES ORE EE eee BORE BEE RREN BERR BORG RERE eee BEOR S
198. Scene Manager Dialog Box page 82 for details about settings for the components to be faded and the time period when the Fade is On 418 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Feedback Suppressor The Feedback Suppressor effectively suppresses acoustic feedback Feedback Supp Seles Snare Library Eo wee E Store Recall Mode Music SuFFression Level an l 15 cents p k SOFT HARD Burdss Feedback SurFFressor HABE terih speech selects the type of input signal to be processed select this mode when the input source is speech Music Select this mode when the input Source is MUSIC suppression Level sets the degree of feedback suppression Higher values produce greater feedback reduction Further the amount of pitch changed produced by the effect is displayed in cents Bypass i ON OFF Turns bypass on DME Designer Owner s Manual 419 Chapter 6 Component Guide Filters A filter passes specific frequencies and attenuates all others There are seven types of filters available in the filter group band pass filter BPF high pass filter HPF low pass filter LPF notch filter Notch programmable BPF programmable HPF and programmable LPF Band Pass Filter BPF The band pass filter passes the signal from a specified frequency band while attenuating frequencies outside that band There are two types of BPF components mono channel and stereo channel M
199. Solid Frame Properties Dialog Box The Solid Frame Properties dialog box will appear when you right click a solid frame and select Properties from the contextual menu Here you can enter the text to be displayed Here you can set the frame size and divider location Partition Line AA Solid Frame Properties Frame Size Width zy Height 178 eae Partition Line Direction Vertical ve Position 175 Add lo i Delete Sub Partition Line Position Add 0 Delete Sub Partition Line Frame Size The width is set using the Width and the height is set using Height The units are pixels NOT C You can change the size of a frame by dragging one of the marks at the four corners top bottom left right of the frame in the user control editor Partition Line Sub Partition Line Sets partition lines within the frame Partition Line is a long partition line displayed from end to end and Sub Partition Line is a short partition line e Direction Select the direction of a partition line from the list Vertical inserts a vertical partition line and Horizontal inserts a horizontal partition line When None is select partition lines are not displayed e Position Displays the currently set line position Displays the number of pixels from the top of the solid frame when Vertical is selected for the Direction and the number of pixels from the left of the solid frame when Horizontal is s
200. T indicator to appear page 57 An auto file save function Auto Save post synchronization has been added page 73 Different zones can be specified for use by different users page 158 scene parameters related to User Defined Button Program Change GPI In and GPI Out can be set via the Scene Manager page 82 Select All and Clear All buttons have been added to the Scene Manager Recall Safe dialog box page 86 User Control can be created for individual users as well as security levels page 91 A Remote Control Setup List has been added page 139 This list can be used to make detailed settings for a new software protocol that allow the DME to be controlled from AMX Crestron and similar devices Refer to the DME N Remote Control Protocol Specifications document for details about the communication protocol Information about the DME N Remote Control Protocol Specifications document can be found at the Yamaha pro Audio website URL below htto www vamahaproaudio com It is possible to specify whether listed events will be executed by the Event Scheduler page 139 DME Designer Owner s Manual 11 12 e The order of same time events can be changed in the Event Scheduler page 139 e Exceptions can be specified for Event Scheduler execution day time page 107 e Event Scheduler execution times can be specified in 1 second increments page 106 e Head amp gain and Mini YGDAI Card can be set via GPI
201. TASP2060 v Component Other Objects E Graphics Ports amp Wires specifies wire color thickness and type for each port type e Color sets the default color for the port and wire e Width sets the default wire width from a range of 1 to 5 e Type Sets the port type NOTE The initial color and thickness of the wires produced when drawing connections are specified here The color and thickness of drawn wires can be changed via the Wire Properties dialog box 268 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Crosshairs e Show Crosshairs While Dragging Place a checkmark here to have crosshairs displayed for guidance when dragging the wire endpoint e Select Crosshair Length specifies the length of the crosshair lines Enter a number into the Arbitrary Crosshair Length box to specify the length in pixels Infinite Crosshairs causes the lines to go all the way to the edge of the window Offset Paste Duplicate from Original By sets the position when pasting or duplicating objects e Auto size based on original object If you place a checkmark here the paste duplicate position will be automatically adjusted so that the object does not overlap the original object e Horizontal Pixels Box Sets the horizontal distance e Vertical Pixels Box Sets the vertical distance Auto Suffix Number Turns automatic appending of sequentially numbered suffixes to the names of placed objects on or off
202. Terminal specifies the type of GPI output produced A high level is output when the value specified by Parameter is equal to Threshold A low level is output when the value specified by Parameter is equal to Threshold Pulse waveform 1 1 is output at the instant the value specified by Parameter becomes equal to Threshold Pulse waveform 2 2 is output at the instant the value specified by Parameter becomes equal to Threshold e Audio Detector The audio signal status detected by the Audio Detector component is output via GPI OUT Parameter selects the Audio Detector component that will produce GPI output according to the detected audio signal status Terminal and Polarity specify the type of GPI output oroduced Ignored High level while an audio signal is detected low level while no audio signal is detected Ignored High level while no audio signal is detected low level while an audio signal is detected IL Pulse waveform 1 1 is output when the status changes from no audio signal detected to audio Te detected Pulse waveform 1 1 is output when the status changes from audio signal detected to no audio signal detected DME Designer Owner s Manual 123 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Pulse waveform 2 2 is output when the status changes from no audio signal detected to audio signal detected Pulse waveform 2 2 is output when the status changes from audio signal detected to
203. VCO seisi a n E a 297 ZOMG VAC OW esien N NS 298 Configuration WINdOW es sesssrneessrrreesrrrrrersrrrrrrsrrrrrerrrreree 301 User OCA Se erener ene psoteaneitdasanaeesceures becuase 309 Chapter 5 Editor Window 319 Component Editor WINKOW ccccccceccces en eceeeeeeeeneeeeeanees 319 User Control Editor User Module Editor ee O25 Operation Mode and Design MOde ccccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeenees 358 Contex IIA erario rbir ere iNe ae E NNER ENEE 359 EAT E EEE AOE E A E A T E T T 362 Ea A E E PE AETA E T E E E 364 Creating Parameter LINKS cccccccscsseeeeceeseeeseseeneeseeseesens 368 Creating Component LINKS ccccccceeseceesseeescceenseeseesenseees 370 Chapter 6 Component Guide 371 Types of ONG CS IS ssssrierinescieiani aeien aiee 371 Ambient Noise Compensator cccccccesseeeeeeeeueeesesseneeeeees 379 AdO DOGON arearen ana EEEa a TETERE caer tee 381 Aulo Gan CONTO asese a ea EE ROE 382 O O a a E eet mee 383 Crossover PIOCESSON a iiwesoacrinccarccudsnosecnsndsltencacsterautatacencrsdebes 387 Bie cl gaeeeere rere eree nt rece E caste eter er cree en etree cree 399 IE sie alle EE E tasers Teter ceenr en E tr TE TT 402 EOI Z ee EO osae ee 414 Fa gt oreee reenter A ner ery rrr eeeee rt S terre tr try ar etre 418 Feedback Suppressor vssicpascaconssontcacsseredangawsagaowadentnesagudenianees 419 PN Se ye eae asa sedans E E E A E S A nema vaenaee 420 DT EEEN saeco ttt VEA see Minster ern
204. When you click the Configuration Manager command on the Tools menu the Configuration Manager dialog box is displayed Here you can add delete or rename a configuration NOTE Simply adding a new configuration does not make the new configuration active To switch to the new configuration it must be clicked in the Navigator window page 197 Configuration Manager dialog box i Configuration Manager Device Group DME Groupi Configurations Configuration Add Delete Rename Duplicate Device Group select the device group to be edited from the list Configurations Lists the configurations included in the device group being edited To change settings for a configuration select it by clicking it in the list Add Button Adds a configuration Clicking here displays the Please enter new name dialog box Enter a configuration name then click OK A configuration will be added F Please enter new name Delete Button Deletes the configuration selected on the list Clicking here displays the Are you sure dialog box Click the OK button and the configuration will be deleted Click the Cancel button and the deletion will be cancelled Ti DME Designer 2 re you sure i Cancel A minimum of one configuration is required When only one configuration remains deletion is impossible DME Designer Owner s Manual 295 296 Chapter 4 Designer Renam
205. X specific resources and therefore the usage percentage display that appears to the lower right of normal components will not appear Check the SPX resource usage percentage via the SPX meter in the Resource Meter window omponent Editor Delete Be d F Duplicate Display Order a TO Recall Component Library Tour Store Component Library Add Component to Component Link cee Properties E Context Menu for SPX Component Objects Open Component Editor Opens the component editor Cut Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard Copy Copies the selected object to the clipboard Paste Pastes the object that is on the clipboard Delete Deletes the object you clicked on Duplicate Duplicates the object you clicked on Display Order Changes the display order of the objects according to a command in the submenu Recall Component Library Recalls libraries with component parameters saved in them Clicking here displays the submenu When a library is selected from the submenu the library is read and the component parameters are changed For more information about libraries see Library page 364 When you will change the effect type for the SPX component select the desired type from the Effect Type displayed in the submenu NOTE Libraries can be recalled only by users for whom Control Component Editor in security is turned ON The command is grayed out for users for wh
206. ach curve Low Output Lewel Mute A Phase DA HPF LPF 0 BN dB ct WSdB Oct i Tyre inkwit gt niewits Changing the Output Level Parameter You can adjust the Frequency parameter by horizontally dragging the control point at the intersection of the curves for each frequency band Low Low Mid Duteut Dutrput 5 Level AAA Mute e Phase dbsOct USdBsOct USdBfoct USdBsict L Changing the Frequency Parameter DME Designer Owner s Manual 385 Chapter 6 Component Guide m LFP HPF Type sets the attenuation slope and the filter type for the LPF and HPF The selected items are displayed on the buttons Clicking these buttons displays a menu Combinations of six slope types and four filter types are available 6dB Oct 12dB Oct 18dB Oct 24dB Oct 86dB Oct and 48dB Oct set the attenuation per octave A low value produces gentle attenuation A large value oroduces sudden attenuation Type SS Crossover Snap wee ob Thru 6dB Oct 12dB Oct AdjustGc 12dB Oct Butrwrth 12dB Oct Bessel 12dB Oct Linkwitz 18dB Oct AdjustGc 18dB Oct Butrwrth 18dB Oct Bessel 24dB Oct AdjustGc 24dB Oct Butrwrth 24dB Oct Bessel 24d0B Oct Linkwitz 36d0B Oct AdjustGc 36d0B Oct Butrwrth 36d0B Oct Bessel 48dB Oct AdjustGc 48dB Oct Butrwrth 48dB Oct Bessel V 48dB Oct Linkwitz e THRU No filter is applied There is no attenuation which produces a level line at all frequencies e AdjustGc Adjustab
207. ade ON or OFF e Show Cascade Port on Configuration Window Checking this enables cascade e Cascade Setting Here you can make settings that apply when cascade is enabled Clicking here displays the Cascade Setting dialog box gt See Cascade Setting dialog box on page 221 OK Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings m Cascade Setting Dialog Box Click the Cascade Setting button to display the Cascade Setting dialog box via which DME64N cascade connections can be verified and edited as required Make sure that the Head Margin and Mixer I O settings are the same for multiple cascaded DMEGAN units These settings are matched automatically for DME64N units that are connected via their CAS IN and CAS OUT terminals in the Zone window NOTE A Refer to Cascade DMEG4N only page 489 for input output and cascade bus assignments F Cascade Setting Unit No Head Margin Mixer I O Port0l Port02 Port03 M PortO4 M Port05 M Port0 M Port0 Port08 M Port09 PortiO l Portl1 Porti2 M Porti3 M Portl4 Porti Portl6 Porti Porti8 Porti9 Port20 Port21 Port22 M Port23 Port24 l Port25 Port26 Port2 M Port28 M Port29 M Port30 M Port31 Port32 Check All Clear All Cancel Unit No Cascade Connection Number These settings automatical
208. age Ratio Displays the resource usage ratio for SPX components and Feedback Suppressor components arranged in the configuration Fi ResourceMe Eg FS 48 0kKHz The components that can be placed in the configuration window vary according to the device type For details see Component List on page 372 If the Matrix Mixer 64 input 64 output or the Matrix Mixer 64 input 32 output components are placed in the DME64N configuration window you will not be able to use other components even though the window does not reach 100 percent DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Navigator Window The Navigator window can be displayed or hidden via the View menu Navigator or the tool button large Show Hide Navigator button in the main window or via the View menu Navigator command in the designer window Gives a hierarchical display of the area zones and configurations along with the DME devices user modules and components arranged within the configurations This allows you to check the overall Status of your setup You can click the icon or name for an area Zone configuration DME device user module or component to make each design window active For user modules with security enabled a password is requested when displaying the hierarchical display shown below E Havigator Area S Area New Area Zone 5 EEE Zone Device Group lt ET OME Group Configuration E gcontig Config Device ae
209. aker Processor SPX User Module Picture Ellipse T er ET HS SE FS SF SE eT SE EE SSeS UE le l Paste Start Wire v Edit Mode Audio Detector Sheet Auto Gain Control pt rane Sees ok Crossover poh en ih aE mkae Eel Crossover Processor E a Crossover ProcessorII CIIIIIIIIIIIII Delay a Gn a ale whens ae Dynamics POSES TOE OO em EQ a Ua Feedback Suppressor Pad b iii iii i Filter G Gl eordhe Gon te wees cdi ce et as Meter a Aviatiasen teal aa ince seme Miscellaneous DY or aata deve a Sen 0 O ea Mixer pre eee ea hades ae 2 eae e Room Combiner Lo Oye Atte a eee ea Router ings Bae eee ss Source Selector Speaker Processor oe o E Dee ESE User Module COIIIIIIIIIIII picture E E E E Text Ellipse Component List submenu on the Tools menu or on the context menu DME Designer Owner s Manual Ambient Noise Compensator gt T F T T T TT T TOP FTC i i el 201 202 Chapter 4 Designer Component List User Module Window The Component List displays objects that can be arranged in the User Module window The same objects are displayed in the Component List submenu on the Tools menu or on the context menu that appears when you right click on the sheet Thart Wine Junbesnt Note Dompensat furio Detector w ER Hdi Age Gan Control Thanet Crepe ndeeeower Prad a ret Proceuort ByMitcalane Mort unireg Pear Lind ES Moves i LET Ae ee Es
210. al 479 Chapter 6 Component Guide E Parameter Setting Range Dist gt Delay DST Type DST1 DST2 OVD1 OVD2 Distortion type DST distortion OVD overdrive One Input two CRUNCH and delay eects in Dive otto Disomionarve OOS and delay effects in Drive O to 100 Distortion drive series 010 100 4010 10 016 20 0 0 to 2725 0 ms Delay time FB Gain 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback 0 1 to 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio 0 05 to 40 00 Hz Modulation speed O to 100 Modulation depth Distortion and delay balance 0 all distortion 100 all delayed distortion Muli Fite ce mult fiter 24 dB Stereo Reverb ae reverb Balance of early reflections and reverb 0 all reverb 100 all early reflections 480 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide M Band Dyna Low Gain 96 0 to 12 0 dB Low band level Suen output 3 band Mid Gain 96 0 to 12 0 dB Mid band level dynamics 96 0 to 12 0 dB High band level ae Presence 10 to 10 For positive values the threshold of the high band is gain reduction lowered and the threshold of the low bandis metering for each increased For negative values the opposite will ee occur When set to O all three bands are affected l the same Parameter Cmp Thre 24 0 dB to 0 0 dB Compressor threshold CmpRat___ t 4 0 20 Cmp Atk Oto 120 ms Compressor attack Cmp Rel 44 1kHz 6
211. al Chapter 4 Designer Select Image Dialog Box You can display an image for the background of sheets or objects You can use image files in the following formats BMP bmp PNG png XPM xpm and JPEG jpg In the project file the location and name of the image file are registered in an relative path below the ContentsFolder and the linked image file is read and displayed If the image file is moved renamed or the ContentsFolder is changed the image cannot be displayed If you click the Image button in the properties dialog box for an object that can display a background image or in the Sheet dialog box the Select Image dialog box will be displayed Specify an image file and set Its display method Select Image Image Layout C Center C Tile Fit File F YAMAHA bldg Picture 0574 jpg Image Layout Selects the manner in which the image file will be displayed e Center Centers the image in the object or sheet e Tile Displays multiple copies of the image side by side until the available space is filled If the image file is smaller than the sheet it will be displayed repeatedly like tiles on a wall e Fit Expands or reduces the size of the image to match the size of the sheet where it will be displayed File Box specifies a path for the image file A path can be directly entered in the box You can also click the Browse button and select the image file It will be en
212. al Knobs and sliders that cannot be converted fea v Design Mode Open Original Component Editor Close All Editor Windows Open Parameter Link Add Parameter to Parameter Link gt Display Order Properties Design Mode Open Original Component Editor Close All Editor Windows Open Parameter Link Add Parameter to Parameter Link Display Order Properties DME Designer Owner s Manual 343 344 Chapter 5 Components Undo and Redo Commands During Editing The Undo and Redo commands in the main panel window Edit menu and the Undo and Redo commands in the editing palette can be used to undo or redo controller move size change or delete operations NOT C If you close an editor window you will no longer be able to undo and redo operations performed there Control Properties A properties dialog box will open when you either double click a controller in the User Control Editor or User Module Editor or right click the controller and select Properties from the contextual menu Here you can specify a design for the controller Multiple properties of the same type can be set at the same time by clicking the controllers while holding the lt Ctrl gt key and then opening the properties dialog box Edited items are shown in bold text until you either click OK or Cancel E Knob Properties Dialog Box When you right click on a knob then select Properties from the context menu the Knob P
213. ally while the output channels are arranged horizontally Matrix Mixer Crosspoint editor window Matrix Mixer CrossPoint4x4 Dutrput Channel 1 4 On Off Nominal Minimum Matrix Mixer 8 16611 lt 271bH gt olmu oema Swichestoanoterchannel group Co ow oem oncies oaonercremetgen e onor fims ON all sends in the Crosspoint window When turned ON the On button lights up Tums Turns OFF all sends in the Crosspoint window all sends in the Turns OFF all sends in the Crosspoint window window C A CA all send levels in the Crosspoint window making them O dB Minimum Resets all send levels in the Crosspoint window making them dB DME Designer Owner s Manual 449 Chapter 6 Component Guide Channel Group Switching The Matrix Mixer Crosspoint editor window displays four channels each for Input and Output It displays the channel group that was clicked on in the matrix mixer component editor The Channel buttons in the Inout and Output sections of the Matrix Mixer Crosspoint editor window switch the channel group that is displayed Input section Output section Channel menu Channel menu If you click another channel group when the matrix mixer component editor is active and an Matrix Mixer Crosspoint editor window is displayed that channel group will be displayed in the open Matrix Mixer Crosspoint editor window Only one Matrix Mixer Cr
214. alue between 1 and 5 5 softest is specified the curve gradually changes when the threshold is exceeded producing a more natural sound LFE Sub Woofer Speaker This is a special speaker for playing back low frequency sounds DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Linkwitz Riley Linkwitz One type of filter characteristics AS second order filters the sum of the output voltages for LPF and HPF have a gain of ObB across the entire band The pass band is flat but the cutoff frequency gain is 6 dB Pan sets the distribution ratio of the input signal between right and left Pan Nominal Position sets the O dB reference for pan There are two selections available Center and LR LR Nominal With the Center Nominal setting level is nominal when pan is set to center and level is 3dB when pan is set fully left or right With the LR nominal setting level is 3dB when pan is set to center and nominal when pan is set fully left or right Phase Reverses the phase of the signal If you turn this ON signal is inverted If you turn this OFF the signal is not inverted Q sets the frequency bandwidth that will change the sound As the value gets larger the width gets narrower and the curve becomes steeper In the parametric equalizer this sets the frequency width where the gain will be cut or boosted When Q is widened the gain is boosted or cut along a wide range centering on the frequenc
215. ame as the standard Windows file save dialog except for the Export Library option Export Library can be sued to select the library to be saved m Close Button Closes the dialog box Look in D Talisman srcV1 2 DESIGNER DESIGNER 7 B design ope O widget adaptor draw setting xml cale dxf testLibrary E 3umx com images translatelF Common mdi ui Debug jobject undo File type Export File umo Cancel Export Library 123 uml Add Library File User Module Settings Dialog Box Click the Change Settings button in the User Module Manager dialog box to open the User Module Settings dialog box Here you can edit the user module template name group name and security settings DME Designer Owner s Manual iF User Module Settings Group Library Group Mame UserModule User Module Name UserModule Double Click Action f Open User Module Design Window f Open User Module Editor Security Settings Enable Security Set Password Default Library None User Module Group Save in new User Module Group User Module Group Name User Module Groupi Chapter 4 Designer E Group Name Displays the pre edit user module group name and user module name E User Module Name specifies the user module name NOTE Since the user module name is used as a file name characters that cannot be used for file names cannot be used for user module n
216. ames E Double Click Action specifies the default action when user modules in the configuration window are double clicked Open User Module Design Window Opens the User Module Design window Open User Module Editor Opens the User Module editor The user module editor is a window where controls for components that are placed in a user module can be laid out and their parameters changed For more information about the user module editor see User Control Editor User Module Editor on page 325 E Security Settings Makes security initial settings for the user module selected on the list Enable Security Enables user module security If security is enabled a password is requested when attempting to open the User Module window If the correct password is not entered the window will stay closed When you place a checkmark here the Set Password dialog box appears Enter the same password into the Password box and Confirm Password box and click the OK button Set Password Password Confirm Password ome To disable user module security turn OFF the checkbox If you click the checkbox when it already has a checkmark the Input Password dialog box appears Enter the password set for this user module and click the OK button You can disable security in this way If you do not enter the correct password you will not be able to disable security Set Password Button Changes the password Click
217. anges the display order according to the selected submenu command Recall Scene Selects and recalls a scene from the submenu Flash Unit LEDs select to flash all indicators on the SP2060 panel Flashing will continue until this command is de selected Output Level Not available for SP2060 objects Properties Opens the SP2060 Device Properties window DME Designer Owner s Manual 221 228 Chapter 4 Designer SP2060 Properties select an SP2060 object and click Properties in the Edit menu to open the Speaker Processor Device Properties window The SP2060 properties can be edited here if Speaker Processor Device Properties Label Saray Label Font Width feo 44 Label Color moel Height 140 9 2 Fort Label Color Style Plain Color W Show Scene Display and On line Indicator Port Style on Zone Window f Customize Port Style f Audio Port Classic Styles Edit Port Lett Right Speaker 8 l Edit Port Label and Type Processor Label Box Up to 100 single byte characters or 50 two byte characters can be entered for display on the object One two byte character is equivalent to two single byte characters Single byte and two byte characters can be mixed NOTE The label specified in the Label box will appear in the Toolkit window the Import and Export menu commands and window lists When multiple SP2060 units are used they can be given di
218. anual 149 150 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Component Lock Click Component Lock in the Tools menu to display the Component Lock dialog NOTE Does not apply to SP2060 units Names and Functions eh Component Lock Component i O Analog Output H Slot n O Internal DME24N DA i O Internal DME24N HA ADI DMEG4N i AD Component i L Crossover Processor I Select All n O EQ CGomp Gompressor i O EQ Comp PEQ Stereo Glear All be O MY Others 2 O Speaker Processor L O SPX Slat fe O SLOT 1 MY Others Cancel The component user module names included in the DME will be displayed AD and Slot will also be displayed When the checkbox to the left of the component name is checked the component is locked so that it is not possible to change parameters from a PM5D or other external device controlling the DME unit via the RS 422 interface While the component is locked it is still possible to control the internal DME head amps via the Internal HA Control function The lock settings will be transferred to the DME when the unit is placed on line The settings can only be changed while off line NOTE If user module security is enabled the components will not be displayed Components displayed by the User Module Editor will be displayed NOTE Only users who s Edit box is checked can edit the lock status E Select All Button Checks all component checkboxes E Clear All Button Clears all component c
219. anual 33 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Files Used by the DME DESIGNER The following files are used by the DME designer application Description Stores information relating to the entire project DME Designer All File Stores the project file library data files and all DME Designer settings at once Project Files systems built with DME Designer are saved as project files Project files have daf as the extension for their filenames These files include settings for the area zones device groups configurations and each parameter i FILE projectOs daf since only one project file can be open at atime before you can open a second file the first one must be closed The commands for opening project files creating new ones and saving them are found in the File menu of the Main Panel window Creating New Project Files Project files are created using the File menu gt New command in the Main Panel window 1 Click File menu gt New in the Main Panel window Since the currently open project file must be closed before a new one can be created a Project file has been modified Save dialog box will be displayed DME Designer Project file has been modified Save 2 To save the file click Yes the File Save dialog box will be displayed If you click Yes the File Save dialog box will be displayed A new project file will be created 34 DME Designer Owner s Manual C
220. at extension omp and save it as a file with the name opening omp E Replacing the graphic data Transmit the graphic file opening bmp to the DME unit using the DME File Storage function from the DME Designer This image will be displayed at the startup screen from the next time when the DME starts up NOTE e To restore the default startup screen create a dummy file and change the name to blank bmp and storage it in the same way as above The default startup screen will be displayed from the next time when the DME starts up e The file transmitted to the DME unit using the DME File Storage function will be automatically erased after completing the internal configuration This means the file is not stored on the DME unit e Compatible graphic files are limited to black and white bitmap format at a size of 160 x 48 Other graphic files cannot be displayed e The Copyright indication at the bottom of the screen cannot be erased e Only the DME64N 24N is compatible with this function The ICP1 is incompatible DME Designer Owner s Manual 71 72 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Preferences When you click the Preferences command on the File menu in the Main Panel window the Preferences dialog box is displayed Here you can make environmental settings for using DME Designer Names and Functions E Application Tab Here you can set the general usage environment Application Component Edit
221. be selected Display Order Changes the display order of the objects according to a command in the submenu Properties Displays the Zone Properties dialog box DME Designer Owner s Manual 211 212 Chapter 4 Designer E Zone Object Properties When you select a zone in the Area window then click the Properties command on the Edit menu the Zone Properties dialog box is displayed Here you can set properties for zone objects The Properties command is also located on the context menu for zone objects T Zone Properties Font Text Cancel Color Text Position Top Left Background Image Color Width Image Height Style Plain Text Box You can enter up to 100 English characters for the object name The object name is displayed in the rectangular box for the object If there is a large number of characters and the object s shape is too narrow all characters might not be displayed Font Button Clicking here displays the Select Font dialog box This sets the font used to display the object name For information about the Select Font dialog box see page 264 Color Button Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box This sets the color of the object name text For information about the Select Color dialog box see page 265 Text Position sets the location of the text The list to the left sets the vertical position
222. called or not recalled can now be selected precisely e Configurations can now be duplicated in the Configuration Manager window e In the Main Panel window configuration names are now displayed and configurations may be selected e The VS4 VS6 and NS IC600 can now be specified as external devices E Changes e The Remote V3 5 tab and the MIDI V3 5 tab in the Utility dialog box have been deleted e The Cancel button has been added in the Project File has been modified Save dialog box which is displayed before closing DME Designer to cancel closing procedure Fixed Bugs e Fixed a problem in which SP2060 configurations could be edited when the Configuration Manager dialog box was opened via Tools menu Configuration Manager item e Fixed a problem in which configurations could be edited while online when the Configuration Manager dialog box was opened via the context menu displayed by right clicking a DME object in the Designer window e Fixed a problem in which the compiling procedure would occasionally complete successfully even though an error should occur when an IN port was connected to multiple OUT ports e Fixed a problem in which the compiling procedure would occasionally not complete when compiling was executed on a complex configuration with multiple SPX components e Fixed a problem in which the compiling procedure would occasionally not complete when compiling was executed on a compl
223. cally detects and reduces constant environmental noises such as projector fans or air conditioning E FBS Feedback Suppressor Automatically detects the frequencies at which feedback is occurring and applies notch filters at those frequencies to stop the feedback 42 notch filters are available for each AEC channel The notch filters are reset i e returned to not applied status when the DME64N 24N power is turned off DME Designer Owner s Manual 483 Chapter 6 Component Guide 484 mE AEC Component Editor The AEC component editor includes meters that aid in setting optimum microphone levels and microphone speaker positioning as well as in adjusting for optimum echo cancellation effect Zee Heaeend hiic2 mM From Farend B gt ee ora meee From Farend The echo cancellation effect is disturbed due to off balance of Mic inputs and reference signals when the components which sounds are dynamically changed xX ex Dynamics and Auto Mixer and the volumes which users control are inserted to the points where cross marks indicate in the right figure To avoid these issues the O components above should be inserted to the points where circles indicate Double click the component to open the component editor 2X Librar Store Reca Hedr erd Mic 1 He r end Mice Hedr end ic 3 Hedr and Pic 4 cho Mic Ref Echo cp Fic Ref Ecso pp Hic Ref Echo pp In attn EAL In im Attn FRE ho In Atin FAL In In
224. can select a parameter link group name by clicking on it Clicking the selected parameter link group name again will select the characters in the name allowing you to change it Clicking the plus or minus sign to the left of the parameter link group name displays or hides items that belong to that parameter link group You can delete a parameter link group by selecting it and pressing the lt Delete gt key You can also delete a parameter link group by right clicking on the parameter link group name and selecting Delete in the context menu that is displayed e DME Icon Displays the DME that includes the parameters that belong to a parameter link group The components can be displayed or hidden by clicking the plus or minus signs for the DME icon The parameters Min and Max can be displayed or hidden by clicking the plus or minus signs for the component e Link Click to turn ON or OFF Turn OFF to disable parameter linking Component linking for multiple parameters can be turned ON or OFF via the contextual menu that appears when the group name is right clicked DME Designer Owner s Manual 95 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window e Keep Offset Click to urn ON or OFF When ON the parameter offset is maintained so that when any parameter in the group reaches its minimum or maximum value further decrease or increase is not possible Keep Offset for multiple parameters can be turned ON or OFF via the contextual menu
225. cassusatinenascnndadnineiddoatsuatandacibeeiddmadss 414 E EE A and E a E A E 270 H Help MenU pn 69 AHigh Pass Filter HPFY mceascutanatacieminanbes sine tapadunebaeanlenndadasannmeniamseccate 421 Hald FAOI TIME sopresa en e Ea ER 506 HOME Button ICP srsccreteasrncnniagetresdanicutaidaedouiieclaeindee beta tobcvadn 510 PO asec acces E stan de E dee sears eee AS 281 E leicester rsa sect eroded dee eo ne VSEE ETT 224 placement xucsarcensaedeoacsatdceniettentaasencetdgstaaian ne aaneeenaieteesieas 300 MAPA sacs E E E E E E E A T A AE E T 509 Import ORI e A A A A 42 MO Ure IE sorcanerr ienaa e eeri ei 517 Kiemal HA OMIT OD lt samatecavecsoatuautieiasdulnns utile asses EEES ESE EE 141 EE ai E E eeaeensaee oy K Eaa E E N E 402 506 E Soh ease eee E E E E TE E E E E T 506 Knob Slider Conversion ss isssrirssrirresrirreerrrreerrrerrrrrerrrreerrrr 343 L Language SE a E E reey ee nee tr ee renter omens er Seen ee 182 Language dialog DOX ccc ceecccccceeeeesceneeeesseeeeeeseeeeeessaeeseessaneeees 182 CIOL seres a tetas usdassetanansuaaaousiessioceamsetanouereader 518 LCD Contrast so cca mreainctacetinaaenaincnsciraeaed onacenanntevoenesndanednaninsennahanandecsdnmendenn 518 E E o EE E IE ei th ean oceans et A A woe oat ance cate 453 Legend Descriptive Fields cccccccccsceesssesseeeeesseessseeeeeeseeeaaas 260 LFE Sub Woofer Speaker sass ieattarbivednsedvaisaiperemuusuaniantvensdwdct 506 Library recalling accsteee e
226. ccccccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 The DME Designer Software Application cccccccceeeeeeee eee 4 Data Handled by a DME Audio System ccceeccceeeeceee eens 6 Main Changes from V1 0 to V1 1 cccecccccesseesesseaseeseseeaeeees 10 Changes from V1 1 to V1 22 scccecccstessazessensrensactoasaneniesaegectacesineat 11 Changes from V1 2 to V2 0 ca ceccssceseameccesaregsattertensene adi stwacs inant 14 Changes from V2 0 to V3 0 ssssisssssiinssriireerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrreen 16 Changes from V3 0 to V3 5 assssisssssiinssririressrrrrrrsrrrrrrrrrrrsren 18 Changes from V3 5 to V3 8 wo ccccceceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenan anes 19 Changes from V3 8 to V4 0 ssssisssssiinssriirserrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrere 20 Chapter 1 Before Using 23 Installing DME Designer siosscsiniss cieveencvavs cde deunetnievtadatuudctewviedeaw tens 23 Starting DME DeSIQNEL cccccceesceccessseeceseeeeeseeseeseesesseaseeses 23 Closing DME DeSiOnes ssccccieavie tivo aA a eee 20 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview 26 Names and Functions of the WINdGOWS cccccceeeeteeeeeeeeees 26 Ussrs and DC CUPILY vnst cteicielaimateiienctiadeantriemnantia een i i oi Files Used by the DME DESIGNER ccccescessnseeeeseeeees 34 Configuration Creation ProCeCure ccccceccceeeecceeeeeeeeene ees 49 ON aca caret ch eae ceca E nin eee ane eee 50 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window 54 Names and Functions of the WINdGOWS cccccceeeeteeeeeeee ees 54 Main
227. cciraizcncscdviadaweedannduaninneeunestees 155 SO Dn e e see catia A IE TE NE IEE EN 156 Security Creating Users and Making User Settings 157 ITN UU ees O 165 COTA e ae A ose tate cats eMeeadeeoa eee 167 WOTE Oi ee nnie cerns ter tas tttnre teeta renee aren rr cee ee 177 MONO OU cet nets tore sheet se tchc cuentas eotanuet R 179 O Cas eater pee ein ieee ode eet 180 Languages SSNS concesie eee Cee nee ene ee ee cree 182 Pa U e a E E A 183 OPF20600 BaCKUD eee eee eee eee ee ee meee eee ee eee 184 DME Firmware Update vcnsccosacteartncssevactosesuatsovactnactuaieosietewenedu 186 Device INFOMATION ss esinussinnerrirerirrerrrrerrirrrrrrrrrrerrrerrree 190 Chapter 4 Designer 192 Editing Configurations ss ssessirsssssirrrrrrirrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrrrn 192 Designer WINKOW ccccccccesecsseeseceeseecseeeseeseeesseseeteeseesenes 193 Toolkit WINCGOW 00 cece ccccceccceseeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeeee estou eeeeeeeeueeeeanees 198 Designer Window MeN cccccsceeeeceeeeseesesesssseeeeesaeseees 203 B lc Rawr A A E rn ent tee ar errs 210 Design Window Shared Settings and Operations 268 Drawing and Editing W6S wscncs2ces seusesessantacevecedsarnadcevmanesaawases 279 Adding Deleting and Renaming a ZOMGE ccceeeceeeeeeees 291 Changing Device GIOU OS eaves se ctsicnnwsinncncccanndnnmedinssibwndvinis weuSenider 293 Adding Deleting and Renaming a Configuration 295 AOT
228. cellation strength Higher values also result in reduced sound quality so these settings should always be made while checking the sound Distance 2 40 Specifies the distance between the microphone and meters speaker used If multiple microphones and speakers are used the distance between closest microphone and speaker should be specified If the microphone to speaker distance is less than 2 meters use the 2 meter setting Advanced button Opens the Advanced Settings editor window see page 486 NR On ON OFF Turns the noise reduction function that automatically reduces constant environmental noises such as projector fans or air conditioning ON or OFF These settings should normally be ON Matrix Router ON OFF Determines whether far end input signals A D will be used as reference signals for AEC channels 1 4 Far end Noise Reduction ON OFF These buttons individually turn noise reduction for far end input channels A D ON or OFF These settings should normally be ON Feedback FBS On ON OFF Turn feedback suppression for the corresponding signal Suppressor ON or OFF Turning this function ON can prevent unwanted feedback that may occur when the near end microphone input is being monitored via the local speaker system Width 1 10 1 60 Specifies the width of the notch filter that will be applied at 1 93 oct the detected feedback frequency This function makes it possible to reduce the bandwidth of the feedback supp
229. cg eter ntsonarteensectoein aided nnietiocicahun AEAN E AAR 366 Soala E E E E E E E E E E T 365 Link MOJE sisisiaiiiea aende i AT SER 517 Index Linkwitz Riley LINKWItZ eessneesinieesiiesriiuesrrrerrrirrrrrerrrrreerrn 507 Ee AEn E E E E E EE E E E E P E E E PE 513 OEE a e E AEEA 518 OR aes E EO EA ceogeey see 33 oles O 4 Meer er ener rn renr entree recnrr err tr en tata nr mer trrerrer ener r reenter 32 BOG oeno didog OK ease ien EE Saeed Tf OI al OMNES CHOI nance censuses miin noan eRe REL OA PILEN REL ENORA 289 situations where no logical connection is created 289 Low PSS Fiker LPF viscera E 422 EE a E E E sacs daceedeiee iaaaondes 454 M MACAT ara EEE S17 Mait dis pIay arrasean E 511 Main Panel WINdOW icc viccene cctsiaiien decenginoisseibieedledaneieteiibaentieas 26 54 RVG VI ET oren cece sectonesantuiae enanen E E arene 442 Menu Dar scnaccnaicanacesansmencamesaneaiadocansmnacscnssenenad oeansmpasscuedaneaasteanans 54 193 PETO EE E E 428 PM ct ee evs E E EEEE hc EET EEEE E E T TE ET 125 Conto change TAD asasen na EEES Ei 126 Parameter Change tab ess eesinsessirsesrrrerrrrrerrrreerrrreerrrn 129 Program Change tab ciccccccccececescensseenierocereseseensceneonssneeancnn 128 MOF AO T DOE e an ENE 125 MISC PAJE bicaos n RAE EEEE EARNERS 519 Miscellaneous areen aiea a E E A EEAS RES 429 Miscellaneous Setup Misc Page ss ssssssiiresssrrrirerrrrrrrrerrrrrren 519 PIROT arn arr E E E A 431
230. ch leap year Time Sets the time the event will start Click the hour and minute then set numerical values using the spin boxes Only the time is set for periodic events Repeating Event When a check is placed here the event becomes a periodic event and the calendar is ignored e Year Month Week Day Hour set the period for the event using the radio buttons to the left e Day Day of the week set the conditions on the right side Select Day Day of the week and set the date and other information The items that can be set vary according to the selected period When the event period is Year All settings can be made When the event period is Month If Day is selected only the date can be set If Day of the Week is selected settings such as the third Sunday or the first Monday can be made When the event period is Week Only Day Of The Week can be selected Set the day of the week When the event period is Day Hour Condition settings on the area on the right are not needed Exception Button Opens the Event Exceptions dialog box OK Button Applies any setting changes and closes the window Cancel Button Closes the window without changing any settings 106 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Event Exceptions specifies exception year month day and time settings at which events will not be executed Sun Mon Tue Wed T
231. characters or less including the extension can be registered Check the Wave file name beforehand Change the name if it has 32 or more characters including the extension NOT C When saving project files including Wave files select Project File with wave daf in the file save dialog box Names and Functions DME DME Group1 DME24N x Library Recall CHIMES WAY 56 0 KI 00s OFF NOTIFY WAY 118 0 H 00s Move Down Play Stop 2 Remaining Memory 25 6 MB Cancel E DME From the list select the DME where you will be making settings DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Wave File Displays the Wave file information Settings can be made here as well No The Wave file number is displayed in the leftmost column Numbers are added from the top in order List Name You can set up to 27 characters as a label separate from the Wave file name The Wave file name is displayed here by default File Name Up to 31 characters are displayed as the wave file name Size Displays Wave file size information The units vary depending on the file size The size is displayed to the first decimal Up to 1023 bytes 0 X KB 1024 bytes to 1023 9 kilobytes XXX X KB 1024 kilobytes or more X X MB Repeats sets the number of repeats for playback Clicking here will display a list where you can select the number of times Select 0 to 98 or INFINITY since
232. check mark on and off The Select All button can be used to check all DME SP2060 and ICP1 units The Clear All button removes the check marks from all DME SP2060 and ICP1 units 4 When the DME SP2060 and ICP1 units to be restored have been checked click the Update button The firmware update will begin When the restore update is complete the DME SP2060 and ICP1 units will restart automatically It is also necessary to restart the DME designer NOTE If a cable is disconnected or the power is interrupted during a firmware update operation it may not be possible to restart the unit after the update has finished and the conditions listed below may occur If this happens it will be necessary to carry out the Recovery Update procedure described below e Recovery Update appears on the DME64N 24N and or ICP1 display e The DME Satellite ERROR indicator lights and the channel 2 PEAK indicator flashes e Download Mode appears on the SP2060 display DME Designer Owner s Manual 187 188 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Recovery Update Recovers restores the DME SP2060 or ICP1 firmware If a cable is unplugged or the power is cut off during a firmware update the firmware may be corrupted and unable to launch In such cases the Recovery Update function can restore the firmware 1 Disconnect the device which is to undergo the Recovery Update procedure from the network and connect it directly to the computer
233. check whether there are any problems with component layout or connections without having to actually connect the DME unit This is a convenient way to check for compile errors that might occur at the time of synchronization Once a configuration has been analyzed or compiled successfully subsequent analysis or compilation will run quicker unless changes are made to the configuration Also if you save the project file the analysis compilation data is saved as well Names and Functions Go On line Button Go Off line Button gar Synchronization Go Off line Group DOME Group DME Designer Network Deve Pemes Fes DME4io Z 192 166 000 004 m 91 6 000 004 DME DMES4 NH 192 168 000 007 gee 9 1 66 000 007 DMEL4H Designer Network Message Message Area Close This window after synchronization checkbox iw Close this window after synchronization Store Project File into DME W Store Project File into OME after synchronization after synchronization checkbox DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Group List Allows selection of a device group to be synchronized E Go On line Button This button will be grayed out when the software is online Clicking the button displays a dialog box where you can decide the synchronization method DME Designer Device DME Designer lt Device DME Designer gt Device button A consistency check is performed between the data
234. communication to Mode 2 e Baud Rate 38400 In order to turn serial communication off for the interface cards installed in all other DME units set the Serial Communication mode to Slave Ethersound Networks Pa Properes E Net Patch g 170 Patch hd Con Ethersound Networks Properties E Lis The Tree Te Group a E Urt Th Tree TE Group a WB ner WB net z MYIGESE4 S1 a MYIG ESE4 amp MYIGESES 82 g MYIGESGA R2 OMEGES 83 a DMERES 3 OME SWESS H a DME4io S 4 Synchro Status Syrchro Stans C Emergency Clock S Syncheo is OK E Lock Input S Syncheo is OK E Lock inputs Tooke oO Lock Outputs Cl Lock Outputs ADEHR Remote Option Serial Port Mode ADGHR Remote Option Seral Pot Mods O Mode 1 Mode 1 Serial Commurication Mode HA Remote Serial Port lt gt Int Slot Port Serial Communication Mode HA Remote Seral Port lt gt Int Slot Port O Multicast O Mode 2 Mode O Mulicatt Mode 2 Unica MYIGESEAH2 Y Iritana Slot Port lt gt EtherSourd K Urican MyisEssm V aa ia Stave Mode 3 gt Slave O Mode 3 1 e Tunnel Unavalsbie HA Remote Serial Port EtherSound Ether Sou Turrel Unavadable HA Remot
235. communications settings see Online page 50 NO Because there are no scene settings when the DME unit is purchased the configuration and scene information in DME Designer must first be transferred aE When combining DME64N 24N and DME Satellite units in a device group be sure to assign a DME Satellite unit as the device group master Synchronization cannot be performed if a DME64N 24N is assigned as the device group master NOT For information about the online procedure see Online page 50 Online and Offline When a DME or SP2060 unit is connected to the computer and synchronized with DME Designer its status is called Online When a DME or SP2060 unit is not physically connected to the computer or is not synchronized even when it is connected its status is called Offline You can check the online offline status and message transmission in Communication Status in the Main Panel window E Online sends configurations created in DME Designer to the DME or SP2060 unit and reads data from the DME or SP2060 unit so that the DME unit configuration is reflected in the DME Designer configuration You can also control the DME or SP2060 in real time from DME Designer Operations performed in the DME Designer control editor are reflected in the DME or SP2060 unit and operations on the DME or SP2060 side are reflected in DME Designer You can not perform configuration editing using the Designer while onl
236. component to open the component editor Mono channel and stereo channel components have the same parameters Limiter component editor amp Limiter Snare E TFT T Store Recall Ier Thr old d 4 l id Sac n ki 3 Ju E 42 Attach felease 2 4 Sam Tit tels D me au O 50 s LALA kesln LA BOTH Limiter Stereo Limiter Curve Displays the limiter response in graph form The horizontal axis represents input signal level and the vertical axis represents output level 0 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the amount of gain reduction KJ Output Meter eee the output aa level oO Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB Sets the threshold value Attack O to 120 ms Sets the attack time Release 44 1 kHz 6 ms to 46 s Sets the release time The range varies according to 48 kHz 5 ms to 42 3 s the operating frequency 88 2 KHz 3 ms to 23 s 96 kHz 3 ms to 21 1 s Keyin Mono SELF The trigger source can be selected from this menu KEYIN The currently selected source is displayed in the button Stereo ON OFF Turns the limiter ON 20 Yo RATIO 20 1 ra 10 ra 7 7 0 Pa Threshold 20dB Fi on D gt l E on O 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 Input Level dB DME Designer Owner s Manual 411 Chapter 6 Component Guide Program Ducker When the key in signal level exceeds the threshold level the output signal is attenuated or the attenuated output signal is returned to its original
237. controls E Selecting Controls In the user control editor or user module editor controls are selected in the same way as in the component editor Click a control to select it or press lt Ctrl gt click to select multiple controls If you use lt Ctrl gt click on a selected control it will cancel that control s selection If you position the mouse in an empty location in the user control editor or user module editor and start dragging from there a frame will be displayed as the pointer moves All controls enclosed by that frame will be selected A red frame will be drawn around the selected controls Moving Controls Move selected controls by dragging them or by pressing the arrow keys on your keyboard When you select multiple controls using lt Shift gt click you can move all of them at the same time Dragging When grid is ON the upper left of the dragged controls will automatically align with the grid When dragging the coordinates displayed here refer to the upper left corner of the object being dragged The Distance to Right and Distance to Bottom are displayed in pixel units using the upper left of the window as a reference point When multiple controls are selected and dragged the coordinates are those of the upper left corner of the control where the mouse is aligned Arrow Keys When the grid is ON the arrow keys move controls a grid unit at a time When the grid is OFF controls are moved one p
238. ct Font Dialog Box page 264 Label Color Button This sets the color of the label text Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box Inputs Outputs Label Color Button sets the color for the I O port label text Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box Color Button sets the color of the object Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box NOTE For information about the Select Color dialog box see Select Color Dialog Box page 265 Edit I O Port Label Button Specifies the I O port label The Edit Port Label window opens when this button is clicked gt Edit Port Label Dialog box page 242 DME Designer Owner s Manual 241 242 Chapter 4 Designer Launch Application Click the radio button and select whether an application or file is to be linked to the Slot component e Application Box Shows the linked application Click the Browse button to browse and select an application Set the path of the application to be launched from the Slot component contextual menu e File shows the linked file Click the Browse button to browse and select a file Set the path of the file to be opened from the Slot component contextual menu OK Button Updates the settings and closes the dialog box Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings Edit Port Label Dialog Box When you click the Edit I O Port Label butt
239. ctor H BAuto Gain Control H Crossover Hy Crossover Processor HB Crossover Processorll ETRS Delay mae DMEG4N Zone2 H B Dynamics H BEQ H Fader H Feedback Suppressor H Filter H Meter H BMiscelaneous H B Miser H mPan H Room Combiner H BfRouter H E Source Selector H Speaker Processor SPX jas Text i Ellipse DMEGAN block with card inserted in a slot and the Configuration window When the DME64N Cascade Setting is Turned ON When Show Cascade Port on Configuration Window is checked in the DME64N DME Device Properties dialog box the cascade I O components will be displayed in the Configuration window If Show Cascade Port on Configuration Window is turned OFF in the DME64N DME Device Properties dialog box cascade I O components will also be deleted automatically in the Configuration window Even if the Cascade I O components are deleted the wiring will remain K OME Dev FF Sh Soni Diaplay ard Online bcfeeaton DO Card Salsa LS Card Chand Label Ska Mva At HvA See MDA Hrs Sbg Wm a00a H ADDA Si Mi AE uvie aE Piet Siyi om Zone Wirek Gustomie Port Mye fF Audio Port Wass Styk Edin Pert ay DME Ede Peet Lebel one Tyge Ghat m Ede Peet Label and Tyee Ed Port Label and Tyee Ed Peet Label and Tyee Eda Poet Label and Tyee anced f Show Cagcade Port on Configuration Winder FP Auto Delp Compensation abtade S
240. cts the unit used for setting the sheet size OK Button saves the DXF file according to the settings in the dialog box Cancel Button Cancels the DXF file export process DME Designer Owner s Manual 273 274 Chapter 4 Designer Printing Each Design Window You can print out the content of each design window just as it appears on the screen The content in the window will be expanded or reduced in size as necessary to match the size and orientation of the paper and printed onto a single sheet of paper Commands related to printing are found on the Designer Window Print menu fF Designer Print Setup Print Preview Ej Print Ctrl P E Print Setup When you select this command the Print Setup dialog box will be displayed Sets the paper size and orientation i Print Setup Paper Size Orientation Portrait Landscape Paper Size Displays a list where you can select the paper size T Print Setup Cancel Orientation sets the orientation of the paper e Portrait Prints on the paper with its long sides vertical e Landscape Prints on the paper with its long sides horizontal OK Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer E Print Preview window Displays a print preview of the active design window You can c
241. cutoff frequency slow 1 wavelength of cutoff frequency Release Fast Selects the release speed of the limiter If the Manual Mid setting is selected specify the release time in msec If Slow Fast Mid Slow is selected the release time is specified Manual roughly according to the HPF cutoff frequency of 44 1kHz 6ms to46s speaker Processor s Crossover 48kHz 5ms to 42 3s Fast 4 wavelength of cutoff frequency 88 2kHz 3ms to 23s Mid 8 wavelength of cutoff frequency 96kHz 3ms to 21 1s Slow 16 wavelength of cutoff frequency On ON OFF Turns the limiter ON The limiter is bypassed when the button is turned OFF 470 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide SPX SPX is an effect component that supports many different effect applications such as reverb delay and modulation effects along with complex combinations of multiple effects Although the SPX component is a single component it encompasses 43 effect types When you change the effect type right click the SPX component to display the context menu click Recall Component Library then select the effect type from the Effect Type submenu Double click this component to display the component editor for it SPX component editor Effect Name Reverb Hall Tyre Rew Time Ini Dly Hi Ratio Lo Ratio 6 6 4 3 1 4 ha a if gt o 2 EE 03 33 0 500 oi 1 odi 2u Diff Density E R Dly E R Bal 8 66 e l 4y THRU k 50 THRU Gate Lvl Attack ry
242. d NOTE gt When you go offline probe monitoring is disengaged and the monitor point will not be restored when you go online again DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Show Signal Delay Delay Display Value The signal delays according to the processing time in the audio processor The Show Signal Delay command from the Tools menu calculates a delay value and displays it for the component Selecting this command switches delay value display between ON and OFF The mark is lit when display is turned ON When turned ON the settings are compiled to obtain a delay value which is displayed for components and lines The delay value obtained through compilation remains valid until the configuration is edited Sample units are used to display the delay value This is linked with the Show Signal Delay button on the toolbar ON and OFF settings for Show Signal Display are saved for each configuration window Switching the setting between ON and OFF in another configuration window has no effect on the current window If you edit the configuration while Show Signal Delay is turned ON it will be automatically turned off i DME64N 2 Zone1 CAT are EM EEEE E AIYE EJ hk JCAL EEG E gt ALYE When you turn ON Show Signal Delay the delay value appears above the object Delay values for components and I O components are displayed at the lower center of the object PEQ Sterep 2sample
243. d OFF and set the level Delay Matrix InputMaster editor window Delay Matrix InputMaster8 Delay Matrix 8 Input 8 Output ON OFF Reverses the phase of each channel s signal to 10 dB sets the level of the signal from each channel s input ON OFF Turns ON solo for each channel If Solo is engaged for even one channel all non Solo channels will be muted ON OFF Turns ON each channel s input On Turns ON input for all channels in the Input Master window When turned ON the On button lights up Off Turns OFF input for all channels in the Inout Master window Nominal Resets all input signal levels in the Inout Master window making them O dB Minimum Resets all input signal levels in the Inout Master windows making them dB E Output Master If you click the Output Master button in the delay matrix component editor it will open the Delay Matrix OutoutMaster editor window Here you can turn the master output for each channel ON and OFF and set the level Delay Matrix OutputMaster editor window Delay Matrix OutputMaster8 Pe rameter Setti I Ra IWC Fu IC io Meter Displays the output signal level for each channel 0 to 10 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel ON OFF Turns ON each channel s output ry var DME Designer Owner s Manual 437 Chapter 6 Component Guide Turns ON output for all channels in the Output Master window When turned
244. d Button User Defined Parameters on page 132 9 Storing Scenes Store the scene using the Tools menu gt Scene Manager command in the Main Panel window see IP Address Setup on page 82 DME Designer Owner s Manual 49 00 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Online You can connect the DME or SP2060 unit to your computer and transfer configurations scenes and parameters created in DME Designer into the DME or SP2060 unit You can also read data from the DME or SP2060 unit into DME Designer synchronizing it with the status of the DME or SP2060 unit Because Synchronization presupposes that the DME or SP2060 unit can communicate with the computer where DME Designer is installed the necessary drivers USB MIDI or DME N Network Driver must be installed and appropriate settings must be made for each driver and for DME Designer communication port NOTE Because there are no scene settings when the DME unit is purchased the configuration and scene information created in DME Designer must first be transferred NOTE A maximum of 32 device groups can be online 1 DME Unit and Computer Connection Connect the DME unit and computer using a USB cable or an Ethernet cable see separate DME or SP2060 unit Owner s Manual for details 2 Communication Driver Installation Install the USB MIDI driver or DME N Network driver in the computer see separate DME Setup Manual for details 3 Communication Driver Setup Make th
245. d at the upper left of each edit box Clicking the displayed numbers changes the order NOTE The tab order for other controls such as knobs sliders and buttons cannot be set 1 Right click in the user control editor or user module editor The context menu will be displayed E Unsayed User Module Design Mode Set User Module As Master Layout Close All Editor Windows Open Parameter Link Set background Image 2 Click Tab Order in the context menu Numbers for the current tab order are displayed to the upper left of each edit box 3 Click the tab order numbers in the order in which you want to set the tab order Even if you do not want to change tab order number 1 click all the numbers in the order you desire starting from number 1 When you click on each number it will change to the number that reflects the order in which it was clicked 4 Once you have finished specifying the order click somewhere within the window where there is no tab number The tab order numbers will disappear The changed tab order will apply the next time user control editor or user module editor is started DME Designer Owner s Manual 357 Chapter 5 Components Operation Mode and Design Mode There are two modes for the user control editor user module editor and the component editor operation mode and design mode In operation mode you adjust parameters while in design mode you lay out controls You can switch betwe
246. d only If you click there it will display the Edit Legend dialog box iDME64N Zone1 The Edit Legend dialog box is used to enable disable Legend display and to set the contents displayed there You can display the Edit Legend command from the Edit menu mE Edit Legend Dialog Box i Edit Legend Project N Title Cancel No Author Company Legend Base Font Style MV Show Legend Address Arial Black Save as Default Legend Address2 Change for All Legends In Area Project Box Title Box No Box Author Box Company Box Address1 Box and Address2 Box Used to enter the Project Title Number Author Company Address1 and Address2 You can enter up to 100 English characters for each field DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Date Box and Revisions Box You can enter up to five dates and five revisions You can enter up to 100 English characters for each field Legend Base Font Style Displays a list where you can select the font Show Legend Place a checkmark here to display the legend on the sheet Save as Default Legend saves this legend as the default legend used when a new sheet is created When a new configuration is created it will have a legend with the same contents as this one Change for All Legends In Area Place a checkmark here to have the changes made here reflected in sheets in all design windows included in t
247. d only when a Configuration window or User Module window is active A submenu here displays the same objects as the Toolkit window Clicking an object on the submenu then clicking the Configuration User Module window places the object in that window gt Component List Configuration Window in Toolkit Window page 201 Component List User Module Window in Toolkit Window page 202 E Zone Manager Displays the Zone Manager dialog box Here you can add delete or rename a zone gt See Adding Deleting and Renaming a Zone on page 291 E Device Group Manager Displays the Device Group Manager window allowing the device group to be changed gt Changing the Device Group page 293 DME Designer Owner s Manual 207 208 Chapter 4 Designer Configuration Manager Displays the Configuration Manager dialog box Here you can add delete or rename a configuration gt See Adding Deleting and Renaming a Configuration on page 295 Save User Module This command can be used only when a User Module is selected in the Configuration window saves a template for the selected user module gt User Module Manager Dialog Box in User Modules page 310 User Module Manager Displays the User Module Manager dialog box Changes the settings of renames or deletes a user module saved as a template gt User Module Manager Dialog Box in User Modul
248. d password to open the file and click the OK button The project file will open W Enter ID amp Password Password E Save Overwrites an already saved project file with the current changes If the file is being saved for the first time the Save As dialog box will be displayed gt See Project Files on page 34 E Save as saves the current project file as another file with a new name or in a new location When you select this command the Save as dialog box will be displayed gt See Project Files on page 35 E Import DME Designer All File Imports DME Designer All files dme extension gt See Importing DME Designer All Files on page 46 E Export DME Designer All File Exports the DME Designer All file dme extension gt See Exporting DME Designer All Files on page 48 E Import Device Configuration Imports parameters for a device that is arranged in a configuration file gt See DME Data Import on page 42 DME Designer Owner s Manual 61 62 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Export Device Configuration Exports parameters of a device that is arranged in a configuration file gt See DME Data Export on page 44 DME File Storage Opens the DME File Storage dialog box gt See DME File Storage on page 70 Recently Used Files Displays recently saved files If you click one of the file names you can open that file Preference
249. d when differences in data between the DME and DME Designer are limited to parameters within components AD824 AD8HR DME24N AD DA setting data or Mini YGDAI card setting parameters If the file was saved when DME Designer was closed there will be no break in sound even in the first synchronization after saving Compile soeed has been increased Up to three times faster when AutoDelayCompensation is turned On Up to two times faster when AutoDelayCompensation is turned Off synchronization is possible when no Mini YGDAI card or a different Mini YGDAI card is installed in the DME unit a confirmation message will appear An option to automatically close the dialog after synchronization has been added page 99 A progress bar has been added to the Synchronization dialog page 51 A message appears to warn when synchronization will cause muting The following operations can be performed while on line Scene storage Scene name changes Fade ON OFF and Fade Mode changes Fade time changes Parameter link setting changes When a scene store is executed that scene becomes the current scene Wave files can be saved as DME data files and are included in import export operations page 44 Wave files can be saved in the Wav file library Event Log events can be output via GPI page 79 The on line indicator appears as a button which can be used to switch between on line and off line page 59 scene edits cause the EDI
250. dB to 6 dB When AdjustGc Adjustable Gc is selected for Type this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency The number of output channels varies according to the component variation LowiFigh Low Mid High Low Low Mid High Mid High sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type THRU turns off the filter Sub Low Low Low Mid High Mid High Sub Low Low Low Mid Mid High Mid High Set the attenuation curve for the lowest band and the middle bands with the Low Pass Filter LPF and High Pass Filter HPF and the highest band with HPF Each frequency band has its own color with Low being red Mid being green and so on These correspond to the colors of the lines on the graph 384 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide E Graphic Control Points The graph control points show Output Level and Frequency As you modify the parameters using the knobs and edit boxes the control points move Also as you drag the points the Output Level and Frequency parameters reflect the changes you make Crossover DER Snap Library we ct Uv Store Recall 10 2k Low Low Mid Hish Mid Hish Outrut Frequency Outrut Outrut Outeut Level oye Level A Level 5 AAL Level 6 4 4 48 f A Mute Mute Mute Mute me e 3 Phase Phase e LA Phase a i logg lt 2712H You can adjust the Output Level parameter by vertically dragging the control point in the center of e
251. dacaascosonand daaneadendosmoadcaoseates 247 A T secon cece arse anette cae tanease ace cer eneste ne ce cacceese 247 POT CO soari oirean asia ses cette RA a 159 Preferences age cetaa sta daeseettenanca steel eased occaeesit sect KEEPER AEREE EEEE Errare 72 268 Pe r e E E E E 90 Print Design WINGOW seiersen iiare ira EEEE TEE REEE 274 Print MENU soisesstes steve eleterkcanpsinecs avila eaters eile luo EEE AASER 203 Probe MONIOF en scceraticevet A A EEE 303 Program Change tab essssnnnneesrninessrrrrrerssrrrressrrrrrrressrrrrees 128 Program TUG CP sca teictiansencedeceneadealebu des edsqenwewieaedaetahennacnseabeaiseadedaent 412 Programmable BPF serei S NE 424 Programmable HPF 22cc5escntecens secaucatetyeaeneeas aaia oia iaa 426 Fogramntnable CPF serrati erenn A EER 427 ProjeGt TIS sesicigiastriiieinisi ikana aa anaE 34 CIOS ceird ariei aa aed aT a 41 CRS GG porcs o a E a EE 34 TN E E E E E T ET 39 OIG eee dias aesoeoe nese dace aces admis teecopmenetensauessee anna maeasainaceeeets 35 37 E E E E E eae 507 R E E apa eter EE EE EE E A E A EA 507 O e E EEA E E A A A A 507 Recall Settings ccccansaadiondcmccmanecatneedine dan aenaninsatianan donidainananndetimahiancanemnnts 86 Release Release Time ou 0 ccccccccceccccesececeeseeeeeeseeeeeessneeeeeannnes 508 Remote Control Setup List cecccccsseeseeeseeesseeeeeseessseeseeseeeesaas 139 Romo TA ei Ere EE nats guano er eenaeea OEE A 172 Resource Meter osatancuccntcctundencd
252. ddns saainenincosmnens 517 Zone WINAOW Serene oe ne een eee ee eee ee wer eee ere eee ee 28 298 Index DME Designer Owner s Manual 020 YAMAHA C S G PA Development Division 2004 2013 Yamaha Corporation MW KO
253. dialog box See Scene Manager on page 157 Automatic Logging On With the auto logon function you can have a specified user automatically logged on when the application is started If you enable the auto logon feature the specified user will be logged on when the application is started without displaying the Log On dialog box Auto logon is set from the Security dialog box See Scene Manager on page 157 DME Designer Owner s Manual 31 32 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Logging On The Log On dialog box is displayed whenever the application is started or a user is logged off Whenever one user is already logged on another user cannot be logged on To log on as another user first log off the currently logged on user NOTE Unless you specifically want to restrict access we recommend enabling automatic logon If the access password is forgotten or lost it will not be possible to logon or operate the system If the automatic logon feature is enabled the Log On dialog box will not be displayed when the application is started Instead the auto logon user will be logged on automatically E The Log On dialog box User Administrator Password User From the list select the user you want to log on as Password Box Enter the password OK Button Log on as the selected user Exit Button When the application is started and the Log On dia
254. dow e Display Error Button switches between displaying and hiding Error events When turned ON Error events are displayed in the Event Logger window Clear Screen Button Clears the event log from the Event Logger window The DME unit event log is not cleared 76 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Log Setup dialog box Click the Log Setup button in the Event Logger window to display the Log Setup dialog box Here you can make Event Log settings These settings apply to the system as a whole W Enable Logging Record 7 days per log file Automatically delete log files after a0 4 days Log file folder mo ocuments and Sethings eaese My Documents Browse Log List Setup W Display Log Buffer Full Message W Warning I Error E Enable Logging Turns the function that writes the event log to a file ON or OFF When the checkbox is checked the event log is saved to a file and the saved event log is cleared from the DME unit If the checkbox is unchecked the DME event log is saved in the DME unit When checked it is set in the Enable Logging frame Record _ days per log file sets the number of days recorded into a single log file When the specified number of days Is exceeded a new log file is created and future log events are recorded there When 1 is set for the number of days at 10 00 AM information will be recorded in the same fil
255. ds Mono channel and stereo channel equalizers are available for each type W ith the parametric equalizer you can freely adjust the frequency bands their amplitudes and bandwidths There are six different tyoes of parametric equalizers each with a different number of frequency bands Mono channel and stereo channel equalizers are available for each type Graphic Equalizer GEQ Boosts or cuts signals within the specified frequencies The mono group contains 7 band 15 band and 31 band mono channel components The stereo group contains 7 band 15 band and 31 band stereo channel components Mono channel GEQs have one Input and one output each Stereo channel GEQs have two inputs and two outputs each Mono channel Stereo channel Double click a component to display the component editor for it The number of bands varies depending on the component but all share a common configuration in the component editor Component editor for GEQ Ek Snare Library AA Store Recall 2 56k 4 66k 6 36k nD T it tt gig gt i _ I P aon KA 1 l it I iS Mpi a ba ji gt 1 I l i l ECE pi Ai it I a heat 1 it EN iiS TE Loy it AN it i in 4 88 3 49 6 15 11 15 bc QO 11 HPF Or Dutrut Lewe Frequency Frequency Frequency requenc c r Notch i Om OK pequenct Q F Q equenc 16 6 106 16 6 i 16 6 f O 620k 20 20k 16621 2725H 5 6 14 6
256. dule H User Module h Pi Picture i Text Ellipse Displayed in the designer Floating style window 198 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Displaying the Toolkit Window You can display or hide the Toolkit window using the Toolkit command on the View menu The Toolkit displays objects that can be arranged in each design window You can arrange objects in each design window by dragging them from the Toolkit window or by double clicking them in the Toolkit window The objects are categorized by type and displayed here in a hierarchy You can use the buttons to display or hide items below a particular level in the window Click the button to display the items on the next level down and the button to hide them fF Designer 4 BAmbient Noise Compensator Md pies l Ol x H BAudio Detector Auto Gain Control Crossover H E Crossover Processor Crossover Processorll Delay Dynamics iDME64N one1 i H BPEQ H Fader H D Feedback Suppressor 4l Filter Meter 2 Miscellaneous HB Mixer Pan H B Room Combiner Router H Source Selector Speaker Processor H BSFX User Module f Picture fe Text Moving the Toolkit Window You can move the Toolkit window by dragging it If you drag the window to right or left side it will remain fixed If you drag it to other locations it will float independently When DME Designer is started for the
257. e Library page 364 Crossover Processor Snap Buttons E Snap Buttons A through D The Snap buttons allow you to switch between parameter sets The buttons change in appearance according to their ON OFF status and to whether or not there were changes to the parameter set from when the editor was started When there has been no change to the parameter set since the editor was started When a button is selected it lights up STE E T ON OFF When a parameter set that is different than when the editor was started has been recorded to a button The color of the button name changes on buttons for which the parameter set has changed When a button is selected it lights up ON OFF Recording Parameter Sets Recording parameters from the current window The parameters present when the snap button is switched are recorded to the snap button before the switch 1 Click the snap button A through D that will record the parameter set This turns it ON 2 Set the parameters in the editor to the settings you want to record 3 Click another snap button DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Components Recalling a Library 1 Click the snap button that has recorded the parameter set This turns it ON 2 The library is recalled E Switching Parameter Set If you click a snap button that has a parameter set recorded the system switches to the parameter set recorded there E Copying Parameter Sets
258. e The Audio Detector detects the presence of an audio signal and can light an indicator trigger a GPI output or perform other functions This function can be useful for checking cable connections for example Audio Detector Snare wre Tf DO Detect Audio Detector Detect Bact Librar Store Recall Threshold 4A 1HHBS C2FTSH Lights when the signal level exceeds the threshold 0 Threshold 90 to 0 dB Sets the threshold level for signal detection DME Designer Owner s Manual 381 382 Chapter 6 Component Guide Auto Gain Control The Auto Gain Control component automatically adjusts gain in response to input level and is a convenient way to maintain a constant output level with an input signal that varies in level Mono and stereo types are provided Double click the component to open the component editor The component editor is the same for stereo and mono types the only difference being the number of channels Auto Gain Control PEK Snare Library we TT Store Recall InFut Compensation ResPonse Qutreut eye Time A5 rer ao Prey z 2 ene ee a 2 wW 7 ie EE 10 SOFT HARD 1 02 42 3 sues Hoise Gate On L R Auto Gain Control Steren ibas c2riaHi lar 1e Input Meter Displays the input signal level Output Meter Displays the compensated output signal level eting mange unctio Compensation Level Sets the amount of gain compensation Highe
259. e REMOTE connector connection CobraNet Allows a digital mixer to control the DME8i C DME8o C DME4io C s internal head amps via the CobraNet connector connection EtherSound Allows a digital mixer to control the DME8i ES DME8o0 ES DME4Io ES s internal head amps via the EtherSound connector connection NOTE An ID must be assigned to the DME unit to be controlled Refer to Setting the Internal Head Amp ID page 146 for details on assigning device IDs Change to RS422 via the rear panel DIP switches to select Remote for a DME Satellite unit External HA Control Displays sets the type of connection to be used for external head amp control If the selected terminal was previously assigned to a different function a confirmation dialog will appear The available ports depend on the device DME64N DME24N OFF Remote RS 422 DME Satellite OFF Remote OFF Select OFF when this function is not to be used Remote Allows connection to and control of an external head amp such as the AD8HR Always use this setting when a remote head amp unit AD8HR AD824 is connected NOTE Change to RS422 via the rear panel DIP switches to select Remote for a DME Satellite unit COM Displays sets the type of connection to be used for DME protocol communication This is a Yamaha maintenance function Normally set this to OFF DME Designer Owner s Manual 173 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E MIDI Tab Info N
260. e Senal Port lt gt EtherSound Serial Port Comfigueation Serial Port Configuration BadRate 38400 Party BadRete wm v Party Bits per Cha Pay Bits per Char Party Stop Bits Handihake Stop Bes Harsdthake v v EtherSound Cee ee eee eee aed eed hee eee eae eee ee eee eae eee eaten tee ete m E a ge SSS m m E m m a D Sub 9 pin z n n a a ay a a a a a z m MY16 ES64 A A mode 2 a z a Network P MY16 ES64 fl TEST z 5 1 2 Switch a _ U i too J n a o FTTH DME24N soocoa m a ge Wg a a a a a a oooo0o000 a 20000000 oo E 1 a PEPER PEEP PEELED a a ooooooo707000700709 FF F909 OOF F000 2oooo9 ooo oo ooon Lat 1 annann A Jm Digital Mixer DME4io ES e DME24N units with firmware version V3 04 or later are compatible e You can download the AVS ESMonitor software from the Auvilran website http www auvitran com DME Designer Owner s Manual 145 146 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Setting the Internal Head Amp ID Click Internal HA Control in the Tools menu to open the Internal HA Control dialog box ID numbers for the internal DME head amplifiers that are to be controlled from the digital mixer are assigned via this dialog box The ID numbers are displayed as AD8HR IDs on the digital mixer Click on a Device Label field and select the target DME unit from the drop down menu that appears Internal HA Control DME Group v Device Label Insert DME 4io C fae
261. e Button Changes the name of the configuration selected on the list Clicking here displays the Enter new name for the current configuration dialog box Enter a configuration name then click the OK button NOTE C The current name of the configuration you will be renaming is displayed in the Current Configuration Name box of the Enter new name for current configuration name message i Enter new name for Config Duplicate Button Copies the configuration selected on the list Clicking here displays the Please enter new name dialog box Enter a configuration name then click the OK button T Please enter new name oee Close Button Closes the Configuration Manager dialog box DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Area Window In the Area window the area is designed by arranging objects on a design sheet When you click Area in the Navigator window the Area window becomes active You can also open the Area window using the Area command in the View menu The following objects can be arranged in the Area window e Zone e External Device e Picture e Text e Box e Ellipse e Wire Title Bar Menu Bar Tool Bar Picture Image Toolkit Window Box Legend E Title Bar You can move windows by dragging the title bar E Zone Zones are added and deleted using the Zone Manager dialog box You cannot perform operations such as
262. e For example 5 1 DME Designer Owner s Manual 203 204 Chapter 4 Designer Edit Menu This menu provides edit commands i Designer Undo Ctrl z Redo Ctrl Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Delete Del Select All Ctrl 4 Duplicate Ctrl D Display Order b Edit Legend Properties Undo Undoes the most recent edit operation Repeatedly clicking this button will delete multiple operations When Undo is not possible the command will be grayed out Redo Returns to the status before the Undo command was executed If you repeatedly click this button it will redo multiple operations If redo is not possible the command will be grayed out Cut Cuts the selected object Moves the selected object to the clipboard Copy Copies the selected object to the clipboard The selected object remains as is Paste This command pastes the object on the clipboard into the active window If there is no data on the clipboard or if the object on the clipboard is not a type that can be pasted into the active window this command cannot be used Delete Deletes the selected object The data on the clipboard does not change NOTE There are some objects that cannot be deleted with the Delete command Select All selects all objects in the active design window Duplicate Duplicates the selected object The data on the clipboard does not change
263. e but also the effect type is displayed in the submenu that appears when you right click on an SPX Component 01 Reverb Hall 02 Reverb Room Open Component Editor 03 Reverb Stage ct QB out 04 Reverb Plate 0 BY Copy 05 Early Ref ENN uplicate Display Order gt FE 37 Delay gt ER 38 Delay Reverb ace_crteesy E BA E H E Bacicrnar 39 Delay gt Reverb p Recall Component Library tore Component Library I NN 40 Distortion gt Delay Add Component to Component Link SOC ee ye 3 Biase et 8 41 Multi Filter 2 Properties th lt REDA TE death A naa Aa e aea a aa a a ayy lt 6 LS 42 Stereo Reverb 43 M Band Dyna 3606 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Components E Recalling a Library Stored in a Folder Other Than the Default Libraries not stored in the default folder do not appear on the Recall Library menu You must specify the file you want in order to recall it 1 Click the Recall Library button in the component editor The Recall Library menu will be displayed 2 Click the Recall Library menu Open File Dialog The Open dialog box will be displayed Look in E Compressor Stereo ra5 cel fm th32 cel My Recent Documents a us File name laces Files of type Library File cel v Cancel 3 Move to the correct folder and select a library file 4 Click the Open button DME Designer Owner s Manual 367
264. e created at the same size OK Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings DME Designer Owner s Manual 263 264 Chapter 4 Designer Select Font Dialog Box When you click the Font or Label Font button in an object s properties dialog box the Select Font dialog box is displayed Sets the font Select Font Font Font style TE N ormal E Arial Black Comic Sans MS Courier Courier New DME Dot Font 1 Fixedsys Franklin Gothic Medium Renrmnia Effects M Strikeout F Underline AaBbYyZz Script Latin v men Font Selects the font The currently selected font name is displayed in this box Select a font by clicking its name on the list Font Style Sets the style of the text The currently selected style is displayed in the box Select a style by clicking its name on the list below e Normal standard style talic i Italic or slanted text e Bold Bold text e Bold Italic Bold italic text Size sets the text size The currently selected size is displayed in the box Select a size by clicking it in the list below Effects sets effects for the text Check the effects you wish to set e Strikeout Adds a strikeout line through the center of the text e Underline Adds an underline to the text Script From the list select the scrip
265. e objects are displayed in the Device List submenu on the Tools menu or on the context menu that appears when you right click on the sheet NOT C 1 Designer Picture EDME 4io C DMESIES EDMESo ES EDME 4io ES H B Speaker Processor External Device CAS OUT ETHERNET USB E REMOTE SPI GPI OUT ETHERNET us REMOTE ee oo Se ee ee ee eee he amp gt Sf ho UF Ue ee be 2 oe ole mo CAES GT oko FATI pt Poser Weer fey er ee ee Ter ck Pee Me er ee eee OP Wey coer al ers er Wc ey er er or ee ar er Ce ee Oe ee Ee Se ee ee a ae eee re tee Se E dented ated SAD Se Gore ee Oe tins 0 o lal oF atten tee i Tel Let Bh Goce Toolkit window Chapter 4 Designer ee Fee Lome Dees Ports Tait Te ipis bipaty pg Farr Lar E met Fiste Diamo Covet ga im a mei bed herien os Paste Start Wire DME gt Speaker Processor gt External Device gt Picture Text Box Ellipse Device List submenu on the Tools menu or on the context menu Configurations are added using the menu bar Tool menu gt Configuration Manager dialog box Component List Configuration Window The Component List displays objects that can be arranged in Configuration windows The same objects are displayed in the Component List submenu on the Tools menu or on the context menu that appears when
266. e until the next day at 9 59 AM The number of days counted is cleared and a new log file is created when the system goes online or when the Log Setup dialog box is closed by changing the settings such as the number of days or the log file folder and then clicking the OK button Automatically delete log files after _ days When a check is placed here log files exceeding the specified number of days are automatically deleted Specifies the number of days after which log files are automatically deleted Log file folder Specify the folder for saving log files Clicking the Browse button opens the standard operating system dialog box for specifying folders Here you can select a folder Log files are saved with the following file name LOG Start_Date txt lf there is a file with the same name already in the specified folder a number will be affixed to the end of the file name and it will be saved as a separate file Example LOG20040824 2 txt m Display Event Displays events with checks next to them This operates together with the Display Information Display Warning and Display Error buttons in the Event Logger window You can place checks next to multiple events m Display Log Buffer Full Message This applies to DME64N 24N units in all zones When checked if the DME event log becomes full a Log Buffer Full message will appear on the display of the corresponding DME unit E Log List Setup B
267. e 111 becomes too small If this occurs delete unwanted data such as DME File Storage files Library data and scene data to increase the amount of available memory NOT C You can download the latest firmware from the following Yamaha Pro Audio website htto www yvamahaproaudio com DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Program Component Updates the DME SP2060 ICP1 unit firmware NOTE D DME Designer cannot be used to upgrade firmware version 3 5 or earlier to version 3 8 or later or to downgrade from version 3 8 or later to version 3 5 or earlier this does not apply to the SP2060 or ICP1 Contact your Yamaha dealer 1 Select Firmware Update Program Component in the Hardware menu The folder select dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the folder that contains the update file then click the OK button The Firmware Update window will open The names firmware version numbers and IP addresses of DME SP2060 and ICP1 units in the current device group will be displayed in a list NO All connected DME units are displayed in the Device field Firmware Update Selected Folder Firmware Please do not disconnect cable or turn off any device while updating YAMAHA USB OUT 0 1 A AMAHA USB IN 0 1 H M DMES C 2 90f 192 168 000 002 Select All Clear All Update 3 Check the DME SP2060 or ICP1 unit you wish to update Clicking the checkboxes alternately turns the
268. e DME or SP2060 is gathered in the computer and saved as a file Backup files are created for each DME or SP2060 You can also send the information saved in a file to a DME or SP2060 Backup can be performed only when in offline status NOTE If a backup file from a DME unit running firmware version V3 8 or later is loaded into a DME unit running a firmware version earlier than V3 5 the Remote and MIDI control settings will not apply all other settings will apply Backup operations can be performed only by users for whom the Edit security checkbox has been checked The event log can be retrieved from the DME unit in the Event Logger window H DME Groupi Ban DME4io ES0192 168 000 002 DME4io ES DMEG4N192168 000011 OME64N i H SP Groupi ba SP20600 92 168 000 01 8 SP2060 Load Save Close E Target DME The DME and SP2060 IP addresses and types are displayed for each device group Check the DME and or SP2060 units from which data is to be obtained Multiple DME and SP2060 units can be checked E Folder Box specifies the folder that will be the destination for saving and reading operations Clicking the Browse button opens the folder select dialog box where you can specify a folder The backup file name will be the DME s IP address If the folder is specified when sending DME data the file sent to the DME will be the file in the folder whose file name that matches the DME s IP address E Load B
269. e and press lt Ctrl gt key and lt gt key simultaneously recall the previous scene These settings can be changed via the Shortcut keys dialog box page 156 E Scene Name Displays the name of the current scene or scene link E Scene Manager Button Opens the Scene Manager dialog box DME Designer Owners Manual 57 08 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window User Logged On User Currently Logged On Security Button User Name E Currently Logged On User Name Displays the currently logged on user name E Security Button Opens the Security dialog box Current Device Group Device Group Configuration Mute Rx On line Displays the name of the currently active device group Click Y to display a list that allows selection of a different device group i jw OME Group Configuration SP Group Device Group Mute Rx On line Current Configuration Configurationy Configuration Mute Rx Configuration Displays the name of the currently active configuration Click Y to display a list that allows selection of a different configuration E Mute Button Mute Mute OFF Mute ON Turns ON and OFF the DME mute button for the current device group To turn it ON press the lt Shift gt key while clicking If you click the button while it is OFF without pressing the lt Shift gt key the following message will be displayed Click the Mute Button with the Shif
270. e configurations are available the DME or SP2060 configuration layout to be exported can be selected via the Navigator window 2 Click the File menu in the Main Panel window and move the mouse cursor over Export Device Configuration A submenu will be displayed The DME groups and SP groups included in the current configuration will be displayed on a Submenu a DME Designer Ctrl M 1 3 4 mo a t Port Chrl o User Ctrl 5 Save Os Import DME Designer All File Export DME Designer All File DME File Storage Import Device Configuration DME Groupi Export Device Configuration 10 Setupo0 daf 20 Setup06 daf SP troup Preferences Log OFF Exit 3 On the submenu click on the DME or SP2060 from which you will export settings The Save As dialog box will be displayed Export DME Save in B My Documents 7 f e Es A My Music A My Pictures Save as type DME File with wave ddf l Cancel Security ID Password Confirm Password 4 Enter the filename Determines whether a selected file type will be exported along with a wave file 5 Specify the folder where the file will be saved then click the Save button NOT C Library data is not contained in the DME data files exported from SP2060 Refer to SP2060 Library Manager on page 153 44 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Ove
271. e displayed on the list in the Import Export menu commands and on the list in the dialog box If there are multiple examples of the same DME set different names for each so that you can distinguish one from the other Width Box Specifies the width of the object in pixels Height Box Specifies the height of the object in pixels Style Sets the style of the object From the list select Plain Raised or Sunken Label Font Button Sets the font for the label Clicking here displays the Select Font dialog box For information about the Select Font dialog box see page 264 Show Scene Display and On line Indicator When checked the current scene number and name and on line indicator are displayed in the zone window Label Color Button This sets the color of the label text Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box Port Label Color Button Sets the color for the I O port label text Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box Color Button Sets the color of the object Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box NOT C For information about the Select Color dialog box see page 265 DME Designer Owner s Manual 219 Chapter 4 Designer I O Card Allows I O card setup Slot1 Slot4 can be set up for a DMEGAN while only Slot is available for a DME24N No I O card setup is provided for the DME Satellite e Select I O Card Specif
272. e file select list is displayed To add a Wave file select the row to which it is to be added and click the Add button lt is also possible to add Wave files by dragging and dropping the files from the desktop directly onto the list in the Wav File Manager window Wave File The file selection dialog box is displayed where you can select a Wave file If the selected table already has data an overwrite confirmation message is displayed External Input Sets External Input You can select multiple Wave files If multiple files are specified they are added after the selected table If a Wave file is registered to the number being added it will be overwritten The following Wave file formats are supported 48 44 1 24 22 05 kHz 16bit 8bit Mono Stereo If a file is selected with a format different than these a message is displayed that says the file cannot be used There is an upper limit to size beyond which a file cannot be used This limit varies according to the format If the size of the selected file is beyond the limit a message is displayed that says the file cannot be used Maximum Size Per File and Playback Time 3 6 Mbyte 65 sec 7 3 Mbyte 65 sec 7 3 Mbyte 65 sec 14 7 Mbyte 65 sec 4 0 Mbyte 65 sec 8 0 Mbyte 65 sec 8 0 Mbyte 65 sec 16 0 Mbyte 65 sec 7 3 Mbyte 65 sec 14 7 Mbyte 65 sec 14 7 Mbyte 65 sec 25 8 Mbyte 65 sec 8 0 Mbyte 65 sec 16 0 Mbyte 65 sec 16 0 Mbyte 65 sec 25 8 Mbyte 64 sec The
273. e level is below the specified PTT Threshold setting the system determines that the PTT switch is ON and AEC learning is suspended When the noise level is low or a microphone that does not have a PTT switch is used this function can be turned OFF for improved learning performance Mic In meters Display the input levels from the near end microphones these meters perform the same functions as the Mic In meters in the AEC component editor window These meters can also be used to judge the level of noise being produced when the microphone PTT switch is OFF PTT Threshold 80 20 Specifies the base level for AEC learning When the PTT On parameter is turned ON AEC learning is suspended when the input to the near end microphone falls below the specified threshold and resumes when the threshold is exceeded AEC learning will resume when the input level exceeds the specified threshold The input signal level can be checked visually via the Mic In meters Mic Type Fixed Moving specifies the way in which the connected microphone will be used If the microphone is placed in a stand for example and the distance between it and the speakers will not change select Fixed If the distance between the microphone and speaker will vary select Moving Depending on the environment the Moving setting may result in optimum echo cancellation effect even when the microphone is fixed and conversely the Fi
274. e necessary settings for the communication driver installed in the computer If the driver is set up already check the settings before going online see separate DME Setup Manual for details 4 Making Communication Port Settings in DME Designer The port for each device group master can be selected via the Communication Port dialog box If the driver is set up already check the settings before going online Communication Port dialog box page 155 NOTE Slave DME64N DME24N units connected via Ethernet and ICP1 units cannot be set Only USB x 1 can be selected for a DME Satellite unit connected via USB 5 Storing and Checking Scenes When moving online the lowest scene must be stored You can check if a scene is stored using the Scene Manager dialog box NOTE Since the SP2060 has scene preset data this confirmation is not necessary see Scene Manager on page 82 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview 6 Recalling Scenes When going online the scene will be recalled Its scene number must be displayed in Scene Number and its scene name will be displayed in Scene Name If is displayed of Scene Name the scene will be recalled since the SP2060 has scene preset data this confirmation is not necessary When the scene device group display mode is ALL the scene link name will be displayed Select a DME group to display the DME group scene name
275. e offline this button will be grayed out m Close Button Closes the dialog box E Close this window after synchronization Checkbox When this checkbox is checked the dialog window will close automatically after synchronization E Store Project File into DME after synchronization Checkbox When this checkbox is checked the project file daf extension will be automatically saved in the DME unit after synchronization DME Designer Owners Manual 99 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Designer The Designer list displays DME or SP2060 units arranged in the currently valid device group in the DME Designer The unit in the DME Designer is matched with a recognized IP address and they are compared one to one DME Desiener IP Address C ME4io G 192 168 000 004 Device Name DME24N 192168000007 IP Address Select Box DME Name Displays the names of DME or SP2060 units included in the project When multiple DMEs and SP2060s of the same type are arranged in a zone window it is a good idea to change the name of each one IP Address Select Box Matches the units in the Designer with recognized IP addresses Click the IP Address column V button to see a list of the IP addresses of all devices of the same type in the area If the unit is a DME24N IP addresses for all DME24N devices in the area will be displayed on the list If you click the title bar with IP Address written on it pale A W mark appears you can line th
276. e restricted to functions that will not allow them to accidentally change the settings DME Designer is used with one user at a time logged on To change the user click the File menu gt Log Off command on the Main Panel window About Users To use DME Designer you must logon when you start the software Except for the first time the software is started or when separate settings are made for the first time you can logon by specifying the name and password for a user that has been set as the administrator The administrator can build the system as a whole or apply function limitations that let other people edit Administrators or other people that can use DME Designer are called users The user name for the currently logged on user appears below User on the Main Panel window DME Designer A case dat a m THp 7 sy of T Device Group or e O e ort Configuration Mute Rx Tx On line Currently Logged On User Name The default user named Administrator is set to use all of the functions Immediately after DME Designer is installed Administrator is the only user and there is no password set Multiple users can be created When the system administrator creates multiple users restrictions can be applied separately for each one of them A user with restrictions applied can edit using only the functions the administrator enables for him The place to create setup and delete users is the Security
277. e slope is also large The compression ratio of the compander soft is small with a gentle compression The parameters in the component editor are the same CompanderH Mono component editor CompanderS Stereo component editor CompanderH Hex Companders EEN Snare Library Snap Library YETI Store Recall WETT Store Threshold Ratio 46 1 rF o o g n 2 z P J st gt a 10 20 10 54_0 t 6a 30 20 mn cu of Wi 0d 1 o 1 F Attack Release Gain 42 Attack Release i 40 aa 229m 6 66 ro E an 25 65r 6 06 g 30 c gt L 30 60 60 Threshold Ratio Width Wwe rE E 2 ale o nd s0 To O i GR K seyin SELI E 60 Oo GR OUT x 0 LALA Keyln LR ComranderH Mono paly C27leH gt CompdnderS Stereo Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation ee Meter pea epee the output aladi level gt Threshold 54dBto 0dB s S Sets the threshold value __ Compander Curve Displays results graphically The horizontal axis is the input signal level and the vertical axis is the output level Ratio ooo 1 1 to 1 Sets the compression ratio O Width 1 dB to 90 dB Sets the width of the expander Attack O to 120 ms Sets the attack time Release 44 1 kHz 6 ms to 46 s sets the release time 48 kHz 5 ms to 42 3 s The setting range may very depending on the 88 2 KHz 3 ms to 23 s operating frequency 96 kHz 3 ms to 21 1 s Gan 18 dB to 0 dB Sets the o
278. e the entire system The Area window includes one or more Zone windows which in turn include one or more DME or SP2060 units that are used to build a zones within the area Next is the Configuration window where you create the internal configuration of each DME or SP2060 unit Within the Configuration window are the User Module windows where you can assemble often used components into templates the Toolkit window which displays objects used in the other windows as the basic building blocks for sound designs and the Navigator window which lets you grasp the overall status of the system at a glance Zone Window Configuration Window Navigator Window gt EE Pore ati x ty Dhaba hons Conpani ir Pata urte tar B Erato Can arin E edie L Birate Prae I Toolkit Window E Area Window The Area window is used for designing areas which manage the entire system While at least one zone is included within an area multiple zones can be arranged there zones DME Designer Owner s Manual 27 28 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview E Zone Window The Zone window is used to design zones within the area A zone is a more concrete blueprint that includes at least one DME or SP2060 It shows the DME s connections with other devices and the wiring between them You can create multiple zones The DME and SP2060 units and connected devices are arranged in each Zone window creating configurations Configurations Configurati
279. each band 452 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Pan The Pan group contains the following subgroups LCR LR and Surround E Pan Nominal Position Component editors contain the Pan Nominal Position parameter The button for that parameter displays its current setting Clicking the button displays a menu with Center and LR which are used to set the pan O dB reference L R L R Nominal Side j peti Pan LR 2 LR Bete Center Center Nominal Level is nominal when pan is at center position Level is 3dB when pan is full left or right LR LR Nominal Level is nominal when pan is full left or right LCR In the LCR component one input is divided into left center and right outputs The number of outputs is triple the inputs Components are available with 1 2 4 8 12 and 16 channels Double click a component to display the component editor for it The number of channels varies depending on the component but all share a common configuration in the component editor DME Designer Owner s Manual 453 Chapter 6 Component Guide LCR component editor PE Library Store Recall rari Nominal r Position Pan LCR 4 Channel 16641 2739H O to 100 Sets the signal level sent to the center channel in relation to the signal level sent to the L and R channels Pans LB L63 Center R63 L63 Center R63 R63 Sets LR orientation LR Sets LR orientation Oc a ea
280. eat tage DME Designer Owner s Manual 215 Chapter 4 Designer CobraNet Card EtherSound Card If the I O card is a CobraNet card or EtherSound card a CobraNet icon or EtherSound icon will be displayed in the DME object CAS OUT ae ETHERNET ae S Eaa REMOTE m EEEE lt Slot1 gt MY16 Cll PRIMARY O SECONDARY ag L CobraNer lt Slot2 gt MY16 ES64 Eee EtherSound IN ag EtherSound OUT NEXT M E S Stee NEXT MY16 EX OUT Sg t lt Slot3 gt lt Slot4 gt DME block with CobraNet card and Ether Sound card inserted E Object Selection To open a configuration window for a DME object arranged in the Zone window first select it by clicking on it then double click on it If you right click on the object a context menu will be displayed Open Configuration Window Configuration Manager Device Group Manager Synchronization Delete lt Slot gt Duplicate MY16 AE Display Order Recall Scene Flash Unit LEDs Output Level Properties E Scene Info and On line Button DME objects include an object that provides scene info and an On line button Scene Info On line Button The scene info area displays the current scene number and name Click the scene info area to open the Scene Manager window The On line button has the same function as the On line button in the main panel window gt On line Button page 59 216 DME Designer Owner
281. eature Refer to Parameter Link on page 94 for information on parameter linking DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide E Parametric Equalizer When you click PEQ button for the crossover processor it opens the parametric equalizer editor window Here you can make parametric equalizer settings for each frequency band Crossover Processor PEQ editor window Crossover Processor PEQ lt High PEQ Curve Displays the PEQ curve E Type PEQ Select the filter type from a menu L SHELF 6 dB Oct L SHELF 12 dB Oct H SHELF 6 dB Oct H SHELF 12 dB Oct oa o1wi60 Ses he equenoy band wid tor each bard Lo Fieqensy _ 20Het0 20K Seis tne equencytoreachband L can 10810 1848 Sette gainioreachbend Lo ewes onor Tuns ON bypass foreach bend DME Designer Owner s Manual 391 Chapter 6 Component Guide E Compressor When you click the Compressor button for the crossover processor It opens the compressor editor window Here you can make compressor settings for each frequency band Crossover Processor Compressor editor window Crossover Processor Compressor H SEE O Q f HARD Compressor Curve Displays results graphically The horizontal axis is the input signal level and the vertical axis is the output level Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation Output Meter Displays the output signal level o moa mona foenn Co mesm sesnecompessionao
282. eckbox is checked daylight saving time display is enabled The DST indicator will also appear in the Date field of the DME64N 24N display Offset Sets the time offset for the daylight saving time period Start Time sets the time at which daylight saving time will start End Time sets the time at which daylight saving time will end If the end time is the same as the start time check Same as Start Time NOTE Time settings may not register properly if the current time or daylight savings end time is set to within 2 hours of the daylight savings start time or if the current time or daylight savings start time is set to within 2 hours of the daylight savings end time Also events set within 2 hours of the daylight savings start or end times may not be executed properly DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Day of the Week When checked the daylight saving time period can be specified by the day of the week Start sets the start day and End sets the end day as the nth Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday or Sunday of the month For example the first Sunday of April is specified as First Sunday April and the last Sunday of October is specified as Last Sunday October Day specifies the daylight saving time period by day The Start and End day are specified as the day of the month E OK Button Applies any setting changes and closes the window E Cancel B
283. ect a type of Initialization NOTE To cancel the initialization operation select gt Exit Diag Mode and confirm the cancellation Alternatively simply turn off the power to the ICP1 Initialize DME Deletes all user settings except component data The Utility settings will be set to default values Delete All Data Component data will be deleted The Utility settings will be set to default After initialization transfer necessary components from DME Designer gt Exit Diag Mode Leaves this screen and restarts 4 Press the ENTER key Do not turn off the power during initialization Doing so Can damage the device 520 DME Designer Owner s Manual Troubleshooting For the latest information about DME Designer visit the Yamaha pro audio site at htto www yamahaproaudio com A compile error occurs during DSP total resource consumption has Delete unneeded components synchronization exceeded the upper limit The wiring between components is Change the connections so that a single connected from multiple output terminals output is connected to a single input to a single input terminal Using a matrix mixer or similar component gather multiple outputs into one signal Cannot place component Cannot place You are in online status Execute Go Off line on the synchronization screen to go into offline status The Designer window in not in edit mode Place a checkmark next to Edit
284. ect from the ports that are not connected in the configuration window E OK Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box E Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings DME Designer Owners Manual 179 180 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Clock When you click the Clock command on the Hardware menu the Clock dialog box is displayed after the Utility window has been displayed once Here you can set the DME internal clock This can be set only when online The default is the computer date and time The daylight saving time can also be set NOT Does not apply to SP2060 units Send clock data to all devices in the selected device group Date Time 04 22 2007 H 22 9005 4 Hr rir Start time Hr rir End time W Same as Start time f Day of the week Start First Sunday April End First Sunday October C Day Start January E End January E E Date Time sets the date via the left button and the time via the right button Change the values via the up and down arrow buttons at the right edge of the box NOTE gt The date and time display format can be changed via the Windows control panel Regional and Language Options item This will also change the display format for the Utility Event Logger Event Scheduler and other dialog boxes E Enable Daylight Saving Time When this ch
285. ect the set of user defined parameters you will assign your parameters to The four tabs correspond to the pages on the DME unit or ICP1 main screen 4 Click the Parameter box for the function key to which you will assign the parameter A list of parameters included in the current configuration will be displayed 5 Select the parameter to assign to the function key 6 Click the LCD Display box and enter text for the user defined parameter name The LCD Display box can accept up to 23 characters but only eight characters can be displayed in the DME unit or ICP1 main screen When making a user defined parameter name the first eight characters should be understandable Note When making multiple registrations you can save time by first setting just the Parameter box for all keys then setting the LCD Display box names When you enter a user defined parameter name into an LCD Display box and press the lt Enter gt key to confirm it the next LCD Display box down will be selected and you can enter text there immediately DME Designer Owner s Manual 135 136 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window DAW Control When you click DAW Control on the Tools menu the DAW Control dialog box is displayed Here you can make settings for when the DME64N 24N is controlled from a DAW controller This is set for each zone configuration The setting can be made only when in offline status NOT C DAW Control can be set on DME64N 24
286. ed E Device If you click a device a Configuration window will be opened for that unit If that window is already open it will be displayed on top of any other windows E Component Click a component and the component editor will open E User Module The window specified by User Module Properties Double Click Action will open when clicked Components Included in the User Module Click a component in the user module and the component editor will be displayed Toolkit Window The Toolkit displays objects that can be arranged in each design window The displayed contents vary according to which window is active See Objects on page 210 B Ambient Noise Compensator BAmbient Noise Compensator BAudio Detector Audio Detector BAuto Gain Control Auto Gain Control Crossover H Crossover Crossover Processor H Crossover Processor Crossover Processorll Cr ossover Processorll Delay Delay Dynamics Dynamics BEQ p BEQ MGEO G GEQ i Mono Gi l amp Mono iwi Band EE i i li amp Stereo i Gl Stereo G PEQ i BPEQ Fader Fader Feedback Suppressor Feedback Suppressor Filter H Filter Meter Meter Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Mixer H Mixer MBPan H D Pan Room Combiner H Room Combiner Router Router H Source Selector H Source Selector Speaker Processor Speaker Processor DSPX HBSP User Mo
287. ed Click the location where the line should bend then double click at the end location to finish drawing Component List gt TE PEEN ee i F Edit Mode Oe 0 2 8 a E Sheet DME Designer Owner s Manual 287 288 Chapter 4 Designer E Finishing Drawing When the hotspots or already drawn wires are connected drawing is finished To finish drawing without connecting to a hotspot use one of the following methods e Right click the mouse e Double click e Press the lt Esc gt key Drawing also finishes if another window is made active Wire Editing You can delete wires change node positions connect to other wires and perform other wire edit operations E Delete Deleting an Entire Wire Right click the wire then click Delete Wire in the context menu Deleting Nodes Nodes can be deleted by selecting them and pressing the lt Delete gt key Nodes on both sides of the deleted node will become directly connected Selected Node mE Editing by Dragging Moving Nodes You can move nodes by dragging them with the mouse When multiple nodes are selected and dragged with the mouse you can move all selected nodes simultaneously DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Moving Line Segments To move a line segment select the nodes on both sides of the segment and drag one of the nodes E Connecting to Other Wires If you drag a node and lay it over another wire the two
288. ed in the creation of DME audio systems are Components Configurations Preset Parameters and Scenes Components Any independent signal processing block such as an equalizer compressor input output module or external device control object is a Component E Configurations A Configuration is group of components including their placement and interconnections E Preset Parameters The set of parameters for all components in a Configuration is Know as the Configuration s Preset Parameters DME Designer Owner s Manual E Scenes A Configuration and its Preset Parameters are a Scene Composition of scene Scenes Configurations 2WAY MATRIX MIXER COMP LIMITER PARAMETRIC EQ DELAY CROSSOVER 2WAY COMP LIMITER PARAMETRIC EQ DELAY CROSSOVER Scenes999 Components DELAY PARAMETRIC EQ COMP LIMITER GATE DELAY PARAMETRIC EQ COMP LIMITER GATE DELAY PARAMETRIC EQ COMP LIMITER GATE DELAY PARAMETRICEQ COMP LIMITER _ GATE Preset Parameters Example GATE e Attack e Decay e Range e Threshold e Key in e Hold DME settings as well as Configuration and Preset Parameter settings are sent from the DME Designer application running on the computer to the Device Master via USB or Ethernet allowing each device to function as a separate processor independently from the computer It is also possible to keep the DME Designer application on line and control the devic
289. editor Double click a component to display the component editor for it The number of bands varies depending on the component but all share a common configuration in the component editor PEQ component editor i PEQ Stereo EQ Curve Displays the equalizer effect You can change the parameter by dragging the control point with the mouse ai co to 10 dB Sets the input signal level ON OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal oS Type PEQ Select the filter tyoe from the menu L SHELF 6 dB Oct L SHELF 12 dB Oct H SHELF 6 dB Oct H SHELF 12 dB Oct HPF LPF i Ae aie band 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the frequency for each band Gain 18 dB to 18 dB Sets the level of the frequency that will be changed ON OFF Turns ON bypass for each band 416 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide rey r i en p 4 C A i IGCUUOT z OLS JT NAIIJS UOTI Equalizer PEQON ON OFF Turns the PEQ ON Output co to 0 dB sets the output signal level ON OFF Turns output ON E Filter Type Various types of curves are available for changing the level Click the Type button and select the type from the menu e PEQ This is a general parametric equalizer e L SHELF Low Shelving There is no sound attenuation at low frequencies The sound is attenuated at a constant rate from the cutoff frequency towards the higher frequencies The attenuation rate per octave can be set to 6 dB Oct or 12 dB Oct e
290. efore you can delete them E Moving Objects You can move objects by dragging them with the mouse If Snap to Grid is ON in the Grid dialog box the dragged objects will automatically align with the grid You can also move a Selected object using the arrow keys If Snap to Grid is ON in the Grid dialog box the selected object will move from grid line to grid line If Snap to Grid is OFF the object will move pixel to pixel DME Designer Owner s Manual 277 Chapter 4 Designer Changing the Order Objects newly placed on the sheet will be displayed above any previously placed objects they overlap You can change this behavior using the Display Order command on the Edit menu Select the object for which you want to change the display order then select the appropriate command from the Display Order submenu on the Edit menu IF Desiener BS a o Gtr Fi 7 t Fa te I i Los i EH ts Ctri Io Gtr Gtr G Ia a trl 7 gu a ia SEE Ee ci S Delete Del f ree hk F Sig gee ath ek Select All Gtri 4 Otrl D Duplicate CAS OUT Display Order Top ETHERNET sare USB Edit Legend Bottom REMOTE Properties Front E M Back m Extra Device o Cassette CT Top Moves the selected object to the top of the stack Bottom Moves the selected object to the bottom of the stack Front Moves the selected object up one level in the
291. eft of the object on the right Press lt Shift gt F4 to connect the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the selected object and the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the object on the left DME Designer Owner s Manual 283 Chapter 4 Designer E Connect with Bent Line Method 1 From Hotspot to Hotspot Click the hotspot where the connection originates to begin drawing then click the location which will become a node where you want the line to bend Finally click the destination hotspot to complete the connection Method 2 From Hotspot to Node or Line Segment Click the hotspot where the connection originates to begin drawing then click the location node where you want the line to bend Click an already drawn wire node or line segment to complete the connection If you connect to a line segment a node will be created there NOT C A termination cannot be connected to a terminal that will be shorted Multiple connections cannot be made to a DME object s Cascade port i Cascade Input 284 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer E Connect Multiple Hotspots in a Single Operation Method 1 lt Ctrl gt Key Combinations If you hold down the lt Ctrl gt key when finishing dragging a wire will be drawn at all origin hotspots The wire will be connected to the destination hotspot you dragged and those that come after Begin dragging from the connection origin hotspot then press the lt Ctr
292. el Window e To allow project information to be easily reproduced on a different computer it is now possible to export and import all necessary files at once rather than only project files with the daf extension page 45 e A Device Information window that lists the status of all devices has been added page 190 e t is now possible to individually set each user control to determine whether it will open automatically when the project file is opened page 91 e In accordance with the above change the Startup User Control item has been removed from the Security dialog box e lt is now possible to assign Direct Parameter Value to the GPI input function and assign Direct Parameter Value and Audio Detector to the GPI output function page 112 page 122 e An option that automatically saves the project file daf extension in the DME unit when going online has been added page 98 e t is now possible to control internal DME 24N DME8i C DME4io C DME8i ES DME4Io ES head amps from a PM5D or other compatible mixing console page 141 e Remote control from AMX Crestron and similar controllers is now possible via Ethernet connection only for DME Satellite units page 171 e The display format of the parameter values displayed in the Remote Control Setup List and Parameter List dialog box can now be switched between the internal settings and the values displayed in the editor windows page 139 page 147 e The Event Logger wi
293. elected NOT C You can change the position of a partition line by dragging one of the marks on the line in the user control editor Add Button If you set the position of the partition line in the box on the right and click the Add button the partition line will be added and displayed in the Position list e Delete Button Deletes the partition line selected in the Position list DME Designer Owner s Manual 349 Chapter 5 Components mE Color Frame Properties Dialog Box The Color Frame Properties dialog box will appear when you right click a solid frame and select Properties from the contextual menu Here you can enter the text to be displayed Here you can set the frame size and divider location Golor Frame Properties Frame Size Width epee Cancel Line Widths Frame Color Select Color Top Left DJ Ii Right Bottom Select Color Arrows Top Line Left Right None Lett Line Top Bottom None Right Line Top Bottom Mone Bottom Line Left Right None Frame Size The width is set using the Width and the height is set using Height The units are pixels and the minimum value is 3 ESE You can change the size of a frame by dragging one of the marks at the four corners top bottom left right of the frame in the user control editor Line Width Sets the thickness of the lines at Top Left Right Bottom Set 0 to disp
294. em up vertically E Network The devices currently connected to the network are displayed in the Network list To keep consistency with the Designer list on the left side the status of DMEs on the network is displayed Metwork IP Address z 192 168 000 002 DME 64H Device Icon IP Address e Device Icon Displays DME SP2060 and ICP1 devices connected to the network The device group master DME or SP2060 icon is red Icons for slave DMEs and SP2060s are blue DMEs and SP2060s and ICP1 devices with no relation to DMEs and SP2060s in Designer have gray icons e P Address Displays the DME or SP2060 IP address E Message Area Displays a message that synchronization is in progress 100 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Event Scheduler Event Scheduler Dialog Box When you click Event Scheduler in the Tools menu the Event Scheduler dialog box is displayed This sets the scheduling for events You can schedule events by specifying the date time and the action to execute You can set up schedules for events to be executed at a specified time and events that are to be repeated periodically Periodic events are those that repeat each year month week or day Up to 50 events can be scheduled Scheduling can be set separately for each device group Settings and changes are sent to the DME unit during online status scene changes parameter changes GPI output and Wave file playback can
295. en Software Hardware is selected and the DME Designer settings take priority when Software is selected High Sampling Input Format DOUBLE Selects the format for 88 2 96 kHz sampling Mode CHANNEL rates SINGLE Linked to Output Format Double FS ON OFF When turned ON the speed of the MY card word clock output is doubled Only available when the card is set as the word clock master Output Format DOUBLE Selects the format for 88 2 96 kHz sampling CHANNEL rates SINGLE Linked to Input Format pi m orre Sts sotal erernel fore sond siae Mi Bit Length Bit Off sets the bit rate for output Mutes the signal if 16 bit Bit Off is set 20 bit 24 bit Latency sets the delay The parameters will not link immediately when Setting Priority is switched Please edit another parameter after switching Setting Priority 500 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide E MY16 Cll Right click the block and select Open MY Card Editor from the context menu to display the editor for it MY16 Cll Sele Setting from this Editor Disable Hish Sampling Mode In ut Format DOUBLE CHANNEL Output Format DOUBLE CHANNEL Bundle Number Outrut 1 Outrut 2 Outrut 3 Output 4 Serial Channel Rx OFF Tx Bit Lensth Latency Advanced When Disable is selected settings made via the CobraNet network take priority When Enable is selected settings made from the DME Designer take priority High
296. en operation mode and design mode using the context menu that is displayed when you right click in the user control editor user module editor or component editor E Unsayed User Module E Unsayed User Module Snap re 0 Switches between Operation mode and design mode hd T h G im me Grid 10 The Design Mode command switches the design mode between ON and OFF A checkmark appears when the design mode is turned ON If you click in the context menu when the checkmark is present design mode will turn OFF and the edit window will return to operation mode NOTE Only users for whom the Operation Security Edit checkbox in the Security dialog box has been checked can turn the design mode ON NOTE You can select controls in the component editor so that you can copy them into the user control editor user module editor When you want to select multiple objects hold down the lt Ctrl gt key as you click each new object you want to select 358 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Components Context Menu The context menus that appear when you right click in a window will differ in operation mode and in design mode In design mode other commands will be added depending on where you click E Operation Mode Context Menu some commands that are displayed in the context menus for operation mode will also be displayed in design mode Master Volume E Unsaved User Module Snap Snap we eo AET
297. en you right click the Tools menu or on the sheet For information about the Device List see page 201 IF Desiener a og a Gh eee ae ee ee Er op H Ge yi ee oe Ge fh BDME24N EDMEE4N E DMESC EDME S0C EDME 4io C M EDMESES Fm ic i ETHERNET BDMES0 ES Sa eG We mEDMEdioES Ea Mibi o REMOTE a re E EES ICP AIDI TH Speaker Processor he ESP2060 H E sternal Device bn Picture i Text i Box i Ellipse CAS OUT a9 gt ee eee Th TE lt Slotd gt ah LY MYAG AE se eM erie anos T 0 16 E iin aie i o o ee d AES EBU 1 E AES EB DME Designer Owner s Manual 299 300 Chapter 4 Designer mE Placing DME or SP2060 In the Toolkit window DME24N DME64N DME8i C DME8o C DME4io C DME8i ES DME8o0 ES and DME4io ES icons are located in the DME folder and an SP2060 icon is located in the Speaker Processor folder These icons can be dragged to the zone window HD ME fe EEDME24N BDMEBGAN EDMESE C BDMESo C EDME tio C m EDMESES m EDMES0 ES EDME dio ES ICP peaker Processor 5P2060 H BE sternal Device p Picture i Box i Ellipse E ICP Placement Just like for a DME or SP2060 placing an ICP is to drag the icon from the Toolkit window If there are multiple ICPs in a hardware configuration create an equivalent number of ICP objects G DIME bSEDME24N BDMEGAN BDMESi C BDMESo C EDHE tio C BDMESiES i BEDMESo ES E
298. ent Log Save E Reboot If this checkbox is checked the Reboot button can be clicked to simultaneously reboot multiple DME and SP2060 units m Port Displays the name of the connected input output port E Group Displays the name of the device group when online E Network Status Displays the online offline status as an icon E Device Label Displays the name assigned to the DME or SP2060 unit m Type Displays the device type DMEGAN etc E Ver Displays the firmware version number E C ES Ver Displays the version number of CobraNet or EtherSound interface for DME Satellite units E Master Slave Displays the device group master slave setting E IP Address Displays the IP address DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window MAC Address Displays the MAC address Message Displays messages being displayed on the DME unit display panel On the most recent message is displayed Tree View Checkbox When checked slaves are displayed below the master in tree form When unchecked the devices are displayed as a list Utility Button Opens the Utility dialog box for the currently selected device in the list Event Log Button Opens the Event Logger dialog box for the currently selected device in the list Save Button saves the information being displayed as a CSV file Comma delimited text file Close Button Closes the dialog bo
299. ent Log List dialog box This allows selection of the events to be stored in each DME unit Events not selected here will not be saved either in the DME unit or to a log file ee Event Log List Zone Zonel DME OME Group DMEG 4AN Event Bet s External device contral buffer full Information Communication between external AD unit and OME ended Information The power was turned on Infor mation Panel Locked Infor mation Panel Unlocked Infor mation GPI OUT transmitted Port Infor mation Portz Infor mation Ports Infor mation Porta Infor mation Port Infor mation Fort Infor mation Port Infor mation Porte Infor mation Port Infor mation Porti0 Infor mation Port 1 Infor mation Portl2 Infor mation Portia Infor mation Portl4 Infor mation K A A K E E Zone If you click here a list will be displayed Specifies a zone E DME If you click here a list will be displayed Specifies DMEs E Event Selects the events to be logged E Type Selects the event type for each event Information Warning Error GPI OUT specifies the port for event triggered GPI output If the same GPI port is specified for multiple events GPI output will be produced when any of the specified events occurs E OK Button Applies any setting changes and closes the window E Cancel Button Closes the window without changing any settings DME Designer Owner s Manual 79 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
300. enuation Clicking the Slope button displays a menu You can select 6 dB Oct or 12 dB Oct in the HPF or LPF In the crossover that is part of the crossover processor in the stand alone crossover the programmable BPF the programmable LPF and the programmable HPF you can select from 6 dB Oct 12 dB Oct 18 dB Oct 24 dB Oct 36 dB Oct and 48 dB Oct Threshold sets the signal level that causes the component to operate Width sets how much lower the level must be than the threshold level for the expansion effect to begin When the trigger signal level changes by 2 dB with the expansion ratio of the expander set at 5 1 the output level will change by 10 GB In the compander if the width is set at 90 dB the expander effect will be essentially be turned OFF DME Designer Owner s Manual Appendix Options The ICP1 CP4SW CP1SF and CP4SF controllers are optionally available for remote external control of the DME The ICP1 connects via Ethernet while the CP4SW CP1SF and CP4SF connect via the GPI interface ICP1 settings and operation This controller connects to the DME series via Ethernet Like the DME series each ICP1 unit has it s own IP address With a display that replicates the display on the DME series the ICP1 allows comprehensive familiar control from remote locations ICP1 Controls YAMAHA G F4 UTILITY F5 INTELLIGENT CONTROL PANEL CP1 F1 Key When the Mai
301. er Label Box You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object Width Box specifies the width of the object in pixels Height Box specifies the height of the object in pixels Style sets the style of the object From the list select Plain Raised or Sunken Label Font Button sets the font for the label Clicking here displays the Select Font dialog box For information about the Select Font dialog box see page 264 Label Color Button This sets the color of the label text Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box Inputs Outputs Label Color Button sets the color for the I O port label text Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box Color Button sets the color of the object Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box NOT C For information about the Select Color dialog box see page 265 OK Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings DME Designer Owner s Manual 231 238 Chapter 4 Designer SPX Component SPX components are arranged in the Configuration window and the User Module window Component objects arranged in a configuration are displayed in block form Clicking on a positioned SPX component will select it and right clicking will display a contextual menu Unlike normal components SPX components use SP
302. er Module Settings dialog box page 316 Double Click Action Displays the default action when user modules in the configuration window are double clicked Security Settings Displays the security setting for the user module selected on the list Default Library Displays the default library file for newly created user modules E Import Library Button Loads a file from the specified folder into the library E Export Library Button saves the library to a file if Export qC Proeram Files ArAMAHA OPT Tools DME Designer Ge image User Module Compiler C Library wav Designer Splash 9 Editor ul File type User Module Export File ums Cancel Export Library 123 uml Add Library File E Rename User Module Group Button Changes the User Module Group name selected on the list Click this button to open the Rename User Module Group dialog box enter the group name at the Name box and then click OK E Delete User Module Button Deletes the user module selected on the list E Import Button Imports the user module settings and library from the user module export file DME Designer Owner s Manual 315 Chapter 4 Designer 316 E Export Button Saves the user module data component wiring connection library and user module editor data to a user module export file Click to display the Export dialog All features of this dialog window are the s
303. er Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Parameter etting Range Function wa pe O Lo ines imo zaas set to way compression sapea Release 44 1 kHz 6 ms to 46 s Sets the release time 48 kHz 5ms to 42 3 s The setting range may very depending on the 88 2 kHz 3 ms to 23 s operating frequency 96 kHz 3 ms to 21 1 s Gan o 0 20dBto 18dB sd 20dBto 18dB sd 18 dB Sets the output gain 2 Sen Mono SELF Selects the trigger source from a menu The KEYIN currently selected trigger source is displayed on the button On o ON OFF Turns the compressor ON Output Level dB ____Threshold 20dB 7 I I I I I l l l 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 Input Level dB De Esser Compresses the signal above a specified frequency The de esser controls sibilant hissing Sounds included in speech that are produced by the letter S Both mono channel and stereo channel de essers are provided Mono channel de essers have one input and one output each Stereo channel de essers have two inputs and two outputs each DME Designer Owner s Manual 405 406 Chapter 6 Component Guide Double click a component to open the component editor for it The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components De Esser component editor Sndar we cv De Esser Curve Displays results graphically The horizontal axis is the input signal level and the vertical axi
304. er Owner s Manual E SP2060 Data Structure Scene Link Settings Settings required for linked scene operation between multiple devices The information required to switch audio data processing setups Scenes include configurations and preset data The last Library name recalled is specified The Scene Manager facilitates registration and management of scene data Up to 99 scenes can be registered for 12 preset areas and 87 user areas and registered scenes are managed by their scene numbers Configurations A combination of the audio signal processing audio input output and external device control components and their interconnections created to create the desired audio system Local Parameter Link Settings that allow linked operation between similar types of internal Settings SP2060 parameters Preset Parameters The settings for the components in a configuration Audio processing setups can be switched by changing the preset parameters Preset parameters can be recalled by SP2060 units but not edited Library Settings specific to the speakers to be used In addition to the preset data provided settings can be created by the DME Designer DME Designer Owners Manual 7 H One DME unit Device Group External Device MIDI GPI DAW AMX Crestron controlling DME internal head amp 1 i Notes Microphone Input i i Output Power Amp Mixer tem Processor gt Audio signal External Head Amp I i etc m Cont
305. er direction changes so that the proportions of the paper remain the same NO The upper left is the starting point for measuring sheet size Therefore in the Horizontal box set the number of pixels to the right edge and in the Vertical box set the number of pixels to the lower edge The boundaries in which items are already arranged on the sheet will form the minimum sheet size Because any objects that are moved cut or deleted will return to the same location if the Undo command is used the minimum sheet size will be determined by the boundaries in which any objects were located now or in the past 262 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Background Effect sets the background for the sheet e Color Button sets the color of the background Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box For information about the Select Color dialog box see page 265 e Draw Image Button When this check box is checked an image file is displayed as the sheet background You can use image files in the following formats BMP omp PNG png XPM xom and JPEG jog Clicking the Image button displays the Select Image dialog box For information about the Select Image dialog box see page 267 e Change for All Sheets Changes all sheets so that they are the same Save As Default Sheet Size When turned ON the current values will become the default for creating sheets New sheets will b
306. ere the file will be saved E Saving a File with a New Name With the File menu Save As command in the Main Panel window you can save the currently open file with a new filename When saving for the first time this creates a new file A file that has already been saved with a name will be saved as a separate file 1 Click File menu gt Save As in the Main Panel window The Save As dialog box will be displayed Save in YAMAHA bldg 2 e F 123 daf T asd daf Ge projectO1 daf FILE projectO2 daf Ge projectO3 daf File name Save as type Project File daf l Cancel M Security ID Password Confirm Password 2 Enter a filename into the File name box 3 Specify the folder where the file will be saved 4 Click the Save button DME Designer Owner s Manual 37 38 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview E Protecting a Project File with a Password When you save a project file with a new name you can set a password and protect the file If a password is set an ID and password will be requested when the file is opened The security settings for a file cannot be changed by resaving the file with the same name They can only be changed when saving the file with a new name using the Save As command Once set the ID and password cannot be changed To change the ID and password for password protected project files use the Save As command to save the file as a new one with a d
307. ers can be displayed in a scene name When two byte characters are to be used for languages such as Japanese the total number of displayable characters is reduced accordingly When the power is turned on the last scene selected before the power was turned off is automatically recalled User Defined Button Names Displays the User Defined Button The User Defined Button is specified by using the DME Designer application A maximum of 24 buttons can be made available for user control but only six buttons can be shown in any one display page Press the HOME key to switch to other available button pages A maximum of 8 one byte Roman characters can be displayed in a parameter name When two byte characters are to be used for languages such as Japanese the total number of displayable characters is reduced accordingly Parameters are selected for editing by using F1 F2 F3 F5 keys to select the parameter and then pressing ENTER Page Scroll Bar The scroll bar provides an indication of which parameter page is currently being displayed 4 pages are available and the scroll bar moves one position to the right each time the HOME key is pressed and a new page of parameters is selected and then back to the leftmost position after the rightmost position has been reached Appendix Edit Indicator If a parameter is changed after recalling a scene EDIT will appear in the display Mute
308. erties dialog box the line thickness and color can be adjusted as required for the various wires arranged on the sheet Line Segment Selection When you select a line segment by clicking on it only that line segment is selected If you hold down the lt Ctrl gt key while clicking you can select multiple line segments Furthermore if you drag the mouse from an empty location on the sheet so that nodes are enclosed by a box line segments between those nodes will be selected DME Designer Owner s Manual 279 Chapter 4 Designer Canceling Line Segment Selection If you select another object or an empty location on the sheet it will cancel selection of the object you previously clicked You can also cancel selections by holding the lt Ctrl gt key while clicking lt Ctrl gt Click Canceling Selection of a Line Segment Selected with lt Ctrl gt Click E Wire Nodes Both ends of a wire the location where wires bend and the location where wires diverge are called Nodes When a wire object is not selected its nodes are not displayed When a wire is selected the nodes are displayed with a red circle Node Selection When you click on a node only that node itself is selected You can select multiple nodes by holding down the lt Ctrl gt key while clicking Furthermore if you drag the mouse from an empty location on the sheet so that nodes are enclosed by a box the enclosed nodes will be selected Canceling
309. es page 314 Show Signal Delay The digital signal delay value is displayed in the configuration window with sample units gt Show Signal Delay Delay Display Value in Configuration Window page 305 Analyze Displays the Analyze dialog box and analyzes the configuration gt Analyze Configuration Analysis in Configuration Window page 308 Probe Monitor Turns the probe monitor ON or OFF This command can be selected only when a Configuration window or User Module window is active while in online status gt Probe Monitor in Configuration Window page 303 Monitoring Point List Opens the Monitoring Point List dialog box Registers points for monitoring with headphones gt Monitoring Point List in Configuration Window page 306 Edit Mode Turns the edit mode ON or OFF Edit Mode in Editing Configurations page 192 NO Only users for whom the Operation Security Edit checkbox in the Security dialog box has been checked can select this command Sheet Opens the Sheet Settings dialog box Sets the sheet size and background gt Sheet in Objects page 262 Prohibit Diagonal Connections All connections will be drawn with horizontal and vertical wires only Diagonal wires cannot be drawn gt Drawing Settings in Drawing and Editing Wires page 282 Grid Opens the Grid d
310. es in real time lt is possible to use the DME Designer to create Configurations that include multiple devices when the appropriate devices are connected Although it is possible to have multiple Zones in an Area multiple Device Groups in a Zone and multiple Scenes and Configurations in a Device Group only one Area Zone Device Group and Configuration can be active and editable via the DME Designer at any one time The active elements are known as the Current Zone Current Device Group Current Scene and Current Configuration DME Designer Owner s Manual 9 Data Handled by a DME Audio System E DME Data Structure Scene Link Settings Settings required for linked scene operation between multiple groups User Defined Button Settings Settings required for component parameter control from the DME64N DME24N or ICP1 panel Up to 24 parameters can be registered for control Global Parameter Link Settings Settings required for linked operation of the same types of parameters between multiple devices Data Used by the Scene Manager MIDI program Change Settings Settings required to allow scene selection via MIDI commands The information required to switch audio data processing setups scenes include configurations and preset data The Scene Manager facilitates registration and management of scene data Up to 999 scenes can be registered and registered scenes are managed by their scene numbers Configurations A c
311. es the dialog box E Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings DME Designer Owner s Manual 307 308 Chapter 4 Designer Analyze Configuration Analysis When you click the Analyze command on the Tools menu or the Analyze button on the toolbar the Analyze dialog box is displayed The wire connections in the currently active configuration window are analyzed and the results are displayed in the Analyze dialog box Because this function allows you to make sure there are no problems with component arrangement and wires without connecting to the DME unit it is useful for eliminating complier errors before executing Synchronization NOTE The Analyze command on the Tools menu can be selected only when a configuration window is active Message Compile Options Delay Compensation OFF Fixed Wire Delay ON Analyzing OK E Message Box Displays the progress of the analysis operation When the analysis finishes the results are displayed If errors are detected during analysis they will display as shown below Analyze Message Compile Options Delay Compensation OFF Fixed Wire Delay ON Analyzing Error SlotIn Cascadeln cannot be directly connected to SlotOut CascadeOut when using a 64 Input Matrix Mixer m Close Button Closes the dialog box E Progress Bar A progress bar will appear during analysis but in some cases it may not exactly matc
312. esigner Overview Importing DME Designer All Files NOTE Only users with Administrator access can import DME Designer All files 1 Click Import DME Designer All File in the Main Panel Window File menu Since the imported data will overwrite the existing DME Designer settings the confirmation message shown below will appear 2 Click OK to continue with the import procedure or Cancel to abort the import If you click OK the Open dialog box will appear Look in E My Documents e E DME Designer B My Music My Recent Emy Pictures Documents E SetupOl dme F My Network File name Setup pe Places on a Files of type AI File dre 3 Select the DME Designer All file you want to import 4 Click the Open button 46 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview 5 The Save Project File in DME Designer All File dialog box will appear allowing you to save the imported project file For details on saving project files refer to Saving Project Files on page 35 Save Project File in DME Designer All File Save in My Documents DME Designer Bry Music My Recent Ermy Pictures Documents Br setupo1 3 BE setupo2 Desktop My Documents hy Ponpuer z My Network File name Places Save as type Project File dat Cancel a 6 If security is set for the file the Enter ID amp Password dialog box will appear
313. esponse can be improved by dividing the device group See Zone Window page 298 for details on deleting devices from a device group NOn DME and SP2060 units cannot be combined in the same Device Group NOTE All devices in a Device Group must be on the same subnet NOTE A single device group cannot be controlled from multiple computers multiple instances of DME Designer DME Designer Owner s Manual 3 4 The DME Designer Software Application The DME Designer software application provides a convenient central interface for the creation and control of DME based audio systems By connecting the computer on which the DME Designer application is running to a Group Master it becomes possible to control multiple devices simultaneously With DME Designer DME audio systems can be designed and configured via a comprehensive block diagram interface on the computer screen DME Designer pn rh a ca T See Oyl te User ww Zonel BPEQ H B Mono Stereo Feedback Suppressor 4 F ilter Meter i i 1 Channel i L j 2 Channel i La j 4 Channel BE i Channel i 812 Channel i L816 Channel H 2 Miscellaneous Mixer GE Auto Mixer H B uto Mixer I mDelay Matrix E H m2 Input Zone Scene E case2 daf Tx On line ag Compressor DME64NZone1 DME Group Configuration1 2718H A Basasneaiias x FS 48 0kHz The main concepts us
314. etc control the DME Satellite via the REMOTE connector connection NOTE gt Switch the REMOTE terminal setting RS 232C RS 422 via the DIP switch on the rear panel of the DME Satellite Refer to DME Remote Control Protocol Specifications Yamaha Pro Audio website http www yamahaproaudio com DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Internal HA Control Displays sets the connector to be used for internal head amp control From a single digital mixer you can control the internal head amps of multiple DME series units within the device group Set this parameter only on the DME series units that is connected directly to the digital mixer and turn in OFF for other units If the selected terminal was previously assigned to a different function a confirmation dialog will appear The available ports depend on the device DMEGA4N OFF Remote RS 422 Slot 1 through 4 DME24N OFF Remote RS 422 Slot DME8i C DME8o0 C DME4io C OFF Remote CobraNet DME8i ES DME8o0 ES DME4io ES OFF Remote EtherSound OFF Select OFF when this function is not to be used Remote RS 422 Allows a digital mixer to control the DME64N 24N s internal head amps via the REMOTE connector using an RS 422 connection Sloti Slot4 Allows a digital mixer to control the internal head amps via the specified expansion slot Remote Allows a digital mixer to control the DME Satellite s internal head amps via th
315. etes the contents of the scene selected on the list The button will be grayed out and cannot be used when the DME unit is online or when an SP2060 preset is being used If the preset parameters included in a scene are not used in another scene a Delete preset message will be displayed DME Designer If the preset parameters are not needed click the OK button If you click the Cancel button the preset parameters will not be deleted Whichever you click the scene itself will be deleted NOTE C The Cancel button on the Delete Preset message does not cancel the Clear for the scene It merely cancels deletion of the presets Recall Settings Button This button opens the Recall Settings dialog box Recall Safe and Partial Recall Recall Safe and Partial Recall parameters can be set up so that only specified components are recalled or specified components are omitted with a scene is recalled Recall Safe specifies the components that will be omitted i e not recalled when a scene is recalled Recall safe settings can be made independently for each configuration and apply to all scenes that use the same configuration Conversely Partial Recall specifies the components that will be recalled when a scene is recalled Partial Recall sets can be saved for use with single or multiple scenes The Recall Safe and Partial Recall settings are accessed via the Recall Safe and Partial Recall buttons res
316. etwork Display Lock Misc Remote MIDI GPI MIDI Control Fort MIDI Protacal f MIDI DAWTypet C DAW Typer MIDI Channel w fT a Pix E Tx Rx OMNI Echo Program Chanee ON On CFF GFF Control Change ON ON OFF OFF Parameter Change ON On CFF Port selects the MIDI port to be used If the selected terminal was previously assigned to a different function a confirmation dialog will appear The available ports depend on the device DME64N OFF Remote RS 232C Remote RS 422 MIDI USB 1 2 Slot1 4 DME24N OFF Remote RS 232C Remote RS 422 MIDI USB 1 2 Slot1 DME Satellite OFF Remote USB 2 OFF Select OFF when this function is not to be used Remote 232C MIDI data will be received via the DME64N 24 s REMOTE connector using an RS 232C connection Remote 422 MIDI data will be received via the DME64N 24 s REMOTE connector using an RS 422 connection MIDI The MIDI connector is the currently active MIDI port USB 1 USB 2 The corresponding USB port is selected for MIDI input Sloti Slot4 A card installed in the corresponding I O slot is currently selected for MIDI input Remote The REMOTE connector of the DME Satellite is currently active MIDI port NOTE When Remote is selected for a DME Satellite unit be sure to change the REMOTE connector setting RS 232C or RS422 via the rear panel DIP switches 174 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Pane
317. evels displayed on the list will differ according to the security level of the user Click the level to be set for the User Control The selected level will be displayed in the Security Level box e Setting Security for Individual Users Click the User box of the User Control to be changed The user list will appear User Control Manager Master Volume Level 3 User name Mixing Setup Adminis Administrator O Operator Designer X Open User Control at startup New Delete Cancel NO C The users that can be selected will depend on the user security level Click the user to be set for the User Control The selected user name will be displayed in the User box 3 Click the OK button DME Designer Owner s Manual 329 330 Chapter 5 Components m User Security Settings In the Security dialog box in the Main Panel window you can set the user control levels at which to allow or disallow editing and display A user can edit user controls if a check has been placed for that user in the Operation Security gt Edit checkbox User controls at a level equal to or lower than the level set in Operation Security User Control Level will be displayed in the menu For information about the Security dialog box see Security Creating Users and Making User Settings on page 82 User Module Editor The user module editor lets you make a layout of controls for compone
318. ex configuration having an SPX component with an output connected to any other component e Fixed a problem in which the 48V Master indicator didn t light in the AD8HR component editor e Fixed a problem in which DME Designer could occasionally freeze when closing the application by means other than clicking Exit in the File menu of the Main Panel window e Fixed a problem in which parameter links remained functional for parameters of different tyoes which should not be linked after the effect tyoe was changed for an SPX component having linked parameters e Fixed problems in which Scene Store and Recall functions might not work when Parameter Link settings were no longer appropriate due to editing the Configuration E V4 0 Precautions e Use DME Designer V4 0 with DME64N 24N or DME Satellite units running firmware V4 0 or later and SP2060 units running firmware V1 2 or later e Use the latest DME Designer to update the DME firmware to the latest version e DME Designer V4 0 cannot be used to update firmware V3 5 or earlier to V4 0 or later or to downgrade from V4 0 or later to V3 5 or earlier this does not apply to the SP2060 or ICP 1 Contact your Yamaha dealer e The DME firmware V3 8 can be updated to V4 0 using DME Designer V4 0 DME Designer Owner s Manual Contents Getting Started with DME Designer c cc ceecccccseseeseeseenee ees 2 ed VO E kecses eE ia EER 2 The DME Audio System Network
319. ff the filter 12 dB Oct Butrwrth 12 dB Oct Bessel 12 dB Oct Linkwitz 18 dB Oct AdjustGc 18 dB Oct Butrwrth 18 dB Oct Bessel 24 dB Oct AdjustGc 24 dB Oct Butrwrth 24 dB Oct Bessel 24 dB Oct Linkwitz 36 dB Oct AdjustGc 36 dB Oct Butrwrth 36 dB Oct Bessel 48 dB Oct AdjustGc 48 dB Oct Butrwrth 48 dB Oct Bessel 48 dB Oct Linkwitz KI Gc 6 dB to 6 dB When AdjustGc Adjustable Gc is selected for Type this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency DME Designer Owner s Manual 389 390 Chapter 6 Component Guide E Delay When you click the Delay button for the crossover processor it opens the delay editor window Here you can set the delay for each frequency band Crossover Processor Delay editor window Crossover Process SEE Delay Rie Sample F 48 kHz Meter 343 59m s Feet 12 7 26ftis Frame ms O to 500 sets the delay time Sample the range depends on the Fs value Meter O to 171 8 Feet O to 563 6 Frame the range depends on the Frame value Beat the range depends on the Beat value to 0 dB sets the output signal level for each channel ON OFF Turns delay ON ON OFF Mutes the signal for each frequency band Delay Scale selects the units for setting the delay time The selected button will light up and the units in the Delay edit box will change If Beat is selected use the knob to set the BPM beats minute Delay Scale does not support the parameter link f
320. fferent labels for easy identification and differentiation Width Box specifies the object width in pixels Height Box specifies the object height in pixels Style Specifies the object style select Plain Raised or Sunken from the list Show Scene Display and On line Indicator When checked the current scene number and name and on line indicator are displayed in the zone window Label Font Button specifies the label font The Select Font window will appear when this button is clicked see The Select Font Window on page 264 for details on using the Select Font window Label Color Button specifies the color of the label characters The Select Color window will appear when this button is clicked DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Port Label Color Button species the color of the I O port label characters The Select Color window will appear when this button is clicked Color Button specifies the color of the object The Select Color window will appear when this button is clicked Port Style on Zone Window species how ports will be displayed on SP2060 objects in the zone window Audio Port Classic Style Displays all audio ports This command grayed out and cannot be selected for SP2060 objects Custom Port Style Customizes the port display This setting is always used for SP2060 objects e Left Specifies the number of ports to be displayed on t
321. figuration Windows will not affect the current window If Show Unconnected Node is ON it will automatically be turned OFF if the configuration is edited 290 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Adding Deleting and Renaming a Zone At least one zone Is included within an area In the default Area window that zone will be named Zone1 Multiple zones can be arranged in an Area When you click the Zone Manager command on the Tools menu the Zone Manager dialog box is displayed Here you can add delete or rename a zone Zone Manager dialog box i Zone Manager fone List Zone List Lists the zones included in the project To change settings for a zone select it by clicking it in the list Add Button Adds a zone Clicking here displays the Please enter new name dialog box Enter anew name then click OK A zone will be added Please enter new name a Delete Button Deletes the zone selected on the list Clicking here displays the Are you sure dialog box Click the OK button and the zone will be deleted Click the Cancel button and the deletion will be cancelled Ti DME Designer 2 4re you sure A minimum of one zone is required When only one zone remains deletion is impossible DME Designer Owner s Manual 291 Chapter 4 Designer Rename Button Changes the name of the zone selected on the list Clicking here displays the
322. g click No To cancel the operation click Cancel If you click Yes the File Save dialog box will be displayed DME Designer Owner s Manual 29 26 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Names and Functions of the Windows The DME Designer software has several windows including the Main Panel window Designer window Component Editor window Resource Meter window and others Main Panel Window Component Editor Window Compressor TE s li s A M Dh f r r i fr op i I B ee eg 3 MAnbant Noise Congantator IDMES4NZonel DME Group Contiewrationt 3 MAudio Detector 3 tuto Gan Control Ceassower i MCeateows Processor Crossover Processor 0 Poon Combiner gt BRouter MSazce Selector actor Contiguration BOMEGAN Comeressir Comgrettar User Module Petare Tent Box Dlpse A ResourceM x FS 48 0kHz Designer Window Resource Meter Window Main Panel Window Menus and buttons are available in the Main Panel window The current DME Designer environment including the active zone device group and scene the currently logged on user name and the connection status to the DME unit are displayed on the right side of the Main Panel window DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Designer Window The Designer window displays several different windows First among them is the Area window where you can manag
323. g higher frequencies in the signal There are two types of LPF components mono channel and stereo channel Mono channel LPFs have one input and one output Stereo channel LPFs have two of each Double click a component to display the component editor for it The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components LPF component editor to 10 dB Sets the input signal level ON OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the cutoff frequency slope 6 dB Oct sets the attenuation for each octave 12 dB Oct ON OFF Turns bypass ON Output co to 0 dB sets the output signal level 422 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Notch Filter Notch The notch filter attenuates the signal within a specified frequency band while passing frequencies outside that band There are two types of notch filter components mono channel and stereo channel Mono channel notch filters have one input and one output Stereo channel notch filters have two of each Double click a component to display the component editor for it The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components Notch component editor DME Designer Owner s Manual 423 Chapter 6 Component Guide Programmable BPF The band pass filter passes the signal from a specified frequency band while attenuating frequencies outside that band With the programmable band pass filter you can
324. glish characters to display over the object Width Box specifies the width of the object in pixels Height Box specifies the height of the object in pixels Style sets the style of the object From the list select Plain Raised Sunken or Image When Image is selected the Open dialog box will appear Select an image file and click Open to place the selected image as an object Label Font Button sets the font for the label Clicking here displays the Select Font dialog box For information about the Select Font dialog box see page 264 Label Color Button This sets the color of the label text Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box Inputs Outputs Labels Color Button sets the color for the I O port label text Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box Color Button sets the color of the object Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box NOTE For information about the Select Color dialog box see page 265 DME Designer Owner s Manual 245 Chapter 4 Designer Inputs Outputs Sets sets the number of input output ports Enter a number into the Inputs box and Outputs box or set a value using the A and F buttons at the right of each box The maximum of both input and output ports is 64 Edit I O Port Label Inout and output port names up to 100 characters in length can be entered Double Click Action sets the actio
325. gnal Indicates there is an input signal and sync is possible with the current word Lock clock Indicates there is an input signal but cannot sync with word clock clocks are Lock But Not Syne ed different Indicates that there is no DME or SP2060 unit information E Internal Word Clock Cascade You can select one of the following for the word clock 5 x ai i DME64N 44 1kHz 48kHz 88 2kHz 96kHz WC IN IN OUT o DME24N 44 1kHz 48kHz 88 2kHz 96kHz WC IN o T DME Satellite M CobraNet EtherSound 48kHz 96kHz Pe J This settings can only be made when the target unit is offline and the DIGITAL IN is selected as the input signal to the SP2060 unit Clock buttons that are grayed out cannot be selected E Close Button Closes the dialog box NOTE You can close the dialog box using the Close button or by pressing lt Esc gt or lt Alt gt lt F4 gt 178 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Monitor Out When you click the Monitor Out command on the Hardware menu the Monitor dialog box is displayed Sets the monitor output destination for monitoring point or probe monitor NOTE Monitor Out can be set on DME64N 24N units only Monitor Out DME ANGINE SLOT 1 MT 6 Cll Chi 2 E DME From the list select the DME64N 24N where you will be making settings E Drop down list From the list select the monitor output port You can sel
326. gner application E Component Editor Window e Line and Scene Recall tools have been added to the User Module Editor and User Control Editor design modes allowing placement of lines and scene recall buttons page 332 e In the User Module Editor and User Control Editor it is now possible to convert placed sliders to knobs and vice versa page 343 e More options are available for customizing the controls listed below in the User Module Editor and User Control Editor A property dialog box has been added for sliders allowing customization of direction scale color size and other parameters page 345 Level meter size can be customized page 347 A property dialog box has been added for slider level meters allowing customization of direction and size page 348 Knob color and knob background color can be customized page 344 Text background color can be customized page 352 A property dialog box has been added for indicators allowing customization of color and size page 348 E V3 0 Precautions Use DME Designer V3 0 only with DME64N 24N V3 0 or later DME Satellite V3 0 or later and or SP2060 V1 2 or later Refer to the Yamaha Pro Audio website htto Awww yamahaproaudio com details on combinations When combining DME64N 24N and DME Satellite units in a device group be sure to assign a DME satellite unit as the device group master Synchronization cannot be performed if a DME64N 24N is assigned as the device g
327. gnments Select this when you are erasing an already set assignment e Parameter Value Edit Allows the parameter of the component specified in the Parameter field to be changed NOn C Components for user modules are also listed in a hierarchal display but if user module security is enabled the components are not displayed However parameters displayed in the user module editor are displayed here e Scene Change Recalls a scene The scene is recalled even if the current scene and the one changed by the DAW controller are the same When a selection has been made SCENE is displayed in the Label field The last scene Is set in the Parameter field e Scene Increment Sets the scene increment Recalls the next valid scene after the current scene When a selection has been made SINC is displayed in the Label field e Scene Decrement Selects the scene decrement Recalls the next valid scene before the current scene When a selection has been made SDEC is displayed in the Label field e Mute sets all mute Mute is set ON and OFF by the DAW controller When a selection has been made MUTE is displayed in the Label field e Component Changes the component parameters Selectable component names that are arranged in the configuration are displayed in a list When selected the first parameter included in the component is set in the Parameter field e GPI Lock Assigns GPI Lock GPI Lock is set ON and OFF
328. gs Only users for whom the Operation Security gt Edit checkbox in the Security dialog box has been checked can display the Designer window and edit configurations For information about the Security dialog box see Security Creating Users and Making User Settings on page 82 Edit Mode There is an Edit Mode in the Designer window when offline status When the Edit Mode is ON configurations can be edited When it is turned OFF configurations cannot be edited When online the Edit Mode is OFF NOT C SP2060 configurations cannot be edited DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Edit Mode ON OFF The edit mode can be turned on or off via the Edit Mode command in either the Tools menu or the contextual menu that appears when you right click on the worksheet You can also use the Edit Mode button in the menu bar To turn Edit Mode ON click the command placing a checkmark to the left of the command name When there is a checkmark next to the command when Edit Mode is ON clicking the command again removes the checkmark and turns OFF the Edit Mode Edit Mode ON When Edit Mode is ON you can do configuration editing tasks such as arranging objects making connections and changing properties Edit Mode OFF When Edit Mode is OFF you can control the component editor but cannot edit configurations When offline Edit Mode Is OFF NOT C Only users for whom the Operation Security
329. h the progress of the analysis process Also the appearance of the progress bar is no guarantee that analysis will be completed successfully If analysis continues for an inordinately long period of time click the Abort button to stop processing NOT C If the analysis process fails try eliminating unnecessary components and connections and replacing components that place a heavy load on resources with more efficient ones then run the analysis again Once a configuration has been analyzed or compiled successfully subsequent analysis or compilation will run quicker unless changes are made to the configuration Also if you save the project file the analysis compilation data is saved as well DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer User Module User Modules A module treated as a single component that combines a number of other components is called a user module A user module can be arranged in the Configuration window just like any other component User module editing consists of placing the component and making logical connections with wires the same as for configurations Saved user modules are displayed in the Toolkit window and can be used as templates User modules are saved in project files but user module templates can also be exported as files and used in other projects A UserModule folder will be created in the folder specified in Contents Folder in the Preferences dialog box in the Main
330. hapter 2 DME Designer Overview Saving Project Files Project files are saved using the File menu gt Save and Save As commands in the Main Panel window The Save command overwrites the previously saved version of the file The Save As command lets you give a new name to the file before saving it When you save the file with a new name you can protect it with a password E The Save As Dialog Box When you click the File menu gt Save As command in the Main Panel window the Save As dialog box is displayed Except for some Security options this dialog box is the same as the normal Windows dialog box for saving files Up One Level Button Create New Folder Button Views Button 7 pe as type Project File daf m Cancel O Security 9 ID Administrator Save In Specify the folder for saving the file The folder name is displayed in this box Click the W on the right to move to another folder The large box below displays the contents of the folder in this box Up One Level Button Moves to the folder one level higher in the hierarchy Create New Folder Button Creates a new folder in the folder currently being displayed Views Button Changes the way the folder content list is displayed If you click this button a menu appears that lets you change the arrangement and display format of the files in the list O List This box displays the contents
331. hapter 6 Component Guide Click the Speaker Processor Crossover button to open the crossover editor window Speaker Processor Crossover editor window Speaker Processor Polarity 236 Hormal Site Low 3 Spe SeSI SIRES CGrossover4 Low Mid Folarity SAA Hormal a Frequency Hiah Mid Hish Polarity Frequenc Polarity F Bak Hor mal aes Hormal _ HPF 4 LPF LPF HPF LPF WedBy Oc ct edb Oct dB Oct WSdB Oct WedBy0 WSdBO Linkw Linkwit2 inkwitz Linkwitz Linkewitz Linkewitz Gc Fre equen I Go Frequency Gc Frequency Gc Frequen 236 736 SAA SHA 5 A k Ee Gowo Sredker Processor 4 Way Wet c2r21H Ft r ct O q o Polarity Normaljinverted Normal Inverted Inverts the polarity of each output channel Mute ON OFF Mutes the output of each output channel This parameter is linked to the Mute setting in the original window ape 20 Hz to 20 kHz sets the crossover frequency between output channels The display appears as a dotted line when muted LPF Type Thru Sets the roll off slope and filter type for each 6dB Oct octave 12dB Oct AdjustGc The filter is bypassed when Thru is 12dB Oct Butrwrth selected 12dB Oct Bessel 12dB Oct Linkwitz 18dB Oct AdjustGc 18dB Oct Butrwrth 18dB Oct Bessel 24dB Oct AdjustGc 24dB Oct Butrwrth 24dB Oct Bessel 24dB Oct Linkwitz 36dB Oct AdjustGc 36dB Oct Butrwrth 36dB Oct Bessel 48dB Oct AdjustGc 48dB Oct Butrwrth 48dB Oct Bessel 48dB Oct Linkwitz
332. hat frames the elliose This setting can range from 1 to 100 pixels e Select Color Button Sets the color of the line that frames the ellipse Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box For information about the Select Color dialog box see page 265 Fill Color Uncheck this item to make the background of objects transparent When this item is checked the Color button opens the Select color dialog box that can be used to select a background color OK Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Wire Draws lines wires for connecting components and creating shapes For instructions on drawing wires see Drawing and Editing Wires on page 279 First click on an wire object arranged on the sheet to select it then double click the object This opens a Wire Properties window Node Line Segment Termination If you right click on a wire object one of three types of context menus will be displayed depending where you clicked E Wire Object Context Menu Line Segment oA E i Start Wire S N ice ee cokes ope Delete Wire S DESNO Ct arteluw aT pie OF mts K Cu t s ane ME me O A ES Copy RS Bie See She Paes a aere EAA stan ackle mice te ENANA Delete Duplicate Wire Color gt Properties Line Segment
333. he Parameter Link dialog box gt See Parameter Link on page 94 Clock Button Opens the Clock dialog box gt See Clock on page 180 User Control Manager Button Opens the User Control Manager dialog box gt See User Control on page 325 Communication Port Button Opens the Communication Port dialog box gt See Communication Port dialog box on page 155 DME Designer Owner s Manual 99 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Tool Button Large Synchronization Button User Control Button Event Logger Button Show Hide Designer Button Event Scheduler Button Show Hide Navigator Button E Show Hide Designer Button Displays or hides the Designer window mE Show Hide Navigator Button Displays or hides the Navigator window E User Control Button Works the same as the User Control command on the View menu Clicking this button displays a menu Pe New User Control User Control will be display there the user control window will be displayed If you click New User Control the New User Control dialog box opens E Synchronization Button Opens the Synchronization dialog box gt See Synchronization Dialog Box on page 98 E Event Logger Button Opens the Event Logger window gt See Event Logger Window on page 75 E Event Scheduler Button Opens the Event Scheduler dialog box
334. he DME data file and click the Open button DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview E Import Device Configuration Submenu The device groups included in the current configuration as well as the DME or SP2060 units included they contain will be displayed in the Import Device Configuration submenu a DME Designer Ctrl M Chrl o Chrl 5 Save Os Import DME Designer All File Export DME Designer All File DME File Storage Import Device Configuration Export Device Configuration 10 Setupo0 daf 20 Setup06 daf Preferences Log OFF Exit 18 oan ar ee pate User l i SP Group1 DMES C Create Mew Group Greate New select Create New Group to create a new device group Create New DME creates a new DME and imports settings NOTE Only users for whom the Operation Security gt Edit checkbox in the Security dialog box has been checked can import DME data For information about user security levels see Scene Manager on page 157 NOT C If DME data file import was not possible a DME file import failed message will be displayed DME Designer Owner s Manual 43 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview DME Data Export This exports parameters from a DME or SP2060 included in the current configuration and saves them as a file 1 Activates the DME or SP2060 configuration layout to be exported If multipl
335. he GPI terminal can be used to switch the channel source of source Selector Position 4 components Assign the Source Selector component s Position parameter via the Parameter Value Edit function in the GPI IN and GPI OUT fields and set the parameter values Max in the GPI IN field and Threshold in the GPI OUT field to 1 through 4 for the corresponding ports The CP4SW switches will then select the corresponding channel sources and the corresponding switch LED will light Terminal in the GPI IN field cannot be altered If Terminal in the GPI OUT field is set to uF a high level voltage will be output and the LED will light when the Position parameter matches the Threshold setting GPI IN Funcion Parenti Mn Ma ea Port Direct Parameter Value ComponentSource Selector Position 1 1 Position ip Part2 Direct Parameter Value Component Source Selector Position 1 1 Position 2p Pot3 Direct Parameter Value Component Source Selector Position 1 1 Position up Direct Parameter Value Component Source Selector Position 1 1 Position 4p PorS NoAssign i ee ee No Assign Port NoAssign No Assign x GPIOUT Function Threshold _ Terminal Direct Parameter Value Component Source Selector Position 1 1 Pasition ip Port2 Direct Parameter Value Component Source Selector Position 1 1 Position 2P Direct Parameter Value Component Source Selector Posi
336. he area OK Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings DME Designer Owner s Manual 261 Chapter 4 Designer Sheet There is one sheet in each design window for arranging objects The size of the sheet and its background image are specified with the Sheet Settings dialog box This dialog box is displayed using the Sheet command from the Tools menu Make the window where you are going to change sheet settings active then click Tools menu gt Sheet E Sheet Settings Dialog Box iF Sheet Settings S00 x 1200 A4 Portrait 6O0dpi Cancel f Custom Sizes Horizontal apg 800 2420 i Fixed Aspect Ratio Vertical 1200 800 2420 Background Effect Color M Draw Image Change for All Sheets Image Save 4s Default Sheet Settings Preset Size Displays a list where you can select preset paper sizes When you select a paper size numerical values are set for Horizontal and Vertical Custom Sizes set a custom size by specifying the vertical and horizontal sizes of the sheet e Horizontal Box Sets the horizontal width of the sheet e Vertical Box Sets the vertical height of the sheet e Fixed Aspect Ratio When this is checked the relationship between horizontal and vertical is fixed When the value for Horizontal or Vertical changed the size of the oth
337. he left side of the object e Right specifies the number of ports to be displayed on the right side of the object e Edit Port Label and Type Edits the label and type for each port The Edit Port Label and Type window opens when clicked gt Edit Port Label and Type window page 223 OK Button Applies the setting changes and closes the window Cancel Button Closes the window without changing any settings DME Designer Owner s Manual 229 230 Chapter 4 Designer External Device Arranges external device objects in the Zone window External applications can be linked to the devices arranged in the window These links to external applications are set using the External Device Properties dialog box To start the application linked to an external device object arranged in the Zone window first click on the object to select it then double click it If you right click on the object a context menu will be displayed If no external application is linked to the an object no application will start when the object is double clicked sei ihe ym ee ee men ee A P B ea ae f CPSF IC 7 cPasw rere JOE a eaa erecta saben eazy renia ream ssw tne ol einen cipro tie oo EBD copy pADokiiy 8 D000 oo Condenser Microphone T Paste Delete Duplicate Display Order Properties E AD824 AD8HR The AD824 is an eight channel analog to digital converter The AD8HR is an eig
338. he library file If you select the Library List File format only the paths will be saved and if you select the Library List File with data format the actual library data will be saved to the file Click the Cancel button to abort the export operation The Export List button will be grayed out and inoperable if no SP2060 is selected Upload List Button sends the SP2060 library to an SP2060 unit When the Export List button is clicked the Select Device window will open Select an SP2060 and click the OK button to send the library Multiple destination SP2060 units can be selected Click the Cancel button to abort the send operation NOTE The library is not sent to the SP2060 unit until the OK button is clicked even when the SP2060 unit is online It can be sent even when the SP2060 unit Is offline Close Button Closes the window DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Communication Port Setup Click the Communication Port item in the Setup menu to open the Communication Port dialog box In this window you can set the communication port of the master current device to be used by the DME Designer selects either the USB MIDI Driver or DME N Network Driver for the communication port Refer to the DME Setup Manual for driver installation and setup instructions Only USB x 1 can be selected for a DME Satellite unit connected via USB Communication Port Dialog
339. he threshold 122 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window e Scene Change The recall status of the specified scene Is transmitted via GPI output Parameter specifies the scene for which the recall status is to be output Threshold and Polarity are not available Terminal determines how the GPI voltage will be output in response to parameter changes When the current scene Is the same as the scene specified by Parameter the output will be high and when different the output will be low When the current scene Is the same as the scene specified by Parameter the output will be low and when different the output will be high A pulse will be output when the current scene is the same as the scene specified by Parameter A pulse will be output when the current scene is the same as the scene specified by Parameter e GPI Lock The GPI Lock status is transmitted via GPI output Parameter Threshold and Polarity are not available Terminal determines how the GPI voltage will be output in response to parameter changes When GPI Lock is ON the output will be high and whe when OFF the output will be low When GPI Lock is ON the output will be high and when OFF the output will be low e Direct Parameter Value GPI output is produced when a component parameter reaches a specified value Parameter sets the parameter name Threshold sets the parameter value Polarity is unavailable
340. heck the appearance of the page before printing it Print Displays the Print dialog box Close Closes the print preview window Arranging Objects Multiple object placement methods are available E Dragging from the Toolkit Window You can drag items from the Toolkit window to the location where you want to place them in each design window E Double Clicking an Object in the Toolkit Window You can double click an object in the Toolkit window to place it in each design window E Selecting from the Tools Menu Available objects are displayed on the Area Parts List Device List Component List submenus which are accessed from the Tools menu When you click an object name the mouse pointer changes shape Click the location on the sheet where you want to place the object E Selecting from the Context Menu If you right click on the sheet you will see the Area Parts List Device List Component List commands displayed on the context menu that appears When you click an object name on the submenu the mouse pointer changes shape Click the location on the sheet where you want to place the object DME Designer Owner s Manual 275 276 Chapter 4 Designer Device Group Selection When laying out DME SP2060 and ICP1 objects the Device Group and Sampling Frequency will be showing mE Device Group and Sampling Frequency Settings Window Device Group and Sampling Frequency Settings Gro
341. heckboxes E OK Button Enters the settings and closes the dialog box E Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without entering the settings DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Scene Link Manager Either click the Scene Link Manager item in the Tools menu or the Scene Link button the Scene Manager window to open the Scene Link Manager window Scene Link Manager Window This window allows setup and recall of scene linking between DME groups and SP2060 units Scene linking makes it possible to simultaneously recall scenes on multiple DME groups and or SP2060 units Up to 999 scene link setups can be specified NOT C Only users with security status in which Edit is checked can edit this feature This is a DME Designer feature and it does not affect scene recall or store operations carried out from the device panel or external devices Names and Functions TE Scene Link Manager Scene Link Scene MHo 5 001 SceneLink 001 SP Groupt L SP2060 013 Scene 013 P OLASPSNG0 013 Scene 013 SP Group LSP206003 013 Scene 013 P OLASPSNG0 O19 Scene 013 DME Group 001 Scene 001 EDME Group 002 Scene O02 4 002 SceneLink 002 HSP Groupi i be SP2060 O14 Scene 014 FL SP2060 014 Scene 014 4 SP Groupe Move UP LSP206003 O14 Scene O14 SECS ate LWSPS060 014 Scene 014 i DME Groupi 002 Scene 002 if Scene Manager E Scene Link Tree
342. hierarchal display but if user module security is enabled the components are not displayed However parameters displayed in the user module editor are displayed here DME Designer Owners Manual 139 140 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Min Max Displays the minimum and maximum values for the parameter Type selects a fader curve when level etc is select for Parameter select dB to directly control the level in dB or Curve Table to use one of the DME fader curves for level adjustment Clear Button Clears the selected row String Display Numeric Buttons switches the parameter value display format string Display The value displayed in the editor windows Numeric The internal value OK Button Applies any setting changes and closes the window Cancel Button Closes the window without changing any settings DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Internal HA Control The gain and phantom power 48V of the DME24N DME8i C DME4io C DME8i ES DME4i0 ES internal head amplifiers can be controlled from a PM5D and LS9 or other compatible mixing console The digital mixer communicates serially with one DME unit in a device group and that DME unit controls all other DME units in the group Only one DME unit in a device group may be connected to a digital mixer for direct serial communication This can be a DME unit other than the group master or a DME unit that does not have head amplifiers
343. hile the SP2060 has 12 preset memories and 87 user memories The preset memories are read only while settings and changes can be stored to the user memories as required NOTE Security for the Logged On User The currently logged on user can store recall or edit scenes that have a security level equal to or lower than his or her own User security levels are set with the Edit Store Recall Edit item in the Security dialog box There is no OK button or Cancel button in the Scene Manager dialog box To close the dialog box click the Close button at the upper right of the dialog box Changes from storing recalling scenes or editing such as changing names or contents will be applied immediately With the dialog box open you can make the Designer window active and add components or change parameters DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Names and Functions Copy Button Insert Button Cut Button Paste Button Clear Button Recall Settings Button mA Scene Manager Cut Copy Paste Insert Clear Recall Settings Del Store New Del Unused DME Group Scene No Name Configuration Edit Security Recall Security Fade Fade Mode Fade Time Protect Partial Recall 101 Scene 001 Configuration Level 1 Levelt OFF All 00s OFF No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Da
344. his ON the fader moves gradually to the position after the jump If you turn this OFF it immediately jumps to the parameters saved in the recalled scene Frequency Sets a frequency In the de esser this sets the lowest frequency of the signal to be compressed when the component is operating In the BPF HPF and LPF filters this sets the cutoff frequency In the graphic equalizer it is also used as the frequency band button Gain Sets the amplification factor for the entire signal level Gain Correct In the Auto Mixer automatically controls the output level for the number of open channels In situations where multiple microphones are used feedback may occur because many channels are open at the same time Feedback can be avoided by using gain correct Hold Hold Time sets how long the gate stays open or the ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold level Keyin Turns an input signal connected to a component s Keyln port into a trigger that activates the component You can select the trigger source in components that have Keyln ports Knee In compressors de essers and expanders sets the way in which compression or expansion will be applied after the signal exceeds the threshold The following range of settings is available HARD 1 273g If Hard is set the signal level changes to a straight line following the specified slope when the trigger signal exceeds the threshold If a v
345. ht part of the Save User Module dialog box They correspond to the same items in the User Module Properties dialog box When saved with different settings than the User Module Properties dialog box the saved settings are immediately applied E Double Click Action Initial setting of the window that opens when you double click on a user module placed in the component editor Open User Module Design Window Opens the User Module Design window Open User Module Editor Opens the User Module editor E Security Settings Initial settings of user module security Enable Security Enables user module security If you place a checkmark here the Set Password dialog box appears Enter the same password into the Password box and Confirm Password box and click the OK button Set Password Password Confirm Password DME Designer Owner s Manual 311 312 Chapter 4 Designer Set Password Button Changes the password Clicking here displays the Inout Password dialog box Enter the current password and click the OK button The Set Password dialog box will be displayed Enter the same password into the Password box and Confirm Password box and click the OK button Input Password Password Default Library Specifies the library file to be imported when creating a user module from a template Refer to Library on page 364 for information User Module Gr
346. ht channel analog to digital converter that features a head amp with high quality sound You can connect Yamaha AD824 and AD8HR A D converters to a DME unit and control them remotely from DME Designer DME Designer has a component editor for controlling AD824 and AD8HR units If you arrange an AD824 or AD8HR from External Device in the Zone window select the connected DME unit in the properties dialog box and double click on an AD824 or AD8HR block the component editor is displayed If a DME is not selected in the properties dialog box the component editor will not be displayed even if you double click DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer E External Device Object Context Menu Open Component Editor starts the application assigned to the object For the AD824 and AD8HR it opens the component editor Cut Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard Copy Copies the selected object to the clipboard Paste Pastes the object that is on the clipboard Delete Deletes the object you clicked on Duplicate Duplicates the object you clicked on Display Order Changes the display order of the objects according to a command in the submenu Properties Displays the External Device Properties dialog box At the lowest position below External Device AD824 and AD8HR display the Serial Controlled Device Properties dialog box The other objects display the
347. hu Fro Sat J 1 2 345678 C Day 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 a 29 3 3 Z Today 10 28 2005 fe Yea 20 o A C Month Janay week First week C Dap of the week Sunday Hour 00 The available settings will depend on the event cycle e When the event cycle is Year Only the Year setting is available e When the event cycle is Month Only the Month and Week setting is available e When the event cycle is Week Only the Month Week and Day settings are available e When the event cycle is Day Only the Month Week Day and Day of the week settings are available e When the event cycle is Hour Only the Month Week Day Day of the week and Hour settings are available DME Designer Owner s Manual 107 108 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Wav File Manager When you click Wav File Manager on the Tools menu the Wav File Manager dialog box is displayed Here you can manage playback settings for Wave files played in the Wav File Player This is set for each DME The setting can be made only when in offline status Up to 100 Wave files can be managed lf a Wave file is added that exceeds the memory limit a warning message will be displayed NOTE Does not apply to SP2060 units These settings can be edited only by users for whom the Edit checkbox in the Security dialog box has been turned ON Only Wave files with file names of 31
348. ialog box Displays or hides the grid and sets the grid spacing gt Grid in Design Window Shared Settings and Operations page 270 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer E Arrow The mouse cursor appears as crosshairs and can be used to select objects mE Hand The mouse cursor appears as a hand shape and can be used to click and grab the worksheet for scrolling E Show Unconnected Node Displays unconnected nodes gt Show Unconnected Node page 290 E Export DXF Exports the information in the active window and saves it as a DXF file which is compatible with CAD software sold by other companies gt Exporting the Design Window in Design Window Shared Settings and Operations page 271 E Preferences Displays the Preferences dialog box Sets the line thickness and the design window edit operations gt Preferences in Design Window Shared Settings and Operations page 268 Window Menu Arranges multiple windows The lower part of the menu displays the names of currently open windows A checkmark appears next to the active window When you click the name of a window that window becomes active Cascade Tile m 1 fone a EDMEOAN 2 New Area E Cascade Displays the windows overlapping one another E Tile Displays the windows arranged side by side DME Designer Owner s Manual 209 Chapter 4 Designer Objects
349. ication Port List TxA Network Setup Yamaha DME NWETWORK 1 amaha DME NWETWORE 1 Master Slave fe Master IP Address 192 asl 168 0 a 3 Master ID 192 B 168 0 ial 2 Link Mode 10Base T 100Base Tx MAC Address 00 AO DE 2515 4E Cancel mE Communication Port List Tx Rx selects the communication port for the device to be set up E Master Slave Displays and sets whether the DME or SP2060 unit connected to the port specified by the Communication Port dialog box is the device group master or slave DME Designer Owner s Manual 165 166 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E IP Address Displays and sets the IP address of the DME or SP2060 unit connected to the port specified by the Communication Port dialog box NOTE gt If the IP address of the DME device is changed after the device has been synchronized with DME Designer it will be necessary to re transfer the configuration data The Full Resync operation forces a re transfer of all configuration data and can be initiated by clicking the Go On line button while holding down the Ctrl key If the device group master IP address is changed and you are using the DME N Network Driver quit the DME Designer and then restart it after changing the DME N Network Driver settings The subnet mask is fixed at 255 255 255 0 Always use a local address 192 168 0 2 through 192 168 255 253 unless it is absolutely necessary to use a global address
350. id High Set the attenuation curve for the lowest band and the middle bands with the Low Pass Filter LPF and High Pass Filter HPF and the highest band with HPF Each frequency band has its own color with Low being red Mid being green and so on These correspond to the colors of the lines on the graph E Crossover When you click the Crossover button for the crossover processor It opens the crossover editor window Crossover Processor Crossover editor window Crossover Processor Crossover4 Hish Mid DME Designer Owner s Manual Crossover Curve Displays the level of each frequency channel distinguished by color Chapter 6 Component Guide 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the cross frequency between each frequency band 6 dB to 6 dB Type Thru 6 dB Oct 12 dB Oct AdjustGc ilter 12 dB Oct Butrwrth 12 dB Oct Bessel 12 dB Oct Linkwitz 18 dB Oct AdjustGc 18 dB Oct Butrwrth 18 dB Oct Bessel 24 dB Oct AdjustGc 24 dB Oct Butrwrth 24 dB Oct Bessel 24 dB Oct Linkwitz 36 dB Oct AdjustGc 36 dB Oct Butrwrth 36 dB Oct Bessel 48 dB Oct AdjustGc 48 dB Oct Butrwrth 48 dB Oct Bessel 48 dB Oct Linkwitz Sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type THRU turns off the filter When AdjustGc Adjustable Gc is selected for Type this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency HPF Type Thru Sets the attenuation for each octave and the 6 dB Oct filter type 12 dB Oct AdjustGc THRU turns o
351. ies dialog box select a DME object then click the Properties command on the Edit menu Here you can set DME properties ie DAME Fevice Proper lee Labet Sy wet fia H Heh fg H Styl Plari Label Font Lipkes Gal Port Label Color Farn VO Gard Sake LA Card Rink rors fe Show Scene Dieplay and Crreline Indicator fe Stow Sacre Dopisy and On line baisi Card Late LAG Gard wa rere a e id rere s Pot Stele on Dons Birde Feri Style on cores Auni f Guclomes Pwi Style Edit Port G Gaatomece Port Dire C hudo Pork Wacce Sylt ida Port Edit Port Label and Type Port Label ard Type Edit Por Lali Caspi tkir fr Aspource C Fosi Geka Fi DME24N if DME Device Properties Label ES i603 Height 50 4 Plain zl MV Show Scene Display and On line Indicator Width Style Port Style on Zone Window C Audio Port Classic Style Edit Port Label and Type Customize Port Style Edit Port Left Right 12 S 15 S Compile Priority Resource C Fixed Delay Auto Delay Compensation DME Satellite DME Designer Owner s Manual P Aulo Port Cissi Biyi Edit Port Labi and Tic Crise I Stow Gescede Port on Gonigustion Window Carga behi DME64N Cancel Chapter 4 Designer Label Box You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object NOTE C The name set in the Label box will b
352. ies the type of I O card If you are using I O cards other than Mini YGDAI cards manufactured by Yamaha and those cards do no appear in the card list select MY Others e Card Label I O card names having up to 100 characters can be entered here Port Style On Zone Window specifies how the DME ports appear in the zone window e Custom Port Style Customizes the port display Left sets the number of ports to be displayed on the left Right sets the number of ports to be displayed to the right e Audio Port Classic Style Displays all audio ports e Edit Port Label and Type sets the label and type for each port Click to display the Edit Port Label dialog gt See Edit port Label and Type dialog box on page 223 Compile Priority Here you can make compile settings for the configuration e Resource Compiles arrangable components in order based on their component numbers The Delay values differ depending on the signal lines e Fixed Delay Fixes the Delay value number of Samples for the signal lines However it also reduces the number of components that can be arranged Auto Delay Compensation This turns ON or OFF a function that automatically corrects the component delay when Fixed Delay is selected NOTE Auto Delay Compensation will not function properly in configurations that have a loop connection 220 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Cascade Turns the DME 64N casc
353. ifferent name 1 Click File menu gt Save As in the Main Panel window The Save As dialog box will be displayed 2 Place a checkmark for Security in the file save dialog box 3 Enter an ID into the ID box The name of the currently logged on user will be automatically entered into the ID box To change it enter another ID into the box When using Save As to save a password protected file the dialog box will be displayed with the ID and password boxes automatically filled in with the ID and password that were assigned to the original file To change the ID and password enter new ones into the boxes 4 Enter the desired password into the Password box You can enter up to 256 alohanumeric characters for the password The characters you enter will be displayed as asterisks in the Password box 5 Enter the same characters into the Confirm Password box as were entered into the Password box The characters you enter will be displayed as asterisks in the Password box 6 Click the Save button Save in O YAMAHA bldg F 123 daf F asd daf F project01 daf Br project02 daf TE projectO3 daf File name yamaha Save as type Project File daf v Cancel V Security ID Administrator Password Confirm Password When saving a password protected file without changing the name the same ID and password will be set the ID and password cannot be changed Using the Save
354. ill be grayed out and the Main Panel window On line button will light up At this point if the Store Project File into DME after synchronization item is checked the project file will be automatically transferred to the DME unit and stored And if the Close this window after synchronization item is checked the window will close automatically NOT C It may not be possible to go online if a scene has not been stored when Recall Safe is selected Group DME Group Device Group DME Designer Network Configuration IP Address Mute Rx DME4io G 192 168 000 004 gma 192 169 000 004 DME4io C DME24N 192 168 000 007 maa 192 169 000 007 DME24N Message Clear Zone ID lt Success gt Write Zone ID lt Success gt Synchronize Zone lt Success gt Recall Scene No 1 lt Success gt Get Word Clock Fs lt Success gt Get Word Clock Fs lt Success gt Start Event Logger lt Success gt Start Event Scheduler lt Success gt Start Wave Manager lt Success gt Start Monitoring Point List lt Success gt Get Component Preset DME4io C Setup lt Success gt Get Component Preset ODME24N Setup lt Success gt Transmission complete a Pe WV Close this window after synchronization j Store Project File into DME after synchronization To go off line click either the On line button in the main panel window or the Go Off line button in the Synchronization dialog box NOT C If the IP address
355. in the current device group and the DME or SP2060 data then the communication status changes to online Transmits data from the DME Designer to the DME or SP2060 unit and synchronizes the two DME Designer lt Device button Data from the DME or SP2060 unit is read into DME Designer Current data stored in the DME or SP2060 unit such as scenes are read into DME Designer The configurations in the DME unit and DME Manager must identical to allow synchronization If the configuration has been edited synchronization can only be achieved by using the DME Designer gt Device button SP2060 configurations cannot be edited so synchronization is always possible NOTE If the IP address of the DME device is changed after the device has been synchronized with DME Designer it will be necessary to re transfer the configuration data The Full Resync operation forces a re transfer of all configuration data and can be initiated by clicking the Go On line button while holding down the Ctrl key For details on backing up the DME or SP2060 data as a file refer to Backup on page 183 Project files can also be saved internally in the DME unit using the DME File Storage function page 70 Synchronization to DME or SP2060 units requires a project file We recommend saving the project file to the DME unit itself to ensure that the file is always available E Go Off line Button Clicking this button changes from online to offline Whil
356. in the toolbar or from the Tools menu The hand tool can also be temporarily selected by holding the spacebar on your keyboard e Window magnification and reduction can now be controlled via the mouse wheel while holding the keyboard Ctrl key e Horizontal scrolling can be controlled via the mouse wheel while holding the keyboard Shift key e The Edit Mode on off can now be changed from the tool bar page 192 e Scene information now appears in DME objects and the Scene Manager can be launched from the scene information display page 82 e An On line button has been added to DME objects and synchronization is now possible page 59 e Sampling frequency display has been added to the resource meter window page 196 e Sampling frequency display has been added to the configuration window status bar page 301 e The sampling frequency is now displayed during analysis DME Designer Owner s Manual e Double clicking the component name now opens the properties window e Organization of the Tool Kit window has been changed page 198 e A Draw Image checkbox that displays or hides the worksheet background image file has been added to the Sheet properties page 263 e Configuration Manager has been added to the contextual menu that appears when a DME or SP2060 object is right clicked page 217 page 226 e Recall Component Library and Store Component Library now appear in the contextual menu that appears when a com
357. ine E Offline The communication status becomes offline when editing configurations E Switching Between Online and Offline You can switch between online and offline in the Synchronization dialog box NOTE For information about the online procedure see Online page 50 DME Designer Owner s Manual 97 98 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Synchronization Dialog Box When you click the Synchronization command on the Tools menu the Synchronization dialog box is displayed The data from the current device group in the Designer is synchronized with the DME or SP2060 unit Here you can make settings for synchronizing the unit in DME Designer one on one with the DME or SP2060 that actually exists on the network NOTE When synchronization is executed the connections components and other data are automatically checked as part of the compilation process A progress bar will appear during compilation but in some cases It may not exactly match the progress of the compilation process Also the appearance of the progress bar is no guarantee that compilation will be completed successfully If compilation continues for an inordinately long period of time click the Abort button to stop processing Try eliminating unnecessary components and connections and replacing components that place a heavy load on resources with more efficient ones then compile again NOTE The Analyze function page 308 can be used to
358. ing Wire drawing starts at the positions shown in the following table il mes pore Wire End Terminal Right click gt click Continue Wire on the menu Right click gt click Start Wire on the menu Line Segment Right click gt click Start Wire on the menu Anywhere on the Sheet Right click gt click Start Wire on the menu NOT C When creating diagrams the keyboard cursor keys can be used to move the mouse cursor and the lt Enter Key can be used to create nodes 282 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer E Connecting Hotspots with Hotspots Method 1 Clicking Click the hotspot where the connection originates to begin drawing then click the destination hotspot The two hotspots will be connected by a wire NOTE A termination cannot be connected to a terminal that will be shorted Multiple connections cannot be made to a DME object s Cascade port When creating diagrams horizontally aligned hot spots can be automatically connected by pressing the lt Shift gt lt gt gt keys or lt Shift gt lt lt gt keys Method 2 Dragging Drag from the origin hotspot to the destination hotspot NOTE A termination cannot be connected to a terminal that will be shorted Multiple connections cannot be made to a DME object s Cascade port Using Shortcuts Press the F4 key to connect the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the selected object and the uppermost open hot spot to the l
359. ing here displays the Input Password dialog box Enter the current password and click the OK button The Set Password dialog box will be displayed Enter the same password into the Password box and Confirm Password box and click the OK button T Input Password Password ores DME Designer Owner s Manual 317 Chapter 4 Designer m Default Library specifies the library file to be imported when creating a user module from a template Refer to Library on page 364 for information mE User Module Group sets the user module group To change the user module group check the Save in New User Module Group checkbox and enter the name of the new group in the User Module Group Name field NO User module groups cannot be changed to an existing group If the user module group is changed without changing the user module name no libraries can be referenced To use a new library you will also need to change the user module name E OK Button Applies the settings and closes the dialog box E Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing any settings 318 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Editor Window Component Editor Window Component parameters are edited in the component editor The same component can be placed multiple times on the same sheet in a Configuration or User Module window If there are multiple examples of the same component in a configuration window or user
360. ing the Event Scheduler function page 139 e Parameters in the current configuration can now be listed on the display and printed out by using the Parameter List function page 144 e The Wav File Manager can manage Wave files played by the Wav File Player page 151 e Settings can be made by the DAW Control function that are used for controlling DMEs from a DAW controller page 157 e DME unit data can now be saved as a backup file by using the Backup function page 157 Designer Window e The port name display can now be switched between long name display and short name display page 206 e DMEGAN cascade connections can now be set page 221 e Priority items can now be set when compiling configurations by using the Compile Priority function in the Preferences dialog box page 220 e Delay time can now be displayed for each component by using the Show Signal Delay function page 305 e Monitoring points can now be edited by using the Monitoring Point List dialog box page 306 e The status of connections in a configuration can now be analyzed in advance by using the Analyze function without connecting the DME unit page 308 e You can now set the action that occurs when you double click a user module object You can also turn user module security ON or OFF and set a password page 246 e Libraries with component parameters saved in them can now be recalled from the context menu for a component objec
361. ing type frequency EQ peaking ype gai EQ peaking ype bandwidth Delay Delay o O to 1000 0 ms Delay time FB Gain 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback 1to 10 Pitch shift precision Pitch 1 24 to 24 semitones Channel 1 pitch shift 50 to 50 cents Channel 1 pitch shift fine Pitch 2 24 to 24 semitones Channel 2 pitch shift 50 to 50 cents Channel 2 pitch shift fine Level 1 Channel 1 level plus values for normal phase 100 to 100 minus values for reverse phase L63 to R63 Channel 1 pan 100 to 100 Channel 2 level plus values for normal phase minus values for reverse phase L63 to R63 Channel 2 pan Delay 1 0 0 to 1000 0 ms Channel 1 delay time FB Gain 1 99 to 99 Channel 1 feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback are 2 0 0 to 1000 0 ms Channel 2 delay time Channel 2 feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback modulation phase difference DST Type DST1 DST2 OVD1 OVD2 Distortion type DST distortion OVD overdrive CRUNCH DME Designer Owner s Manual 475 476 Chapter 6 Component Guide Parameter setting Range F AMP Type Amp Simulate One input two output guitar amp simulator U UTICUOTI STK M1 STK M2 THRASH Guitar amp simulation type MIDBST CMB PG CMB VR CMB DX CMB TW
362. ing will be assigned to it E Clear All Button Clears all parameter change assignments DME Designer Owner s Manual 131 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window User Defined Button User Defined Parameters User Defined Parameters Parameters that the user can operate using function keys lt F1 gt through lt F6 gt in the DME64N 24N unit or ICP1 are called User Defined Button Frequently changed parameters can be assigned in advance to any of 24 four pages times six presets and operated on the DME64N 24N unit or ICP 1 even if DME Designer is not being used This function sets parameters in DME Designer that can be called by these function keys lt F1 gt through lt F6 gt In DME Designer user defined parameter settings are made using the User Defined Button dialog box The user defined parameter settings are shared between device group configurations User Defined Button Dialog Box When you click User Defined Button in the Tools menu the User Defined Button dialog box is displayed NOTE Does not apply to SP2060 units E Names and Functions Ps User Defined Button DME Group LCD Displa Function Parameter Fi Comp n Compr Parameter Value Edit DME4H Component CompanderH h 1 1 0n OFF F2 SceneCha SceneChanee Scene Change 001 BGM_Contral E Group Select the device group to be set up from the list m 1 2 3 1 4 Tabs Switches the set to which settings will appl
363. ink noise Outputs a pink noise burst signal DME Designer Owner s Manual 429 Chapter 6 Component Guide Wav File Player The Wav File Player is a component for playing Wave files Only one Wav File Player component can be arranged for each single DME unit Add Wave files via the Wav File Manager page 108 NOTE If you switch the effect type for SPX components while playing Wave file by Wav File Player drop outs in the sound played in the Wav File Player may occur NOTE gt When a Wave file is played back while the DME is set to operate at 88 2 kHz or 96 kHz only the OUT1 output of the Wav File Player will be delivered via the Left channel There will be no output from OUT2 Double click the component to display the component editor for it Wav File Player component editor selects and displays the playback file Only files set in the DME unit in which this component is placed by the Wav File Manager can be selected Open the Wav File Manager to display a list of files set in the DME unit in which this component is located This list functions as a play list a Selects the previous file in the play list a ee selects the next file in the playsuit Plays the selected Wave file Mute is turned OFF when External Input is selected stops playback of the Wave file Muted when External Input is selected Playback will be stopped if synchronization is carried out during playback 430 DME Designe
364. ink position in the scene link tree view The selected scene link setup and all others below it will be moved down one position The Insert button will be grayed out and inoperable if no scene link setup has been cut or copied Move UP Button Moves the currently selected scene link setup up one position in the scene link view The Move UP button will be grayed out and inoperable if a scene link setup is not selected Move Down Button Moves the currently selected scene link setup down one position in the scene link view The Move Down button will be grayed out and inoperable if a scene link setup is not selected Recall Button Recalls the scene number specified for the currently selected scene link setup in the scene link view to the corresponding devices The Recall button will be grayed out and inoperable if a scene link setup is not selected NOT C Scenes can only be recalled in real time for DME and SP2060 units in an online device group Scene Manager Button Opens the Scene Manager window Close Button Closes the window DME Designer Owner s Manual SP2060 Library Manager Click the SP2060 Library Manager item in the Tools menu to open the SP2060 Library Manager window Chapter 3 Main Panel Window SP2060 Library Manager Window Allows editing of SP2060 Speaker Processor component libraries Up to 60 libraries can be stored for each component and up to 360 libraries ca
365. ion name to make that window active Clicking a component name will open the component editor window for that component E Resource Meter Window This window provides an indication of component usage for each DME unit currently placed in the Configuration window The usage percentage increases as the number of components increases The component usage percentage is shown in graph form for each DME unit The window appears simultaneously with the designer window and can be used as a component usage guide while creating configurations The sampling frequency for each DME unit is also displayed Please note that the sampling frequency of the DME unit itself will also affect the usage percentage NOT C In configurations that have a large number of connections compilation might not be possible in some cases even if the resource meter reading is less than 100 To determine whether compilation is possible we recommend using the Analyze dialog box page 308 prior to actual compilation NOT C This window is not displayed for SP2060 units FS ResourceMe fx FS 48 0kHz E Objects and Components Object is the name for the parts that are arranged in the various design windows such as the Area Zone Configuration and User Module windows Objects are always laid out in the Toolkit window Only the appropriate objects for each window are displayed The blocks displayed at the higher level of the Toolkit window in particular a
366. iose Circle Title Bar Designer Menu Bar Tool Bar ETHERNET USB E REMOTE BICP1 H Speaker Processor External Device Picture Sheet i Ellipse Toolkit Window 298 DME Designer Owner s Manual E Title Bar Chapter 4 Designer Displays the zone name you have in the Zone Manager dialog box There is always one zone named Zone 1 in a newly created project E Configuration You can create multiple configurations within a zone but they cannot be arranged within the Zone window The devices can be arranged in the Zone window common to multiple configurations To switch configurations click the desired configuration in the Navigator window You can add delete and rename configurations in the Configuration Manager dialog box E Objects You can perform edit operations such as place cut copy paste delete and move to devices and shapes If you double click on a device arranged in the window a Configuration window or dialog box will open DME SP2060 Displays Configuration Window Displays Control Panel Properties dialog box Double click the label External Device Opens external application linked to the device Arranging Objects You can place objects by dragging them from the Toolkit window You can also place objects by double clicking them in the Toolkit window The same objects are displayed in the Device List submenu on the context menu that appears wh
367. irst install the USB MIDI Driver or the DME N Network Driver according to how you will be connecting and then make the appropriate settings For instructions about the installation and setup for the DME Designer and DME N Network Driver and about the installation for the USB MIDI Driver see the DME Setup Manual NOTE Initial settings for DME Satellite units must be transferred via USB MIDI so it is necessary to properly install the USB MIDI Driver Starting DME Designer The DME Designer software is started from the Start menu DME Designer is used with one user logged on The user logs on when the software is started E DME Designer Start Up and Logon When Auto Logon Is Not Set 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt YAMAHA OPT Tools gt DME Designer gt DME Designer The Log On dialog box will be displayed User Administrator Password Automatic log on is the default setting If the automatic logon feature is enabled the Log On dialog box will not be displayed when the application is started Instead the auto logon user will be logged on automatically See page 31 for information about auto logon DME Designer Owner s Manual 293 Chapter 1 Before Using 2 Click the V at the right of the User box and select the user If no user has been created only Administrator will appear in the list When starting DME Designer for the first time after installing select Administrato
368. ished by color ates laa e to 10 dB Sets the input signal level SSS Output Level co to 0 dB Sets the output signal level for each frequency band Mute ON OFF Mutes the output signal level for each frequency band Phase ON OFF Reverses the phase of the output signal for each frequency band Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the cross frequency between each frequency band DME Designer Owner s Manual 383 Chapter 6 Component Guide LPF Type Thru sets the attenuation for each octave and the 6 dB Oct filter type 12 dB Oct AdjustGc THRU turns off the filter 12 dB Oct Butrwrth 12 dB Oct Bessel 12 dB Oct Linkwitz 18 dB Oct AdjustGc 18 dB Oct Butrwrth 18 dB Oct Bessel 24 dB Oct AdjustGc 24 dB Oct Butrwrth 24 dB Oct Bessel 24 dB Oct Linkwitz 36 dB Oct AdjustGc 36 dB Oct Butrwrth 36 dB Oct Bessel 48 dB Oct AdjustGc 48 dB Oct Butrwrth 48 dB Oct Bessel 48 dB Oct Linkwitz Gc 6 dB to 6 dB When AdjustGc Adjustable Gc is selected for Type this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency HPF Type Thru 6 dB Oct 12 dB Oct AdjustGc 12 dB Oct Butrwrth 12 dB Oct Bessel 12 dB Oct Linkwitz 18 dB Oct AdjustGc 18 dB Oct Butrwrth 18 dB Oct Bessel 24 dB Oct AdjustGc 24 dB Oct Butrwrth 24 dB Oct Bessel 24 dB Oct Linkwitz 36 dB Oct AdjustGc 36 dB Oct Butrwrth 36 dB Oct Bessel 48 dB Oct AdjustGc 48 dB Oct Butrwrth 48 dB Oct Bessel 48 dB Oct Linkwitz Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz sets the HPF cutoff frequency Gc 6
369. isplayed in the component editor Recall Library menu The dialog box used for storing items in the library opens with the library folder displayed Save in Programmable LPF Stereo A My Recent Documents 4 Desktop E My Documents My Recent Decani W My Computer z 3 3 Floppy 4 Cc ce HA Win2000 JP C ee HA WinXP IP D Desktop ee HA WinXP ENG E i O Program Files oD i YAMAHA O OPT Tools My Documents O DME Designer l O Library PE O ProgrammableLPF Ea My Computer GQ My Network File name Kz Places Save as type Library File cel M Cancel If you save like this without changing the folder the item you saved will be displayed on the Recall Library menu When a library is saved it can be displayed in the component editor for other project files besides the currently open one and also in new project files NOT A In the Save Library File dialog box you can specify another folder for saving library files and save them there Library files that are saved in another folder also can be recalled by specifying the folder 364 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Components E Library Filenames Because the library filenames are displayed in the Recall Library menu use a filename that helos you understand the contents of the parameter set in the file When saving in the default folder there is no need to include the component name in the filename For example when yo
370. isplayed on the SP2060 display For example a backslash character will appear as a yen symbol on the SP2060 display DME Designer Owner s Manual 83 84 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Configuration Displays the configuration name If the scene has not been stored a hyphen will be displayed H Scene Manager Cut Copy Paste Insert Clear Recall Settings DME Group T Name Configuration Edit Security Recall Security Fade Fade Mode Fade Time Protect Partial Recall Scene 001 Configuration Level 1 Level 1 OFF All DOs OFF No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data Thla Natal x Scene Link Recall DetaiD gt Edit Security Displays the scene edit security levels Clicking here will display a list where you can change these security levels Only levels at or below the security level of the currently logged on user are displayed in the list Scenes are stored with the same security level as the user but their store and edit security levels can be set lower if required Recall Security Displays the scene recall security level Clicking here will display a list where you can change the security level Only levels at or below the security level of the currently
371. istering and editing monitoring points that can be monitored via the DME64N DME24N PHONES jack Monitoring points can be specified not only at the slot and analog inputs and outputs but also at points between the components NOTE gt Monitoring points can be edited only by users for whom the Edit security checkbox has been turned ON Monitoring Point List E Cut Button Cuts the selected monitoring point information When monitoring point information is cut information below that point moves up E Copy Button Copies the selected monitoring point information E Paste Button Pastes the copied monitoring point information at the selected line E Insert Button The copied monitoring point information is inserted at the selected point E Clear Button Deletes the selected monitoring point information DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer E Monitoring Point List Displays and allows editing of monitoring point information No Displays the numbers for monitor link points Numbers are assigned in order from the top Label Displays and allows editing of monitoring point names Clicking here selects the text You can then enter a new name Component L Sets the monitoring point L channel component Clicking here displays a list of components arranged in the active configuration window You can then select components for monitoring NOTE Components arranged in user modules are als
372. it This editor can be used for generic MY card editing but some parameters are not available Use a card specific editor when available WY Others Seles Hiah Samelina Mode InFut Format DOUBLE SPEED Double Fe Uutrut Format DOUBLE SPEED Inout Format DOUBLE SPEED Selects the format for 88 2 96 KHz DOUBLE CHANNEL SINGLE Double Fs ON OFF When ON the speed of the word clock from the MY Card is doubled Only displayed when this card is functioning as the word clock master Output Format DOUBLE SPEED Selects the format for 88 2 96 KHz DOUBLE CHANNEL SINGLE 498 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide E MY8 AE96S Right click the block and select Open MY Card Editor from the context menu to display the editor for it MY8 AE96S component editor 2 MYB AE96S n DAR Hish Sampling Mode Input Format DOUBLE SPEED Double Fs Uuteut Format DOUBLE SPEED Sampling Rate Converter On V2 aramet Setting Rang Input Format DOUBLE SPEED Selects the format for 88 2 96 KHz DOUBLE CHANNEL Double Fs ON OFF When ON the speed of the word clock from the MY Card is doubled Only displayed when this card is functioning as the word clock master Output Format DOUBLE SPEED Selects the format for 88 2 96 kHz DOUBLE CHANNEL Sampling Rate ON OFF Turns the sampling rate converter ON Converter E MY16 AE MY8 AE96 MY8 AE MY8 AT MY8 TD MY16 TD MY16 AT Right click the block and select Open MY Card
373. itor Slot Out p y p Component Editor Cascade Cascade In v Component Editor Cascade Out Component Editor Analog Input Output Analog Input Component Editor Analog Output Component Editor SP2060 Input Output SP2060 Input v Component Editor SP2060 Output P Component Editor CobraNet Input v Component Editor CobraNet Output v Component Editor EtherSound Input Output EtherSound Input v Component Editor EtherSound Output v Component Editor MY Card Component Editor p E of each card Remote Controlled Head Amp Component Editor of each device Parameter edit only CobraNet Input Output DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Ambient Noise Compensator The Ambient Noise Compensator automatically adjusts program source level to compensate for ambient noise levels Mono and stereo components are provided Stereo PINAL OUTIL PINAR OUTIRGE AMBIEN We Double click the component to open the component editor The component editor is the same for stereo and mono types the only difference being the number of channels Library Store Fe all Ambient Woise GAF Frosrdin Source Gain Detect Bypass Sense Threshold Threshold in Gain Mas Gain THEO Gain ResPonse Ratio Time B A oul eo 1 Ambient Woise Comrensator Stereo ibay Certs ry Ambient Noise Level Meter Displays the ambient noise level sense co to 0 00 dB sets
374. itor is not active Picture Properties will be displayed This only affects the object that has been placed in the Configuration Window All others will be grayed out and cannot be selected DME Designer Owner s Manual 249 290 Chapter 4 Designer Select Component Button Specifies the component editor to be opened when a Picture object is double clicked Only effective when Link Component editor is On Port specifies the number of ports to be displayed for a picture object e Left sets the number of ports to be displayed on the left e Right sets the number of ports to be displayed to the right e Edit Port Label and Type Button sets the label and type for each port Click to display the Edit Port Label dialog box OK Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Text Box Text objects can be arranged in all design windows Text is entered into the Text Properties dialog box When first placed in the design window the word Text is entered into the box If you click the text object handles small squares appear at the corners and sides of the object You can adjust the size by dragging the handles You can open the Text Properties dialog box by double clicking the box If you right click on the object a context menu will be displayed aaa Delete
375. ixel at a time Alignment You can align controls using the following alignment buttons on the edit palette Align Left Align Right Align To Top Align To Bottom Align Horizontally Align Vertically Horizontal Center Align and Vertical Center Align You can only use the Align Horizontally or Align Vertically buttons when three or more controls are selected DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Components Cut Copy Paste Controls You can edit controls arranged in the user control editor or user module editor using the Cut Copy and Paste commands in the edit palette E Cut Cuts controls arranged in the user control editor Select one or more controls then press the Cut button on the edit palette mE Copy Copies controls arranged in the user control editor or user module editor Select one or more controls then press the Copy button on the edit palette E Paste Pastes cut or copied controls Click the Paste button on the edit palette If you cannot paste the button color turns pale E Delete Controls can be deleted by selecting them and pressing the lt Delete gt key Knob Slider Conversion This function makes it possible to convert knobs placed in the user control editor or user module editor to sliders or vice versa Right click on a knob or slider and select Convert Slider or Convert gt Knob as appropriate The Convert item will not appear for certain speci
376. ize is specified Link Component Editor When ON clicking the Select Component button selects the editor that is opened when the graphic is clicked DME Designer Owner s Manual 351 392 Chapter 5 Components E Text Properties Dialog Box Right click the text box and select Properties from the contextual menu to display the Text Properties dialog box Text Properties Text Text Cancel Text Font Text Color Alignment Left M Rotate M Link Component Editor Name Select Component Text Box Displays and edits the text to be displayed Text Font selects the font Click to display the Select Font dialog box Refer to Select Font Dialog Box on page 264 for more information on the Select Font dialog box Text Color Button Sets the text color Click to display the Select Color dialog box For information about the Select color dialog box see page 265 Alignment Selects Left Center or Right text alignment Rotate Rotates the text box Background Color Uncheck this item to make the background of text transparent When this item is checked the Color button below the checkbox opens the Select color dialog box that can be used to select a background color Link Component Editor When ON clicking the Select Component button selects the editor that is opened when the text box is clicked DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Component
377. ject the Enter ID amp Password dialog box will be displayed when you click the Open button in the Open dialog box Enter ID amp Password Password Enter the ID and password for the file into the ID and Password boxes and click the OK button If you enter an incorrect ID or password and click the OK button on the Enter ID amp Password dialog box the Wrong ID or password dialog box will be displayed DME Designer A Wrong ID or password Click the OK button and enter the correct ID and password the Enter ID amp Password dialog box E Opening a Project File from the Recently Used Files List Recently used project files are displayed on the File menu in the Main Panel window If you click one of the filenames you can open that project file DME Designer New Ctrl N a Few as g t 0G A yi te E Open Ctrl o Save cerits ind Save As Import DME Designer All File Export DME Designer All File DME File Storage Import Device Configuration gt Export Device Configuration gt Recently Used Files 2 C SetupO06 daf Preferences Log OFF Exit If security is set for a project file the Enter ID amp Password dialog box will be displayed if that file is selected from the recently used files list Enter the ID and password to open the file 40 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview E Double Clic
378. ject file has been modified Save will be displayed Project file has been modified Save Yes Button saves the currently open project If the currently open file was already given a name and saved that saved file will be overwritten The Save As dialog box will be displayed for files that have not yet been saved In this dialog box you can name the file when you save it No Button Closes the project without saving it If the file has already been given a name and saved the most recently saved version will remain as is If the project has not been given a name and saved it will be lost Cancel Button Cancels creation of a new project DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Open Opens saved project files Because the currently open project will be closed a confirmation message asking Project file has been modified Save will be displayed When you select this command the Open dialog box will be displayed Select the project file you want to open and click the Open button Look in O YAMAHA bldg X F 123 dar Se asd daf My Recent F project01 daf Documents project02 daf Ti projectO3 daf Gi project04 daf Oy project14 daf My Network File name Places Files of type Project File daf x If security is enabled for the project file the Enter ID amp Password dialog box will be displayed Enter the ID an
379. k dialog box settings so that an external Word clock not synchronized Cascade OUT word clock that is in sync with the DME word clock is received External word clock changed Fs kHz The external word clock frequency KHz has been changed Internal word clock changed Fs kHz The internal word clock frequency KHz has been changed 80 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Displayed Messages Contents Countermeasures Heavy network traffic is causing communication delays Check the devices connected to the network It may be advisable to reduce the number of devices connected to the network If the current link mode is 10Base T it may be advisable to upgrade to 100Base 1TX Communication between DME is busy and load is applied No Battery The backup battery is completely depleted or not connected The current settings will be lost and the default settings restored when the power is turned off Cease operation immediately and contact your Yamaha dealer Low Battery The backup battery is running low This will not affect operation immediately but if operation is continued current settings may be lost and the default settings restored Contact your Yamaha dealer as soon as possible MIDI buffer full The MIDI receive buffer is full Too much MIDI data may have been received Flash ROM full The flash memory used for data storage is full Delete unneeded configurations presets and or wave files
380. k the Icon for the Project File When you double click the icon for the project file the file will open If DME Designer is not started it will start After logon the project file will open Just as when you use the Open command if DME Designer is already started the currently open project file must be closed before another one can be opened Therefore a Project file has been modified Save dialog box will be displayed NOTE Sometimes the Project file has been modified Save dialog box will not be displayed i Froject file has been modified Save If security is set for the project file the Enter ID amp Password dialog box will be displayed Enter the ID and password to open the file Closing Project Files You cannot have multiple project files open simultaneously in DME Designer To close the currently open project file you can create a new project file or open another project file DME Data File You can import or export parameters for a DME or SP2060 that is arranged in a configuration file Parameters for a single DME or SP2060 unit in the current configuration the one being edited are saved as afile Saved parameters can be imported into another project file Files with parameters saved in them are called DME Data Files These files have ddf as the extension for their filenames 4 FILE data i ddf DME Designer Owner s Manual 41 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
381. l s FB Gain 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase output basic repeat feedback minus values for reverse phase delay with feedback modulation Delay LCR oa ett center right FB Gain 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback 0 1 to 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio THRU 21 2 Hz to 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz to 16 0 KHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency Echo Delay L 0 0 to 1350 0 ms Left channel delay time Two input two i i output stereo delay Delay R 0 0 to 1350 0 ms Right channel delay time channel delay time with crossed FB Dly L 0 0 to 1350 0 ms Left channel feedback delay time feedback loop FB Dly R 0 0 to 1350 0 ms Right channel feedback delay time FB Gain L 99 to 99 Left channel feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback FB Gain R 99 to 99 Right channel feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback L gt R FBG 99 to 99 Left to right channel feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback R gt L FBG 99 to 99 Right to left channel feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback 0 1 to 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio THRU 21 2 Hz to 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz to 16 0
382. l Window Protocol Displays sets the protocol to be used for communication with devices connected via MIDI The available settings are MIDI DAW Type1 and DAW Type2 MIDI Use this setting when any MIDI device other than a general purpose ProTools controller HUI protocol or general purpose Logic or Cubase controller Mackie control protocol is to be connected DAW Type Use this setting when a general purpose ProTools controller HUI protocol is to be connected DAW Type2 Use this setting when a general purpose Logic or Cubase controller Mackie control protocol is to be connected NOTE gt If the Protocol setting is changed while online the DAW Type specified in the DAW Control dialog box will also change accordingly NOTE The following parameters are available when the Protocol parameter is set to MIDI MIDI CH sets the MIDI channel This number is also used as the Parameter Change Device ID e Tx Select the MIDI transmit channel from the list e Rx Select the MIDI receive channel from the list Program Change Control Change Parameter Change Sets transmit Tx receive Rx OMNI and Echo for program change control change parameter change When ON clicking turns this OFF When OFF clicking turns this ON When OMNI is ON channel messages are received regardless of the receive channel setting When ECHO is ON the input data is echoed re transmitted via the output port that corresponds to the i
383. l axis is the output level 0 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation Output Meter Reais EE the output signal level C Fe rao etwas d Sete he compression ato TO Knee HARD 23 45 Sele he way he expanderisappled 408 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Release 44 1 kHz 6 ms to 46 s sets the release time 48 kHz 5 ms to 42 3 s The setting range may very depending on the 88 2 KHz 3 ms to 23 s operating frequency 96 kHz 3 ms to 21 1 s Gan o 0 0dBto 18dB sd to 18 dB Sets the output gain 2 es Mono a Selects the trigger source from a menu The KEYIN currently selected trigger source is displayed on the button Stereo L R LR BOTH KEYIN Oon ON OFF Turns the expander ON Knee Hard l Threshold 10dB Output Level dB 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 Input Level dB Gate Attenuates signals that are lower than the threshold level Both mono channel and stereo channel gates are provided Mono channel gates have one input one output and one Keyln input Stereo channel gates have two inputs two outputs and one Keyln input Double click a component to open the component editor for it The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components Gate component editor EEX Library ecall fiver hreshold Range ets GROUT LALA 8626 lt 2724H DME Designer Owner s Manual 40
384. l devices only Even if one ICP1 unit is set to Disable scene store operations will be possible via another DME series in the same device group that is set to Enable Last Mem Resume This parameter displays whether the ICP1 will recall the current scene when started up or whether the memory contents at the time the unit was turned off will be recalled ON The memory contents at the time the unit was turned off will be recalled at startup OFF The current scene will be recalled at startup The Last Men Resume status can not be changed from ICP1 controls Event Scheduler Displays the current status of an event schedule setup in the DME Designer will be executed or not ON The event will be executed OFF The event schedule will not be executed Edit using the List Parameters editing procedure described on page 513 NOTE The event schedule status can not be changed from the ICP 1 controls DME Designer Owner s Manual 519 Appendix Initializing the ICP1 Follow the steps below to initialize the internal memory When the internal memory is initialized all data stored in the memory will be lost Use caution when caution You execute this function 1 Turn off the power to the ICP1 2 Plug the PA 300 AC adaptor while holding down the SCENE and ENTER buttons Release keys after YAHAMA logo disappears The Initialization display appears 3 Press the F2 F5 keys to sel
385. l gt key after aligning the mouse pointer with the hotspot you will connect too A wire will be displayed below the destination hotspot Finish dragging while holding the lt Ctrl gt key down Press lt Ctrl gt Key Method 2 Connect Multiple Selected Hotspots select multiple hotspots using lt Shift gt lt Ctrl gt click or lt Shift gt drag then drag from one of the selected hotspots to the destination hotspot The selected multiple origin hotspots will all be connected a Wet a Ga Be ee ee e gt Pima jae Wie tat eet Vem Viet amen uy et en Vey Un Jone ot Wet Wet jenn Le et tC Tair ene ene Multiple Hotspots Selected DME Designer Owner s Manual 285 286 Chapter 4 Designer Press the F5 key to connect the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the selected object and the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the object on the right and continue automatically making sequential connections until no more open ports are available on either object Automatic connections will not be made over other objects Press lt Shift gt F5 to connect the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the selected object and the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the object on the left and continue automatically making sequential connections until no more open ports are available on either object Automatic connections will not be made over other objects Press the F8 key to clear all wires connected to
386. lay no lines Frame Color Sets the color of the color frame Click this button to display the Select color dialog box For information about the Select color dialog box see page 265 Fill Color Sets the frame fill color Click the Select Color button to display the Select color dialog box Refer to Select Color Dialog Box in the Object section on page 265 for information on this dialog box Arrows Specifies the shape of line endpoints terminals The Left and Right endpoints of Top Line and Bottom Line lines and the Top and Bottom endpoints of Left Line and Right Line lines can be set independently None No endpoint shape Arrow Arrow shaped endpoint Circle Circle shaped endpoint 350 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Components m User Picture Properties Dialog Box Right click the image and select Properties from the contextual menu to display the User Picture Properties dialog box User Picture Properties Es File Path Select File Cancel e Size Width a0 Height 60 ke Stretch File Path Box Displays the path to the graphic file Select File Button selects a graphic file Size e Width Specifies the width in pixels e Height specifies the height in pixels e Reset Button Click to display the graphic at it s original size e Stretch When ON the graphic will be enlarged when a size that is bigger than it s original s
387. le Select Image Button Clicking here displays the Select Image dialog box Here you can select an image file to be displayed as the window background Select Image Look in O image 7 L My Recent Documents Desktop Places 5 My Network File name Ps Files of type Images bmp png xpm ipa T Layout Box This box displays a list where you can select how the image file will be displayed e Center Centers the image in the window e Tile Displays multiple copies of the image side by side until the available space is filled If the image file is smaller than the window it will be displayed repeatedly like tiles on a wall e Fit Expands or reduces the size of the image to match the size of the window where it will be displayed File Box Displays a path for the image file Click the Select Image button and select an image file The path will be automatically entered DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Components Placing Controls Controls can be placed when you are in the design mode You can turn the design mode ON and OFF by right clicking in the user control editor user module editor or component editor then clicking the Design Mode command in the context menu that is displayed You can place controls by dragging them from the component editor or by using the copy and paste commands Knob Edit Box Text Solid Frame Slider Library Master Vo
388. le Gc With this setting you can adjust Gc gain on the cutoff frequency between 6 dB and 6 qB If you set 3 dB it becomes a Butterworth filter If you set 6 dB it becomes Linkwitz Riley filter When you select Adjustable Gc the Gc knob is displayed e Butrwrth Butterworth This filter has the most general characteristics The pass band is flat and the gain for the cutoff frequency is 3 dB e Bessel For curves where phase characteristics are important Bessel has gentler attenuation than Butterworth and there is little distortion of the waveform when square waves are passed through e Linkwitz Linkwitz Riley As second order filters the sum of the output voltages for LPF and HPF have a gain of O dB across the entire band The pass band is flat but the cutoff frequency gain is 6 dB Butterworth SNERRE Linkwitz Riley 386 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Crossover Processor A crossover processor consists of a crossover delay parametric equalizer and compressor After the input signal is processed by the crossover effects of the delay parametric equalizer and compressor are applied to each frequency band The following two types are available in the Crossover Processor group Crossover Processor and Crossover Processor Il Crossover Processor The following five types of components are available in the Crossover Processor group 2 Way 3 Way 4 Way 5 Way and 6 Way Crossover process
389. level Mono channel and stereo channel components are provided Mono channel components have one input and one output and a single key in input Stereo channel components have two inputs and two outputs and a single key in input Double click the component to open the component editor The mono and stereo channel types have the same parameters Program Ducker component editor Program Ducker Sele Ez nF Lib ary ia we a Store Recall EKesln ode 7 Byrass TO Atatk O Threshold Time Time Outeut 48 8 6 8 B A en 1 o 40 o 40 Hold Time BEDER G Proaram OQucker Mono ipy c2ri4Hi INATIT Function o Keyln Meter Displays the key in signal level Output Meter eee the output level Detect Threst Threshold 60 0 0 0 0 0 dB Sets the the threshold level for the key in signal The set level is indicated by a triangular marker next to the Keyln Meter Hold Time 0 1 10 0 s Sets the hold time during which operation will continue after the key in signal falls below the threshold level in 0 1 second increments ES pal E amp A The output level is attenuated when the key in signal is detected The normal output level is OdB nominal and the attenuated level is specified by the Range parameter FX The output level is attenuated when no key in signal is detected and the output returns to its original level when a key in signal is detected The normal attenuation level is specified by the Range
390. li yT oe ee e Compressor i PEQ Steren R E AE EE E E E JTICr SAL 18 L Gr Label iiep t DOPTE ID Open Component Editor a gt ka w i g Copy A E Input Por i D os geen _ re iors Aimed ne eet bas Duplicate EEEN A E E an ene mee Display Order si Output Port EP PAA Li T a Recall Component Library Amount of DSP memory used eT ee Gonnant bay in the DME Add Component to Component Link Properties The amount of DSP memory used is not displayed for SP2060 units E Component Object Context Menu Open Component Editor Opens the component editor Cut Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard Copy Copies the selected object to the clipboard Paste Pastes the object that is on the clipboard Delete Deletes the object you clicked on Duplicate Duplicates the object you clicked on Display Order Changes the display order of the objects according to a command in the submenu DME Designer Owner s Manual 235 236 Chapter 4 Designer Recall Component Library Recalls libraries with component parameters saved in them Clicking here displays the submenu When a library is selected from the submenu the library is read and the component parameters are changed For more information about libraries see Library page 364 Libraries can be recalled only by users for whom Control Component Editor in security is turned
391. lied to GPI IN The scene number will be decremented each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to below the median voltage Max voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min voltage applied to GPI IN P Same as 1 Same as 4 DME Designer Owner s Manual 117 118 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window e Mute GPI input can be used to engage or disengage the DME mute function Parameter Min and Max are not available Terminal determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter T Mute will be ON when the voltage applied to GPI IN is above the median voltage and OFF when the voltage is below the median Max voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min voltage applied to GPI IN 4 Mute will be OFF when the voltage applied to GPI IN is above the median voltage and ON when the voltage is below the median Max voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min voltage applied to GPI IN P Mute will be alternately turned ON and OFF each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from below to above the median voltage Max voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min voltage applied to GPI IN ON OFF ON ly Mute will be alternately turned ON and OFF each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from above to below the median voltage ON OFF ON Max voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min voltage applied to GP
392. lied to GPI IN Min voltage applied to GPI IN Max parameter Min parameter value Max parameter value 1 The specified Min and Max parameter values are alternately selected each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to below the median voltage Example Relationship between the voltage applied to GPI IN and the Fader Level when Fader Level is set in the Parameter box Min parameter value Max parameter value Min parameter value Max voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min voltage applied to GPI IN e Direct Parameter Value Sets component parameters to a specified value Select the parameter to be set via Parameter and Max sets the parameter value Min and Terminal are unavailable When the voltage at the GPI input changes from below to above the median voltage the parameter is set to the value specified by Max DME Designer Owners Manual 115 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window e Scene Change GPI input can be used to recall a specified scene Parameter specifies the number of the scene to be recalled Min and Max are not available Terminal determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter T The scene specified by Parameter will be recalled each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to above the median voltage Max voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min voltage applied to GPI IN The sce
393. list The contents of the selected preset parameters will be overwritten New Button Stores the current status and creates a new preset parameters The newly created preset parameters is named New Preset1 New Preset2 etc Del Unused Button Deletes unused preset parameters from DME units in the selected device group Scene Link Button Opens Scene Link Manager dialog box Refer to Scene Link Manager on page 151 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window User Control User Controls You can create an original control by arranging Knobs and sliders in the component editor Controls you Create are called user controls Those created user controls are displayed in the View gt User Control submenu in the Main Panel window Refer to User Control Editor User Module Editor on page 325 for information on user control editing User Control Manager Dialog Box When you click User Control Manager on the Tools menu the User Control Manager dialog box is displayed This dialog box displays a list of user controls included in the configuration of the current device group There they can be created or deleted You can also edit the name and security level of user controls here NOTE Security for the Logged On User The currently logged on user can create and edit the user controls of all users at lower security levels as well as the controls specified for tha
394. ll not be affected by phantom power e Do not connect or disconnect a device to IN INPUT jacks while phantom power is applied Doing so can damage the connected device and or the unit itself To protect your speaker system leave the power amps powered speakers turned off when switching the phantom power on off We also recommend that you set all output levels to minimum Otherwise high volume output may damage your hearing or equipment 492 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide E Analog Output Double click Analog Output to display the component editor for it The displayed parameters are the same as for Slot Out component editor NOTE The DME24N DME8o C DME4io C DME8o0 ES and DME4io ES have analog outputs The DME24N DME8i C and DME8o ES have eight analog outputs while the DME4io C and DME4io ES have four To output signals at the same level at which they were input set the Analog Input Gain to 4dBu and the Analog Output Level to OdB DME Designer Owner s Manual 493 Chapter 6 Component Guide SP2060 Input and Output The SP2060 configuration window includes SP2060 Input and SP2060 Output blocks m SP2060 Input Either double click SP2060 Input or select Open Component Editor from the contextual menu that appears when the component is right clicked to open the editor SP2060 Input Component Editor SP2060 Input Eel Snap Library re ct y Store Recall Input Mute
395. log box is displayed there is an Exit button This closes the application without logging on a user Cancel Button When the Log On dialog box is displayed after a user is logged off there is a Cancel button instead of an Exit button This cancels the logoff The original user will continue to be logged on E Logon Procedure 1 Click V at the right of the User A drop down list of user names will be displayed 2 Click the user you want to log on 3 Enter the password into the Password box When you type in the password box the characters you enter will display as asterisks 4 Click the OK button DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Logging Off Logoff is used when changing users When you log off the document currently being edited is closed and the Log On dialog box is displayed so you can log on the next user Log off with the Log Off command on the File menu in the Main Panel window 1 Click the File menu Log Off command on the Main Panel window a DME Designer Chen a E oe Op tf be Port Chri o T chs a Import DME Designer All File Export DME Designer All File DME File Storage Import Device Configuration Export Device Configuration t 10 SetupO0 daf 20 Setup06 daf Preferences Log OFF Log on the next user in the Log On dialog box DME Designer Owner s M
396. ls connected with Select an unconnected channel wiring Cannot be used as monitor output Poor meter response A large number of DME units displaying Close or minimize the component meters in the same device group editor window to reduce the dumber of DME displays e Divide the device group containing DME units displaying meters When the computer connection was If LAN cable connections are changed Either quit DME designer before changed the connection to the DME unit while DME Designer is running the DME changing the LAN connections or set was lost units will continue to attempt to connect the Port parameter to No Assign to the original computer DME Designer Owner s Manual 521 922 POOL aar a eA R A E N 230 503 PO AIR aera a E E E T E 230 504 Add Event dialog DOX ssssissssrisssrisssrrrnrrrrrrrnrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnt 103 PC Stel CIO DOK reecsasisgusas ei saruy Arania ES AEAN ERE 162 Adjustable Gc AdjuStGOC oo ceccececcseeeeeeseeesseesessseesaaneseeeeees 505 Administrator USE ccc cece ce cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeaaeees 157 PE cated E atacutaasausuiaddesdacstonaceseecexe 482 Ambient Noise Compensator oo cece eeceeee ee eeeeeeeeeeaneeeeeeees 379 PMO WN OU seeps sstsecrete sacesrea A E eaves eeoeee 492 Analog QUIOUL scssccascncdiiaiceedteonsaisndnesttenncdieon tain raesidabiadsoeabeniacieianss 493 PUN T EEE E aastaeta toc en awe ads A A TT 308 PC el EE EE EE EA A E E
397. ltage applied to the GPI input The minimum voltage applied to GPI IN will produce the specified Min parameter value and the maximum voltage applied to GPI IN will produce the specified Max parameter value with intermediate voltages produced the corresponding intermediate parameter values Example Relationship between the voltage applied to GPI IN and the Fader Level when Fader Level is set in the Parameter box Max voltage applied to GPI IN Max parameter value Min parameter value Min voltage applied to GPI IN 4 The parameter value changes in inverse proportion to the voltage applied to the GPI input The minimum voltage applied to GPI IN will produce the specified Max parameter value and the maximum voltage applied to GPI IN will produce the specified Min parameter value with intermediate voltages produced the corresponding intermediate parameter values Example Relationship between the voltage applied to GPI IN and the Fader Level when Fader Level is set in the Parameter box Max voltage applied to GPI IN Min parameter value Max parameter value Min voltage applied to GPI IN P The specified Min and Max parameter values are alternately selected each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to above the median voltage Example Relationship between the voltage applied to GPI IN and the Fader Level when Fader Level is set in the Parameter box Max voltage app
398. ltiple Controls You can select multiple controls in Design Mode When multiple controls are selected multiple parameters can be added to a group simultaneously DME Designer Owner s Manual 309 370 Chapter 5 Components Creating Component Links The same types of parameters can be linked between the same types of component included in a group Component groups can be created using the component editor and components can be added to the group as required Parameter linking is set up via the Parameter Link window Refer to Parameter Link on page 94 for information on the Component Link Parameter Link window NOTE SPX components and SP2060 units do not support component linking E Creating a New Group Right click a component in the component editor to display the contextual menu Add Component to Component Link Add Group creates a new group eT Hade Peat Hole Ces All Geto Ariea Open Fames Link Add Parameter to Parameter d m a TARR RETA mE Add Components to a Group Right click a component in the component editor to display the contextual menu Add Component to Component Link gt group name adds to an existing group Groups that are not of the same type will be grayed out and cannot be selected Dasim Hoi Fesk Hoki Ckit AD Biliir Wraki Qpen Parameter ani Aad Parareter to Perarmeter Lint DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Types of Components Com
399. lume Sele Library Store Recall Edit Palette E Selecting Controls If you click a control in the component editor while in design mode the control will be selected and a red frame will be displayed around it Controls like knobs sliders edit boxes and labels are all separate objects Only the item clicked will be selected If you hold down the lt Ctrl gt key while clicking you can select multiple controls and labels If you use lt Ctrl gt click on a selected control it will cancel that control s selection If you position the mouse in an empty location on the sheet and start dragging from there a frame will be displayed as the pointer moves All controls enclosed by that frame will be selected If you drag controls like Knobs and sliders edit boxes and labels that show parameter types and place them one by one in the user control editor they must be arranged in the user control editor If you select multiple items and drag them you can copy them as a group into the user control editor keeping their original arrangement When copying multiple controls from a single component editor if you select all the controls you want copy and drag them together as a unit their original positional relationship and tab order will be maintained DME Designer Owner s Manual 337 Chapter 5 Components m Placing Controls by Dragging Them User Control Editor You can drag the controls you want to copy from the component edito
400. ly E Detail Button Expands the dialog box and displays a preset parameters list If you click the preset parameters list while it is displayed the preset parameters list will be hidden When the dialog box is opened its status will be the same as the last time it was closed NOT C Not available for SP2060 groups Del Button Store Button New Button Del Unused Button 2 Scene Manager h amp t coy f Paste __ hset f _ Cer Recall Settings _Del Store New Del Unused DME Group X Preset DME24N mmm BGM _ Control Config FF F T pi wy Preset004 1 Convention_Genter Confie Level 1 Level 1 OFF l 00 s OFF i PresetOO4 2 003 No Data x 7 Fe j o Component 004 No Data fe z S 3 i PresetO04 1 005 No Data iO Preset004 2 Preset Parameters 006 No Data ToO g z h D Shot 007 No Data 3 5 5 Preset004 1 008 No Data a z r iO Preset004 2 009 No Data 5 iz i x 3 z j DMESi CD m 010 No Data ca J S z i g 4D 011 No Data T x ir J S 5 i gt Preset004 1 012 No Data i i LO Preset004 2 013 No Data z 5 fa zi o Component Preset Param ete rs 014 No Data ra z a S re O Preset004 1 015 No Data z a iO PresetO04 2 016 No Data T 7 z D j h D Slot 017 No Data a z O Preset004 1 ms No Data 7 F z O Preset004 2 a S Scene Link _ Recall Detail gt gt Detail Button Preset Parameters List
401. ly produce appropriate delay compensation for cascade connected DMEGAN units When DMEG4N units are connected via their CAS IN and CAS OUT terminals in the Zone window DMEGA4N units other than the first unit default unit no 1 are automatically assigned sequential unit numbers If the number of the first unit is changed the numbers of the other units are automatically changed accordingly If multiple first units exist in the same device group those first units can all be assigned Unit No 1 Unit numbers are also automatically assigned for cascade connections that soan device groups DME Designer Owner s Manual 221 222 Chapter 4 Designer Device group 1 DME64N DME64N Unit No 1 DME64N Unit No 2 DME64N Unit No 3 DME64N Unit No 4 When multiple DME64N units are cascade connected each additional unit introduces a delay of a few samples that is automatically compensated for The Unit No settings determine the amount of automatic compensation to be applied for each unit Head Margin sets the CASCADE bus signal head margin This setting only applies when the unit is cascade connected to a mixer Since Yamaha provides a CASCADE bus head margin of 18 dB this parameter should normally be set to 18dB The margin for cascade connected DMEGAN units is always 18dB regardless of the setting The head margin settings for DMEGAN units other than the first unit are automatically set to the same value as the firs
402. m 5 ows tugines s business How s business MY4 AEC Hello fan noise a In order to reduce acoustic echo originating from the remote location an echo canceller must be installed and active at the remote location 482 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide MY4 AEC Signal Flow The local and remote locations in a teleconferencing system are referred to as the near end and far end respectively The MY4 AEC acoustic echo canceller AEC works by comparing the reference signal received from the far end with the signal from the microphone in order to determine which components of the signal are echo and then subtracts only the far end echo component from microphone signal The near end sound is thus clearly transmitted to the far end without echo Far end Voice A Far end Voice B Far end Voice C Far end Voice D From Far end A gt NR From Far end B gt _ NR From Far end C gt _ NR From Far end D gt NR Matrix Router oj To Far end 4 Near end Mic 4 FBS Near end Voice 4 Near end Mic 3 Near end Voice 3 To Far end 3 Near end Mic 2 Near end Voice 2 To Far end 2 lt Q Near end Mic 1 FBS Near end Voice 1 To Far end 1 NR Reference signal FBS Feedback suppressor NR Noise reduction mE NR Noise Reduction Automati
403. m it When you type in the password box asterisks will be displayed instead of the characters you enter If you do not want to set a password the user leave the box blank E OK Button In the Add User dialog box this creates new users according to the settings made there In the Change User Information dialog box this applies the dialog box settings and changes the user settings E Cancel Button Cancels user creation or setting changes and closes the dialog box DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Creating Users Users are created as follows 1 Click Security on the Main Panel window Setup menu The Security dialog box will be displayed You can open the Security dialog box by clicking the Security button in the Main Panel window 2 Select a user from the User List in the Security dialog box A user will be created subordinate to the selected user Administrator can be selected only if the logged on user is the Administrator If there are multiple users select the user that will be above the new user Multiple users can be created subordinate to a single user pe Sec urity We Enable Auto Log On Administrator User List Operation Security Administrator W Edit SystemEngineer bn Manager z Designer i Control Component Editor MainO perator Operator i Dperator4 W Change Configuration gt Operator i Operators W View DME De
404. m templates use the same library as the original template User module templates that use the same library are categorized as a user module group User module templates are displayed in the appropriate group in each window e f a project is opened on a different computer only user modules placed in the configuration window will reappear Export and import the data as a DME Designer All file in order to reproduce the user module templates as well NOT C Parameter links local links and component links are saved with user modules DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Save the User Module using the Save User Module command on the Tools menu The Save User Module command can be used only when a user module is selected in the Configuration window When you select the command the Save User Module dialog box will be displayed Enter a name for the User Module then click the OK button ff Save User Module User Modules User Modules Name Library Groupt fu serModuled be UserModule1 i UserModule2 Double Click Action User Module Group2 L UserModule3 Open User Module Design Window C Open User Module Editor Security Settings Enable Security Default Library None v User Module Group F Save in new User Module Group User Module Group Name User Module Group1 set Double Click Action Security Settings Default Library and User Module Group at the rig
405. me as the External Device Properties dialog box except for Remote Remote I Serial Gontrolled Device Properties Label Font Cancel Width Label Color Height 60 Port Label Color Style Plain ad Back Color Launch Application fe Application Co SSS S ESSES S y y y Browse C File Browse Fort Left 0 2 Max G4 Edit Port Label and Type Right 0 Max 642 Remote DME Unit none ID F select the DME to control remotely AD824 and AD8HR e DME Unit The DMEs in the current configuration will be displayed in a list Select the DME you will control remotely ID Selects an ID from 1 to 8 The default is 1 AD824 and or AD8HR units will be assigned beginning from 1 in the order that they are connected When combining AD824 and AD8HR units it is necessary to connect AD8HR units before AD824 units DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Component Components are arranged in the Configuration window and the User Module window They include audio processors like mixers and compressors and control parts like switches and sliders Component objects arranged in a configuration are displayed in block form To open the component editor for an arranged component first select it by clicking on it then double click on it If you right click on the object a context menu will be displayed Fak Fo fA an tl nur fo
406. me the input voltage goes from low to high the moment that the switch is pressed By assigning the component s On parameter via the Parameter Value Edit function in the GPI OUT field the CP4SF switch LED can be toggled by the ON parameter If Terminal is set to y a high level will be output when the On parameter is on lighting the LED GPI IN Function Parameter Min Ma Terminal Port Parameter Value Edit Component Fader Fader 1 1 Level INFINITYdB 10 00dB T Parameter Value Edit Component Fader Fader 2 1 Level INFINITYdB 10 00dB T Parameter Value Edit Component Fader Fader 3 1 Level INFINITYdB 10 00dB T Pots Parameter Value Edit Component Fader Fader 4 1 Level INFINITYdB 10 00dB T Parameter Yalue Edit Component Fader Fader 1 1 0n OFF ON P Pote Parameter Yalue Edit Component Fader Fader 2 1 0n OFF ON P Parameter Yalue Edit Component Fader Fader 3 1 0n OFF ON P Parameter Value Edit Component Fader Fader 4 1 0n OFF ON P GPI OUT Function 112 DME Designer Owner s Manual Parameter Y alue Edit Component Fader Fader 1 1 0n Parameter Yalue Edit Component Fader Fader 2 1 0n 0 5 Parameter Yalue Edit Component Fader Fader 3 1 0n 0 5 Parameter Value Edit Component Fader Fader 4 1 0n 0 5 No Assign P No Assign P No Assign P Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Control Source Selection via a CP4SW A CP4SW control panel connected to t
407. meter in the LS9 EXTERNAL HA display e DME24N units with firmware version V3 04 or later are compatible e You can download the AVS ESMonitor software from the Auvilran website http www auvitran com 144 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window m Digital Mixers With a REMOTE Connector Connect the mixer s REMOTE connector to the MY16 ES64 or similar EtherSound interface card via a 9 pin D sub cross cable and make the appropriate EtherSound connections between the interface card and DME units Use an Ethernet cable connected to the NETWORK connectors to make connections between DME series units The port to be used for head amp control via direct serial communication with a DME unit is specified by the Internal HA Control parameter in the Remote tab in the Utility dialog box page 172 select Slot 1 when the DME unit to be used for serial communication is a DME24N Slot 3 or Slot 4 if itis a DMEGAN or EtherSound if it is a DME Satellite unit The settings for all other DME units should be OFF Use the AVS ESMonitor software from Auvilran to specify the EtherSound serial communication settings for both the digital mixer s interface card and the interface card installed in the serially connected DME unit e Serial Communication mode Unicast for bidirectional operation e Set the digital mixer s interface card to Mode 3 and the DME unit to be used for serial
408. mmable BPF 24dB Oct Linkwitz 36dB Oct AdjustGc 36dB Oct Butrwrth 36dB Oct Bessel 48dB Oct AdjustGc 48dB Oct Butrwrth 48dB Oct Bessel 48dB Oct Linkwitz Mek Library Store Recall Navisator Hish Mid Low Delay Delay Delay Input Low Mute Phase DME Designer Owner s Manual Comer Compressor Output Mid ay 09 10 Mute Phase PEx Click this button nina to switch all channels in the block 18626 lt 2 2ah gt PEx Library Store Recall Output 1 16631 Crossover Processor Compressor High See Over Processor Threshold Ratio Knee e eo rV ta 11 68 1 HARD 5 ase Gain Chapter 5 Components E Edit Box Lewel 8 68 e 1 10 Displays current values for settings You can modify values by typing from the keyboard or using the mouse When a value is changed the knob or slider moves Mouse over When Edit Box Zoom in the Component Editor tab of the Preferences dialog box is checked the edit box will zoom when the mouse is positioned over it mouse over Preferences dialog box gt Component Editor tab page 73 InFut lara Erpa ry OU k ai Click Text in the selected edit box will turn red Values can be entered and edited via the keyboard It is not necessary to enter the unit Press the lt ENTER gt key to confirm the entry and display the unit Changing Values Using Spin Boxes
409. mponent Editor Open Slot Out Component Editor Open Input Component Editor Open Output Component Editor Opens the component editor Launch Application Launches linked application Cut Copy Paste Delete Duplicate The functions cannot be used with Slot components Display Order Changes the display order of the objects according to a command in the submenu Properties Displays the Component Properties dialog box DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer E Slot Component Properties To display the Slot Component Properties dialog box select a Slot component object then click the Properties command on the Edit menu i Component Properties Label Slot Input Label Font Width 80 Label Color Height 1190 4 Inputs Outputs Labels Color Style Plain v Color Cancel 1 0 Port Edit 1 0 Port Label Launch Application Application C AWINDOWS system32 cmd exe Browse C File Label Box You can enter up to 100 characters to display over the object Width Box specifies the width of the object in pixels Height Box specifies the height of the object in pixels Style sets the style of the object From the list select Plain Raised or Sunken Label Font button sets the font for the label Clicking here displays the Select Font dialog box For information about the Select Font dialog box see Sele
410. n parallel Delay gt Reverb One input two output delay and reverb effects in series Chapter 6 Component Guide Lo 0 0 to 1000 0 ms _ Left channel delay time Delay R 0 0 to 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB Dly 0 0 to 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time FB Gain 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback 0 1 to 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio THRU 21 2 Hz to 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz to 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency DLY BAL O to 100 Delay and early reflected delay balance 0 all early reflected delay 100 all delay Type S Hall L Hall Random Revers Type of early reflection simulation Plate Spring 0 1 to 20 0 Reflection spacing O to 10 rae reflections decay characteristics 0 dead live FB Gain 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback Delay Hi 0 1 to 1 0 Delay high frequency feedback ratio _ THRU 21 2 Hz to 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF sd 50 O Hz to 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency ee O to 100 Delay and reverb balance 0 all delay 100 all reverb FB Gain 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback Je U Delay and delayed reverb balance 0 all delayed reverb 100 all delay DME Designer Owner s Manu
411. n be stored for each SP2060 unit Only users with security status in which Edit is checked can edit this feature E Names and Functions ee SPP060 L ibrary Manager Device Library List Z0ne1 5 P2060 2901 92 168 000 01 3 i Speaker Processor 5 P2060 1 92 1 68 000 01 2 4 Speaker Processor O 1 Way 2 O 2 Way z O 3 Way 2 O 4 Way z O 5 Way L O 6 Way E Speaker Processor List Library File G Program Files YAMAHA OPT Tools DME De D Program Files YAMAHA DPT Tools DME De Da Program Files YAMAHA OPT Tools DME De G Program Files YAMAHA OPT Tools DME De D Program Files YAMAHA OPT Tools DME De D Program Files YAMAHA OPT Tools DME De G Program Files YAMAHA OPT Toole DME De G Program Files YAMAHA OPT Tools DME De Da Program Files YAMAHA OPT Tools DME De Gu Program Files YAMAHA OPT Toole DME De G Program Files YAMAHA OPT Tools DME De D Program Files YAMAHA OPT Tools DME De Ga Program Files YAMAHA OPT Tools DME De G Program Files YAMAHA OPT Tools DME De G Program Files YAMAHA OPT Tools DME De G Program Files YAMAHA OPT Tools DME De Gu Program Files YS amp MAHA OPT Toole DME De G Program Files YAMAHA OPT Tools DME De D Program Files YAMAHA ODPT Tools DME De Da Program Files YAMAHA OPT Tools DME De G Program Files YAMAHA OPT Tools DME De D Program Files YAMAHA ODPT Tools DME De Da Program Files YAMAHA OPT Tools DME De G Program Files YAMAHA OPT Toole DME De G Program Files YAMAHA OPT ete Displays a list of the SP2
412. n display is showing this button calls the Parameter Edit display for the User Defined Button in the upper left corner of the display When the Utility display is showing it has the same function as the Left button F2 Key When the Main display is showing this button calls the Parameter Edit display for the middle User Defined Button in the upper part of the display When the Utility display is showing it has the same function as the Up button F3 Key When the Main display is showing this button calls the Parameter Edit display for the User Defined Button in the upper right corner of the display When the Utility display is showing it has the same function as the right button 0 F4 UTILITY Key When the Main display is showing this button calls the Parameter Edit display for the User Defined Button in the lower left corner of the display If this button is pressed and held for longer than 2 seconds when the Main display is showing the Utility display will appear Pressing the F4 button while the Utility display is showing sequentially steps through the various Utility pages DME Designer Owner s Manual 509 010 Appendix F5 Key When the Main display is showing this button calls the Parameter Edit display for the middle User Defined Button in the lower part of the display When the Utility display is showing it has the same function as the Down button F6 MUTE Key When the Main display is showing this bu
413. n that occurs when you double click on a user module object arranged in the Configuration window e Open User Module Design Window Opens the User Module window e Open User Module Editor Opens the User Module editor Security Settings Turns user module security ON or OFF and sets a password e Enable Security Enables user module security If you turn this function ON when no password is currently set the Set Password dialog box appears Enter a password then click the OK button Set Password Password Confirm Password If you change the setting from OFF to ON the Input Password dialog box appears You cannot turn Security OFF until you enter the correct password Input Password Password NOTE When security is active the editor cannot be opened unless the appropriate password is entered Once the password has been entered security is temporarily disabled until the DME Designer is quit or a different file is opened e Set Password Button Changes the password for user modules Clicking this button displays the Input Password dialog box Enter the current password and click the OK button The Set Password dialog box will be displayed and you can set a new password This button will be grayed out when Enable Security is turned OFF OK Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings
414. n using the mouse in the two dimensional surround pan graph The sound position cannot be changed via the numbers below the two dimensional surround pan graph To specify position numerically use the Position X Y knobs to the left of the graph DME Designer Owner s Manual 499 Chapter 6 Component Guide Dragging You can move the control by dragging it with the mouse surround Library Store Recall Divergence Front 166 Level 6 68 a 10 Pan Nominal fosition Center Surround 16615 271fH gt Click If you click within the graph the control point will move to that position ie Surround l eal Surround l X Library Sna Store Recall Library Store Recall Divergence Front 166 Divergence Front 166 Level Click 6 68 P 10 Level 6 68 e_ 10 Pan Nominal Nominal sb Position ee a c c SS Center R32 F33 Surround 6 1 16815 lt 27IfH Surround 6 1 16015 lt 27ifH Speaker Button If you click any speaker button besides the LFE button the control point will jump to that speaker s position f surround l x surround Eq Library n Library Store Recall Store Recall Divergence Front 166 Divergence Front 166 Position Click Level 6 48 e_ 10 Level 6 668 La 10 Nominal osition Center 7 5 Rs Nominal 4 S k s P tio en Center L63 R63 Surround
415. nconnected Node Button Displays unconnected nodes gt Show Unconnected Node page 290 E Edit Mode Button Turns the edit mode ON or OFF gt Edit Mode page 195 in the Configuration Editing section Status Bar Component ID 10003 00002713H Sampling Frequency 48 0k Hz Sheet Size 800 800 ean t 756 DME ID Component ID Sampling Frequency Sheet Size Coordinates E DME ID Component ID When the mouse pointer is moved over a DME device in the Zone window the ID for that DME device is displayed When the mouse pointer is moved over a component in the Configuration window the ID for the component is displayed E Sampling Frequency Displays the sampling frequency in the configuration window E Sheet size Displays the size of the sheet in the active design window E Coordinates Displays the coordinates of the mouse pointer any time it is within the design window When dragging an object the coordinates displayed here refer to the upper left corner of the object being dragged DME Designer Owner s Manual 195 196 Chapter 4 Designer Resource Meter Window The Resource Meter can be displayed or hidden via the Navigator command in the View menu The Resource Meter window is displayed only when the Configuration window and User Module window are active Meters for the DSP memory usage percentage and the SPX resource usage percentage are in the Resource Meter window The sampling frequency of each DME
416. nding the signal after the component operates As the attack time is made faster compression or expansion becomes more instantaneous As it is made slower the initial attack part of the sound will not be compressed or expanded Bessel One type of filter characteristic For curves where phase characteristics are important Bessel has gentler attenuation then Butterworth and there is little distortion of the waveform when square waves are passed through Butterworth Butrwrth One type of filter characteristics This filter has the most general characteristics The pass band is flat and the gain for the cutoff frequency is 3 dB Bypass Passes the signal without changing it When you turn this ON bypassed sound unchanged sound is output When you turn this OFF the sound is output with effects applied Decay Decay Time sets the time period until gain returns to normal after a trigger signal level falls below the threshold value Delay sets the time period by which a signal is delayed Delay Scale sets the units used for specifying the delay time Divergence sets the ratio for sending the center signal to LR When 100 percent is set the signal will be sent to LR only When zero percent is set the signal is sent to center only DME Designer Owner s Manual 505 906 Chapter 6 Component Guide Fade Sets the action of the fader when there is a large change in its position during scene recall When you turn t
417. ndow Se eae Open User Module Editor AER Delete E Duplicate i Slot4 Input E nivS AE Display Order E l E Recall Component Library cP cae Store Component Library ow D T D i E PTA D on Re Da ae a S Save User Module Gii aiaa iaka Properties m User Module Object Context Menu Open User Module Design Window Opens the User Module Design Window Open User Module Editor Opens the User Module Editor Cut Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard Copy Copies the selected object to the clipboard Paste Pastes the object that is on the clipboard Delete Deletes the object you clicked on Duplicate Duplicates the object you clicked on Display Order Changes the display order of the objects according to a command in the submenu DME Designer Owner s Manual 243 244 Chapter 4 Designer Recall Component Library Recalls a library into which component parameters have been saved Click to display a sub menu select a library from the sub menu to load the parameters into the component Refer to Library on page 364 for more information NOT A Libraries can be recalled only by users for whom Control Component Editor in security is turned ON The command is grayed out for users for whom Control Component Editor is turned OFF Delete De Duplicate Display Order EEEE R Component Library OG ieee a a1 de
418. ndow can now display additional error messages shown on the DME display panel page 80 e t is now possible to set the DME unit so that the internally stored event log is not erased page 77 e Improvements have been made to the additional error message information shown in the Event Logger window e The DME unit internal clock and DME Designer time display now support daylight saving time DST page 180 e Firmware updates can now be applied to entire device groups for improved speed and efficiency DME Designer Owner s Manual mE Designer Window e lt is now possible to set a clear background color for text box and ellipse objects page 252 page 254 page 256 e Password entry is now required when opening a User Module Properties dialog box or saving exporting in a user module to which security has been applied e Linked software applications can now be launched from the Slot component contextual menu page 240 e User module templates that use the same library are now categorized and displayed as user module groups page 310 e Image files are now included in User Module exports e Component and parameter links can now be copied when DME objects components and user modules are copied pasted or duplicated e Parameter links are now saved when User Module data is saved exported e When already placed picture files are replaced they will be updated and displayed correctly without the need to restart the DME Desi
419. ndtactueaaeanad 126 OS a E E E 383 Crossover Processor ccccceccccsseeeceeceeeseeeeeeceeesseeeseeseesaeaeeeeseeeaaas 387 Grossoyver Processor Il ainne eelereroreondein 393 E T s E E ent 57 CUEN LONE non airran rin a Ea eee eee 56 D DAW ORIOL earra E NE E dass O E 157 Decay Decay Time neicscccesccsacerencccnanscenecencisanccsenesusnedancdsemeiseenne 505 DOES OT serra Er E E eau aceee easiness 405 DELAY xasceahcedeeaneaansadedoaatgbagdaesasdensioiate a tepsaandnaecaensand taandeoiegaede 399 505 Ce OVI a A E E E 399 delay SNO enasna aE E EE EAE 400 PECKA E T 435 BE ee E E A A E TAE E E T 505 VM aaae E A E A 305 Design MOUE sree REEE ORNS 398 DeSIN WINGON seen eRe eee eal ee a N 202 E T e E EEE ES 271 SaL e EEEE A T A TE casen 274 shared settings and Operations ccccccccsessecceeeeeeeeeeees 268 DO SIG WING OW erene anen EES 27 Device GROUP ccsasiunecasaceanesacdansveeasdad add dehanitvede shebhanddieacgdaedaebeniteness 3 DEVICE Group Manager cisusiesaceevnsiccrawedsnasedsawenden ds sdagelensnademisa tanec 293 Device INFOFMATION 0 0 ccccccceesececceesseeeeeseeeaseeeeessesesaeaseeeseeaaaneseeess 190 Device List ccicoanacinsdaamasaliucnaniedthononamiecnsduanrinhoammamieawneraecdticnnamiedia 201 DEDI AS aee a E E E E E Gaasutseeenanccee 518 Display Order scscscncascmaeatinn sosicnnracanonsqsstunncnnennseniennesosuintammnnsenueaadans 278 Display Setup Disp Page ss s ssssssnnnsessrrrrrerrsrrrrrerssrrrrrrrrssrn 518
420. ne specified by Parameter will be recalled each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to below the median voltage Max voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min voltage applied to GPI IN P Same as 15 Same as 4 e Scene Increment GPI input can be used to increment the scene number Parameter Min and Max are not available Terminal determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter T The scene number will be incremented each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to above the median voltage Max voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min voltage applied to GPI IN Trigger 4 The scene number will be incremented each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to below the median voltage Max voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min voltage applied to GPI IN P Same as 1 Same as 4 116 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window e Scene Decrement GPI input can be used to decrement the scene number Parameter Min and Max are not available Terminal determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter T The scene number will be decremented each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to above the median voltage Max voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min voltage app
421. nent editors Routing and other EtherSound settings cannot be made via EtherSound Input Output components Make EtherSound settings using the AVS ESMonitor software available from Auvitran DME Designer Owner s Manual 497 Chapter 6 Component Guide MY Card This shows the input and output for the card inserted into the DME expansion slot The following components are available depending on the card types Input Format Output Format This is the I O mode for high sample rate operation 88 2 96 KHz In the Double Channel Mode high sampling rate data 88 2 96 kHz is transmitted and received by two channels each channel handling the digital audio data at half the sampling rate For this reason the total number of available channels is halved and even numbered channels are unavailable In the Double Speed Mode digital audio data is transmitted and received at the current high sampling rate 88 2 96 kHz In the Single Mode digital audio data is transmitted and received at half the current high sampling rate 88 2 96 KHz Setting Examples Double Channel Double Speed When the MY card word clock is used as the master word clock Double FS determines whether the speed of that word clock is to be doubled and used as the DME clock The Double Fs setting is only available the word clock from an MY Card is used E MyY Others Right click the block and select Open MY Card Editor from the context menu to display the editor for
422. nent will not be recalled When a scene that includes Local Link or Component Link settings made via the Parameter Link window page 94 is recalled the linked parameters are recalled 88 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Store Button stores the contents of the current configuration into the scene selected in the list If an empty scene is selected and the contents stored there a new scene is created If a scene is already stored in the selected scene number it will be overwritten If Confirm Scene Store is checked on the Application tab of the Preferences dialog box a confirmation message will be displayed before the scene Is stored NOTE gt The currently logged on user can store scenes at a security level equal to or lower than his or her own only When the computer and DME SP2060 unit are online a scene stored in the DME Designer will also be stored on the DME or SP2060 unit regardless of the DME or SP2060 settings The DME64N 24N utility display Misc page Scene Store setting only affects store operation from the DME panel controls When a scene is stored the configuration parameters at that time are saved as preset parameters Preset parameters are created automatically E Recall Button Recalls the scene selected in the list and makes it the current scene NOTE The currently logged on user can recall scenes at a security level equal to or lower than his or her own on
423. ner NOn Be carefully not to disconnect any USB or Ethernet cables or interrupt the power supply during the update process Doing so can damage the MY4 AEC card and or cause the DME Designer communication port settings to be lost BGE After the update check the firmware version number in the MY4 AEC Firmware Update dialog box to be sure that the update has been successful NOn C If insufficient Remaining Memory is available the amount of memory available in the DME unit page 111 it may not be possible to complete the update process and an error message may appear in the Status field If this occurs you will need to delete unnecessary files files stored using the DME File Storage function libraries scenes to make more memory available DME Designer Owner s Manual 189 190 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Device Information Click Device Information in the Hardware menu to open the Device Information dialog box The status of DME and SP2060 units connected to the network will be displayed as a list even if they are offline or a configuration has not yet been created This capability allows centralized DME management for effective troubleshooting and system maintenance N Device Information Network Statue Device Label Master Slave IP Address MAC Address Message YAMAHA USB DME Grou E DMESI C DMESI C 2 90f Master 192 168 000 002 OOA0DE 261548 Reboot iW Tree View Utility Ev
424. ner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer E Wire Object Properties To display the Wire Properties dialog box double click on a wire object You can also select a wire object then click the Properties command on the Edit menu T Wire Properties Line Width f 4 Line Color Cancel ance Line Type Solid Selected Color Line Width Box set the line width This setting can range from 1 to 10 pixels Line Type Displays a list where you can select the type of line The following types are available Solid Dash Dot DashDot and DashDotDot Line Color Button sets the color of the line Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box Selected Color Button sets the color of the selected line Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box NOn For information about the Select Color dialog box see page 265 OK Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings DME Designer Owner s Manual 259 260 Chapter 4 Designer Legend Descriptive Fields Displays a legend for all sheets except the User Module window When you click the Edit Legend command on the Edit menu or double click on one of the Legend fields displayed on the sheet the Edit Legend dialog box is displayed If you right click on the Legend the displayed context menu will have the Edit Legend comman
425. nfiguration window and User Module window are active DME Designer Owner s Manual 205 Chapter 4 Designer E Full Screen Displays in full screen mode Displays the active design window Area Zone Configuration or User Module window exclusively with it covering the entire screen Component List gt ee y Edit Mode Sheet na 2a ae i MM AF E Tao A context menu appears wherever you right click on the screen containing the commands that are needed at that location To return from the full screen mode to the original display status press the lt Esc gt key E Port Long Name Switches the port name display of the slot components When you select this command a checkmark appears next to it and long names are displayed If you select this command when a checkmark is next to it the checkmark disappears and short names are displayed Status Bar rea Toolkit ie Long name Effect BUS MEE BUSS Resource Meter Short name Navigator Full Screen Port Long Name Ctrl Zoom In Zoom Out Ctrl zoom To gt Actual Size Fit in Window E Zoom In Gives a closer view of an area displayed on the screen E Zoom Out Widens the area displayed on the screen E Zoom To selects the display magnification from a submenu 125 Actual Size 2 50 Fit in Window 375 v 4100 5125 6 150 7 200 E Actual Size Returns
426. ng When a user is created automatically this is set to One level lower than the user above The initially set level is the highest level that can be set for that user OK Button Applies any setting changes and closes the window Cancel Button Closes the window without changing any settings DME Designer Owner s Manual 161 162 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Add User Dialog Box Change User Information Dialog Box When you click the Add User button in the Security dialog box the Add User dialog box Is displayed If you click the Change button in the Security dialog box the Change User Information dialog box is displayed The Add User dialog box is for setting a user name and password when adding a new user You can change user settings in the Change User Information dialog box The contents of the dialog boxes are the same a Add User Eg gi Change User Information Hame Hame Password Password Confirm Password Contirm Password Add User dialog box Change User Information dialog box E Name Box Enter the user name Enter a name different than other existing user names E Password Box Enter the password When you type in the password box asterisks will be displayed instead of the characters you enter If you do not want to set a password the user leave the box blank E Confirm Password Box Enter the password once again to confir
427. ng DME units remotely from a PM5D using the DME Control function it is now possible to set an ID number other than 2 for the group master DME unit In this case the PM5D firmware must be updated to V2 20 or later e t is now possible to replace the default DME64N 24N startup screen normally the model name with an original graphic file page 71 V3 5 Precautions Use DME Designer version V3 5 with DME64N 24N or DME Satellite units running firmware version between V3 0 and V3 8 and SP2060 units running firmware version V1 2 or later Refer to the Yamaha Pro Audio website http www yamahaproaudio com details on combinations When combining DME64N 24N and DME Satellite units in a device group be sure to assign a DME satellite unit as the device group master Synchronization cannot be performed if a DME64N 24N is assigned as the device group master When using the Windows Vista operating system use only USB MIDI Driver V3 0 or later and DME N Network Driver V1 2 or later When using the Windows 7 operating system use only USB MIDI Driver V3 0 4 or later and DME N Network Driver V1 2 1 or later DME Designer Owner s Manual Changes from V3 5 to V3 8 E New Features e The DME64N 24N V3 8x or later can now be controlled via Ethernet connection from certain external control devices e The DME64N 24N V3 8x or later can now be assigned as the device group master when the device group is formed by combining the DME64N 24
428. ng and Short Each has a different setting range for the delay The maximum delay time that can be set internally is approximately 43 6 seconds for the DME64N and 21 8 seconds for the DME24N regardless of the sampling frequency Delay Long Delay long components are available with from one to eight outputs Each has a single input and from one to eight outputs Delay Long Delay Long 2 i Delay Long Delay Long 4 i 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output a LJIN4 OUTIL CJIN4A OuUT1LJ CJINA OuT1L CJ 1 OuUT2L ouT2C 1 OUT3SLI ot al a T na Caceres 1 Double click a component to display the component editor for it Only the number of outputs in each component is different The other parts are the same Delay Long Component Editor Delay Long Sele Snare Library METT Store Recall Delay Q All Burass Mute Delay Lons 3 Output C2718H gt Parameter Setting Range Function Delay All Bypass ON OFF Bypasses from input to output Input co to 0 dB sets the input signal level ON OFF Mute the input signal Delay Tap Delay ms O to 1300 sets the delay time sample the range depends There are two edit boxes displaying on the Fs value milliseconds and the units selected for Delay Meter O to 446 7 scale Feet O to 1465 4 Frame the range depends on the Frame value Beat the range depends on the Beat value ON OFF Turns ON each channel s delay ON OFF T
429. nge depends on the Frame value Beat the range depends on the Beat value Delay Scale selects the delay time units The selected button will light and the Delay edit box will change accordingly When Beat is selected the knobs can be used to adjust BPM Delay Scale does not support the parameter link feature Refer to Parameter Link on page 94 for information on parameter linking 468 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide E Parametric Equalizer Click the Crossover Processor PEQ button to open the window Parametric equalization is provided for each crossover band Speaker Processor PEQ edit window amp Speaker Processor PEQ High IT l I tic Crossover response phase shows crossover phase response Crossover response level Shows crossover level response Par ster Range Functic Type PEQ Select a filter tyoe from the menu L SHELF 6dB Oct L SHELF 12dB Oct H SHELF 6dB Oct H SHELF 12dB Oct HPF LPF APF ist APF 2nd Horn EQ Fo ai ooas ca72 soste octave barawar reach band e es0 010 SeistheQloreachbana Fe ream orzo Sets te Feauency tor earba Fo raon ono oson oo 1 APF The APF All Pass Filter is a filter that passes all frequency bands while affecting only the phase This is mainly used to correct the phase at the crossover band APF 1st will invert the phase at the specified frequency by 90 and for entire frequency bands by 0 180 while APF
430. nges e Library recall DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Misc Tab Info Network Display Lock Mise Remote MIDI GPI Scene Store f Enable f Disable Last Mem Resume fe ON f OFF Event Scheduler fe OF f OFF Displays and sets parameters not provided in the other tabs Scene Store Displays and sets whether scene store operations can be performed on a DME64N 24N unit The settings are Enable and Disable Enable Scene store possible Disable Scene store not possible Last Mem Resume Determines whether the scene number that was selected when the power was last turned off will be recalled when the power is turned on or whether the overall status of the unit when the power was last turned off will be recalled when the power is turned on The settings are ON and OFF ON The status of the unit when the power was last turned off will be recalled OFF The scene number that was selected when the unit was last turned off will be recalled Event Scheduler Displays and sets whether the DME unit s Event Scheduler function is active or not The settings are ON and OFF ON The Event Scheduler is active OFF The Event Scheduler is not active DME Designer Owner s Manual 171 172 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Remote Tab Info Network Display Lock Misc Remote MIDI GPI DME Remote Control Port OFF Y IF Port Mo select IP Po
431. nnel oO Master Output Level Meter Displays the master output level 10 Response Time 2 Sets the response time for reducing the amount of output level compensation gain increase o ON OFF Turns the master output ON to 10 dB sets the master output level 1 The amount of gain compensation varies according to the number of channels for which input is detected as follows 3 2 The setting range of Response Time varies according to the operating frequency as follows 44 1kHz 110 msec to 46 0 sec 48kHz 101 msec to 42 3 sec 88 2kHz 55 msec to 23 0sec 96kHz 51 msec to 21 1 sec 434 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Delay Matrix This is a matrix mixer that allows you to set an independent delay time and level adjustment for each output There are three groups of delay matrix based on the number of inputs 2 Input 4 Input and 8 Input In each of the three groups there are five mixers available with 2 4 8 12 or 16 outputs for a total of 15 components Delay Matnx 10 ut ut i 4 Input Delay Matrix 11 Delay Matrix 12 Delay Matrix 13 Delay Matrix 14 Delay Matrix 15 ut Double click a component to display the component editor for it The number of input and output channels varies depending on the component but all share a common configuration in the component editor The delay matrix component editor consists of four sections input outpu
432. no audio signal detected 1 Pulse waveform 1 2 Pulse waveform 2 FA ee ese TEEN Peete ee ee Se Hr ee ee et ee ee eee oe LO LO 250msec 250msec Event Scheduler Event Schedule is shown when GPI OUT is set in Event Scheduler See Event Scheduler on page 101 User Defined Button User Defined Button is shown when GPI OUT is set in User Defined Button See User Defined Button User Defined Parameters on page 132 Event Logger Event Log is shown when GPI OUT is set in Event Logger See Event Logger on page 75 Apply Button Applies any current setting changes OK Button Applies any setting changes and closes the window Cancel Button Closes the window without changing any settings 124 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window When you click the MIDI command on the Tools menu the MIDI dialog box is displayed Here you can make remote control and other settings NOTE Does not apply to SP2060 units Names and Functions DME Group DME64H ad Control Change Program Change Parameter hange Clear Clear All E Common to All Tabs DME From the list select the DME where you will be making settings OK Button Applies any setting changes and closes the window Cancel Button Closes the window without changing any settings DME Designer Owner s Manual 125 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
433. not checked only the text will be displayed on the sheet Text Border Style Box sets the style of the object From the list select Plain Raised or Sunken Background Color Uncheck this item to make the background of text objects transparent When this item is checked the Color button to its right opens the Select color dialog box that can be used to select a background color NOTE For information about the Select Color dialog box see page 265 Link Component Editor When On a Text object can be double clicked to open the component editor specified by the Select Component button If an object is placed in the Configuration Window and the Link Component Editor is not active Text Properties will be displayed This only affects the object that has been placed in the Configuration Window All others will be grayed out and cannot be selected Select Component Button Specifies the component editor to be opened when a Text object is double clicked Only effective when Link Component editor is On OK Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings DME Designer Owner s Manual Box Rectangle You can arrange rectangles on the sheet Chapter 4 Designer If you click the box handles small squares appear at the corners and sides of the object You can adjust the size by dragging the handles You can open the
434. nput 8 Output 18611 271bH gt ON OFF Reverses the phase of each channel s signal to 10 dB sets the input level to each input channel ON OFF Turns ON solo for each channel If Solo is engaged for even one channel all non Solo channels will be muted Turns ON input for all channels in the Inout Master window When turned ON the On button lights up Resets all output signal levels in the Input master window making them dB E Output Master Window If you click the Output Master button in the matrix mixer component editor it will open the Output Master window Her you can turn the master output for each channel ON and OFF and set the level Matrix Mixer OutputMaster editor window amp Matrix Mixer OutputMaster8 On Off Nominal Minimum Matrix Mixer 8 Input Output 16611 271bH gt DME Designer Owner s Manual 445 Chapter 6 Component Guide Meter s Displays the output signal level for each channel to 10 dB sets the output signal level for each channel ON OFF Turns ON each channel s output On Turns ON output for all channels in the Output Master window When turned ON the On button lights up Off Turns OFF output for all channels in the Output Master window Nominal Resets all output signal levels in the Output Master window making them O dB Minimum Resets all output signal levels in the Output Master window making them dB E All Inputs to One Output When
435. nput port via which it was received Program change control change and parameter change details can be set up via the MIDI window Program Change Control Change and Parameter Change tabs respectively DME Designer Owner s Manual 175 176 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window GPI Tab Info Network Display Lock Misc Remote MIDI GPI All Ports 1 2 3 4 E E fg Gg E i eee Max Si in I on I o J I o g Calibrates the input voltage detection range for a DME unit GPI terminal ALL Checkbox Automatically checks all channel checkboxes Ch Checkbox These checkboxes specify the channels to be calibrated Calibration Information Displays the input voltage in real time Reset Button Resets the calibration of checked channels Max Button Sets the current input voltage as the maximum input voltage for checked channels The specified maximum voltage is indicated by a red bar Min Button Sets the current input voltage as the minimum input voltage for checked channels The specified minimum voltage is indicated by a blue bar DME Designer Owner s Manual Word Clock Chapter 3 Main Panel Window The signal that synchronizes all devices connected to the DME or SP2060 is called the Word Clock lt uses the same frequency as the sampling frequency The word clock is set for each DME or SP2060 in the Word Clock dialog box When you click Word Clock on the
436. nts arranged in the user module window For each user module there is one user module editor The name of the user module is displayed in the title bar Only components that are arranged in a particular user module can be laid out in the specific control window that is associated with that user module Both the user module and the control window will have the same name Refer to User Modules on page 309 for more information about user modules NOTE C You can copy controls from a user module to the user control editor User Module Editor Component Editor E Unsaved User Module Il If H Compressor Snare oe Laid Out Controls Gr Re San Meee ENNA Sine OR SOS Dea AEE Sa eRe oa Controls Laid Out in the User Control Status Bar Edit Palette E Opening a User Module Editor Window In the designer window the user module editor can be opened by selecting Open User Module Editor from a user module contextual menu User modules for which Open User Module Editor is selected as the Double Click Action in the User Module Properties window can be opened by double clicking For information about the User Module Manager dialog box see page 314 For information about the User Module Properties dialog box see page 243 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Components Names and Functions E Status Bar The lock icon will appear in the User Module when security is active User Module
437. nu the Security dialog box is displayed Here you can create and delete users You can also set the security level for each user Users are saved as DME Designer settings You don t need to create users for each file no Sec urity fx 7 Enableauioleetn Bre H Auto Logon User User List Operation Security Administrator Edit z SystemEngineer Manager S Designer l Control Component Editor Main perator Operator i Operator Change Configuration Operator i Operators View DME Design Window View Component Editor Synchronization View Log Window Scene Store Recall Level 2 User Control Level 2 Add User Remove User Change mE User Setting Restrictions Various restrictions apply depending on the security level of the user that is currently logged on e The currently logged on user can edit only users at a security level lower than his or her own e The currently logged on user cannot raise his or her own security level E Administrator User The Administrator user is registered by default and can use all functions Immediately after DME Designer is installed there is no password set for the Administrator user DME Designer Owner s Manual 157 158 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Security Level User security levels are set with the Operation Security item at the right of the Security dialog box F SET Edit Security User Level Levell v W Enable Auto
438. o 0 dB Sets the amount by which the level is reduced O Attack O to 120 ms Sets the attack time Hold 44 1 kHz 0 02 ms to 2 13 s sets the hold time 48 kHz 0 02 ms to 1 96 s The setting range may very depending on the 88 2 kHz 0 01 ms to 1 06 s operating frequency 96 kHz 0 01 ms to 981 ms Decay 44 1 kHz 6 ms to 46 s Sets the decay time 48 kHz 5 ms to 42 3 s The setting range may very depending on the 88 2 KHz 3 ms to 23 s operating frequency 96 kHz 3 ms to 21 1 s Keyin Mono SELF Selects the trigger source from a menu KEYIN The currently selected trigger source is displayed on the button Stereo ON OFF Turns the ducking ON DME Designer Owner s Manual 407 Chapter 6 Component Guide Threshold 20dB Range 25dB Output Level dB 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 Input Level dB Expander Widens the dynamic range of the signal Low level signals such as noise are diminished Both mono channel and stereo channel expanders are provided Mono channel expanders have one input one output and one Keyln input Stereo channel expanders have two inputs two outputs and one Keyln input Double click a component to open the component editor for it The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components Expander component editor o o nel GROUT LALA Expander Curve Displays results graphically The horizontal axis is the input signal level and the vertica
439. o displayed in the list However components for user modules for which security is set will not be displayed Port L sets the monitoring point L channel port Clicking here displays a list of ports for the component selected in the Component L field Click the port you want to monitor NOTE C If you click a port in the designer window while the Monitoring Point List dialog box is displayed the port will be registered to the monitoring point of current selected row If you will register the monitoring points as stereo click a port while holding down the lt Shift gt key to register Component L and Port L then click a port again while holding down the lt Shift gt key to register Component R and Port R If you will set Label automatically click a port while holding down the lt Ctrl gt key to assign the component name and port name to Label Component R Sets the monitoring point R channel component Clicking here displays a list of components arranged in the active configuration window You can then select components for monitoring NOT A Components arranged in user modules are also displayed in the list However components for user modules for which security is set will not be displayed Port R Sets the monitoring point R channel port Clicking here displays a list of ports for the component selected in the Component R field Click the port you want to monitor E OK Button Updates the settings and clos
440. odule As Master Layout Open Original Component Editor Close All Editor Windows Open Parameter Link Add Parameter to Parameter Link iq Display Order gt ESA ge Oot S A Properties Open Original Component Editor User Control Editor and User Module Editor only lt opens the component editor for the control you clicked Display Order Specifies the vertical display order of the controllers lt opens the component editor for the control you clicked Properties Opens the properties dialog box for the control See Control Properties on page 344 NOT There some controls such as sliders that do not display the Properties command E The contextual menu that appears in when a controller is right clicked in the design mode Properties User Control Editor amp User Module Editor only Opens the controller properties window Refer to Control Properties on page 344 DME Designer Owner s Manual 9361 362 Chapter 5 Components Snap The Snap function records parameters for the component editor user control editor and user module editor temporarily Clicking a button switches the parameter set setting all parameters in the editor to the status that existed when the parameters were recorded in the memory You can record the current values for parameters Furthermore when you recall a library it is recorded to the Snap button that is on at that time For more information about libraries se
441. odule that combines a number of other components yet is treated as a single component is called a user module It is arranged in the Configuration window gt See Component List User Module Window on page 202 Designer Window Menu Print Menu This menu provides commands for exporting configurations and printing windows i Designer Print Setup Print Preview Ej Print Ctrl P E Print Setup When you select this command the Print Setup dialog box will be displayed Sets the paper size and orientation gt Printing Each Design Window in Design Window Shared Settings and Operations page 274 E Print Preview Displays a print preview of the active design window gt Print Preview window in Design Window Shared Settings and Operations page 275 E Print Prints the active window When you select this command the Print dialog box will be displayed gt Printing Each Design Window in Design Window Shared Settings and Operations page 274 Print dialog box Enter the number of copies to print into the Number of Copies box and click the Print button General Select Printer Sa Add Printer BAr 201P5 J9 Status Ready Printto file Preferences Location Comment Find Printer Page Range All Number of copies 1 C 2g C Pages fo IV g 1 2 Enter either a single page number or a single page rang
442. of the text The list to the right sets the horizontal position e Vertical Position select Top Center or Bottom e Horizontal Position select Left Center or Right Width Box Specifies the width of the object in pixels The default is 50 pixels Height Box specifies the height of the object in pixels The default is 50 pixels DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Style Sets the style of the object From the list select Plain Raised or Sunken Raised Sunken Background Image sets background effects for the object e Color Button Sets the color Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box For information about the Select Color dialog box see page 265 e Image Button Displays an image inside the object You can use image files in the following formats BMP omp PNG png XPM xom and JPEG jog Clicking here displays the Select Image dialog box Specify an image file and set its display method For information about the Select Image dialog box see page 267 OK Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings DMEs are arranged in the Zone window If DME properties settings have been made for an expansion card installed in one of the DME slots the card will be displayed automatically DME24N ETHERNET ee USE oe REMOTE i ETHERNET us REMOTE
443. olarity items will change according to the selected function GPIOUT Function Jee Flee is GPI Lock Direct Parameter Value Audio Detector e No Assign No function assigned and no GPI output will occur This is the default setting select No Assign to clear an assigned function The Parameter Threshold Terminal and Polarity items are not available e Parameter Value Edit Allows component parameter values to be output via GPI Parameter selects the parameter to be output via the GPI OUT terminals Threshold specifies the parameter threshold value Terminal and Polarity determine how the GPI voltage will be output in response to parameter changes P Ignored When value of the specified parameter is above the threshold level the output will be high and when below the threshold level the output will be low Ignored When value of the specified parameter is below the threshold level the output will be high and when above the threshold level the output will be low A pulse will be output when the value of the parameter changes from below to above the threshold A pulse 2 will be output when the value of the parameter changes from below to above the threshold 4 A pulse will be output when the value of the parameter changes from above to below the threshold d A pulse will be output when the value of the parameter changes from above to below t
444. om Control Component Editor is turned OFF DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Store Component Library saves the component parameters Click to display the Store dialog box If you then save without changing the folder the parameters will be added to the library Refer to Library on page 364 for more information Add Component to Component Link This menu has no effect for SPX components Properties Displays the SPX Component Properties dialog box SPX Component Properties SPX component properties are set for each component If multiple examples of the same component type are arranged on a single sheet changing the properties of a single component does not change the others To display the SPX Component Properties dialog box select a component object then click the Properties command on the Edit menu Component Properties Label ___LebelFont _ widh eo __Label Color Style Plain Col Label Box You can enter up to 100 characters to display over the object Width Box specifies the width of the object in pixels Height Box specifies the height of the object in pixels Style sets the style of the object From the list select Plain Raised or Sunken Label Font button sets the font for the label Clicking here displays the Select Font dialog box For information about the Select Font dialog box see Select Font dialog b
445. ombination of the audio signal processing audio input output and external device control components and their interconnections created to create the desired audio system Local Parameter Link Settings that allow linked operation between similar types of Settings internal DME parameters Component Link Settings that allow linked operation between similar types of Settings internal DME components External Device Settings required to allow control of component parameters from Settings external devices Independent settings are required for each device The external devices that can be used are as follows e MIDI Controller MIDI Control Change Parameter Change e GPI Controller e DAW Controller e AMX Crestron and other remote controllers e PM5D or other compatible mixing console controlling DME internal head amp Preset Parameters The settings for the components in a configuration Audio processing setups can be switched by changing the preset parameters Components included in the preset parameter set are as follows e GEQ MatrixMixer and other audio signal processing components e Internal AD DA DME24N Cascade DME64N and Mini YGDAI card O components e Components for external devices such as the AD8HR and AD824 remote head amplifiers Audio files to be played back by the Wav File Player File Storage Project files and other file tyoes can be stored Some settings not included 6 DME Design
446. on page 204 Restores operations undone with the Undo button back to their original condition Cut Button page 204 Cuts the selected object from the screen and moves it to the clipboard Copy Button page 204 Copies the selected object to the clipboard Paste Button page 204 Pastes data from the clipboard Navigator Button page 197 Displays or hides the Navigator window Resource Meter Button page 196 Displays or hides the Resource Meter window Analyze Button page 208 Displays the Analyze dialog box and analyzes the configuration Show Signal Delay Button The digital signal delay value is displayed in the Configuration window gt Show Signal Delay Delay Display Value in Configuration Window page 305 Probe Monitor Button Turns the probe monitor ON or OFF gt Probe Monitor in Configuration Window page 303 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer E Zoom Out Zoom In Actual Size Zoom To Buttons These buttons correspond to the commands on the View menu with the same names Changes the magnification of the display on the screen gt View Menu in Designer Window Menus page 205 E Arrow Button The mouse cursor appears as crosshairs and can be used to select objects E Hand Button The mouse cursor appears as a hand shape and can be used to click and grab the worksheet for scrolling E Show U
447. on the Edit Port Label dialog box is displayed Here you can set the port labels displayed for components Enter a Short Name and Long Name You can enter up to 100 English characters for each name If you click the Use default names button all port labels return to the default settings You can switch between long and short port names displayed in the configuration window with the Port Long Name command in the View menu When you select this command a checkmark appears next to it and long names are displayed If you select this command while a checkmark is next to it the checkmark disappears and short names are displayed Labels specified here are always displayed in the Configuration Window fF Edit Port Labels IN Cancel N3 IN4 IN5 ING IN ING N9 N10 IN11 IN12 IN13 N14 IN15 IN16 Use default names DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer User Module A user module combines a number of other components into a module that is treated as a single component It can be arranged in the Configuration window A user object arranged in a window is displayed as a single block Tne User Module Design Window or User Module Window will open according to the Double Click Action setting of User Module Properties dialog box when you double click the user module page 314 If you right click on the object a context menu will be displayed iDME64N Zone1 Open User Module Design Wi
448. on Window The Configuration window is used to design the internal configuration of each DME unit contained in the Zone window By arranging and connecting components in the Configuration window you can create things like complex processors or matrix mixers that determine the actual internal structure that operates each DME unit DMES4N Zonet Components E User Module Window The User Module window is used for designing user modules that can be arranged in the Configuration window You can create original modules by combining multiple examples of often used components When you save these modules as templates you can recall them easily whenever you want i Unaved User Module Zonet Drt TOPE G DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview E Toolkit Window The Toolkit window displays the objects that you can use in each window that can be displayed in the Designer window Those windows are the Area Zone Configuration and User Module windows The Toolkit displays different objects according to the currently active window To place an object in a window double click it in the Toolkit window where it is displayed or drag it to the Currently active window mE Navigator Window The Navigator window displays the area zones configurations and components in a hierarchal fashion that lets you check their status as a whole When editing offline you can click an area name zone name or configurat
449. on the Tool menu The currently logged on user is restricted Logoff then log in again as a new user from editing or as the Administrator If edit restrictions are required for a user place a check in the Security gt Edit checkbox A user module is not displayed on the The File menu Preference gt Check that there are user module files list ContentsFolder has been changed or umf in the ContentsFolder and User the User Module folder has been Module folders moved Cannot switch configurations in the While online you cannot not switch toa If you can switch between scenes you Navigator Window configuration different from the current will be able to switch configurations scene The user module window does not open This is a user module saved by selecting Open the save dialog select Open gt even when a user module is double Open gt User Module Design User Module Editor and resave the clicked Window user module No editor displays after right clicking on Some cards do not have editors No special corrective action a card component and selecting Open from the context menu The message Reset Config is This is not abnormal If many scenes are Wait until processing finishes displayed for a long time in the message entered into the DME processing takes area of the Synchronization dialog box Cannot set the monitor output This is because channe
450. one For example if Door_Open was stored as scene number 005 and selected when the Insert button was clicked the inserted scene would become scene number 005 and Door_Open would be moved to scene number 006 Scene No Name Configuration Edit Security Recall Security Scene No Name Configuration Edit Security Recall Security BGM_Control Configuration Level 5 Level 5 BGM_Control Configuration Level 5 Level 5 Convention_Center Configuration Level 5 Level 5 Convention_Center Configuration Level 5 Level 5 Scene 003 Configuration Level 5 Level 5 Scene 003 Configuration Level 5 Level 5 Light_On Configuration Level 5 Level 5 Light_On Configuration Level 5 Level 5 Door_Open Configuration Level 5 Level 5 No Data Click the Insert DoorOpen Configuration Level 5 Level 5 No Data button No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Datal E No Datal E Recall Detab gt Recall _ _Detail gt gt If a scene is stored in the lowest scene on the scene memory list the button will be grayed out and the insert function will not be available Delete the contents of the lowest scene before attempting to use the insert function NOTE Move the scene data to a different scene memory when you don t want to erase the contents of the lowest scene DME Designer Owner s Manual 85 86 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Clear Button Del
451. ono channel BPFs have one input and one output Stereo channel BPFs have two of each Double click a component to display the component editor for it The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components BPF component editor Library fo 0110160 Sethe band with ofa tequenoy bard 420 3 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide High Pass Filter HPF The high pass filter passes frequencies in the signal that are higher than a specified frequency while attenuating lower frequencies in the signal There are two types of HPF components mono channel and stereo channel Mono channel HPFs have one input and one output Stereo channel HPFs have two of each Double click a component to display the component editor for it The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components HPF component editor to 10 dB EEE the input signal level ON OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal Frequency Frequency 20Hz to 20kHz Hz 20 Hz to 20 kHz 20 kHz Sets the cutoff frequency the cutoff Sets the cutoff frequency Slope 6 dB Oct Sets the attenuation for each octave 12 dB Oct ON OFF Turns bypass ON O Output to 0 dB Sets the output signal level DME Designer Owner s Manual 421 Chapter 6 Component Guide Low Pass Filter LPF The low pass filter passes frequencies in the signal that are lower than a specified frequency while attenuatin
452. ons between the digital mixer and DME units Use an Ethernet cable connected to the NETWORK connectors to make connections between DME series units The port to be used for head amp control via direct serial communication with a DME unit is specified by the Internal HA Control parameter in the Remote tab in the Utility dialog box page 172 select Slot 1 when the DME unit to be used for serial communication is a DME24N Slot 3 or Slot 4 if itis a DMEGAN or EtherSound if it is a DME Satellite unit The settings for all other DME units should be OFF Use the AVS ESMonitor software from Auvilran to specify the following EtherSound settings for both the digital mixer s interface card and the DME unit e Serial Communication mode Unicast for bidirectional operation e AD8HR Remote Option Mode 2 e Baud Rate 38400 In order to turn serial communication off for the interface cards installed in all other DME units set the Serial Communication mode to Slave Ethersound Networks Pa Proguertres E Net Patch Qg O Pach Og Contol E Lin The Tree TE Group WB ner z MYIG ESE4 S1 MYIG ESES 82 DMESES 3 gt DME Sa S 4 Synchro Stahut Lock Routing Options Synchro Status mone J Emergency Clock C Emergency Clock S BOK yf Synchro i 0 S Syncheo is OF C Lock Inputs Tools yrcteo ts OF C Lock ingt Tools Cl Lock Outputs C Lock Outputs ADGHR Remote Option Serial Port Mode A
453. or On Startup On Startup TIRED Rm Eaa mettre T ContentsFolder les YAMAHA OPT Tools DME Designer Auto Save Enable Interval in minute 30 A se M Confirm Scene Store F Save after Synchronization Cancel On Startup selects the action when the application starts up or a user logs on e Load the last file opened Opens the last opened file If the file cannot be found because It was moved deleted or its name was changed a new project will be opened e Create an empty file Opens a new project e Load File amp Synchronization Opens the last opened file and synchronizes with the DME or SP2060 unit Contents Folder Specifies the folder in which common files that are not project dependent are saved Click the Browse button to locate and specify the folder The files listed below are saved in the specified folder e User module template files e All types of library files e Wave files e Graphic files NOT C If the folder is changed files that were stored in the previous folder will not be automatically moved or copied to the new folder To carry the files over to the new folder export the files as DME Designer All before changing the folder then re import the files after the new folder has been specified DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Auto Save set up the automatic file save feature This setting has no effect when the file being worked on has
454. or Synchronization i Operators View Log Window Scene StoreAecall Level 3 4 User Control Level 3 8 Set the security level for the user using Operation Security in the Security dialog box When creating a new user all the checkboxes in Operation Security will be turned OFF Click and turn ON the functions you want to permit the new user to use Scene Store Recall Level and User Control Level will be set to one level lower than the user above the newly created user The initially set level will automatically be the highest level that can be set for that user To lower the level enter a larger number in the box Click the OK button and the dialog will close You can continue creating new users without closing the dialog box 164 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Network Setup Click the Network Setup item in the Hardware menu to open the Network Setup window This window can be used to set the IP address and device group master slave status of DME and SP2060 units These settings can be edited regardless of the current settings of the DME and SP2060 units The DME Utility screen Lock page and SP2060 Utility screen User Lock settings only apply to the device panels DME64N 24N and SP2060 slave devices will not be displayed The settings cannot be changed for devices in a device group that is online Network Setup Window Names and Functions Network Setup Commun
455. ors have a single input and 2 to 6 outputs Crossover Processor Crossover Processor 2 Crossover Processor 3 Crossover Processor 4 Crossover Processor 5 2Way oWay y JIN1 HIGHL C JIN14 HIGHL F Low LJ Mmibiy a 4 9 Low t Double click a component to display the component editor for it Band numbers may vary depending on the component but they share a common configuration in the component editor If you click the Crossover Compressor PEQ or Delay button in the Navigator section an editor for the crossover compressor parametric equalizer or delay will be displayed in a separate window A separate component editor will open for each output channel Such as Low or Mid when you click on the compressor parametric equalizer or delay Component editor for Crossover Processor Ek Snare Library Wer op Store Recall Navisator Hish 2 4 Delay 4 Compressor Hish Mid Compressor t r Delay Low Mid Delay Low Delay Output Low Low Mid Hiah Mid eee 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 Q Mute Mute Mute O Phase Phdse Phase over Processor 4 Way Navigator Crossover Delay PEQ Compressor Level Mute DME Designer Owner s Manual 387 388 Chapter 6 Component Guide The output number varies according to the component variation LowiHigh Low Mid High Low Low Mid High Mid High Sub Low Low Low Mid High Mid High Sub Low Low Low Mid Mid High M
456. osspoint matrix window is displayed for each matrix mixer component editor Simple Mixer This is a simple mixer with AUX and PFL facilities 16 channel and 24 channel types are provided Simple Mixer bb kx y ae ON LEVELBAL 2 ON LEVEL Ay st tT yO gt STL 3BAND DU a ma rol AUX STR PRE POST F oh ae th it j AUX 2 PFL 450 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Double click the component to open the component editor The component editor is the same for the 16 input and 24 input types the only difference being the number of channels The Simple Mixer component editor is organized into input channel and master output sections Simple Mixer DBR Snap Library re E Store Recall 15 46 6 68 6 48 PFL oO Input Channel EQ Details Opens the EQ editor window Oo High Gain 18 0 to 18 0 dB _ Sets the gain of the EQ High band 18 0 to 18 0 dB Sets the gain of the EQ Mid band O 18 0 to 18 0 dB Sets the gain of the EQ Low band oO AUX1 Send ot0 10 0dB Sets the AUX1 send level AUX2 AUX2 Send 00 to 10 00B 10 0 to 10 00B Sets the AUX2 send level AUX1 CO Point Pre Post Switches the AUX1 send point to pre fader Pre or post fader Post AUX2 Send Point Pre Post switches the AUX2 send point to pre fader Pre or post fader Post Pan L63 L63 Center R63 L63 Center R63 R63 Sets the pan position C ON OFF
457. ot H M Internal Analoe Component Select All Clear All cance Partial Recall List Component Tree e Component Tree Displays all components included in the scene Check the checkboxes to the left of the components that you want to be recalled when a scene Is recalled e Partial Recall List Displays the sets of Partial Recall components settings that have been saved Up to 64 Partial Recall sets can be saved for each configuration Saved sets can be selected via the Partial Recall menu in the Scene Manager dialog box ee Scene Manager Gut Copy Paste Inzert lear Recall Settings DME Groupi ha Configuration Edit Security Recall Security Fade Mode Partial Recall Scene O01 Configuration Level 1 Level 1 OFF All TE OFF Part Partial ad scene O02 Configuration Level 1 Level 1 OFF All OO z No Data z z z z 5 Fartiall No Data No Data x 7 z 5 Z E F No Data z z 5 Z z No Data 5 z z 5 gt z Ma Datal S z ri DME Designer Owners Manual 87 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Click the Add button to create a new set with all components selected Click the Delete button to delete the currently selected set from the list Right clicking in the Partial Recall list displays a contextual menu that provides access to the following operations Add Add a new set with all components selected same function as the
458. oup Sets the user module group a group of user modules that use the same library When saving a new user module enter a name for the user module group in the User Module Group Name field When saving a user module created from a template you can specify whether it is saved in the same group as the original template or a new group To save the user module in a new group check the Save in New User Module Group checkbox and enter the name of the new group in the User Module Group Name field If you try to save a user module with the same name as an already saved user module a message asking xxxxx already exists Do you wish to overwrite it will be displayed To overwrite click the Yes button To abort saving click the No button to close the Save User Module dialog box To change the name click the Cancel button and change the file name in the Save User Module dialog box iF DME Desiener q User Module already exists Do you want to overwrite it When the Save User Module dialog box is displayed the name set in the user module s User Module Properties dialog box will be entered into the File name box If you change the name of a user module and save it using the Save User Module dialog box the filename in the user module and the user module name displayed in the Toolkit window will also change The Label box displayed in the User Module Properties dialog box will not change
459. ow to Zone display while online V2 0 Precautions Please use DME Designer V2 0 with DME64N 24N V2 0 or later DME8i C DME80 C DME4Iio0 C V2 0 or later and SP2060 V1 1 or later see the Yamaha Pro Audio website for compatibility details htto www yamahaproaudio com When DME64N 24N and DME8i C DME8o0 C DME4io C are used together in the same device group faster communication speed as well as smoother DME Designer meter display can be obtained by assigning a DME8i C DME8o0 C DME4io C unit as the device group master DME Designer Owner s Manual 15 16 Changes from V2 0 to V3 0 E General e DME8i ES DME80 ES DME4Iio ES support e The DME Designer and DME N Network Driver installers have been combined so the appropriate DME N Network Driver version is now installed automatically with the DME Designer application e The following connections to the Slave DME units are now possible when a DME Satellite unit is assigned as the Device Group Master USB Ethernet connection to the computer DME Designer Cascade connection to control from the PM5D console DMEGA4N only E Component e Ambient Noise Compensator component added page 379 e Audio Detector component added page 381 e Auto Gain Control component added page 382 e Auto Mixer Il component added page 431 e Simple Mixer component added page 450 e Room Combiner component added page 460 e Matrix Mixer and Router component variations added Main Pan
460. ox page 264 Label Color Button sets the color for the label text Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box Inputs Outputs Label Color Button sets the color for the I O port label text Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box Color Button sets the color of the object Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box NOTE D For information about the Select Color dialog box see Select Color Dialog Box page 265 OK Button Updates the settings and closes the dialog box Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings DME Designer Owner s Manual 239 240 Chapter 4 Designer Slot Component If an inserted I O card is selected in the DME properties settings it will be displayed in the Configuration window as a Slot component Slot component objects arranged in a configuration are displayed in block form If you select an arranged component by clicking on it then double click it the component editor opens If you right click on the object a context menu will be displayed Slot1 Input My16 C i Sop Miia mas TEYA j Slott Output P Open MY Card Editor Open Slot In Component Editor Launch Application Duplicate or Display Order eee PEG Properties E Slot Component Object Context Menu Open MY Card Editor Open HA Editor Open CobraNet Editor Opens the editor for Slot components Open Slot In Co
461. ox then select the DME or SP2060 unit IP address that matches the DME or SP2060 currently in the DME Designer NOn Click Y to display the IP addresses of all similar devices in the area Synchronization Group DME Group DME Designer Network IP Address m 992 168 000 004 DME4io C za 992 168 000 007 DME24N Select IP Address 192 168 000 004 192 168 000 007 Message iV Close this window after synchronization Store Project File into DME after synchronization 10Going Online Clicking the Go On line button displays a dialog box where you can decide the synchronization method An alert will be displayed if no scene has been recalled r Sync Direction DME Designer Device DME Designer lt Device Click the DME Designer gt Device direction button Transfer of the configuration will begin and DME Designer will be synchronized with the unit If there are many zones this process may take time NOTE When a configuration has already been transferred to a DME unit we recommend using the DME Designer lt Device button for synchronization The transfer time is faster than using the DME Designer gt Device button If the configuration has been edited however synchronization can only be achieved by using the DME Designer gt Device button DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview When going online is finished the Go On line button w
462. parameter and the output level when a key in signal is detected is OdB nominal Attack Time 0 0 10 0 s Sets the time it takes to reach the target output level after a key in signal is detected in 0 1 second increments Release Time 0 0 10 0 s Sets the time it takes for the output to return to its normal pre detect level after the key in signal falls below the threshold level and the Hold Time has elapsed in 0 1 second increments 412 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Range Sets the attenuation level the attenuation level while a key in signal is detected in the M mode or the attenuation level while no key in signal is detected in the Xe mode Bypass i On Off Attenuation is bypassed when On Level 0 dB Range ner gt oe te Cee gt Time Attack Hold Release Key in signal is detected Level 0 dB Range EE gt E A gt Time Attack Hold Release Key in signal is detected DME Designer Owner s Manual 413 414 Chapter 6 Compo nent Guide Equalizer EQ The equalizer boosts or cuts the levels of specified frequencies The EQ group contains graphic equalizers GEQ and parametric equalizers PEQ The frequency bands in the graphic equalizer are fixed The graphical interface lets you visually check the gain of each frequency There are three different types of equalizers each with a different number of frequency ban
463. pectively Recall Safe Tab The components that will not be recalled when a scene is recalled are selected via this tab M Recall Settings Recall Safe Partial Recall Component 5 AD oh AEC Component Analog Output O Oscillator Component i A Slot Output Slot H M Internal Analog Select All Clear All Component Tree DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window e Component Tree Displays all components included in the scene Check the checkboxes to the left of the components that you do not want to recall when a scene Is recalled NOT C Components that are checked in the Recall Safe tab component tree will not be recalled If you want all components to be recalled there is no need to make any settings in this tab This function is useful when you want most of the scene s components to be recalled normally while preventing specified components from being recalled Partial Recall tab In this tab you can select only the components you want to be recalled when a scene recall operation is carried out All other unchecked components will not be recalled The selections made here can be saved a sets Saved sets can be used with multiple scenes copied and edited as required P Recall Settings Recall Safe Partial Recall Add Delete Partiall Partial2 Component H O Analog Output M Oscillator b M Slot Output Sl
464. pendently specified for each port type page 219 e Default wire thicknesses and types can be independently specified for each port type e An automatic hot spot connection function has been added page 285 e Port display has been added to External Device Picture DME and ICP1 objects e When drawing wires the keyboard cursor keys can be used to move the mouse cursor and the lt Enter gt key can be used to create nodes e When drawing wires lt Shitt gt key plus lt gt key and lt Shift gt key plus lt lt gt key combinations can be used to automatically connect horizontally aligned hot spots e DME object ports can be freely specified e Compilation of configurations with loop connections is possible when Auto Delay Compensation is On e The name has been changed from Foot Monitor external device to Floor Monitor e Addition External Device types have been provided e External Devices can be double clicked to open a file saved by other applications page 233 e Picture objects can be double clicked to open a specified editor page 249 e Text objects can be double clicked to open a specified editor page 252 DME Designer Owner s Manual e User module port labels can be edited page 246 e Graphics can be placed to represent user modules page 247 e The Legend field automatically resizes to accommodate project names and titles of different lengths e A Generic MY Others setting has been provided
465. plays the grid using lines e Dot Displays the grid using dots Save As Default Setting Place a checkmark here to make the current grid settings the default when a new sheet is created OK Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Exporting Each Design Window Instead of saving projects in their entirety you can output the information contained in the active window using the Designer Window Print gt Export DXF command and save it in a DXF format file These files have dxf as their filename extension Because the DXF format uses the standard CAD file format it can be opened using CAD software DXF format files can also be opened by graphics software that Support vector graphics such as Adobe Illustrator NOT C Configurations are saved in project files This is done using the File menu gt Save and Save As commands in the Main Panel window For information about saving project files see Project Files on page 34 IF Designer H B External De i Picture i Text i Ellipse Grea Parts List Device List Component List fone Manager Device Group Manager Configuration Manager Save User Module User Module Manager Show Signal Delay H Analyze fees Probe Monitor Monitoring Point List
466. ponent Groups When the Configuration window and User Module window are made active a component list is displayed in the Toolkit window and you can use the Component List on the Tools menu Components can be separated into groups based on types In the Toolkit window component groups are displayed as folders Some of the groups in the Toolkit window are further divided into Subgroups Click the buttons to the left of the folders to display the components Toolkit H Crossover H Crossover Processor H Crossover Frocessorll DD elay H Long Group mE op E2 Output SE Output E Output E5 Output HBG Output E7 Output ES Output D Dynamics H Compander l B Compressor HE Mono i E Stereo DD e E sser HE Mono i E Stereo Ducker HE Mono i E Stereo H Expander Component NOT C When the User Module window is active User Module is not present on the menu DME Designer Owner s Manual 371 Chapter 6 Component Guide In the Designer window Tools menu Component List menu component groups are displayed as submenu items The items with small rightward facing triangles are groups Those without triangles are components i Designer NOT C When the User Module window is active User Module is not present in the menu Component List Ambient Noise Compensator Audio Detector Auto Gain Control Crossover Crossover Processor Crossover Processor ll 372 DME
467. ponent is right clicked even when the Edit Mode is OFF e The Compile Settings can now be edited for each DME unit page 220 e Only one Zone window is now provided for multiple configurations e The Export DXF and Preferences commands have been moved from the Print menu to the Tools menu e Configuration has been changed to Configuration Manager in the Tools menu e When Prohibit Diagonal Connections in the Tools menu is active it is possible to select 2 diagonal points and those points will automatically be connected by a combination of horizontal and vertical wires Component Editor Window e A Level Meter Enable command that displays or hides the meter values has been added to the contextual menu Hiding the meters can result in increased communication speed in some cases page 360 e A Display Order function that allows the order of the controllers to be changed as required has been added to the User Control Editor and User Module Editor page 325 e An Add Component to Component Link command has been added to the controller contextual menu page 360 e The registered group is now displayed in the Add Parameter to Parameter Link submenu of the contextual menu of controllers registered for Parameter Link operation page 368 e Increased speed when selecting and dragging a large number of controllers in the User Control Editor and User Module Editor e t is now possible to switch from the Navigator wind
468. ports in your configuration with headphones You can turn it ON or OFF using Probe Monitor in the Tools menu or the Probe Monitor button on the toolbar The probe monitor can be set to ON or OFF for each DME64N 24N The probe monitor can be used only when online with the DME64N 24N and Configuration window or user module active NOn DME Satellite and SP2060 do not support the probe monitor E Probe Monitor Procedure 1 Turn the probe monitor ON Click Probe Monitor in the Tools menu or the Probe Monitor button on the toolbar The shape of the mouse pointer changes DME Designer Owner s Manual 303 304 Chapter 4 Designer The output port you clicked will be selected and monitoring will begin Monitor object If you click another output port the location being monitored will change E L R Selection To monitor the left channel and right channel simultaneously lt Shift gt click on the left channel then do the some for the right channel E Exiting the Probe Monitor Click Probe Monitor in the Tools menu or the Probe Monitor button on the toolbar to turn OFF the probe monitor When probe monitor is turned off the mouse pointer returns to its normal shape E Monitoring the Second or Later Time The software remembers the location being monitored even when probe monitoring is turned OFF The next time probe monitoring is turned ON the location that was being monitored previously will be selecte
469. properties page 243 User Module page 309 The lock icon will appear locked when the password has not been entered and layouts cannot be edited in the Design Mode Fi EQ Gomp fol Snare Librar s rE ST TI Store Recall a WserModule The lock icon will not appear if the Enable Security checkbox in the Properties dialog box is not checked E EO Gomp k Ed Snare Librar s wr eo Store Recall UserModule DME Designer Owner s Manual 331 Chapter 5 Components E Edit Palette The edit palette is automatically displayed whenever the user control editor user module editor is active in design mode Whenever you move the user control editor user module editor the edit palette moves together with it When you turn OFF design mode the palette disappears Commands for editing in the user control editor user module editor are provided on the edit palette Design Mode Off Button Undo Button Control Alignment Grid Setting Redo Button Toil Palette i o fe A me Gra 00_ Paste Button Copy Button Cut Button E Design Mode Off Button Turns OFF the design mode E Undo Button Redo Button Used to undo redo operations E Cut Button Copy Button Cuts or copies the selected controls See Cut Copy Paste Controls on page 343 E Paste Button Pastes cut or copied controls See Cut Copy Paste Controls on page 343 E Alignment of Controls
470. r 3 Enter the password into the Password box Enter the password set for the user If no password has been set leave the password box blank when you log on 4 Click the OK button DME Designer starts up E When Automatic Logon Has Been Set page 31 If automatic logon has been set the Log On dialog box will not be displayed The user set for automatic logon will be logged on With automatic log on even if a password is set for a user it will not be requested during log on This is useful when logging on a specific user E Starting by Opening a Project File DME Designer starts when a project file with a saved configuration is opened When the project file is opened DME Designer is started with the window configuration that was in place when the file was last saved 24 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 1 Before Using Closing DME Designer To close DME Designer click Exit on the File menu of the Main Panel window It can also be closed by clicking the Close button on the Main Panel window 1 Click Exit on the Main Panel window File menu When you try to close DME Designer Project File has been modified Save will be displayed in a dialog box NO Sometimes the Project File has been modified Save dialog box will not be displayed DME Designer i Project file has been modified Save Mo Cancel 2 To save the file click Yes To close without savin
471. r Delay s Compressor Delay i Compressor 13666 lt E716H Name Function o Input Meter Displays the input signal level see Meter eee the ane i level aa fe 10 10 dB A Mute Mute ON OFF ON OFF Mutes the input signal the input Mutes the input signal Oo Gain to 10 dB sets the output signal level for each frequency band ON OFF Mutes the output signal for each frequency band DME Designer Owner s Manual 393 Chapter 6 Component Guide ji Navigator Crossover f This opens the crossover editor window Delay oo e This opens the delay editor window PEQ This opens the parametric equalizer editor window Compressor This opens the compressor editor window E Crossover When you click the Crossover button for the crossover processor It opens the crossover editor window Crossover Processor I component editor Crossover Processor Il Crossover4 Low Low Mid Hish Mid Hish Polarity Polarity icy Polarity Polarity Normal Normal Sor Normal 9 661 Normal 16663 27 18H Crossover Curve Displays the level of each frequency band distinguished by color Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the cross frequency between each frequency band Polarity Normal Inverted Reverses the output signal phase for each frequency band Mute ON OFF Mutes the signal for each frequency band This is linked to the Mute setting in the original window The display appears as
472. r on page 325 NOTE C Controls that are not available to the currently logged on user are not shown in the menu The User Controls that are displayed when the DME Designer is launched can be set on the User Control Manager dialog box gt See User Control Manager Dialog Box on page 91 page 325 m Navigator Displays or hides the Navigator window DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Tools Menu DME Designer Ctrl i Ctril 2 Ctrl 3 Synchronization Ctrl 4 RES Event Scheduler Way File Manager lel GPI Ctrl 5 ay MIDI Ctrl 6 User Defined Button Chri Da Control Remote Control Setup List Internal H4 Control Parameter List Component Lock Scene Link Manager SP2060 Library Manager E Scene Manager Opens the Scene Manager dialog box gt See Scene Manager on page 82 mE User Control Manager Opens the User Control Manager dialog box gt See User Control on page 91 page 325 E Parameter Link Opens the Parameter Link window gt See Parameter Link on page 94 E Synchronization Opens the Synchronization dialog box gt See Synchronization DME Designer and Unit Synchronization on page 97 E Event Scheduler Opens the Event Scheduler dialog box gt See Event Scheduler on page 101 E Wav File Manager Opens the
473. r 4 Designer Drawing Settings several functions are available to helo ensure accurate wire drawing E Grid To accurately draw in relation to the grid turn ON Snap to Grid in the Grid dialog box E Draw Exact Vertical and Horizontal Lines When Prohibit Diagonal Connections in the Tools menu is turned ON wires will be drawn using horizontal and vertical lines only Diagonal wires cannot be drawn To activate this function select it from the menu so that a checkmark appears next to the command name in the menu Selected the command again to remove the checkmark and deactivate the function You can also limit wire drawing to horizontal and vertical lines by holding the lt Shift gt key while drawing the wires NOTE You can change the positions of existing components or nodes while converting the existing wires to wires composed only of horizontal and vertical lines by activating the Prohibit Diagonal Connections function You can draw diagonal lines holding the lt Shift gt key while dropping the objects T Designer Gn ma Area Parts List Device List k Component List p Zone Manager Device Group Manager Configuration Manager Save User Module User Module Manager PA Analyze Probe Monitor Monitoring Point List aN Edit Mode Sheet v Been ml i Connections Grid y fa r r Oo yy Ex por t DXF Preferences Wire Draw
474. r Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Mixer The Mixer group contains the Auto Mixer Auto Mixer Il Delay Matrix Matrix Mixer and Simple Mixer Auto Mixer There is a noise gate for each input channel which passes only signals that exceed a specified threshold There are five mixer types each with a different number of inputs Double click a component to display the component editor for it The number of channels varies depending on the component but all share a common configuration in the component editor The auto mixer component editor consists of two sections input channels and master output Auto Mixer component editor Auto Mixer KEk Snare Library we te Store Recall Phace Gate Threshold gm ys S ISEN T O 1 l AE tebe bale BEL i i mr l E PS a l EUS AME Wh Ima l l KEE l LEESI Do m N a e KEER GDE gna D a Pat fe EREEREER ae PAE E l l Eo l pagi EZERSZER ne CEOD Iei Peal bal Et LEERI SANNE V Wh E Lepo FE S l l l Auto Mixer rarametetr setting Range Phase ON OFF Reverses the phase of each channel s input signal Gate Indicator When the gate is open the light turns green When the gate is closed the light turns yellow Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB Sets the threshold value for each gate Hold 44 1 kHz 110 ms to 2 13 s Sets the gate hold time 48 kHz 101 ms to 1 96 s The setting range may vary depending 8
475. r eachta DME Designer Owner s Manual 397 Chapter 6 Component Guide E Compressor When you click the Compressor button for the crossover processor It opens the compressor editor window Here you can make compressor settings for each frequency band Crossover Processor Il Compressor E ols lagas CerisHs input signal level and the vertical axis is the output level Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation Output Meter Displays the output signal level Q O Compressor Curve Displays results graphically The horizontal axis is the Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB Sets the threshold value Ratio 1 1 to 1 sets the compression ratio STING Man HARD 1 2 3 4 5 sets the way compression is applied Attack O to 120 ms Sets the attack time 0 dB to 18 dB sets the output gain On ON OFF Turns the compressor ON When you turn this button OFF the compressor is bypassed Release 44 1 kHz 6 ms to 46 s Sets the release time 48 kHz 5 ms to 42 3 s The setting range may vary depending on the 88 2 KHz 3 ms to 23 s operating frequency 96 kHz 3 ms to 21 1 s 398 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Delay This is a multi tap delay that provides independent delay and level control for each output You can specify the delay time in milliseconds samples meters feet time code frames or number of beats Within the delay group there are two subgroups called Lo
476. r her own level The log on user can use zones that are checked in the View Zone field Users with security level lower than level 2 form groups with a level 2 user as the leader Regardless of user security level user controls and scenes created by users of a different group cannot be used or edited DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Names and Functions Enable Auto Log On Enables auto logon If this checkbox is selected the user displayed in the box to the right will be logged on automatically when DME Designer is started Auto logon logs on the user without any password entry Click the W at the right of the box and select the user for auto logon from the displayed user list If auto logon is turned OFF the Log On dialog box will be displayed whenever the DME Designer is started Each time a user must be selected and a password entered in order to log on If auto logon is changed from ON to OFF Confirmation of Current User dialog box will be displayed Confirmation of Current User Ed User Administrator i Password Cancel Enter the user s password into the Password box and click the OK button If you click the Cancel button auto logon will remain ON E Auto Logon User selects the user for auto logon when Enable Auto Log On is checked be Enable Auto Log On Administrator Y User List Administrator MM ainQ peratar Name Opera
477. r settings produce more gain compensation Caution sudden changes in this setting can result in output level changes Response Time Sets the response time for gain compensation Effective for upward gain compensation gain increase this parameter specifies the time it will take for a gain increase of 6 dB This parameter does not affect gain reduction ON OFF Turns the noise gate compensation on or off ON OFF Turns gain compensation on or off 1 The setting range of Response Time varies according to the operating frequency as follows 44 1kHz 447 msec to 2 14 sec 48kHz 411 msec to 1 96 sec 88 2kHz 224 msec to 1 07 sec 96kHz 206 msec to 984 msec DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Crossover separates input signals into multiple frequency channels and outputs them The following five types of components are available in the Crossover group 2 Way 3 Way 4 Way 5 Way and 6 Way Crossover components have a single inout and multiple outputs P CTGSSBVED on os Crossovert2 Crossovers Crossovert3 Crossover 4 _ Double click a component to display the component editor for It Crossover component Crossover SEE Snap Library we tT DU Store Recall Low Mid Hish Mid Outrut equency Quteut equency Outrut Level SAA Lewel pie Mute Mute a e Phase e Phase V logg 2712H Crossover Curve Displays the level of each frequency band distingu
478. r to the user control editor 1 Open the component edit window that has the controls you will be placing in the user control box 2 Open the user control editor User control names are displayed in the View gt User Control submenu in the Main Panel window Click a user control name to open its window 3 Right click in the component editor or the user control editor The context menu will be displayed 4 Click Design Mode on the menu KE Master Volume Sele Snap Library re Store Recai Design Mode Set Us h Module As Master Layout Peak Hold gt Level Meter Enable Close All Editor Windows Open Parameter Link Design mode will be turned ON 5 Drag the controls from the component editor to the user control editor 2 Master Volume UserControl 338 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Components m Placing Controls by Dragging Them User Module Editor You can drag the controls you want to copy from the component editor window in the user module to the user module editor 1 Create a user module then arrange and connect the components for it 2 Double click the components and leave the component editor windows that appear open 3 Store the user module by checking Double Click Action Open User Module Editor in the Store dialog box see Saving User Modules on page 309 for details about storing user modules f Save User Module User Modules EQ Comp Double Glick Action
479. raagson con ammanycaianneiqncaneenaniielrengsoniawaens 495 COMMUNI CANON SIAS cates acseijat aden aniees adeaiseciiaanickoonsasendt astaleeateen 59 COMPEINGED serierne niran R Ei EEAO RiR 403 CODON aea EE EEAS 29 235 O eiaa N 302 Component ECHO ercsrisiiniriienirasricrstisic tenaren atiina athea 30 Component GOUD seraano E aeaa 371 COMPONEN aeaee a E R E 372 Component List Configuration WINGOW eessessseeeriererrrrenn 201 Component List User Module window cc ccceecccceeeeeeeee eens 202 COMPONEN LOCK sortsien nE ERRE 150 COMPrESSOT ccncasscniaboscratessadadesalsbolenaneioedaat adaboleniniedsdvads aloboderavdenes 404 COMO NMA sersa fan Gta R REE 192 CCIM E E E E E E E E E eae 295 CI yt Saeed testes ce accu E RS 308 TG pata coe secretes eee seas E eaten terete eeeieee tater 192 creation procedure niisscarstraenescesiatednacddiatokeddeedierioindidendaaiaciets 49 deleting oircsrriatseabinceniei nerden r aeda iia 295 COU E R E E E E E E T 192 SINC eaaa E E E ancien E E 295 Coniguration WINGOW sitnasSaiaciuissadncinsinritcinderamed REA 28 301 Component List seisnsonssiudccmicundddleiadantwladmadintiabiddaiannd cats Anata 201 Control S A E EE IET ET P E EI E AEE IET 342 COTO e E EE E A E E R 343 CUT a E E 343 DME Designer Owner s Manual TOWING eor E EE E E IS 342 BE e EEE E E EE E ETT 343 ELE E a S EE ATEI AT AE ATE T 337 OS e TEE E E 344 Control Change tab sanaccarinansadnronnanndsmatconetadnesaanwniardiea
480. rammable LPFs have two of each Double click a component to display the component editor for it The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components Programmable LPF component editor Programmable LPF l BHR Snap Library AETI Store Recall o LPF Outru Q Tyre Level Freaquenc Oj sdB Uct Level conj Linkwitz am ala EH ac O Gc LC C9 20 20k y D Pass Section Parameter Setting Range Function l o Input to 10 dB Sets the input signal level 0 ON OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal 6 dB to 6 dB When AdjustGc Adjustable Gc is selected for Type this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency ON OFF Turns bypass ON Output to 0 dB Sets the output signal level Vo Type Thru Sets the attenuation for each octave and the 6 dB Oct filter type 12 dB Oct AdjustGc THRU turns off the filter 12 dB Oct Butrwrth 12 dB Oct Bessel 12 dB Oct Linkwitz 18 dB Oct AdjustGc 18 dB Oct Butrwrth 18 dB Oct Bessel 24 dB Oct AdjustGc 24 dB Oct Butrwrth 24 dB Oct Bessel 24 dB Oct Linkwitz 36 dB Oct AdjustGc 36 dB Oct Butrwrth 36 dB Oct Bessel 48 dB Oct AdjustGc 48 dB Oct Butrwrth 48 dB Oct Bessel 48 dB Oct Linkwitz Gc DME Designer Owner s Manual 427 428 Chapter 6 Com Meter ponent Guide Displays signal levels Meter components are available with 1 2 4 8 12 and 16 channels Meter 2 Meter S gt Meter 4 Meter Sy
481. range depends on the Frame value Beat the range depends on the Beat value a o ON OFF Turns ON each channel s delay ON OFF Turns ON muting for each channel s output Delay Scale selects the units for setting the delay time The selected button will light up and the units in the Delay edit box will change If Beat is selected use the knob to set the BPM beats minute Delay Scale does not support the parameter link feature Refer to Parameter Link on page 94 for information on parameter linking DME Designer Owner s Manual 401 Chapter 6 Component Guide Dynamics Components in the dynamic group adjust the dynamic range of the sound There are eight types of components each of which is available in mono channel and stereo channel versions The nine types are compander hard compander soft compressor de esser ducking expander gate limiter and orogram ducker E Keyin All components in the dynamic group except the de esser have Keyln input This is used as a trigger source that activates the effects of the component Snare wet 0 v LRBOTH KEYIN Keyin Section The currently selected trigger source is displayed on the button Click the button and select the trigger source from the menu Mono channel Stereo channel a a v LR BOTH KEYIN e SELF Sets the input signal as the trigger source for mono channel components e LV R Sets the left or right input signal as
482. re called components This refers to each type of processor that operates the DME Object normally refers to Picture Text Ellipse and other items that are used after connecting them by wire to the various components DME Designer Owner s Manual 29 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Component Editor The blocks that are arranged in the configuration window are called components When you double click on a component block arranged in the Configuration window the Component Editor window will open There you can edit the parameters for that component The types of parameters displayed will differ depending on the component i DMEGAM Zone1 CL Compressa iga i BUS our nun BUE BUS LLELE nus BUE Bu a j Component Editor Stereo Compressor Component Window Operations Operations in all windows are the same as for normal Windows applications The windows are controlled with the Minimize Maximize Restore and Close buttons at the upper right of the title bar DME Designer is closed by clicking the Close button on the Main Panel window 30 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Users and Security You can create multiple users in DME Designer and set the functions that are available to each user Although users who will design and put together installations must be able to use all the functions of DME Designer users who will only operate the system can b
483. ressor notch filters when the filters begin to have noticeable negative impact on sound quality A setting of 1 93 results in the narrowest notch filter bandwidth Reducing bandwidth can also reduce the effectiveness of feedback suppression The default setting is 1 10 Depth 12 Specifies the attenuation of the notch filter that will be applied at the detected feedback frequency A setting of 18 results in the strongest feedback suppression but this can also lead to a reduction in sound quality The default setting is 6 DME Designer Owner s Manual 485 Chapter 6 Component Guide E Advanced Settings Editor Window Click the Advanced button in the AEC component editor window to open this window The Advanced settings editor window includes microphone settings for each AEC channel When a microphone with a PTT Push To Talk switch is used a small amount of noise may be produced when the PTT switch is off The AEC system may mistakenly learn the noise resulting in an unwanted echo when the PTT switch is turned on and speech is resumed This window includes settings that can prevent this type of problem as well as specify how the microphones will be used AEG Advanced Settings Hear end Mic 1 Hedar end Mic Hear end Mic 3 Hear end Mic 4 is PTT S PTT fs PTT z PTT Mic In Threshold Mic In Threshold Mic In Threshold Mic In Threshold u When this button is turned ON and the microphon
484. roject file the application will request an ID and password If they are not entered correctly the file cannot be opened Be careful to avoid mistakes when entering the ID and password The password cannot be reissued and the ID and password cannot be changed Be careful not to forget them Save Button saves the project file If the characters entered into the Password and Confirm Password boxes were not the same a Password is different dialog box will be displayed Click the OK button and reenter the correct password in the Password and Confirm Password boxes A Password is different Cancel Button Cancel the file save process DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview E Saving Project Files 1 Click File menu gt Save in the Main Panel window a DME Designer cH 128 b Grif te Port User Save s Import DME Designer All File Export DME Designer All File DME File Storage Import Device Configuration Export Device Configuration t 10 Setupo0 daf 2 0 Setup06 daf Preferences Log OFF Exit If there is a file already saved with the same name it will be overwritten When saving a project file for the first time you must name the file before saving it The Save As dialog box will open the same as when clicking the File menu Save As command Enter a filename and specify the folder wh
485. rol signal en gt Data explanation ee ree all z Setting preset parameters Dome Low Dome Hid Dome Hi Wiegand Set 1 User Defined Button Scene Manager LCD Display Assigned Parameter No Scene Name Configuration Preset Parameters Dome Low Crossover Output Low Level Dome Mid Crossover Output Mid Level Dome Hi Crossover Output High Level No Assign No Assign No Assign 003 Band Set 1_ Specifies the parameter to be changed Specifies the configuration and preset parameters combination Configuration Preset parameters for output processor Cross Over Set the value Mi Two DME units Device Group When one DME unit doesn t provide sufficient processing power up to 16 DME units can be used External Device MIDI GPI DAW AMX Crestron controlling DME internal head amp Input Output l een Microphone i i Power Amp Mixer 1 i Processor External Head Amp t etc Input Output bi E put r JUpu P Audio signal j p Control signal D ae i Data explanation oer gt Setting preset parameters Scene Manager eee For DME 1 For DME 2 Scene Name Configuration Preset parameters Configuration Preset parameters 008 Band Set 1 User Defined Button LCD Display Assigned Parameter Dome Low 1 Crossover Output Low Level Dome Mid 1 Crossover Output Mid Level Dome Hi 1 Crossover Output High Level Hall Low 2 Crossover
486. rom you increases the value Rolling it down towards you decreases the value Dragging Dragging upward increases the value while dragging downward decreases it e lt ESC gt Key The lt ESC gt key can be used to cancel a value being entered E Graph Control Point Displays parameters graphically When parameters are changed the graph also changes In graphs that have control points you can adjust parameters by dragging the points On graphs with control points that are limited to movement in one direction only aligning the mouse pointer with the control point and pressing the mouse button causes the mouse pointer to change to a double headed arrow pointing in both directions of movement Change the parameter by dragging in the directions of the arrow Control points that can be dragged in any direction usually have their position determined by multiple parameters in the component editor These multiple parameters can be adjusted by dragging the point When there are multiple control points in the graph they are identified by their colors A bar with the same color as each control point can be found below the corresponding knob or edit box NOT CO When a graph that has control points is copied to the User Control Editor or User Module Editor the controls points will not be displayed The controllers assigned to the corresponding parameters must also be copied to display the control points DME Designer Owner s Manual
487. roperties dialog box will be displayed This dialog box sets the size of the knob Knob Properties Ed knob Size Size z Cancel Color Settings Indicator Yellow r Thumb white ka W Background Color E Select Color Size Displays a list where you can select the knob size Select Large Medium Small or Very small NOT C You can change the size of a knob by dragging one of the marks at the four corners top bottom left right of the knob in the user control editor Color Settings e Indicator Select an indicator color from the list White Red Yellow Green Blue Violet Black Light Blue e Thumb Select a knob color from the list Black Gray Wh ite Red Yellow Green Blue Violet e Background Color Uncheck this item to make the background transparent When this item is checked the Color button to its right opens the Select color dialog box that can be used to select a background color DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Components E Slider Properties Dialog Box The Slider Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click a slider or right click it and select Properties from the contextual menu This lets you change the size orientation and other characteristics of the related slider l Slider Properties Size Width 29 4 Height 168 3 Cancel Style Direction Vertical v MV Background Color
488. roup master When using the Windows Vista operating system use only USB MIDI Driver V3 0 or later and DME N Network Driver V1 2 or later DME Designer Owner s Manual 17 18 Changes from V3 0 to V3 5 E Component e Program Ducker component added page 412 e V3 5 1 During installation it is possible to select and install soeaker library data for third part speakers into the Speaker Processor component library Main Panel Window e MIDI Setup has been discontinued Communication ports can now be directly selected via the Setup menu Communication Port item page 155 e V3 5 1 SP2060 Backup has been added to the main panel window Hardware menu allowing internal SP2060 data to be transferred to a computer for backup Multiple SP2060 units can be restored from the backup data page 184 Designer Window e Improvements in the compiler algorithm achieve greater DSP resource utilization efficiency page 98 page 305 page 308 e MY16 ES64 MY16 EX and MY16 MD64 I O cards can now be specified for slot installation e The TX6n TX5n TX4n ACD1 SB168 ES IMx644 IPA8200 and NEXO products can now be specified as external devices V3 5 1 adds the IM8 MSR250 and other devices e When cascade connecting DMEGAN units across device groups unit numbers are automatically assigned when a connection is made between the CAS IN and CAS OUT terminals in the Zone window Others Firmware V3 09 changes e When controlli
489. rs of multiple DME units in the zone NOTE Recall Safe and Partial Recall settings page 86 do not apply to linked parameters when a scene is recalled Because there is a large load on the network the maximum number of Global Links will be limited to eight DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window e Local Link Links to the parameters of one DME unit NOT C When a scene is recalled using Recall Safe or Partial Recall settings page 86 linked parameters will be recalled with the same settings e Component Link Links component parameters of the same type within a single DME unit ESE When a scene is recalled using Recall Safe or Partial Recall settings page 86 linked parameters will be recalled with the same settings NOTE Component Link cannot be used with SPX components Parameter Link Group List Displays a hierarchical list of parameter link group and the parameters that belong to them When a parameter link group name is selected the controls that belong to that parameter link group are selected Global Link Local Link Component Link Oba ink Keep Offet Min Max off E74 Groupt On zz Hish Mid SDMESI Ci2 Outrut equency oz Crossover Level E eve E i Output 1 1 Level INFINITY dB 0 00 dB Sa 9 99 oo Group T off DME8i 02 Crossover in Centers 1 Frequency 20 0 Hz 20 0k Hz i Center 2 1 Frequency 20 0 Hz 20 0k Hz e Phase e Group Name You
490. rt Ho Internal H amp A Control Port OFF External H Control Port Remote RS 422 ba COM Fort OFF r NOn The SP2060 and ICP1 are not supported DME Remote Control Displays sets the connector and connection type to be used for DME remote control protocol communication If the selected terminal was previously assigned to a different function a confirmation message will appear The available ports depend on the device DME64N DME24N OFF Remote RS 232C Remote RS 422 Network DME Satellite OFF Remote Network OFF Select OFF when this function is not to be used Remote RS 232C External controllers AMX Crestron etc control the DME64N 24N via the REMOTE connector using an RS 232C connection Remote RS 422 External controllers AMX Crestron etc control the DME64N 24N via the REMOTE connector using an RS 422 connection Network This setting allows the DME to be controlled via the NETWORK terminal When Network is selected it is also possible to select the port number to be used The Ethernet port to be used for remote control will be displayed in the IP Port No field Change the port as necessary via the Select IP Port No dialog box that appears when the Select IP Port No button is clicked since the DME network connection will automatically be broken when the port is changed DME Designer will have to be re launched Remote External controllers AMX Crestron
491. rview E Export Device Configuration Submenu The DMEs or SP2060s included in the current configuration will be displayed on the Export Device Configuration submenu a DME Designer Ctrl M Chri o Cbrl 5 Import DME Designer All File Export DME Designer All File DME File Storage Import Device Configuration Export Device Configuration OMe count DMES4N 10 SetupO dat SP Groupi OMEBI C 2 0 Setup06 daf Preferences Log OFF Exit Library Files Component Editor User Control Editor and User Module Editor parameters can be stored to and recalled from library files Refer to Library Files on page 325 The library data for a single SP2060 unit can be imported or exported as required Refer to SP2060 Library Manager on page 153 DME Designer All Files The project file and all DME Designer settings related to the project file can be managed as a DME Designer All file DME Designer All files have a dme extension DME Designer All files include the settings listed below e Project file e Library files e User module files e Wave files e Picture files e All DME Designer settings DME Designer All files are a convenient way to move project data and DME settings you have created from one computer to another The DME Designer All import and export commands are provided in the Main Panel Window File menu DME Designer Owner s Manual 49 Chapter 2 DME D
492. s Opens the Preferences dialog box gt See Preferences on page 72 Log Off Logs off the currently logged on user Because the currently logged on user must be logged off before a new one can be logged on the Log On dialog box will be displayed so you can log on the next user gt See Users and Security on page 31 Exit Closes DME Designer A confirmation message asking Project file has been modified Save will be displayed To save click Yes To close without saving click No DME Designer i Project file has been modified Saver Cancel DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Edit Menu uae DME Designer Undo Move Objects 9 Ctrl 2 an OO WP tf Redo Append Wire Otrl y User ndo History i T T E Undo Undoes a single operation The name of the operation that will be undone by Undo is displayed in the command name You can also select the commands that come after that When Undo is not possible the command will be grayed out E Redo Returns to the status before the Undo command was executed The name of the operation that will be restored by Redo is displayed You can Redo only as many operations as were undone with the Undo command When Redo is not possible the command will be grayed out E Undo History Opens the Undo History dialog box Undoes multiple operations
493. s E Box Properties Dialog Box Right click the box and select Properties from the contextual menu to display the Box Properties dialog box a Box Properties Box Size Width Fly Saye E0 Cancel Box Style Style Plain ki J Round Gorner Curve Medium gt Line Type icf r Sie 2 Select Color Fill Golor Select Color Box Size e Width Specifies the width in pixels e Height Specifies the height in pixels Box Style e Style sets the style of the object Select Plain Raised or Sunken from the list e Round Corner Turn ON to produce a round cornered box Use Curve to select the degree of roundness Line e Type select a type of frame line from the list Solid Dash Dot Dash Dot Or Dash Dot Dot e Size sets the thickness of the frame line in pixels The range is from 1 to 100 e Select Color Button Sets the color of the frame line Click to display the Select color dialog box Refer to Select Color Dialog Box on page 265 for more information on the Select Color dialog box Fill Color e Select Color Button sets the frame fill color Click to display the Select color dialog box Refer to Select Color Dialog Box on page 265 for more information on the Select Color dialog box DME Designer Owner s Manual 353 Chapter 5 Components E Ellipse Properties Dialog Box Right click the ellipse and select Proper
494. s is the output level ar g Range Function o Release 44 1 kHz 6 ms to 46 s Sets the release time 48 kHz 5 ms to 42 3 s The setting range may very depending on the 88 2 kHz 3 ms to 23 s operating frequency 96 kHz 3 ms to 21 1 s Gan oo 0 dB to 18 dB Sets the output gain 80 Hz to 10 kHz Sets the minimum signal frequency for compression ON OFF Turns the de esser ON 20 Output Level dB l l i l I I i l l i i l i i L Threshold 200B i i 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 O 10 20 Input Level dB DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Ducking Attenuates the output a particular amount when an input signal exceeds its threshold Both mono channel and stereo channel duckers are provided Mono channel duckers have one input one output and one Keyln input Stereo channel duckers have two inputs two outputs and one Keyln input Double click a component to open the component editor for it The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components Ducking component editor Duckine Snap WETT Ducking Curve Displays results graphically The horizontal axis is the input signal level and the vertical axis is the output level Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation Output Meter Meter Displays the output aeia level o Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB eee the threshold value Rawe 70 dB t
495. s placed in the DME64N configuration window no other components can be used even though the resource meter does not reach 100 Double click a component to display the component editor for it The number of input and output channels varies depending on the component but all share a common configuration in the component editor The matrix mixer component editor consists of four sections input output matrix and block The Master buttons in the Input and Output sections display windows where you can make master input and output settings The level for each channel is set in separate windows that display four channels each Matrix Mixer component editor matrix Mixer Library Store Recall Outeut Block Master ee Se On Uff Nominal Minimum Matrix Mixer 8 Input 8 Output C27 37H Output Opens the Output Master window Matrix send level These meters display the send levels from each input channel to all output buses Clicking here displays the Crosspoint window Block ON send from all inout channels to output buses ae ON button lights up Of Turns OFF send from all inout channels to output buses 2 jor aa all send levels making them O dB Resets all send levels making them dB DME Designer Owner s Manual 443 444 Chapter 6 Component Guide E Matrix Output Level In the matrix you can view send levels from all output channels to output buses at once The level will be grayed out
496. s to be output to the CASCADE bus here Signals from multiple DMEGA4N units input to the same channel are summed The meter displays the signal levels being sent to the rear panel CASCADE OUT terminal When multiple DME64N units are cascade connected each additional unit introduces a delay of a few samples that is automatically compensated for This compensation is independent from the compensation within each unit Right click the component and select Open Component Editor from the contextual menu to open the component editor The component editor is the same for all types Cascade Output mE fF 8 3 18 N i 18 14 15 16 IF 18 15 26 21 22 23 24 253 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Shows the signal level for each channel 490 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide The following diagram shows an example in which three DMEGAN units are cascaded Signal transmission and reception between cascade connected DMEGAN units is bidirectional Using BUS 1 the signal from component of DME64N 1 is distributed to DME64N 2 and DMEG4N 3 Using BUS 32 the signals from component of DME64N 2 and component of DMEG4N 3 are summed and returned to component of DMEG4N 1 CASCADE bus DMEGAN 1 CASCADE IN CASCADE OUT Parallel Summing DMEG4N 2 CASCADE IN CASCADE OUT DMEG4N 3 CASCADE IN CASCADE OUT Physical connection Signal
497. sed by the user selected on the User List to the left Selecting a checkbox enables use of the corresponding function Edit You can change the following settings editing in the Designer window user control edit user defined parameter edit word clock scene edit GPI and MIDI View DME Design Window Allows display of the Designer window Control Component Editor Allows parameter editing in the component editor View Component Editor Allows display of the component editor Change Configuration Allows switching between configurations Synchronization Allows synchronizing with the DME or SP2060 unit View Log Window Displays the Event Logger window Scene Store Recall Level sets the level at which scenes can be stored and recalled Click the A and F buttons or enter a number into the box to set the level While levels 1 through 10 are available the range of levels that can be actually set varies according to the level of the user doing the setting When a user is created automatically this is set to One level lower than the user above The initially set level is the highest level that can be set for that user User Control Level sets the user control level Click the A and F buttons or enter a number into the box to set a level from 1 through 10 While levels 1 through 10 are available the range of levels that can be actually set varies according to the level of the user doing the setti
498. set the filter tyoe and the slope between the frequency band that is passed and the band that is cutoff There are two types of programmable BPF components mono channel and stereo channel Mono channel programmable BPFs have one input and one output Stereo channel programmable BPFs have two of each Double click a component to display the component editor for it The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components Programmable BPF component editor EEk Snare Library Q Py Store GN Input 1 P Output Level 4 88 Section rarameter Oe nc R ANGE Function Co mu La gt 10 10 cB Sets the input signal level Phase o ON OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal Type Thru Sets the attenuation for each octave and the 6 dB Oct filter type 12 dB Oct AdjustGc THRU turns off the filter 12 dB Oct Butrwrth 12 dB Oct Bessel 12 dB Oct Linkwitz 18 dB Oct AdjustGc 18 dB Oct Butrwrth 18 dB Oct Bessel 24 dB Oct AdjustGc 24 dB Oct Butrwrth 24 dB Oct Bessel 24 dB Oct Linkwitz 36 dB Oct AdjustGc 36 dB Oct Butrwrth 36 dB Oct Bessel 48 dB Oct AdjustGc 48 dB Oct Butrwrth 48 dB Oct Bessel 48 dB Oct Linkwitz Gc 6 dB to 6 dB When AdjustGc Adjustable Gc is selected for Type this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency ON OFF Turns bypass ON 424 DME Designer Owner s Manual Thru 6 dB Oct 12 dB Oct AdjustGc 12 dB Oct Butrwrth 12 dB Oct Bessel 12 dB Oct Linkwitz 18 dB Oct AdjustGc
499. sign window i View Component Editor i Synchronization I View Log Window Scene Store Hecall Level 2 a User Control Level E View one Add User Remove User Change 3 Click the Add User button The Add User dialog box will be displayed 4 Enter the user name into the Name box 5 Enter the password into the Password box You can also create users with no password If you do not want to set a password for the user leave the Password box blank DME Designer Owner s Manual 163 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window 6 Enter the password into the Confirm Password box also If you do not want to set a password for the user leave the Confirm Password box blank also e Add User Hame Password Confirm Password eae NOT C If the text entered into the Password and Confirm Password boxes is not the same a Different password message will be displayed Click the OK button and reenter the correct password in the Password and Confirm Password boxes in the Add User dialog box Click the OK button This closes the Add User dialog box The new user will be added to the Security dialog box list User List Operation Security Administrator Edit Systeme ngi of em l View DME Design Window p Manager gt Designer Control Component Editor WanGperalor View Component Editor Operator Change Configuration oo ha Operator ra 4 Operat
500. signer TERG Save User Module Mer LIVE LIES way 55 properties So eee ee ee u i i ner DME De e Open File Dialog Displays the file select dialog box You can recall libraries saved in folders other than the user module Library folder Store Component Library saves the component parameters Click to display the Store dialog box If you then save without changing the folder the parameters will be added to the library Refer to Library on page 364 for more information Save User Module saves the selected user module See Saving User Modules on page 310 Properties Displays the User Module Properties dialog box DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer E User Module Properties To display the User Module Properties dialog box select a user module object then click the Properties command on the Edit menu NOTE gt gt The User Module Properties dialog box is also displayed when a Blank User Module is arranged in the configuration window i User Module Properties Label Unsaved User Module Label Font Width 180 Label Color Height 140 4 Inputs Outputs Labels Color Style Plain Color Inputs Outputs Sets Inputs 1 4 Max 64 Outputs f 4 Max 64 Double Click Action Security Settings Open User Module Design Window Enable Security Open User Module Editor Label Box You can enter up to 100 En
501. sing the F1 F2 F3 F5 keys and then pressing the ENTER button There are basically three types of parameters that can be accessed via a Parameter Edit display Numeric values Lists ON OFF switches Numeric Parameters Numeric parameters can be edited in a number of ways and depending on the parameter a fader knob or minimum and maximum values may appear to the left of the numeric value A Numeric Value with a fader l Sz Faders Level mje r A Numeric Value with a Knob lk PEO1 4 Ga in o S00 7150 il Name of parameter selected for editing Fader Knob Minimum and maximum values Current value some Parameter Edit displays have just one numeric parameter while other may have two or more DME Designer Owner s Manual Parameter Edit Display with One Numeric Parameter LCD Contrast l 1 Numeric values can be changed by rotating the dial Dial rotation produces an immediate corresponding change in the selected value LOD Contrast 82 I E 2 Press the ENTER key to close the Parameter Edit display after the value s have been edited as required Parameter Edit Display with Multiple Numeric Parameters Dir Lock F JD address Lim HAC Adr 1 Use the F1 F2 F3 F5 keys to select the value to be edited YAMAHA Lock r Het Di ZF Address _ a ea oS HAC Adr CeOg AGD
502. sponding direction e Touch The slider does not move without directly touching It even if you click the mouse button e Jump The slider jumps to the location where you click Edit Box Zoom When On the edit box will enlarge on mouse over Edit Box Font When On the edit box will enlarge on mouse over NOTE This is the font when the box is enlarged not the font that is used when the box is at it s smallest size The text may bleed beyond the box with some fonts To make a finer setting press the lt Shift gt key while dragging the slider If you click a slider while pressing the lt Ctrl gt key the setting will return to its default value Common to All Tabs OK Button Applies any setting changes and closes the window Cancel Button Closes the window without changing any settings 14 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Event Logger Click Event Logger in the View menu to open the Event Logger window This window displays the DME unit event log and it allows specifying the log file to be stored on the computer as well as the log file to be store in the DME unit If the window is opened while online the event log is automatically retrieved from the DME unit and displayed as a list in the Event Logger window New events are displayed in real time while the window Is opened and the system is online If Enable Logging in the Log Setup dialog box is ON the even
503. sseeees 157 Se CUM ECVE enere rie RE E E 158 Select Color Dialog BOX sscsons ecaseonasoacdeieedinaeaeotsansoatadasadewaddndass 265 Select Font dialog DOX oo cceccceccsssesseeesessseeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeseessaeess 264 Select Image dialog DOK ci sccsdinadsnshnchsnasdanmindonisendaseasdunatedencsinlens 267 TSE E 262 Show signal Delay sesaieeroeieriree nRa AOTER 305 Simple MIKE esssssunneessrrrrurssrrrrrerrssrrrrerssrrrrrrrssrrrerssrrrerrrrssrene 450 DME Designer Owner s Manual SEE E NEEE S E A T 508 DIOL SOMPONEME eTA E E E E E E E T 240 487 TO e AOE A E EE E E E EE NE 362 DP 2060 BACKUP iiressncusiuonansmevseecineeaiianimaueiiaaindationmaninbesandaaean 184 le SOO MPU seei aN 494 PORT OU UE e E A EAE A 494 Speaker Processor COMPONENT s sssssiiseerssrrrrerrsrerrersrrrrreessn 464 SPX COMpONeENt sca cananivawnrnasiinssanonmsetenedingecnasmannnsenaiatemnunecananndes 238 471 bMS E a N A dah gpagunaoadensnesaans 195 SUONA 2 orisoiiocnia a ii daonenshasacaasatalesas 457 OT E a AEE E a tetetnreetaads 458 E Ol a EA E E E E E A 459 Synchronization DME Designer and DME unit synchronization s 97 Synchronization dialog DOK esssiieesrirerrirrerrrreerrrreerrrren 98 T Tab Order CIMT a A 30 E aee E sea ERE A NEE E 251 HO RO T eieae aE E E E aoneeueanheaennaqacuees 508 Title bar pececa cece een seeps arcs tess tatararaa EEEE AEAEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEE 54 193 Tool button aE Scarce tas EEE E ET E TE 56 S11 gt
504. st of parameters Clicking here displays the Print dialog box When you click the Print button printing begins 148 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Setup Button Clicking here displays the Print Setup dialog box Here you can set the paper size paper orientation and font Paper Size CO o oK Orientation Cancel Portrait C Landscape Font MS Shell Dlg i Target C Selected Component Selected DME C AIDME Paper Size select the paper size from the list Orientation set the orientation of the paper by clicking one of the radio buttons e Portrait Prints on the paper with it oriented vertically e Landscape Prints on the paper with it orientated horizontally Font Displays the set font Clicking the Font button displays the Font dialog box where you can change the font Target set the parameters to be printed by clicking one of the radio buttons e Selected Component Prints all parameters for the component selected in the list e Selected DME Prints all parameters for the selected DME e All DME Prints all parameters for all DMEs Close Button Ends the preview and returns the screen to the original dialog box Prev Button Next Button switches the page being previewed when there are multiple pages The Prev button goes to the previous page The Next button goes to the next page DME Designer Owners M
505. suisendiaaties 314 User Module WiINdOW ssnssnnsssnnssrnnssirsrinerirerrrrsrrrssrrerrrrerirrrrrrerren 28 Component LIST lt scccsie ntceousiacuetctinan asus euddtemacatiesicmenicinddeaseeuenien 202 User Setting Restrictions cccccceccceccssseesseeseeesseeeseseesseaeesesees 15 User defined parameter Edit 2 0 0 ccccccceccccesseseeceseeeeeessnneeeeaas 514 User defined Parameter Names cccccccccecceceeeeseeeeteeeeeneeeeeeees 511 E e E E T E 167 iiye LOCE PAE esre E eN 518 Utility display Operation sssnnssssssssineesrrrrinrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrn 517 V OP aa E EE EEEE 517 Mew MENU ssccsn2szinisuacwnrnduscntd sieniabacenmnbnidnadacd i geita i aakediedhatees 64 205 W Wav File Manager esesensessresessreeesrrrrerrrrrrrrrrsrrerrrrrersrrrrerrreressne 151 W FIS ROO esna E E Na 430 NATO E E E E EA T E E E E 508 Window MENU 0 0 cee cece ceeccccee ee eecceeeeeceeeaececeeeaaeseceaaeeseeaneeees 69 209 Window size CAOT reer A E N ER 334 WIE eaa E E ee 257 279 N a A E 282 dawna seringo noran ea E A 282 C aE E E A EEEE 288 iNe SegmMENi ae certo ciec ceerno aceeyneres asec in NEA TAERAA EE ASERS 279 SS ee E eden eace peers 280 MOGs IOCK acere EE E 177 Z TOON EEA EET POAN E TA EE ste PEE E TE 211 OO ee E E A E 291 IPI ierrceii rinni iieiea cheeses inas aaa Ea a Eaa L TA 56 DE E EE E E EE A E E E N 291 En E E T E EEE E E E E 291 Zone Net Page sisicircnernecarcaadaas sasincteianmtanadund sramenumena an
506. t page 236 e A new rule for wiring prohibits connections to terminals that would short the terminator E Component Editor Component e A status bar has been added to the component editor It displays the component name component ID and parameter IDs for parameters that are being edited page 320 e A Snap function has been added that records parameters in the editor temporarily Parameter sets can then be switched by using the Snap buttons page 362 e The meter s peak hold function can now be turned ON or OFF page 359 e A Wav File Player component has been added for playing Wave files page 430 e An effect component called SPX has been added that supports many different effect applications such as reverb delay and modulation effects along with complex combinations of multiple effects page 471 e A Slot Out component editor has been added page 488 e An Undo Redo function is now available when using the design mode It can undo the most recent operation control movement resize deletion DME Designer Owner s Manual Changes from V1 1 to V1 2 E Main Panel Window The synchronization algorithm has been refined for faster synchronization synchronization now can be executed from DME to DME Designer without any break in the sound In the following cases synchronization can be executed from DME Designer to DME without any break in the sound The second or later synchronization after starting DME Designer an
507. t C Color Color C Image C Image Select Image Layou t Center Size Width sets the width of the User Control Editor User Module Editor window in pixels up to a maximum of 2 000 pixels mE Height sets the height of the User Control Editor User Module Editor window in pixels up to a maximum of 2 000 pixels Background Image E Default Sets the background color to black the same as the component editor Select this if you have set the background with Color or Image and you want to return to the original background m Color Sets the color of the background Use the Select Color button to select a color Select Color Button Clicking here displays the Select color dialog box This sets the color of the background For information about the Select color dialog box see page 265 Select color Basic colors E g FF iS in E a FF o pn 4 e fF fF minip st fF ft j pal Custom colors bom magaaan Hue 1 Red 128 roe ontoaneonfoetfontfl Sat 0 Green 128 Vat 128 Blue 128 Define Custom Colors gt gt Cancel Add to Custom Colors If you select a light color it may be difficult to see the grid DME Designer Owner s Manual 335 336 Chapter 5 Components E Image Displays an image for the background You can use image files in the following formats BMP omp PNG ong XPM xpm and JPEG jpg Use the Select Image button to select an image fi
508. t language for the text There is no need to change the language setting unless you want to specify a specific language E Sample Displays an example of the current settings DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Select Color Dialog Box When you click the Color or Label Color button in an object s properties dialog box the Select color dialog box is displayed Sets the color of objects and text Select color Aki Custom colors Tepe De mh BER Sat 0 Green 0 Val jo Blue jo Cancel Add to Custom Colors Define Custom Colors gt gt E Setting Basic Colors There are 48 basic colors provided in the Basic colors section When you select a basic color by clicking on it the position of that color in the color palette to the right is indicated by a cross Information about the selected color is displayed below the color palette Click the OK button to set the color you selected E Setting Colors That Are Not in the Basic colors Section You can select any color in the color palette displayed at the upper right of the dialog box by clicking on it in the palette Color information is displayed below the color palette If you like the color you selected click the OK button If you don t like the color you can select a new color by clicking in another location in the color palette or by dragging the cross symbol to another location there Grey colors can be selected on
509. t matrix and block The Master buttons in the Input and Output sections display windows where you can make master input and output settings Delay and level for each channel are set in separate windows that display four channels each Delay Matrix component editor Delay Matrix Sele Snare Library Wet 0 Store Recall Outeut Block Master On TET EVAR RWS Off Nominal Minimum Delay Matri 2 Ineut 16 Output 10025 2733H ection Name Fi Opens the Input Master window 0 Output Opens the Output Master window Matrix Delay meters Displays send level and delay time from each input Send level meters channels to output buses Clicking here displays the Crosspoint window DME Designer Owner s Manual 435 Chapter 6 Component Guide Turns ON send from all inout channels to output buses The ON button lights up Turns OFF send from all inout channels to output buses Nominal Resets all send levels making them O dB The delay settings are not changed Minimum Resets all send levels making them dB The delay settings are not changed mE Matrix Delay Meter Output Level Meter The upper row has delay meters while the middle row has send level meters You can view parameters for all output channels at once J 168 TW TETS 14 T 1b Delay Meter Send Level Meter When you click the output channel number on the matrix the Delay Matrix All Inputs to One Output editor window opens When you click
510. t Key To turn it OFF click on the button There is no need to press the lt Shift gt key DME Designer i Click the Mute Button with Shift key DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Communication Status Displays the status of communication between the group master of the current device group and the computer Message Transmit Receive Indicator n line On line Button On line Button When the group master of the current device group is connected to a computer clicking this button alternately switches the unit s on line off line status The indicator will light when the DME unit is on line Message Transmit Receive Indicators e Rx Lights when MIDI messages from the group master of the current device group are received by DME Designer e Tx Lights when MIDI messages are transmitted from DME Designer to the group master of the current device group DME Designer Owner s Manual 59 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Main Panel Window Menu File Menu Ctrl M ES TE 1 8 oe h Chrl c T Ctrl 5 ser Import OME Designer All File Export DME Designer All File DME File Storage Import Device Configuration d Export Device Configuration F LCi fSetup0 daf 2 0 SetupO daf Preferences Log OFF Exit E New Creates a new project When a new project is created the current project will be closed A confirmation message asking Pro
511. t center signal to front L and front R Rear O to 100 Sets the ratio for sending the rear center signal to rear L and rear R LFE to 10 dB Sets output level to the sub woofer Pan Nominal Position Selects the nominal position from a menu LR DME Designer Owner s Manual 459 Chapter 6 Component Guide Room Combiner The Room Combiner component is for use in facilities where movable partitions allow rooms to be divided or combined The audio feeds can be easily adjusted to match the physical room configuration For example if Room 1 and Room 2 are to be combined to create a single large room the audio feed for Room 1 can be connected to IN 1 of the component and the audio feed for Room 2 can be connected to IN 2 of the component Then when Combine for Room 1 and Room 2 is ON the audio signals connected to IN 1 and IN 2 are summed and output via OUT 1 and OUT 2 When Combine for Room 1 and Room 2 is OFF the IN 1 signal is sent to OUT 1 only and the IN 2 signal is sent to OUT 2 only Components are available for combining up to 4 8 12 or 16 rooms INIGL OUTI6BLEJ L E irri LJINIGR OUTIGRLI CHN12R OUTIZRL 15 aay 9 Double click the component to open the component editor The component editor is the same for all types the only difference being the number of rooms Room Combiner Stereo Seles f C Sna i Ee eee Po Store Recall Combine Room Mo Room Combiner Stereo 4
512. t data will be written to the computer log file at the same time NOT C Does not apply to SP2060 units Only users for whom the View Log Window checkbox in the Security dialog box has been turned ON can display the Event Logger window The default setting for this parameter is OFF The events you wish to display in the Event Logger window must be set in advance in the Event Log List dialog box Up to 1 536 events can be stored in the DME unit while the maximum number of events that can be displayed in the Event Logger window is 12 288 When the DME unit even log becomes full further events cannot be stored When the DME event log does become full use the Get Log dialog box to retrieve the event log and then click the DME Log Clear button to clear the DME unit log as necessary If the Event Logger window event log becomes full the oldest events are automatically deleted to make room for new events Periodically make Enable Logging in the Log Setup dialog box active so that the event log is saved as a file on the computer This operation will automatically clear the DME unit event log Names and Functions A Event Logger mB Get Log fone ll ad d A x lear Screen 2006 04 20 14 49 45 J Information Log Or Administrator 2006 04 20 14 49 46 A Mnformation Log Off 4dministrator 2006 04 20 14 49 46 information Log Or Administrator DME Designer Owners Manual 75 Chapter 3 Main
513. t link parameter When you click here a list is displayed of parameters included in the component selected in the Component box select the parameter you want to assign DME Group DME64N Control Change Program Change Farameter Change Clear Clear All 001 Component Compan e Slag Dyn 1 1 idth Dyn 1 1 Attack Dyn 1 1 Felease Dyn 1 1 Gain 130 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Min Max This sets the parameter range The current values for the Min lower limit and Max upper limit are displayed The range and units that can be set will vary depending on the parameter selected If you click here a slider will be displayed You can change the parameter by dragging the slider To make a finer setting press the lt Shift gt key while dragging the slider The value for the parameter will be shown while you are dragging the slider When you finish dragging and release the mouse button the slider will disappear The same slider is displayed whether you click the Min box or the Max box The black part is the parameter range If you drag the left edge of the black part the Min value will change If you drag the right edge the Max will change EE MIDI fx DME Group DMEG4H Control Change Program Ghanee Parameter Change Clear Clear All x Od6 E Clear Button Clears the assignment for the parameter change selected in the list so that noth
514. t unit when cascade connections are made and are thereafter grayed out and can t be changed No head margin is provided when a cascade connected PM5D is set up to send the slot output signals via its CASCADE OUT terminal so the Head Margin parameter must be set to OdB Mixer I O Channel Determines whether a direct cascade connection between a DMEGAN unit and mixer will be bidirectional bus sharing or not on a channel by channel basis Make sure that the checkboxes for cascade connected DMEGAN units are all set the same The settings are matched automatically when DME64N units are connected via their CAS IN and CAS OUT terminals in the Zone window OFF The connection with other DMEGA4N units is bus sharing bidirectional Since the mixer does not support bidirectional connection the connection between the mixer and DMEGAN unit is unidirectional CASCADE IN gt CASCADE OUT regardless of the checkbox setting ON The connection with other DMEG4N units is unidirectional CASCADE IN gt CASCADE OUT For DMEGAN units connected between two other DMEGAN units the connection is internally set to bidirectional regardless of the checkbox setting NOTE The following settings are made automatically when cascade connections are made regardless of the checkbox setting e DMEGAN unit between two other DMEG4N units bidirectional e DME64N between two mixers unidirectional e One mixer connected to one DME64N unit unidirectional DME
515. t user Available user controls are displayed in the User Control manager dialog box that can be accessed through the User Control sub menu of the main panel window View menu The user control security level for each user is set with Operation Security gt User Control Level in the Security dialog box For information about user security see page 157 Names and Functions User Control Manager PARANA AAR RARAN ARAARA RRAN ANA RAA RAN ARARA KARRAR RANAR ETC OEE ECEC ECE EERE EECECE PEELE RAARARNAN KARANE RANRRA RRR RRN KARANA RANNAN r z Door Operi Administrator Bae Light On Level 3 Open User Control at startup Hew Delete Cancel Only controls available to the currently logged on user are shown in the list E Open If this checkbox is checked the user control will open automatically when the project file is opened DME Designer Owner s Manual 91 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Name Displays the names of the user controls Clicking here will select the characters in the name allowing you to change tt User Control Manager Open Name Securty Level User D oor O peni E Administrator bd Light Un Level 3 Open User Control at startup New Delete Cancel E Security Level Displays the security level set for each user control Clicking here will display a list where you can change the security level a Light On Open User Control at s
516. ta No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data a Matal Scene Link Recall Detail gt gt i L gt PresetO01 E Component 2 LQ Preset00l E Slot 1 1 j I 1 I I j I 1 j I 1 j I 1 j I l 1 j 1 j I I 1 j j 1 j 1 j j I j I j 1 I List Store Button Detail Button Scene Link Button Recall Button E DME Group SP2060 Selection selects a DME group or SP2060 NOTE The selected DME group or SP2060 is linked with the current device group E List Displays the contents of the scene Scene No Displays the scene number Click here to select a scene Name Displays the name of the scene Click the Name box to enter a scene name Up to 18 characters can be entered If the scene has not been stored No Data will be displayed A name can be entered when a scene is stored The default names are Scene001 Scene002 etc The three digit number is the same as the scene number displayed in Scene Number for the stored scene NOTE The SP2060 display can only display up to 16 single byte characters Some characters that appear correctly on the DME Designer may change when d
517. tae Dyn 1 1 Gain FeedbackSuppressor H PEQ Stereo Slot 4 DME24N LCD Display sets the text displayed on the DME unit or ICP 1 Click the LCD Display box and enter text Up to 23 characters can be entered into the LCD Display box After you confirm the name by pressing the lt Enter gt key a short name will be created and displayed in the function key area as follows F1 shortnam The short name will also be displayed in the DME unit or ICP1 main display A short name is automatically created with up to eight characters for display as the user defined parameter name on the DME unit or ICP1 main screen Min Max sets the lower and upper limits for a parameter E Clear Button Clears assignments for the selected function keys This is the same as No Assign OK Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box E Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings 1384 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Setting User Defined Parameters set the user defined parameter 1 Create a configuration 2 Click User Defined Button in the Tools menu The User Defined Button dialog box will be displayed ee User Defined Button DME Group Fi Comp n CompOn Parameter Value Edit DME646 ComponentCompanderHn717 On OFF SceneChange Scene Change 001 BGM_Contral 3 Click one of the tabs numbered 1 through 4 to sel
518. tartup Hew Delete Cancel aa E User Displays the name of the user specified in User Control Clicking here will display a list of the available users User Control Manager User name W Administrator O Woon Door Open i Light On Level 3 O Morning Open User Control at startup Hew Delete 92 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E New Button Creates new user controls Clicking here displays the New User Control dialog box New User Control Name Security UserLevel Levell f User Name User Name Administrator Morning Might Noon Me Open User Control at startup Enter the User Control name in the Name box User Level User Name Use the radio buttons to the left to select security level or user dependent control e User Level Select a security level from the drop down list e User Name Check a checkbox Click OK to create the specified User Control setup Open User Control at startup If this checkbox is checked the user control will open automatically when the project file is opened E Delete Button Deletes the user control selected on the list E OK Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box E Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings DME Designer Owners Manual 93 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Parameter Link About Parameter Links
519. te gt Program Component from the Hardware menu Page 187 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E MY4 AEC Update the firmware on an MY4 AEC Acoustic Echo Canceller card installed in a DME unit 1 Select Firmware Update gt MY4 AEC from the Hardware menu The MY4 AEC Firmware Update dialog box will appear NOTE All connected DME units and MY4 AEC cards will appear in the Device column The current MY4 AEC firmware version number is also displayed in this dialog box CH MY4 AEGC Firmware Update Please do not disconnect cable or turn off any device while updatine i Yamaha DME24N 1 Yamaha DME24N 1 H O DME24N 400 192 168 000 002 ied MYA AEC W100 Select All Clear All Update i 2 Check the checkbox for the DME unit in which the MY4 AEC card to be updated is installed Clicking the checkbox alternately checks and un checks it Click the Select All button if you want to select all connected DME units Click the Clear All button to un check all connected DME units 3 Click the Update button The folder selection dialog box will appear 4 Select the folder that contains the update file and click OK The MY4 AEC update process will begin The DME unit will automatically restart twice during the update process The update process finishes when the second restart has completed When the update process has finished it will be necessary to restart DME Desig
520. tered automatically To stop display of an image delete all characters in the box leaving the field blank Browse Button specifies a path for the image file Clicking here displays the Open dialog box Select a file with one of the following extensions omp ong xom or jog then click the Open button in Picture 01 jpg e 0574 jpg hee motif_es_7 jpg 590 jpg My Computer _ 3D My Network Places OK Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings DME Designer Owner s Manual 267 Chapter 4 Designer Design Window Shared Settings and Operations Preferences You can set the operating environment for the Designer window in the Preferences dialog box This dialog box is opened using the Preferences command in the Designer window Tools menu if Preferences Graphics Ports amp Wires Ethernet Remote Network Audio Cascade Digital Audio Analog Audio GPI MIDI Word Glock USB Mor mal Type ok Solid Cancel o 2 m LLULL Lil SUCELLULUF Crosshairs W Show Crosshairs While Dragging Select Crosshair Length C Arbitrary Crosshair Length fe Infinite Crosshairs Offset Paster Duplicate From Original By W Auto size based on original abject 100 Horizontal Fisela 100 l Vertical Pixels Auto Suffix Number W DOMEAIGP
521. the input channel number on the left side of the matrix the Delay Matrix One Input to All Outputs editor window opens EK pears Store Recall Qutrut Black Master Click to open the Delay Matrix All Inputs eS eB Ty fF T T i On to One Output editor window i off Hominal Minimum Inrut Master Click to open the Delay Matrix One Input to All Outputs editor window Delay Matrix 8 Input d Qutrut THESE CerS4Hs The matrix is divided into groups For the 2 Input matrix each group has two input channels and four output channels For the 4 Inout matrix each group has four input channels and four output channels Groups in matrixes with more than four inputs are the same as for the 4 Input matrix When you place the mouse pointer over a group its channel numbers are highlighted Click to open the Delay Matrix Crosspoint editor window Outrut Outeut Master Master ste Ta Wiha 3 TE T5 WH i t 8 3 6 1 1 13 4 15 16 Input h Input K Master 5 aster 5 Click to open the In 1 4 x Out Click to open the In 5 8 x Out For 2 input matrix click to 1 4 Crosspoint window 5 8 Crosspoint window open the In 1 2 x Out 1 4 Crosspoint window 436 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide E Input Master If you click the Inout Master button in the delay matrix component editor it will open the Delay Matrix InoutMaster editor window Here you can turn the master input for each channel ON an
522. the minimum and maximum values for the parameter NOT C The displayed parameter values are those that were in effect when the dialog box was opened or when the displayed DME was selected from the DME list They cannot be changed here DME Designer Owners Manual 147 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Preview Button Prints a list of parameters When you click this button a preview screen is displayed E Save Button saves the parameter list as a CSV file When you click this button the standard operating system save dialog box is displayed NOTE The CSV format is a comma delimited text file that can be read by many types of software such as word processor spreadsheet or database programs The parameter values are saved in the display format selected by the String Display or Numeric button E String Display Numeric Buttons Switches the parameter value display format String Display The value displayed in the editor windows Numeric The internal value E Close Button Closes the dialog box E Printing a List of Parameters Prints all parameters for the component selected in the list all parameters for the selected DME or all parameters for all DMEs When you click the Preview button the dialog box display will change and the print preview will be displayed in the center Buttons will be added to the upper part of the dialog box H Parameter List Preview Save Print Button Prints a li
523. the position of the uppermost and lowermost control this button arranges the controls between them at uniform intervals It puts the same amount of space between each control and its neighbor Horizontal Center Align Button Aligns the selected controls horizontally with the center position Vertical Center Align Button Aligns the selected controls vertically with the center position Picture Button Places a graphic file TEXT Button Places a text box Box Button Places a square Ellipse Button Places an ellipse Frame Button Places a frame Line Button Places a line Scene Recall Button Button Places a Scene Recall button DME Designer Owner s Manual 333 Chapter 5 Components E Grid Setting When arranging controls you can align them along the grid This menu sets the spacing of the grid Grid 10 OFF Grid 10 Clicking the W button displays a menu Click the menu to set the grid spacing Select OFF to turn OFF the grid When the grid is turned ON when any grid item besides OFF is selected clicking any control that is not aligned with the grid position will cause it to align with the nearest grid Please note that after copying multiple controls in one operation from the component editor and adjusting their positions manually their positions could become disarranged when you select them by clicking on them if they do not already align with the grid interval Fur
524. ther double click a slider level meter or right click it and select Properties from the contextual menu This lets you change the size and orientation of the related level meter Size Width and Height set the width and height of the level meter in pixel increments NOTE The size of level meters can also be changed by dragging any of the meter s corners in the user control editor Direction set the level meter s orientation to Vertical or Horizontal as required Indicator Properties Dialog Box The Indicator Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click an indicator or right click it and select Properties from the contextual menu This lets you change the size and display characteristics of the related indicator Size Width and Height set the width and height of the indicator in pixel increments NOT C The size of indicators can also be changed by dragging any of the indicator s corners in the user control editor Threshold Logic Determines whether the indicator will light or go out when the monitored parameter exceeds the threshold Select Turn On if you want the indicator to light when the threshold is exceeded or Turn Off if you want the indicator to go out when the threshold is exceeded Color Click the Select Color button and select the desired indicator color in the Select Color dialog box DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Components E
525. thermore if you change the grid spacing after aligning the positions of controls in the user control editor user module editor the controls will be placed into positions that do not align with the grid even if they are arranged using the align buttons When there are controls that do not align with the grid turn the grid OFF Changing the Window Size In design mode you can change the window size of the user control editor If you align the mouse pointer with a side or corner of the window its shape will change into a double headed arrow When the arrow is shaped like this dragging it will change the size of the window E Unsaved User Module Sele Store Recall Bhs E oH 0 Even if you change the width of the window the library button will remain where it is in the upper right corner 334 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Components Window Size and Background Settings The size and background of the User Control Editor User Module Editor window can be changed as required A color or image file can be specified as the window background These settings are made in the User Control Editor Settings dialog box To display this dialog box right click in the user control editor window while in design mode then click User Control Editor Settings on the displayed context menu Size Size Width Width Height Height Background Image Background Image Default Defaul
526. ties from the contextual menu to display the Ellipse Properties dialog box sir Ellipse Properties Ellipse Size Width Height Cancel Line Type Size Select Color J Fill Golor Select Color Ellipse Size e Width Specifies the width in pixels e Height specifies the height in pixels Line e Type select a type of frame line from the list Solid Dash Dot Dash Dot Or Dash Dot Dot e Size sets the thickness of the frame line in pixels The range is from 1 to 100 e Select Color Button sets the color of the frame line Click to display the Select color dialog box Refer to Select Color Dialog Box on page 265 for more information on the Select color dialog box Fill Color sets the ellipse fill color when ON e Select Color Button sets the ellipse fill color Click to display the Select color dialog box Refer to Select Color Dialog Box on page 265 for more information on the Select color dialog box 354 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Components E Line Properties Dialog Box Double click a line or right click it and select Properties from the contextual menu to display the Line Properties dialog box This lets you change the size and style of the related line Size Width fag Height 200 Style Direction Vertical Type Solid r Size 3 Color Select Color Arron Top Arrow Y
527. tion You can Pan Graph Pan Graph move the sound image by clicking and dragging Speaker Button Clicking here moves the sound image to the button location Position Left Right Position L63 C R63 Displays and edits the LR surround location Front Back Position F63 C R63 Displays and edits the front back surround location Divergence Front O to 100 Sets the ratio for sending the front center signal to front L and front R to 10 dB Sets output level to the sub woofer Pan Nominal Position Selects the nominal position from a menu LR 458 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide E Surround 6 1 surround 6 1 has surround pan with three channels in front three in the rear and one sub woofer channel There is one input and seven outputs Double click a component to display the component editor for it Surround 6 1 component editor Surround Sele Snap Library wE CT Stare pecan Bs Center C C Surround 6 1 10015 lt 27IfH 2D Surround 2D Surround Sets the sound image orientation You can Pan Graph Pan Graph move the sound image by clicking and dragging Speaker Button Clicking here moves the sound image to the button location Position Left Right Position L63 C R63 Displays and edits the LR surround location Front Back Position F63 C R63 Displays and edits the front back surround location Divergence Front O to 100 Sets the ratio for sending the fron
528. tion 1 1 Position 3P Direct Parameter Value Component Source Selector Position 1 1 Position 4p Pots No Assign P Pote No Assign mP Pon Noass p fa GPP Dialog Box When you click the GPI command on the Tools menu the GPI dialog box is displayed Sets GPI input output for the DME Names and Functions Contine atian DME GPI IN eararter Tehot Terma Polarity Event Scheduler _ sr Dalina Button Evert Lorem GPI OUT t F 4 E T Portia Mo As Fatih Ma rtan zi P si P r m F Fi D F n F F F r DME Designer Owners Manual 113 114 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E DME From the list select the DME where you will be making settings Configuration The current configuration name will be displayed GPI IN The DMEGAN has 16 GPI IN channels and the DME24N DME Satellite has 8 GPI IN ports These settings determine which DME parameters will be controlled by input received at each individual GPI IN port The port numbers are shown in the leftmost column Function Specifies the function to be controlled by GPI input Click to see a list from which you can choose the function to be assigned to the corresponding GPI IN port The ten available functions are No Assign Parameter Value Edit Direct Parameter Value Scene Change Scene Increment Scene Decrement Mute GPI Lock Time Adjustment Pla
529. tions can be created and deleted for each device group E Component e A Feedback Suppressor component has been added page 419 e The Speaker Processor component PEQ Q parameter now goes to 63 page 464 Main Panel Window e Firmware and component data can now be updated simultaneously page 186 e A Recovery Update function that allows recovery from program corruption has been added page 188 e A Component Link function that allows simultaneous linking of all component parameters has been added page 94 e Scene Link function that allows simultaneous control of multiple devices in different device groups has been added page 151 e A Protect function has been added to the scene manager page 82 e Card settings are no longer included in scene data e A Utility window has been added to allow editing of device utility settings page 167 e The Local Parameter Link display order has been changed page 94 e Parameter Link operation can now be turned on or off for each device group page 94 e Compilation and analysis is now possible even if no connections have been made e Navigator window hide show can now be selected from the main window e The Event Logger can now display only the event data for a specified device page 75 e The GPI terminal names have been changed from CH to PORT Designer Window e A hand tool for window movement has been added The hand tool can be selected via the hand arrow icon
530. to display above the object Labels for identical ICP objects that exist in other configurations will also be changed Width Box specifies the object width in pixels Height Box specifies the object height in pixels Style sets the object style Select Plain Raised or Sunken from the list Label Font Button sets the font for the label Clicking here displays the Select Font dialog box For information about the Select Font dialog box see page 264 Label Color Button This sets the color of the label text Clicking here displays the Select Color dialog box For information about the Select Color dialog box see page 265 Back Color Button sets the object color Click to display the Select Color dialog box Ethernet Port Turns Ethernet port rendering on or off Ethernet port display will appear when the checkbox is ON The radio buttons can be used to specify whether the display is on the left or right side OK Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings DME Designer Owner s Manual 225 226 Chapter 4 Designer SP2060 SP2060 objects can be placed in the zone window When clicked an SP2060 in the zone window will be selected and when double clicked the configuration window will open A contextual menu will appear if the object is right clicked Open Configuration Window aa aa
531. tor Operators Operators Administrator je SpstemEngineer s Designer Operatord MainO perator Designer H Operator SystemE ngineer H Oneratnr The currently logged on user can set this command for users at a security level equal to or lower than his or her own If a user at a higher level is selected a message that warns Cannot access higher user level will be displayed Click the OK button DME Designer Cannot access higher user level To set auto logon for a user at a security level higher than the currently logged on user first log off as the current user then logon as a user at a higher security level DME Designer Owner s Manual 159 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window User List The registered users are displayed here The currently logged on user is displayed in bold text Click the name of the user whose settings you want to edit User List Administrator om SystemE ngineer bo Manager A Designer MainO perator Operator 2 E Operator e Operators Operation Security Iw Edit i View DME Design Window lf Control Component Editor lf YWiew Component Editor ke Change Configuration i Operatora I Synchronization Wiew Log Window Scene Store Recall Level User Control Level Zone O Zone Add User Remove User Change The Administrator is the user set by default and it is used for administering the system The Administrator user
532. tton calls the Parameter Edit display for the User Defined Button in the lower right corner of the display If this button is pressed and held for more that 2 seconds the Mute display will appear HOME Key Directly recalls the home main display If pressed while the main display is showing the HOME button steps through the User Defined Button display pages page 514 SCENE Key Calls the scene recall display page 515 Calls the scene store confirmation display if pressed and held from longer than 2 seconds page 515 The indicator will light green while the scene recall store display is showing CANCEL Key Closes the window on the display O ENTER Key Confirms and enters a value or setting Display Displays scene information and device parameters Dial Adjusts the value of selected parameters The ICP1 dial functions in the same way as the DME64N 24N dial DME Designer Owner s Manual Main Display The Main display will appear in a few seconds after the power is turned on The Main display shows information about the current scene NOTE Nothing will appear on the display if no scene data is stored in the DME series scene memory this is the case when the unit is initially shipped for example Level jfLevel yh Scene Information The current scene number and name Scene names can be entered by using the DME Designer application A maximum of 12 one byte Roman charact
533. u are storing a parameter set in the stereo compressor library the Save Library File dialog will be displayed with the Library Compressor Compressor Stereo folder in the ContentsFolder selected If you save in that folder the file you save will be displayed only in the Recall Library menu for stereo compressor components only It will not be displayed in any other library If you use a filename that makes it easy to understand the parameter contents or the conditions under which they are used you can select them without confusion when recalling Storing in the Library The library is the place to store component editor parameters E Editor Window 1 Set the parameters to be stored in the library 2 Click the Store Library button in the component editor The Save Library File dialog box will be displayed 3 Enter the filename select a filename that makes it easy to understand the contents of the parameter set 4 Specify the folder for saving the file If you want the saved file displayed on the Recall Library menu do not change the folder for Saving 5 Click the Save button mE Designer Window Right click a component or user module in the Designer window to show the contextual menu Use the Store Component Library command to store the library The menu that appears when the contextual menu Store Component Library command is clicked is the same as the menu that appears when the Edit window Store Librar
534. uamstenetawsdeiiecteamebenetanoauiinnitaamedenetasmeutica 29 Resource Meter WINAOW cccccccseseccceeseeccceseeescuesseeseeesseesneess 196 ROOMEC OMONGI ssanccusia denen danasypagusicdeataadeneauncqusasdeatiadtos EN 460 EOC EE EE T E E A E E TE E sendoacidoee maces E ETE 471 S SAVE saan epee eat cet de E EEAO 35 37 saving a file with a new NAME eeececeeecececeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeas of cece eres da tc attest Dee ee ese ee eee 35 37 Scene CUEN a ae ae E E E E E R E EE E of OCENE Or AG Ay soise ONS 510 Scene INFOMATION 20 cece cece cee ecce ee eeceee ea eeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaeeeeeaas 511 ocene LINK Manager ccpicveaieincedisa dataariuivetuetwocedagttanwsuetiasvace seaRdauatls 151 Scene Manager ccceccccccccsseeeeeceeeceeeeeeceeesseeseesseesaeesseseseeaaaasseeees 82 Scene Manager dialog DOX cccccccecscecceeseeeeessessseeesesseeesaaneeees 82 OSI Reca erras raae e N E A E 515 Scene Store Misc Page saccpesaase ctunimemmapeacentacsdsenatoesinabecmtadsneeed 519 Scene Store Operation oo cee cc ccceececces ee eecesseeeceeeeeeeeeseneeeeeas 515 OCCUM siaren S EE ee 192 Administrator USET et costetcnaheererastens vaciansiestesidiaiteto dessa csuaaiinirsadstntsterius 157 creating users and making user settings c eee 82 security for the Logged On USE ssiccesiirerrirerrrrrerrrrrern 91 user SECUMLY level sssrini ase aiina 158 user setting restrictions ccccccceeeseecceeeeeeseeeseeseaeese
535. ultiple selection it will cancel selection of that single object E Selecting by Dragging If you position the mouse in an empty location on the sheet and start dragging from there a frame will be displayed as the pointer moves Any objects within this frame will be selected E Changing the Selected Object Using the lt Tab gt Key When a single object is selected you can change the selection to the next object by pressing the lt Tab gt key If you press lt Shift gt lt Tab gt the selection moves to the previous object The selection order moves from left to right NOT C Wires cannot be selected with the lt Tab gt key Editing Objects Objects that have been arranged on the sheet can be edited using the Cut Copy Paste Duplicate and similar commands in the Edit menu These edit commands will also appear in the context menu displayed when you right click an object in the design window Buttons for Cut Copy and Paste are also available on the Designer window toolbar NO Some objects cannot be edited mE Undoing and Redoing Operations You can undo operations using the Undo command on the Edit menu You can use the Redo command to redo operations that have been undone E Deleting Objects Objects can be deleted by selecting them and pressing the lt Delete gt key NOTE Some objects cannot be deleted With some other objects you must first make appropriate settings in a dialog box b
536. up assignment Existent Group fe Hew Group DME Groupi Select Color Sampling Frequency f 44 1kHe2 fe 48k Hz C 882k Hz C OGkHz Mote You can change this setting in Word Clock dialoge box later Group Assignment Selects a device group e Existent Group Allows an existing group to be selected from a list If a group does not exist it will be grayed out in the list and cannot be selected e New Group Creates a new group The initial color of the new group s name and added devices can be edited as required Sampling Frequency specifies the sampling frequency NOn The sampling frequency can be changed from that specified in the Word Clock window Refer to Word Clock on page 139 for information on the Word Clock window NOT A sampling frequency cannot be set for ICP1 units DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Selecting Objects Objects can be selected when the mouse cursor appears as crosshairs E Selecting with a Click You can select an object by clicking on it If you click another object or an empty location on the sheet it will cancel selection of the object you previously clicked Selecting with Click lt Ctrl gt Key When you want to select multiple objects hold down the lt Ctrl gt key as you click each new object you want to select If you hold down the lt Ctrl gt key and click again on one of the objects that is part of the m
537. up i Device Group t Utility Word Clock Gtrl 8 E i kg Configuration PIR ee E Monitor Out Ctrl 9 Mute Rx a Glock Language Backup SP2060 Backup Firmware Update gt Program Component Device Information Recovery Update MY4 AEC When you select Program Component or Recovery Update on the submenu the folder select dialog box will be displayed When performing a firmware update connect the DME or SP2060 unit ICP1 and the computer When the DME or SP2060 unit CP1 update is finished the DME or SP2060 unit ICP1 will be automatically restarted You also need to restart DME Designer NOT C When performing the DME or SP2060 unit firmware update connect the DME or SP2060 unit and the computer by USB or Ethernet The USB MIDI or DME N Network Driver must be installed in the computer NOT C To perform the ICP1 firmware update the ICP1 and the device group master DME unit must be connected by Ethernet In addition the device group master DME unit must be connected to the computer as described above BO gt If the DME64N 24N has been updated from V1 07 or earlier to V1 10 or later perform the update twice Because the text display data in the DME64N 24N unit is changed text display for Japanese is not possible with one update only NOT C It may be impossible to complete the firmware update and Error may occur in the Status field if the Remaining Memory value the amount of remaining DME memory pag
538. urns ON muting for each channel s output DME Designer Owner s Manual 9399 Chapter 6 Component Guide Delay Scale selects the units for setting the delay time The selected button will light up and the units in the Delay edit box will change If Beat is selected use the knob to set the BPM beats minute Delay Scale does not support the parameter link feature Refer to Parameter Link on page 94 for information on parameter linking Delay Short Delay short components are available with from one to eight outputs Each has a single input and from one to eight outputs Delay Short 7 Output CIINA OuTiICI Double click a component to display the component editor for it Only the number of outputs in each component is different The other parts are the same Delay Short component editor amp Delay Short Seles Snare Library we et Store _ Recall Delay Scale Sample FS 48 6kH2 Meter 3 E Feet 127 26ft s Frame Mute 3 Output 16611 271bH gt All Bypass ON OFF Bypasses from input to output o Input co to 0 dB sets the input signal level ON OFF Mute the input signal 400 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Delay Tap Delay ms O to 130 sets the delay time Sample the range depends There are two edit boxes displaying on the Fs value milliseconds and the units selected for Delay Meter O to 44 7 Scale Feet O to 146 5 Frame the
539. uses When turned ON the On button lights up Turns OFF send to all output buses o Resets all send levels making them O qB o Minimum f Resets all send levels making them87 dB DME Designer Owners Manual 447 448 Chapter 6 Component Guide Input Channel Switching The Matrix Mixer One Input to All Outputs editor window displays the input channel for the channel number clicked on in the matrix mixer component editor The Channel buttons in the Input section of the Matrix Mixer All Inputs to One Output editor window switch the channel group that is displayed in the window amp Matrix Mixer One Input to All Outputs Input Channel 0O N A OO N e If you make the matrix mixer component editor active while the Matrix Mixer One Input to All Outputs editor window is displayed and then click another input channel that channel will be displayed in the Matrix Mixer One Input to All Outputs editor window One Matrix Mixer One Input to All Outputs editor window is displayed for each matrix mixer component editor DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide E Crosspoint If you click a level meter in the matrix mixer component editor the output crosspoint window for the group will be displayed Adjusts the send levels from each input channel to output buses and turns them ON and OFF Just like the matrix mixture component editor the input channels are arranged vertic
540. ut Tyre Level Frequenc iO SdB Oct Level ah r Linkwitz rae ae C bena PRE section rarameter Sett ng Re INGE unction o Input co to 10 dB sets the input signal level 0 ON OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal 6 dB to 6 dB When AdjustGc Adjustable Gc is selected for Type this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency ON OFF Turns bypass ON Output 20 to 0 dB Sets the output signal level o HPF Sets the HPF cutoff frequency Type Thru Sets the attenuation for each octave and the 6 dB Oct filter type 12 dB Oct AdjustGc THRU turns off the filter 12 dB Oct Butrwrth 12 dB Oct Bessel 12 dB Oct Linkwitz 18 dB Oct AdjustGc 18 dB Oct Butrwrth 18 dB Oct Bessel 24 dB Oct AdjustGc 24 dB Oct Butrwrth 24 dB Oct Bessel 24 dB Oct Linkwitz 36 dB Oct AdjustGc 36 dB Oct Butrwrth 36 dB Oct Bessel 48 dB Oct AdjustGc 48 dB Oct Butrwrth 48 dB Oct Bessel 48 dB Oct Linkwitz Gc 426 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Programmable LPF The low pass filter passes frequencies in the signal that are lower than the specified frequency while attenuating higher frequencies in the signal With the programmable low pass filter you can set the filter type and the slope between the frequency band that is passed and the band that is cutoff There are two types of programmable LPF components mono channel and stereo channel Mono channel programmable LPFs have one input and one output Stereo channel prog
541. utput gain DME Designer Owner s Manual 403 Chapter 6 Component Guide Selects the trigger source from a menu The currently selected trigger source is displayed on the button LR BOTH KEYIN Width 25 Output Level dB E 26d 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 Input Level dB Compressor Compresses signals that exceed a threshold Narrows the dynamic range of the signal making it easier to mix or record signals with a wide dynamic range such as vocals or piano music Both mono channel and stereo channel compressors are provided Mono channel compressors have one input one output and one Keyln input Stereo channel compressors have two inputs two outputs and one Keyln input i Compressor oe Compressor 2 Double click a component to open the component editor for it The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components Compressor component editor Compressor Hax Snap Library weer y Store Recall Over hresholl Ratio Knee 4 2 amp 10 44 54 o 4 1 09 1 HARD 5 13 Attack Release Gain ve Sf POG ABE 40 12 60 O i GROUT LALR 10016 lt 2720H gt the input signal level and the vertical axis is the output level 0 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation Output Meter Displays the output signal level Compressor Curve Displays results graphically The horizontal axis is 404 DME Design
542. utton Closes the window without changing any settings NOTE You can close the dialog box using the Close button or by pressing lt Esc gt or lt Alt gt lt F4 gt DME Designer Owner s Manual 181 182 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Language Settings When you click the Language command on the Hardware menu the Language dialog box is displayed This sets the language of scene names User Defined parameter names and labels that will be shown on the DME64N 24N unit display This setting also applies to the names of files saved using the DME File Storage function NOTE This setting does not apply to the SP2060 As for the DME Satellite this setting only applies to the names of files saved using the DME File Storage function Names and Functions ar Language Language E Language Select the language English German French Spanish and Japanese are in the list E Language Language Engli h German French Spanish English German French Spanish Japanese E OK Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box E Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings NO You can close the dialog box using the Close button or by pressing lt Esc gt or lt Alt gt lt F4 gt DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Backup When you click the Backup command on the Hardware menu the Backup dialog box is displayed Data in th
543. utton sends the backed up file to the specified DME or SP2060 E Save Button Obtains data from the specified DME or SP2060 and saves it as a backup file m Close Button Closes the dialog box DME Designer Owner s Manual 183 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window SP2060 Backup Click SP2060 Backup in the Hardware menu to open the SP2060 Backup dialog box Internal SP2060 data can be transferred to a computer for backup and the backup data can be used to restore multiple SP2060 units This makes it possible to set up a single SP2060 unit and then distribute the settings to a group of SP2060 units Backup can also be carried out using the Backup dialog box but the SP2060 Backup dialog box has the following differences e SP2060 Backup can only be used for SP2060 backup e Data from only one SP2060 can be backed up at atime but that data can be used to simultaneously restore multiple SP2060 units e Network settings are not affected when the data is restored Nor p e Backup files cannot be edited using DME Designer e Backup restore can only be carried out while offline e Only users for whom Edit security is checked enabled can perform backup and restore operations e f backup data is restored to an SP2060 unit running a firmware version prior to V1 3 the network settings will be changed E Backup Tab P 2060 Backup Backup Restore Target mo SP2060 1 932 168 000 002 Ea SP20
544. utton sets events sent from the DME units Clicking here displays the Event Log List dialog box DME Designer Owner s Manual 77 78 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E OK Button Applies any setting changes and closes the window E Cancel Button Closes the window without changing any settings Get Log dialog box Click the Get Log button in the Event Logger window while offline to open the Get Log dialog box The event log can be retrieved from the DME unit while offline and saved as a file on the computer H DME Groupi i O DMES C 192 168 000 002 DMES C Output File Name C Log tet Browse DME Log Clear Cancel E DME List Displays the IP addresses and types of DME units included in the device group Click the DME from which to obtain events by placing a check next to it E Output File Name sets the file name and save location for the log file Clicking the Browse button opens the file select dialog box where you can select a file E DME Log Clear Clears erases logs in the DME units checked When you click this button a confirmation dialog is displayed E OK Button Applies any setting changes and closes the window E Cancel Button Closes the window without changing any settings DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Event Log List Dialog Box Click the Log List button in the Log Setup dialog box to open the Ev
545. values in the above chart are all approximate Playback time will also vary according to the Wave file format When a Wave file is played back while the DME is set to operate at 88 2 KHz or 96 kHz only the OUT1 output of the Wav File Player will be delivered via the Left channel There will be no output from OUT2 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Remove Button Deletes settings from the selected line This button is grayed out when no Wave file is selected in the list Move Up Button Moves the selected line up one It is switched with the line immediately above The button will be grayed out if nothing is selected in the list or if No 1 is selected in the list Move Down Button Moves the selected line down one It is switched with the line immediately below The button will be grayed out if nothing is selected in the list or if No 100 is selected in the list Play Button Plays the selected Wave file on the computer Allows monitoring and checking of the Wave file Stop Button stops playback of the Wave file Remaining Memory Displays the amount of available Wave file memory OK Button Updates the settings and closes the dialog box Cancel Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings DME Designer Owner s Manual 111 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window GPI About GPI GPI is an abbreviation for General Purpose Interface Using GPI input and output DMEs
546. when the corresponding send is set to Off Send level ee We Be n When you click an output channel number on the matrix the Matrix Mixer All Inputs to One Output editor window opens When you click the input channel number on the left side of the matrix the Matrix Mixer One Input to All Outputs editor window opens Matrix Mixer E m nar Library rr TI Store Recall Outeut Block Master Click to open the Matrix Mixer All On Inputs to One Output editor window IFF Nominal Click to open the Matrix Mixer One Minimum a t Input to All Outputs editor window Input Master Matrix Mixer amp In ut 8 Quteut 1639 CersyrHa The matrix is divided into groups each with four input channels and four output channels When you place the mouse pointer over a group its channel numbers are highlighted Click to open the Matrix Mixer Crosspoint editor window Qutrut InFut Master 5 7 Click to open the In 1 4 x Out 5 8 Matrix Mixer Crosspoint editor window DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide E Input Master If you click the Inout Master button in the matrix mixer component editor it will open the Matrix Mixer InoutMaster editor window Here you can turn the master input for each channel ON and OFF and set the level Matrix Mixer InputMaster editor window amp Matrix Mixer InputMaster8 On off Nominal Minimum Matrix Mixer 8 I
547. without changing any settings Add Event Edit Event Dialog Box The dialog box is displayed when you click on the Add or Edit button in the Event Scheduler dialog box Here you can add or edit a scheduling event A Add Event Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Event Hame Event Operation Operation Scene Change Operation Setting Scene 001 Scene 001 Event Schedule Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fro Sat 1 2 3 4 5 Bb 7 858 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 23 24 25 26 27 eon 24 30 3l Today 1072872005 Repeating Event f ear C Month Week Day i Day of the week t Hour f Dap E Event Name Box Enter the event name There is no limit to the number of characters Time 00 00 00 2 hrmin sec January F 1 January e First Sunday Exception DME Designer Owner s Manual 103 104 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window mE Event Operation set the operation that is executed when the event starts Operation When you click this button a list of events is displayed Specify the operation that is executed when the event starts The following four items are on the list e Scene Change Changes the scene e Parameter Value Edit Changes a parameter NOTE gt If user module security is enabled the components are not displayed However parameters displayed in the user module editor are displayed here e GPI Out Sends GPI output
548. ws the status of the NETWORK connector The NETWORK connector can be set to operate in 10Base IT or 100Base TX mode 10Base T The NETWORK connector is compatible with 10Base T operation 100Base TX The NETWORK connector is compatible with 100Base TX operation Edit using the List Parameters editing procedure described on page 513 MAC Adr This is the device s MAC Media Access Control address NOTE The MAC address is also Known as the Ethernet address and is an independent address assigned to all Ethernet devices No two devices anywhere in the world can have the same address DME Designer Owner s Manual 517 018 Appendix Display Setup Disp Page Provides access to anumber of display parameters Info Het Di F D Lco Contrast ES jz 2 Back iSht LCD Contrast The current LCD contrast setting This parameter can be adjusted from 0 through 100 Edit using the Numeric Parameters editing procedure described on page 512 LCD Backlight specifies LCD backlight operation Two settings are available ON and OFF ON The display is continuously lit OFF The display lights when a control is operated and will go out 10 seconds after panel operation ceases Pressing the ENTER key alternately selects ON and OFF DME Designer Owner s Manual Security Setup Lock Page Panel lock and related settings Info
549. x DME Designer Owner s Manual 191 192 Chapter 4 Designer Editing Configurations Configurations Information about inputs outputs along with the arrangement of components and how they are connected is called a configuration Configurations are created in the Designer window and sent to the DME unit In the Designer window configurations are designed using various design windows such as the Area Zone Configuration and User Module windows In each window a sheet is displayed on which objects can be arranged New Configurations Multiple zones can be created for an area multiple device groups can be created for a zone and multiple configurations can be created for a device group Zones can be added via the Zone Manager window device groups can be added via the Device Group and Sampling Frequency Settings window and configurations can be added via the Configuration manager window Information about the Zone Manager window can be found in the Adding Deleting and Renaming a Zone section on page 291 information on the Device Group and sampling Frequency Settings window can be found in the Device Group Selection section on page 276 and information on the Configuration Manager window can be found in the Adding Deleting and Renaming a Configuration section on page 295 Security Editing in the Designer window can be restricted based on the user security settin
550. xed setting can sometimes produce the best results with a hand held microphone Set this parameter for optimum results in your application 486 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Slot E Slot In The Slot In Component only has outputs 4 8 and 16 channel types are provided Either double click the component or select Open Slot In Component Editor from the contextual menu that appears when the component is right clicked to open the component editor The component editor is the same for all types 2 93 6 1 Te 4 15 Shows the signal level for each channel DME Designer Owner s Manual 487 488 Chapter 6 Component Guide E Slot Out The Slot Out component has only an input There are three types of Slot In components four channel eight channel and 16 channel types CEMEG Either double click the component or select Open Slot Out Component Editor from the contextual menu that appears when the component is right clicked to open the component editor Slot Out component editor l Slot Output 16 Channel Slot No 1 Phase ON OFF Reverses the phase of the output signal for each channel On Ss ONOFF ON OFF Turns Turns ON each channel s output each channel s Turns ON each channel s output oe O to 24 Samples sets the delay time level co to 0 dB Sets the output level ep sets the quantization bit rate for conversion
551. y You can set up to six function keys in each set The user defined parameters set on a single tab are displayed on one page in the DME64N 24N unit or ICP1 main screen Function Keys The function keys are displayed in the leftmost column of the table When you enter text for LCD Display a short name with up to eight characters will be created and displayed to the right of the function key 132 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Function specifies the function to be assigned to the function keys Fi Compin Compon Parameter Value Edit OMEG4h ComponentGompanderHiInd1 0n OFF F2 SceneChal SceneGhanee Scene Chanee O01 BGM_ Control fe We Assign Parameter Value Edit Direct Para a Scene Change Play Wavy File e No Assign No assignment Select this option to clear an assigned function e Parameter Value Edit Allows the parameter specified in the Parameter field to be changed NOTE Components for user modules are also listed in a hierarchal display but if user module security is enabled the components are not displayed However parameters displayed in the user module editor are displayed here e Direct Parameter Value Allows the value of a parameter to be set directly The target parameter is specified in the Parameter field and the value to be set is specified in the Max field NOTE Components for user modules are also listed in a hierarchal display
552. y button is clicked Specify a file name and save the file DME Designer Owner s Manual 365 Chapter 5 Components Recalling a Library The recall function reads stored parameters into the component editor E Editor Windows You can recall libraries in the component editor user control editor and user module editor windows by clicking the Recall Library button When a library is recalled in an editor window the parameter set is recorded to the selected snap button 1 Click the snap button A through D that will record the parameter set 2 Click the Recall Library button in the component editor The Recall Library menu will be displayed 3 Click the library name filename in the Recall Library menu The parameters in the library will be recalled mE Designer Window If you right click on a component or user module in the design window a context menu will be displayed You can recall a library using the Recall Component Library command If you click Recall Component Library in the context menu the same menu is displayed as when you click the Recall Library button in the editor window If you select a library that is displayed in the submenu that library is recalled a Bes Paste Spee ie Delete foe amp iw Duplicate opie SIA S Display Order Hiku LIARA S Store Component Library Paas HO Bt J Bee Add Component to Component Link Properties Not only the library nam
553. y Wav File The Parameter Min Max and Terminal items will change according to the selected function GPI IM Parameter Value Edit Component Delay Le INFINITYdB 0 00dB t Direct Parameter Value Component Delay Le 0 010d wT Port3 Scene Change E OoOo Ho No Assign Parameter Value Edit Pons _ Direct Parameter alue Time Adjustment Play Vay File No Assign e No Assign No function assigned This is the default setting Select No Assign to clear an assigned function The Parameter Min Max and Terminal items are not available Parameter Value Edit Allows component parameters to be changed via GPI input In this case Parameter is used to select the parameter to be controlled Min and Max specify the range over which the parameter can be changed Terminal determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter NOn Components for user modules are also listed in a hierarchal display but if user module security is enabled the components are not displayed However parameters displayed in the user module editor are displayed here t and specify continuous control of continuously variable parameters from an external fader Knob or similar device P and ly specify on off control of 2 state parameters via an external switching device DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window T The parameter value changes in proportion to the vo
554. y for the Word Clock DME Designer Owner s Manual 003 004 Chapter 6 Component Guide E AD8HR Controls the Yamaha A D converter AD8HR The AD8HR is an eight channel analog to digital converter Double click this component to display the component editor for it NOT C If a DME is not selected in the properties dialog box the component editor will not be displayed even if you double click page 230 AD8HR component editor 43 43 43 48 HPF HPF HPF HPF 83 2kH2 A A A on A f 4SkH2 44 tkHe Word Clock In 7 yon Woy Wan 7 oP yP 7 z0 bu zu BU z0 500 Zu BU bain Gain bain bain A A f A W Channel s Ees o p Hev Master 0 62 0 62 10 62 10 62 10 62 1 5 3 4 Remote Controlled Head Ame ADSHR Turns ON phantom power 48V Word Clock 96 kHz sets the operating frequency for the Word 88 2 kHz Clock 48 kHz 44 1 kHz Selects the operation for 88 2 96 kHz Shows the on off status of the master phantom power Word Clock In Digital Out A DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Component Glossary Adjustable Gc AdjustGc One type of filter characteristic With this setting you can adjust Gc gain on the cutoff frequency between 6 dB and 6 GB If you set 3 dB it becomes a Butterworth filter If you set 6 dB It becomes Linkwitz Riley filter Attack Attack Time In dynamic components sets the time period for compressing or expa
555. y k Date Time 2011 08 08 0419 52 Daylight Sawing Time Enabled Disabled Disabled Offset Chr iri fhr mind Clock setup E Device Select Field Device Type Field select the DME or SP2060 to be displayed or edited from the list m Close Button Closes the window DME Designer Owner s Manual 167 168 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Info Tab Info Network Display Lock Misc Remote MIDI GPI Version Oo Battery k D aD Z Date Time 2011 08 09 Daylight Saving Time 041952 Enabled Disabled Disabled Offset Hr mini Start ihr mind End ihr min Glock setup Displays basic information for the selected DME or SP2060 unit Version Displays the firmware version number of DME or SP2060 unit Battery Displays the battery status of DME or SP2060 unit Date Time Displays the date and time of the DME internal clock Daylight Saving Time Displays the daylight saving time settings Clock setup Button Opens the Clock dialog box to set the DME internal clock See Clock on page 180 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window E Network Tab Info Network Display Lock Misc Remote MIDI GPI Master Slave Master Link Mode 100 Base TX MAG Address 00 AD DE 25 OF 00 Displays DME and SP2060 network information Master Slave Displays the device group master and slave Link Mode Displays whether the network
556. y set by the frequency setting resulting in a large change in the tone quality When Q is narrowed only a specific frequency is boosted or cut Range set for Ducking and Gate Sets the amount by which the level is reduced when signal is ducked gated It can be set within the range of 70 to O dB At 70 dB the entire signal above the threshold value is cut At O dB there is no effect Ratio sets the ratio of change in the output signal level with respect to the input signal level At 1 1 there is no compression At 2 1 when a trigger signal level that exceeds the threshold changes by 10 dB the output level will change by 5 dB DME Designer Owner s Manual 507 908 Chapter 6 Component Guide Release Release Time Sets the time period until gain returns to normal after a trigger signal level falls below the threshold value and operation of a component ceases If the release time is short the sound will seem like it is jumping the ear will notice the change because the gain suddenly returns to normal If the release is set too long compression might not be applied properly because the next high level signal will be input before the gain returns to normal from the previous high It s a good ideal to try an initial release time setting in the range of 0 11 to 0 5 milliseconds Slope In a high pass filter HPF or low pass filter LPF this sets the attenuation amount for each octave A large value results in rapid att
557. you click the output channel number on the matrix the Matrix Mixer All Inputs to One Output editor window opens One output channel and the send levels from each input channel to the output bus are displayed The output channel is the one you have clicked on in the matrix mixer component editor amp Matrix Mixer All Inputs to One Output Output Char nel a On Off Nominal 10 14 i2 Minimum 40 gt e ine Re ng Bus Send Level Level to 10 dB Sets the send level from each input channel to the output bus nction ON OFF Turns ON the send from each input channel Output Channel Displays the selected output channel Select another channel from a menu ON OFF Turns ON the output for the channel displayed in the window Displays the output signal level of the channel displayed in the window On Block On Turns ON send from all input channels When turned ON the On button lights up of fe Turns OFF send from all input channels Meter Resets all send levels making them O dB Reset all send levels making them dB e o 446 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Output Channel Switching Matrix Mixer All Inputs to One Output editor window displays the output channel clicked in the matrix mixer component editor The Channel buttons in the Output section of the Matrix Mixer All Inputs to One Output editor window switch the channel group that is displayed in the window
558. you right click on the sheet i Designer Ambient Noise Compensator Audio Detector BAuto Gain Control Crossover Crossover Processor Crossover Processorll Delay B Dynamics BEQ Fader Feedback Suppressor Filter peter B Miscellaneous pixer BPan Room Combiner Router Source Selector M Speaker Processor SPX MUser Module i gt Picture LAH amp d popoom mmm mv mm omo m Toolkit window i Designer l BAudio Dete H BAuto Gain M Crossover lM Crossover Area Parts List Device List Component List Zone Manager Device Group Manager Configuration Manager lM Crossover H D Delay H B Dynamics Save User Module User Module Manager H BEQ H Fader Feedback Filter E H iy H D Meter H B Miscellane Show Signal Delay Analyze Probe Monitor Monitoring Point List H Mixer Pan SS 4 Room Com Edit Mode Sheet Router Source Sel H Speaker Pi Prohibit Diagonal Connections Grid H BUser Modu Picture Arrow Hand i Ellipse Export DXF Preferences Tools menu l o amp amp kh smh e Ambient Noise Compensator gt Audio Detector Auto Gain Control Crossover Crossover Processor Crossover ProcessorII Delay Dynamics EQ Fader Feedback Suppressor Filter Meter Miscellaneous Mixer Pan Room Combiner Router Source Selector Spe
559. ze from the list Small 87x119 Small 44x11 Middle 75x11 Middle 74x22 Large 111x33 Large 222x66 Text Enter the text to be displayed in the button Edit Mark When this item is checked the specified text will be displayed when the assigned scene has been edited The additional text is entered via the Text box below gt Text Font Button The Select Font dialog box will appear when this button is clicked Select the required font style and size Refer to Select Font Dialog Box in the Objects section on page 264 for more information about the Select Font dialog box Alignment Select Left Center or Right alignment Scene Specifies the scene that will be selected when the button is clicked Click the Select Scene button to open the scene selection menu Scene O01 Scene O01 Device Group Device Scene bn All EE OME Group me CU Scene 001 O02 Scene O02 003 Scene 003 Ei SP Group H ES P2060 DME Designer Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Components Changing the Tab Order The tab order for edit boxes is determined by the order in which they were pasted into the user control editor or user module editor If you right click the user control editor or user module editor you can check or change the tab order using the Tab Order command on the context menu If you select the Tab Order command tab order numbers will be displaye

Yamaha V4.0 Owner's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents